This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
I ■ P/.r.l'.li LMIJIrVlil
Case
I
Shelf
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
OF THE
PEABODY MUSEUM OF AMEEIOAN
AEOHJEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY.
EXCHANGE WITH
Received *VvvOL>ot^ ^ S, I*? "•
^
■'F^
Die itized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR
OF THE
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
BY
First Lmur» W* £• W. MacKINLAY,
Ftrst Ca<oaliy, U* S* Army, ' I
Member Ameriam Oriental Society*
^
WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1905.
Digitized by
Google
OC.IND.M u
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Document No. 260.
OFFICE OF CHIEF OF 3TAFF.
Digitized by
Google
[Extract.]
ERRATA.
Page 29, ninth line from bottom. For ^'(Sp.)" read ''(Sp,; from
Aztec)"
Page 45, twenty -seventh line from bottom. For '^Zo/5^<?«" read
Page 62, eleventh line from bottom. For "j?auamg " read ^^pauang.^^
Washington, D, C.
3
Digitized by
Google
OC.IND.M XI
^-^^J,/f/y
Digitized by
Google
[Extract.]
War Department,
Office of the Chief of Staff,
WashingtoUf August SOf 1905.
Sir: I have the honor to transmit herewith the manuscript of a work
entitled **A Handbook and Grammar of the Tagalog Language," consist-
ing of 399 pages of typewriting, which I estimate will make about 200 pages
in print. 1 would suggest that the work be bound in a substantial water-
groof cover, similar to that used for the latest edition of the "Soldier's
[andbook," and that the size be 8 by 5 J inches, or approximately so.
I would also invite attention to the folders accompanying. * * * It
would be best to have the left-hand edge of the folders begin at the outside
margin of the printed page, so that when extended the student could read
the corresponding text to the synopsis at the same time and not be obliged
to turn the pages back and forth.
* # ♦ * * « «
Very respectfully,
William E. W. MacKinlay,
First Lieutenant, First Cavalry,
Maj. William D. Beach,
Chief, Second (Military Information) Division,
Washington, D, C.
3
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE.
Shortly after the arrival of the author in the Philippines he, in common
with many others, felt the need of a work upon the Tagalog language in
English, and began to prepare this compendium, working upon it from
time to time as other military duties permitted, and, upon being ordered to
duty in Washington for the purpose of having better facilities for the com-
pletion of the work, has been enabled to bring it to such completion, under
the direction of Maj. W. D. Beach, Fifteenth Cavalry, chief of the Second
Division, General Staff.
As the Tagalog, belonging to a very different family of languages from
those with which Americans are familiar, has extremely dissimilar char-
acteristics from English or any Aryan tongue, the writer has devised a
type scheme, presented in the folder herewith, by which the salient points
of difference may be seen at a glance and vividly retained in the memory,
thus enabling the student to use correct and intelligible Tagalog.
Supplemented by that constant practice necessary for the ear, it is believed
that the copious index to this work, together with the type scheme, selected
vocabularies, and plain nontechnical (as far as possible) explanations of
the grammatical structure of Tagalog, will prove to be of value to those
whose duty or inclination may lead them to consult this book. Such, at
least, is the hope of the writer.
The Tagalog language is easily pronounced, regular in its forms, and
although its structure is complex, yet when once grasped it is so plain that
it is not only clearly comprehended, but is a key to all the Malayan tongues,
especially to those of the Philippines. It is an idiom which builds up its
sentences and parts of speech from roots by means of particles which
are prefixed, intixed, or suffixed to the roots. Several of these particles
may be combined with the same root, each having its share in the modifi-
cation of the inherent idea of the root.
Attention is also invited to the great use of the ** definite '* in Tagalog,
the so-called "passive" of the Spanish writers upon this subject.
The index, which has been made very full and copious, should be con-
sulted, as every probable combination of particles has been noted, as well
as Tagalog roots and English words occurring in the work. For example,
every word preceded by the compound particle ipinag has been listed, thus
enabling the root to be found at once, and so on in like manner.
The writer desires to express his appreciation for assistance received
from the military authorities both in the Philippine Islands and the United
States, from many of his brother officers, and from Profs. Friedrich Hirth,
of Columbia; E. W. Hopkins, of Yale (secretary of the American Oriental
Society) ; Paul Haupt and F. VV. Blake, of Johns Hopkins; Otis T. Mason,
of the Smithsonian Institution, and the late John W. Huett, of Luther
College, Illinois. Valuable suggestions were also received from Messrs.
Pedro Serrano Laktaw, author of a Tagalog-Spanish dictionary; Luis
Torres, and Vicente Albert, all of Manila.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR OF THE TAGALOG
LANGUAGE.
BIBLIOGRAPHY OP TAGALOG.
BOOKS CONSULTED IN THE PBEPABATION OP THIS WOBK.
It is scarcely necessary to mention that authorities upon Tagalo^ have
not been very plentiful, even with the great revival of interest in the
Malayo-Polynesian languages which has taken place within the last few
years. The number of works, old and new, large and small, upon this
subject, or bearing upon it, is very close to forty, and many of these are
of little value or are obsolete. The number of reprints, however, brings
the aggregate up to about one hundred, but this has no bearing upon the
material available for study.
The isolation of the Philippine Islands under the Spanish regime also
contributed to the n^lect of the Philippine languages, and it seems almost
as if Spanish and foreign workers in this field studiously avoided consulting
one another's researches, or else were i^orant of them. In the review
of books written upon Tagalog, or containing notices of it, works written
to teach Spanish to the Ta^alogs, novels — generally romances of the type
current in the middle ages in Europe — lives of saints, and miscellaneous
works, which make up what may be called the Tagalog literature, have
been omitted. The total number of works in Tagalos may be estimated
at from four to five hundred, and very few can be said to have a literary
value.
The energy of those who are able to write Tagalog well has mainly been
absorbed in newspaper work, and no great work has as yet appeared in the
language.
It can scarcely be doubted that if some of the great works of the world
were translated into Tagalog and placed where they would be accessible to
the common people, who do not speak or read Spanish, and are almost too
old to learn English well, that the results would be of great and immediate
importance in the mental development of the race.
The honor of the first written treatise upon the Tagalog language prob-
ably belongs to the Friar Agustfn de Alburquerque, wno arriv^ at Manila
from Nueva Espaila (Mexico) in 1571, and after three years' residence in
Taal, Balayan, and other parts of Batangas, became Prior of Tondoin 1575,
holding the position until his death in 1580. This treatise has never been
published, and the assertion is opposed by the Franciscan order, which
claims the credit for the first worfc upon this subject. (See Vol. II, p.
563, ** Estadismode las Islas Filipinas, de Zdfliga," edited by W. E. Retana,
Madrid, 1893; "La Polfticade Espafiaen Filipinas," ailo VI, ndm. 134; and
the **Catdlogo Bio-Bibliogrdfico de los Eeligiosos Agustinos," P^rez,
Manila, 1901. )
To the Franciscan friar Juan de Plasencia, or Portocarrero, who came
to the Philippines with the first mission of his order ixf. 1577, is attributed
an ** Arte y Diccionario " of Tagalog in 1581, which has remained in manu-
script. (Bee ** Cat^logo Biogrdfico de los Religiosos Franciscanos," Moya,
Manila, 1880.)
Digitized by
Google
8 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
However, the most important point is when the first printed work upon
the language was published, and this was undoubtedly in the year 1610,
when an '* Arte y Keglas de la Lengua Tagala," by Friar Francisco de San
Jos^ of the Dominican order, and who arrived in the Philippines in 1595,
was printed in the **Partido de Batadn," probabl]^ by Tomds Pinpfn, a
Tagalog. The book is a quarto of 327 pages of rice paper. One copy
exists in the Museo-Biblioteca de Ultramar at Madrid. Other editions of
this book were printed at Manila in 1752 and 1832. (See Retana* sedition
of Ziifiiga, pp. 101-105.)
This work was followed in 1612 by the ** Vocabulario de la Lengua
Tagala," by Friar Pedro de San Buenaventura of the Franciscan order,
who was in charge of parishes in the present province of La Laguna, and
whose work was printed in Pila by Tom^ Pinpfn and Domingo Loag,
Tagalogs. The book is described by Medina in his **La Imprenta en
Manila," Santiago de Chile, 1896, and a facsimile of the title-page is given.
The Franciscan friar Juan de Oliver, who died in the Camarines in
1597, is said to have written a treatise upon the Tagalog, but his work
seems to have been limited to correcting and adding to the ** Arte y Diccio-
nario'* of Plasencia. Another of the same order, Francisco de San Anto-
nio, who was in charge of Baler from 1611 to 1616, and from that time
until his death in 1624 resided in the present La Laguna, wrote an
" Arte '* and a Tagalog-Spanish vocabulary, which works existed in manu-
script in 1745, the author being known also as *'Orejita." (See Cat.
Biog. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880; and the preface to the **Arte" of Totan^s.)
The Augustinian friar Juan de Quiilones, who died in Manila in 1587,
also left a work upon the Tagalog, which is said by Beristafn to have been
printed in Manila in 1581. (See Beristain, Biblioteca Hispano- Americana
Setentrional, Amecameca, Mexico, 1883-1887, 2d ed.) The first edition
was printed in Mexico City in 1816. (See Vol. II, p. 464.) The matter
seems to be doubtful.
The Franciscan friar Ger6nimo Monte y Escamilla, who died in 1614,
is said to have left in manuscript an "Arte" and "Diccionario" in Taga-
log, but the work, if extant, is in the archives of his order. (See Cat.
Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 60.) A similar manuscript is said to have
been written by Francisco de San Antonio, of the same order, who came
to the Philippines in 1606 and died at Pila, La Laguna, in 1624. (See Id.,
p. 139.)
The third printed work upon Tagalog was the "Arte de Idioma Taga-
log," by the Franciscan Agustfn de la Magdalena, who arrived in the
islands in 1665 and lived in Tayabas and Laguna for some years. Return-
ing to Mexico he there gave his manuscripts to the press in 1679, and i^
1684 returned to Manila, dying in Santa Cruz de La Laguna in 1689. ( See
La Imprenta en Mexico, Medina, Se villa, 1893, No. 1784; and Cat. Rel.
Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 292.)
The Dominican friar Teodoro (Quiros) de la Madre de Dfos, who came
to the islands in 1627 and died in 1662, has been credited with an "Arte'*
of Tagalog by some bibliographers of Philippine literature, but Medina
marks such a work as doubtful, as far as the printing is concerned.
The eighteenth century witnessed a revival of interest in the language,
and in 1703 two works, both of which have been reprinted, were printed.
The first was the "Compendio de la Arte de la lengua Tagala," printed
in Manila. This excellent treatise was reprinted at Sampaloc in 1787, and .
in Manila proper in 1879. Both the early editions are now rare. The
author was the Augustinian friar Gaspar de San Agustfn, who came to the
Philippines in 1668, and died in Manila in 1724. He is better known as
the author of the work "Conquistas de las Islas Filipinas," Part I, Mad-
rid, 1698; Part II, 'Valladolid, 1890. The third edition, however, retains
many obsolete words.
The second work was a "Vocabulario,** or dictionary of the Tagalog,
written by the Franciscan friar Domingo de los Santos, who came to the
Philippines in 1665, and after administering parishes mainly in La Laguna,
Digitized by
Google
d;
(«^
f<
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 9
died in Majayjay in 1695. His work was printed in the town of Tayabas
in 1703, and but two copies seem to be known. One is from the Marsden
collection, and is in the library of King's College, London, and the other
in the archives of the Franciscan order. Some leaves of a manuscript
''Arte*' by the same author are also preserved in the archives. This dic-
tionary was reprinted in Sampdloc m 1794 and in Manila in 1835. It is
now obsolete. (See Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 294; Biblioteca Fili-
pina, Retana, Madrid, 1898 [referred to hereafter as R.]; Nos. 77 and 148;
Id., Nos. 26 note, 66 note, 66 and 594; and Cat. Bio. -Bib. Rel. Agustinos,
Manila, 1901, pp. 133-134.)
The next work upon this subject was the "Arte y Reglas de la lengua
Tagala,'* by the Augustinian friar Tom^ Ortfz, printed at the convento
of Sampaloc in 1740. The author came to the Philippines in 1690, was a
missionary in China until about 1712, and died in Manila in 1742. (See
Medina, La Imprenta en Manila and Cat. Rel. Agustinos, p. 169. )
In 1742 the Franciscan friar Melchor Oyanguren de Santa In^s, who
had lived in the Philippines, mainly at Los Bafios and Sariaya, from 1717
to 1736, gave a work to the press in Mexico entitled **Tagalysmo.*' This
interesting book, which has never been reprinted, compares with Tagalog
the Mandarin dialect of Chinese, Hebrew, and Greek, the Tagalog being
reduced as far as possible to a Latin basis. (R., 39. )
In 1745 the work of the Franciscan Sebastian de Totan^s was printed
at Sampaloc. This valuable treatise, entitled "Arte de la lengua Tagala y
Manual Tagalog," was reprinted at Sampdloc in 1796, at Manila in 1850,
and in Binondo (Manila) in 1865. (R., 42, 79, 202, and 329. ) The author
came to the Philippines in 1717 and remained twenty-nine years in the
islands. During his residence at Lilio and Pagsanhan, La Laguna, from
1732 to 1738, he wrote the foregoing book. He died in Madrid in 1748,
having left the Philippines in 1746. (Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, pp.
390-391.)
In 1754 the great " Vocabulario," or dictionary, of the Ta^log, explained
in Spanish, was printed at Manila by the Jesuits. The mam authors were
Juan de Noceda, S. J. , and Pedro de San Lucar, S. J. A second edition,
with a Spanish-Tagalog appendix, was printed in Valladolid in 1832, which
is now very rare, nearly all copies having been lost by shipwreck en route
to the islands. There is a copy in the Library of Congress. Another
edition, with additions, was printed by the Augustinian order at Manila
in 1860. This work, although many words are obsolete, is the standard
on Tagalog as yet. It is also becoming rare. (R., 48, 136, and 268. )
The next work containing a notice of Tagalog is in English. In Johann
Reinhold Forster's "Observations made during a Voyage round the
World" (London, 1778; German translation by his son, Georg Forster,
Berlin, 1783) a list of 47 English words is given, with their equivalents in
Tagalog, Pampango, Malay, and several Polynesian dialects. From some
rare words the Tagalog would appear to have been taken from Noceda
and San Lucar. Forster was born in Germany in 1 729, a descendant of
the Forester family of Scotland, and accompanied Captain Cook in his
second voyage to the South Sea (1772-1775). After his return he became
professor at Halle, Germany, where he died in 1798. His book is espe-
cially valuable concerning the Polynesian races and islands.
A few years later the German naturalist Peter Simon Pallas (Ixjrn 1741,
died 1811), who had become professor of natural history in tne Imperial
Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg in 1768, published there in 1787-
1789 the work known as the " Vocabularium Catharinse," from its patron-
ess, Catharine II. Written in Russian, it gives the corresponding word
for nearly 200 terms in 200 languages. In this list Pampango is No. 186
and Tagalog No. 187. The source is not given, but that for the Tagalog is
evidently the same as that of Forster. The Latin equivalent for the Rus-
sian words is given in the preface. The full title of the work is * * Linguarum
totius Orbis Vocabularia comparativa." It is in two quarto volumes.
Digitized by
Google
10 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
At the same time the Spanish author Lorenzo Hervas y Pandoro (bom
1735, died 1809), of the Society of Jesus, published two works bcttiring
upon Tagalog to a slight extent, but of importance as inspiring other work
upon the same line. The first was his **Aritm6tica," published in Cesena,
Italy, in 1785, and the second, his ** Vocabolario Poliglotto," published at
the same place in 1787, both in Italian. In the latter he gives specimens
of the language of 1593, of 1604, and his own time. The Spanish edition,
printed at Madrid in two volumes in 1801, has his observations upon
Taffalog in the second volume.
In 1803 Prof. Franz Carl Alter, librarian of the Imperial and Royal
University of Vienna, published a work of 60 p^es upon the Tacalog,
with the title **Ueber die tagalische Sprache.'* This work seems based
upon a manuscript vocabulary from the library of Count Wrbna at Vienna,
supplemented by words from Pallas and the works of the Abb^ Hervas.
The latter seems to have corresponded with Alter, who speaks of Hervas
in the preface to his book, and also of Miss Knight, of England, probably
a sister of Thomas Payne Knight, the numismatist, as being interested in
his researches.
A work which is yet of value to the student is that of Johann Christoph
Adelung (bom in Germany in 1731, died in Dresden, Saxony, 1806),
entitled " Mithridates, oder Allgemeine Sprachenkunde." In the first
volume, which appeared at Berlin in 1806, on pages 127 and 128, two ver-
sions of the Lord s Prayer are given — one of 1593 and the other of current
form — with an explanation of the grammatical forms as deduced from the
words. The author, who gives specimens from over 500 languages, is best
remembered for his great work m German philology, and at the time of
his death was principal librarian of the Elector of Saxony, at Dresden.
Adriano Baloi (bom in Venice in 1782, died there 1848) published an
"Atlas Ethnographique du Globe'* at Paris in 1826. (See-Table No. 364
and pp. 246 to 249, for remarks upon Tagalog.)
The catalogue of William Marsden, the eminent orientalist (born in
England in 1754, died there 1836), published at London in 1827, contains
mention of some manuscript ^Artes'' of Tagalog not known to have been
printed. One is an "Arte'* by a Dominican friar, dated 1736, and the
other a " Vocabulario" by the Dominican Miguel Ruiz, dated 1580. This,
however, must be an error, as the Dominicans did not arrive in the Phil-
ippines until 1587. Miguel Ruiz was one of their early friars, but little
seems to have been recorded about him. In Marsden's Miscellaneous
Works (London, 1834), page 94, are also some observations upon Tagalog.
To the genius of the German author Wilhelm von Humboldt the world
is indebted for his magnificent work upon the Malayo-Polynesian languages,
which was published by the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, in three
volumes, in 1838, under the title "Ueber die Kawi-Sprache auf der Insel
Java.'' His dissertation upon the Tagalog verbal system and formations
in Volume II, pages 347 to 596, clearly establishes the fact that the Tagalog
and allied tongues of the Philippines have preserved the verbal modifying
particles to a greater extent than any other members of this great linguistic
family, and On pace 288 of the same volume he goes so far as to say that at
first view the student of Tagalog seems to have come into a wholly new
system. This noted philologist, who was bom in 1767 and died in 1835,
has evidently taken the greater part of his material upon the Tagalog from
the second (1796) edition of Totan^, and hence lacked the advantage of
having been upon the ground.
The Augustinian friar Manuel Buzeta, better known as the author of the
** Geographical Dictionary" or Gazetteer of the Philippines (in cooperation
with Bravo), published a Tagalog grammar at Madrid in 1850. (R., 199. )
The author, whose name is spelled **Buceta" in the Cat. Rel. Agustinos,
came to the Philippines in 1827, where he was in charge of the church at
Guiguinto in 1832 and of Malate in 1848. He retumeS to Spain in 1849,
and resided at Madrid until 1854, in which year he left the order and
returned to secular life.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 11
The work of Sinibaldo de Mas upon the islands, published at Madrid in
two volumes in 1843, contains a short comparative vocabulary of Tagalog,
Visayan, Ilocano, Ibanai? (Cagayan), and Malay. (R., 180.)
In 1854 the **Tagalog-Spanish 'Dictionary '* of Rosalio Serrano, a Tagalog
of Bulacan Province, was printed at Manila, and second and third editions
have appeared, the third being printed in Binondo (Manila) in 1869. A
Spanish-Tagalog dictionary by the same author was printed in Manila in
1872. (R., 227, 376, 426.)
In 1855 Carlos Cuarteron, a priest who had also been a pilot in the
Southern Islands, published a work at Rome entitled ''Sp^gazione e tra-
duzione," at the end of which there is a vocabulary of Italian, Malay,
Tacalog, and Joloano. (R., 229.)
In 1872 the grammar of Joaquin de Ooria (Gil y Montes de Santo
Domingo) was published at Madrid, where the author had accepted the
position of professor of Tagalog in the Central University. The work
shows the careful study of the author, who came to the islands in 1831
and resided in the Tagalog region until his return to Spain in 1866. On
account of his accepting the chair of Tagalog against the wish of the prel-
ate of his order, he was dropped from its rolls; but, unfortunately, the plan
of Minister Moret did not succeed, and the position to which he was
elected never became active. The author was born in 1815 and entered
the Franciscan Order in 1830. (R., 411; also Cat. Biog. Rel. Fran., p. 656. )
The same year, 1872, appeared the popular Spanish-Ta^log ^* Lessons
upon the Grammar'^ of Bishop Jos6 Hevia Campomanes, bishop of Nueva
Segovia (Vigan). A second edition appeared in 1877, the third in 1883,
the fourth in 1888, and the sixth in 1901. All the editions were printed
at Manila and are alike, no corrections or additions having been made.
(R., 1133.)
Here should be mentioned the interesting work of V. M. de Abella, the
" Vade-mecum Filipino," a manual of Spanish-Tagalog dialogues. It con-
tains a vocabulary of Manila local words and phrases. The first edition
was published in 1868 (T. H. Pardo de Tavera, Bib. Fil, No. 9), and other
editions were publishea in 1869 and 1871, and the ninth had been reached
in 1873. (R., 2524. ) All editions were printed in Manila.
The most practical of all Tagalog-Spanish grammars appeared in Manila
in 1878, the work of the Recoleto iriar Toribio Minguella. Interlinear
translations, simpli(dty of arrangement, and clearness of explanation make
this little book of great value, and many of its suggestions and ideas have
been very useful in the preparation of this present work.
In 1880 Prof. H. Kern, a Javan-bom Hollander, made a valuable con-
tribution to philology by his list of words in Tagalog which are derived
from the Sanskrit. This article, which appeared in the **Biidragen tot
de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde van Nederland-Indie" at The Hague, volg.
(series) 4, deel (volume) 4, pages 535 to 564, shows the large number of
such words and their importance in expressing some most necessary ideas
of civilization. This field was further explored by T. H. Pardo de Tavera,
who published a pamphlet of 55 pages at Paris in 1887, in which the San-
skrit words which have passed into Pampango are also noted. ( R. , 1066. )
Kern remarks in his article that the scarcity of Sanskrit words in the dia-
lects of northern Celebes indicates that the Tagalog received this element
directly from Camlxxlia and Sumatra, and not oy way of Celebes. This is
an interesting suggestion, which might lead to something if studied upon.
Dr. F. R. Blake, teacher of Tagalog and Visayan at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Md., also rSui an article on ** Sanskrit loan-words in
Tagalog" at the April, 1903, meeting of the American Oriental Society, at
Baltimore, Md. Doctor Blake has also written articles upon "Analogies
between Semitic and Tagalog" and the ''Differences between Tagalog and
Bisayan."
In 1882 appeared the second edition of a Spanish-Tagalog and Pampan^
vocabulary by E. Fernandez, printed at Manila. This was followed in
Digitized by
Google
12 TAGALOG LANGUAGE,
1883 by hifl Tagalog-Spanish vocabulary, both of which are very useful
books. (P. T., 1061, and R., 756.)
The valuable " rapport*' of Dr. Joseph Montano, Paris, 1885, to the
French minister of public instruction, contains several Philippine vocabu-
laries, some of them of little known languages, and also quite an analysis
of the Tagalog. (R. , 885. )
Under the pseudonym of JuUus Miles, an unknown author published a
small Tagalog-Spanish grammar and phrase book at Barcelona, Spain, in
1887. (R., 1054.)
In 1889 Friar Toribio Minguella, Recoleto, published a work in Madrid
upon the unity of the human race as proved oy philology. In this work
he makes some comparisons between Semitic and Tagalog.
The same year Dr. Pardo de Tavera published his pamphlet upon the
origin of the names of the Tagalog numerals, at Manila. W. G. Seiple, of
Johns Hopkins University, also published an article upon the Tagalog
numerals m the Johns Hopkins University Circular, No. 163, June, 1903,
Baltimore, Md.
In 1889 also appeared the "Spanish-Tagalog Dictionary" of Pedro Serrano
Laktaw, son of Rosalio Serrano, and in 1903 director of the Spanish paper,
El Pueblo, of Manila. It is understood that the author is now working
upon a Tagalog-English dictionary. (R., 1260. )
In 1890 a most valuable little work was published in Mahila, under the
title *'Colecci6n de Refranes, Erases y Modismos Ta^los,'* translated and
explained in Spanish by the Franciscan Friars Gregorio Martin and Mariano
Martinez Cuadrado, and edited by the Friar Miguel Lucio y Bustamente.
The first came to the Philippines in 1874, the second in 1875, and the
editor in 1860. All administered parishes mainly in La Laguna Province,
Friar Martfnez also serving for many years at Binangonan de Lampon, on
the Pacific. This collection comprises 879 proverbs, phrases, and idiomatic
expressions as used in the vicinity of Tanay and Pililla, where the authors
resided, and embraces but a part of the wealth of the language in this
regard. Many of these expressions, marked **T. P." (Tagalog proverbs)
. have been quoted in the explanation of the language. (R., 1318. )
In 1893 Dr. Ferd. Blumentritt, of Leitmeritz, Bohemia, published a
translation of a sketch of Tagalog orthography by Doctor Rizal, at The
Hague, under the title "Die Transcription des Tagalog," von Dr. Jos^ Rizal.
The advent of the United States forces at Manila and the occupation of
the Tagalog region led to several small pamphlets being issued with the
English, Spanish, and Tagalog in parallel columns. One of these was
written by Capt. John Bordman, jr.. Twenty-sixth U. S. Volunteer
Infantry.
In 1902 Constantino Lendoyro, a Spanish gentleman of more than
twenty years* residence in the Philippines, published his work, entitled
*'The Tagalog Language," at Manila. It is a very good book, but is full
of typographical errors, and in many places the English is not idiomatic.
The author deserves much credit for his labor, and a corrected edition
would be of great value. At any rate, he is entitled to commendation for
having written, in a foreign language, a work upon the Tagalog which
shows his thorough knowledge of the Philippine tongue.
In 1902 R. Brandstetter issued a work upon the Tagalog and Malagasy
languages at Lucerne, which is of interest as showing tne resemblance
between these two languages spoken at such distant points.
In 1903 the *'English-Tagalog Pocket Dictionary," of P. D. Neilson, was
published at Manila, and, while merely giving the Tagalog equivalent for
the English word, is of considerable value. The Tagalog-English part has
also been published.
Mention should also be made of * * Crawfurd's Grammar of the Malay Lan-
guage," which has also a dictionary attached, London, 1852. Many valu-
able comparisons are made between Tagalog and other Malayan languages.
For a grammatical discussion of authority upon the Malayan languages
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 13
the student is referred to the **Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft,'* of F.
Muller, II. Band, II. Abtheilung, pages 87-160 (Vienna, 1887).
THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The Tagalog is the most important of the many tongues and dialects of
the Philippines, which seem to number well over threescore,» on account
of its being the most widely understood, the most euphonious, and the
most developed by contact with foreign idioms. It thus occupies a similar
position to that held by Malay farther to the south, and to English in the
world at large. Spoken by over a million and a half of the most energetic
race in the islands, occupying the city of Manila, eight provinces surround-
ing the metropolis, and a number of outlying islands and districts beyond
these limits, it is also generally understood by many far beyond its own
territory, especially in seaport towns throughout the archipelago.
The language seems to be divided into a nQrthieUL-andJEUEQUthern_dia-
LB9t,^the former being six)ken in Bulacan, Bataan, Nueva Ecija, Rizal, and
Tarlac, and the latter occupying La Laguna, Batangas, Cavite, Tayabas,
Marinduque, the coast of Mindoro, and part of Ambos Camarines. Each
of these dialects is more or less split up, each town almost having local
mannerisms by which the people of one neighborhood easily dintinguish
a stranger. Yet the region above described is clearly the territory of one
and the same language, which is different and distinguishable from the
Pampangan language on the north and the Bicol on the south by the test
of intelligibility. ^
Philologically, JCagalog belongs to the Malayan branch of the great
Malayo-Polynesian linguistic family, which extends from Hawaii to Mada-
gascar and from Formosa to Easter Island west of Chile, including New
Zealand, Tonga, and Samoa, as well as Borneo, Celebes, Java, Sumatra,
the Malay Peninsula, and the Philippines, from east to west, a distance of
180°, or half the circumference of the earth.
Considering the rudimentary state of culture existing up to compara-
tively recent times of the majority of the peoples speaking the languages
of this family, its unity is remarkable, and a thorough knowledge of one
tongue is found to be of great utility in the acquirement of any other of the
great group, especially in the same branch.
Tagalog, together with other civilized tongues of the Philippines, such
as Visayan, Pampangan, Ilocano and Bicol, has preserved the verbal system
better than any other, and the basis for the comparative study of the
family must be taken from the Philippine tongues and not from the more
cultivated Malay, Kawi, or modern Javanese, all three of which have been
profoundly affected by Sanskrit and to a lesser degree by Arabic, some-
thing as English has been affected by Latin and French elements.
The number of roots or primitive-idea words in Tagalog seems to be
about 17,000, there being 16,842 words in the Noceda and Sanlucar dic-
tionary of 1832, according to Crawfurd, the distinguished Malay scholar.
(** Malay Grammar,*' p. cxiv.) Of these some 284 are derived from the
Sanskrit, and are evidently borrowed through the Malay. Many of these
are names for things unknown to the primitive Malayan peoples, but
others are abstracts and various words, some of which would seem to have
supplanted a primitive Malayan word. Thus in many cases American and
Tagalog use words in their own languages which are from the same remote
source in India, and coming around the earth east and west meet again
in the Philippines. Such a word is pad, "foot," from the Sanskrit pada,
which has descended into English * * foot * * and Spanish * * pie. * ' The origin
of these words is marked after each in the handbook. The names of the
chief workers in this field have been given in the list of books consulted.
a The Philippine Bureau of Ethnology, however, has given out as a result of its re-
searches, that the number of distinct tongues is not over 15 or 16, the larger number being
made up by counting very similar dialects.
Digitized by
Google
14 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
The Japanese language seems to have furnished no words to the Taga-
log, although many Japanese came to the islands during the seventeenth
century, owing to the expulsion of Japanese converts to Catholicism, who
found a refuge in Manila and the aajoining provinces, mainly in Pam-
panga, where it is said many of them settled around Macahebe. It is
thought that some Japanese expressions still exist in the Macabebe dialect
of the Pampangan language.
Notwithstanding a comi)aratively close contact with the Chinese for
several centuries, and certainly antedating the Spanish conquest by many
hundred years, very few words seem to have come into Tagalog from any
of the numerous dialects of that Empire. The Chinese element in Tagalog
seems limited to a few commercial terms, some household implements,
and a few miscellaneous terms, some of which are confined in their use to
Sangley or Chinese-Mestizo families. These words are noted wherever
they occur in the handbook. Professor Hirth, the Chinese scholar, thinks
that the first notices of the Philippines are to be found in the work of
Chao Ju-kua, collector of customs ot Chuan-chou, a city in Fo-Kien Prov-
ince, between 1210 and 1240. In this work he speaks of the islands of
Po-ni (Borneo), Ma-i (Mindoro? or Panay?), and of the Pi-Sho-y6 of
Taiwan (Formosa). This latter name sounds something like **Bisaya,"
the native name for Visaya. The book speaks also of the San-sii, or
" Three Islands.'' Book 325 of the " History of the Ming Dynasty (1368^
1643) of China," as abstracted by Groeneveldt, speaks of the Kmgs (Sultans)
of Sulu as attacking Puni (Borneo) in 1368, and of the King of Sulu, Paduka
(Javanese ** Lord " ) Pahala as dying while on a visit to the Emperor at T^
Chou on the Grand Canal (Shantung Province). The Emperor then
recognized his eldest son, Tumohan, as Sultan of Sulu, in 1417. The
brother of Pahala, who was named Suli, made a visit to China in 1421,
but a few years after this no more was heard from this Kingdom. From
this and other extracts it would seem that the Chinese knew of the Moham-
medan settlements at Manila and Tondo prior to the arrival of the Span-
iards, and must have carried on a lucrative trade with them, otherwise the
pirate Li-Ma-hong would not have made such a desperate attempt to take
the city so soon after its foundation in 1571.
The Arabic words in Tagalog, which are hardly more than a dozen in
number, evidently came in with the Mohammedan religion, and upon the
extinction of that faith around the mouth of the Pa?ig, all but a few words
fell into disuse. Mohammedanism could have hardly become established
in the Tagalog region before 1450 to 1500, as it came very slowly from India
or Arabia to Java, and thence by way of Borneo and Sulu to the Bay of
Manila and the Pasig Valley. It had apparently not extended to the
inland provinces, its farthest northern point appearing to have been Hago-
noy. Arabic words which were adopted by the Spanish and thus brought
into Tagalog are not included in the above remarks.
Spanish, as a matter of course, has contributed a great number of words
to Tagalog, many of which have been thoroughly naturalized. They are
mainly religious, governmental, social, legal, and abstract terms, including
also terms for foreign articles and luxuries. Some names for Mexican
articles are not Spanish but Nahuatl or Aztec, owing to the intimate con-
nection between Mexico and the Philippines for more than two centuries,
and there are even some Arawak words from the tongue of Cuba, Haiti,
and Puerto Rico among these.
English has as yet given but few words to Tagalog. Of these the news-
papers use four, which seem to have no exact native or Spanish equiva-
lents, viz: "Self-government," "high life," "sport," ana "besbol," or
baseball. The latter has been verl&lized and taken into the language
bodily, while the others are still quoted.
The construction of Tagalog does not seem to have been influenced byl
any of the foregoing, but to have retained its Malayan structure.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE. 15
THE PBONUNCIATION OP TAGALOG.
The most succinct statement upon the above subject is that given by
Rev. W. A. Goodell, of the Methodist mission in the Philippines, as printed,
in Stuntz's " The Philippines and the Far East/* page 483:
' ' II. The pronunciation of Tagalog is very simple, and there are no sounds
to which the American vocal organs are not accustomed. The letter ( sound )
most diflficult to get is *ng,* which has exactly the sound which it has in
the middle of the word * ringing,* but which becomes difficult when at the
beginning of a word, as in the word(s) *ri^uni*t,* one of the words (terms)
translating the conjunction * but,* and which often occurs at the beginning
of a sentence.
'*But although so simple in word pronunciation, Tagalog is extremely
difficult in utterance, for one reason because of the great number of long
words (compounds J it contains, and for another and more important still,
because of the rhythmic movement of the language, a quality that can not
be described and a characteristic for which no rules whatever can be given,
but which is entirely as much a part of the Tagalog language as are its
words themselves.**
The "rhythmic movement** spoken of by the Rev. Mr. Goodell, who is
an excellent speaker of Tagaloe, is what may be called the "national
accent,** and, like the tones of Chinese and other allied \
[ tongues, can only
be acquired by long practice.
The vowels are really but three in number, although a, e, i, o, and u»
with their Spanish values, are printed (ah, a, e, o, oo). Of these " e ** and
**i** are habitually confused, and "e'* can hardly be said to exist in pure
Tagalog. "O** and "u** are also confused, the tendency being to drop
" o ** and substitute "u** in manv words, a process which has already taken
effect in Pampangan. The diphthongs are ao (ow), au (aw), less nasal
than ao, and ua ( wa) ; but there are no triphthongs, as each vowel in such
combinations preserves its own sound.
The native consonants, pronounced (except rig) as in English, are B, C
(K), D, G (hard), H, L, M, N, NG, P, R, S, and T. The sound of F does not
exist in Tagalog, and is replaced by P. V is also a foreign sound merging
with B to the Tagalog ear. Z is pronounced like S, and is found only in
Spanish words. The same is true of X, which is pronounced at the begin-
ning of a word as H. W is beginning to be used in native papers as a semi-
vowel in place of initial ua (wa) and in ao (aw). K is also used by many
in place of hard C and Q. Y is used as a part of the diphthong ay (ai),
and also as an initial consonant.
The pronunciation and construction of the language will be more clearly
understood by carefully studying the two versions of the Dominical Oration,
or Lord*s Prayer, given below with interlinear pronunciation and trans^
lation.
[From the Vulgate.]
Tag. Amd namin sungmasalarigit ka; sambahfn
Pro. Ahrmdh nAhmeen soovg-mah'Sah-ldhft^'eet kah; sahm-bah-hein
Eng. Father our (of us) art in heaven thou; adored (worshiped)
Tag. ang rigalan mo; mapasaamin ang kaharian
Pro. ahng ngdMahn moh; mah-pah-sah'dh'meen ahng kah-hah-reS-ahn
Eng. the name of thee; come to us the kingdom
Tag. mo; sundin ang 16ob mo; dito sa lupa para
Pro. moh; sodndeen ahng Idh-obe moh; dei-tohsah loo-pah pdh-rah
Eng. of thee; (be) done the will of thee; here upon earth according
Tag. nang sa larigit; bigydn mo kamf rigay6n nang
Pro. nahng sah Idhng-eet; heeg-ydhn moh kah-md ngeye-dhn nahng
Eng. to (that) in heaven; (be) given of thee we (us) now of the
Digitized by
Google
16 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Tag. aming kanin sa urao-drao at patawdrin mo
Pro. dh-meeng kdh-neen aah dh-row-dh-row aht pah-tow-dh-reen moh
Eng. our food upon every day and (be) pardoned of thee
Tag. kamf nang aming mangd dtane, para nang
Pro. kah-mei nahng dh-meeng mahng-dh od-tahngy pdh-rah nahng
£ng. we (us) of the our (sign of plurality) debts, according as
Tag. pagpatawad namin sa mangagkakautang sa aniin;
Pro. pahg-pa-tow-dd ndh-meen sah mahng-ahg-kah-kah-od'tahng sah dh-meen;
Eng. (are) forgiven of us to those indebted to us;
Tag. at houag mo kaming ipahintulot sa tuk86,
Pro. aht hoo-dhg moh kah-meeng ee-pah-h^en-tod-loht sah took-sdhy
Eng. and do not of thee (let) us (be) permitted into temptation,
Tag. at iadyd mo kamf sa dilang masamd.
Pro. aht ee-dydh moh kah-meS sah deelahng mah-sah-mdh.
Eng. but (be) delivered of thee we (us) from all evil.
The version from the translation of the American Bible Society, follow-
ing the authorized, or King James, version, is as follows:
Tag. Amd namin nanasaldi^t ka; sambahfn
Pro. Ah-mdh ndh-meen nah-nah-sah-ldhrip-eet kah; sahm-bah-hehi
Eng. Father our(of us) (art) in heaven thou; hallowed (worshiped)
Tag. ang pangalan mo: dumdting ang kaharian
Pro. ahng pahng-dhl-ahn moh: doo-mdh-teeng ahng kah-hah-ree-ahn
Eng. the name of thee: to arrive the kingdom
Tag. mo. Gawfn ang iyong kalooban, kung paano sa
Pro. moh, Gowehi ahng eeydng kah-loh-6-bahnf koong pah-dh-no sah
Eng. of thee. (Be) done the thy will if as in
Tag. Idngit, ay gayon din namdn sa lupa. Ibigdy mo
Pro. Idhng-edy eye gdy-on deen nah-mdhn sah loo-pah. Ee-tng-jtye moh
Eng. heaven, be thus truly also in earth. (Be) given of thee
Tag. sa amin ngay6n ang aming kanin sa drao-drao.
Pro. sah dh-meen ngeye-6hn ahng dh-meeng kdh-neen sah dh-row-dh-row.
Eng. to us now(thi8day) the our food on everyday.
Tag. At ipatawad mo sa amin ang aming mangd
Pro. Aht ee-pah-tow-dhd moh sah dh-meen ahng dh-meeng mahng-dh
Eng. And (be) pardoned of thee to us the our (signof plur.)
Tag. litang, gaya naman namin na nagpatauad sa
Pro. o6-tahng, guyah nah-mdhn ndh-meen nah nahg-pah-tow-dhd sah
Eng. debt(s), as also by us now (are) forgiven (to)
Tag. marigd may litang sa amin. At houag
Pro. mahng-dh my o6-tahng sah dh-meen, Aht hoo-dhg
Eng. (s. of plur. ) those-having debts against us. And do not
Tag. mo kaming dalhfn sa tuks6, kungdi
Pro. moh kah-mehig dahl-hein sah iook-sdh, koong-de^
Eng. of thee (let) us (be) brought into temptation, but
Tag. iligtds mo kamf sa masamd: Sapagka't
Pro. ee-lig-tdss moh kah-mei sah mah-sah-mdh: Sah-pdhg-kahH
Eng. (be) delivered by thee us from evil: For (because)
Tag. iy6 ang kaharian at ang kapangyarihan at
Pro. eeydh ahng kah-hahrei-ahn aht ahng kah-pcJing-yahrei'hahn aht
Eng. thine the kingdom and the power and
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
17
Tag. ang kaloualbatian, maspakail^ man.
Pro. ahng kah-loo^hl-hah'tei^Jint mcmg-pahcah-eeldhn mahn,
Eng. the' glory, ever (for ever) also
Tag. Siyd, nau^.
Pro. Seeyah ndw-ah.
Eng. Amen.
The same prayer may be taken to show the changes in the language
since it was first reduced to Roman letters by the missionaries.
From the Doctrina CMstiana of 1593, reprinted by Hervas in "Saggio
Prattico/' p. 129. Also found in Adelung's ** Mithridates/' Vol. 1, p. 609.
'Mmd namin nasaldngit ca, ipasamba mo ang ngala mo; moui (return) aa
amin ang pagiahaH mOj ipasonor (be obeyed) mo ang l6oh mo^ dito sa lupa
paran sa i&npit. Big-idn mo cami npaidn nang camin cacanin para nang aa
drao; atpa^caualin mo ang amin caaalanan (sins), yagang (as) uinaualan
bakala (equally) namin aa l6oh ang casaman (evils) nang macasaaa (of exist-
ence) aa amin; howi^ mo earning {auan nang di carrA) maialo nang tocad;
dcdapouaH (but) yadta (be delivered) mo cami aa dilan maaamd.*'
It may be said that this last version shows a comparative want of feuniliar-
ity witli the language, except as might be spoken by servants, etc., and it
has doubtless suffered by reprinting, the proof having to be read by those
ignorant of the language, and hence unable to detect errors except by copy.
An example of the folklore stories is given in the **Tale of the Unlucky
Bat'' from the examples of Malayan languages, published atBatavia, Java,
in 1868, by J. G. F. Kiedel, the Dutch philologist. It is as follows:
Tag. i^y6n din isang dagd nagwika sa kaniyd
Pro. Ngeye-dn deen eeadhng dahgd nahaweika aah kahneevd
Eng. Now indeed (one time) a (one) rat saidf to himself
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
Tag.
Pro.
Eng.
T^.
Pro.
Eng.
din, nasakit ang atay niyd: " Aydo na ak6'y
deeUf nahaahkek akng ahtU neeydh: '*Eyey6w nah ahk&y
(self), (being) pained the liver his: "Not wish now 1
matir^ dito, sa bayan ko; ak6'y papar6on aakvat
mahteha deitohf aah bdy-an koh; ahkdy par>ar6-on aJumkvdht
(to) remain here, in town my; I willgo (and) ascend
sa an6 sa bundok, titingin nang ibang bayan,
aah andh aah hoonddke, teetemgeen nahng eebdhng Myan,
somewhere into (the) mountains, looking for another town,
sdan ak6 makakit^ nang kaibigan ko, nang pagkain
adhahn ahkd mahkakeita nahng kah-eebeSgan koh, nahng pahgkdheen
where I can see some of friend (s) my, some food
masarap sa dagft, at nang pakabdhay na mabuti.''
mahaahrdhp sah dahgdhy aht nahng pahkahbodnigh nah mahbodtee,**
agreeable for rat(s), and some living (of) good."
Pumar6on ang dagd, lumdkad drao-drao, hangang
Poomahrdhon ahng dahgdh, loomdhkahd dhrow-dhrowy hdhngahng
Went there the rat, traveling daily, until
dumdting sa baybay, nakiUt isang taklobo
doaindhteeng aah buybuy, nahkeita eeadhng tahkldhboh
arriving at (the) beach, (it) saw a (one) giant clam
nakan^nga nang kaunti. Nagwika ang dag&: *'An6
nahkangdhnga nahng kounteS. Nahgwe^ka ahng dahgdh: '^An6h
opening-the-mouth (of) a little. Said the rat: **What
it6? Tot6ong walA pa akong nakikit^ na
eetdhf Tohtdh-ohng toahldh pah ahkdhng nahkeekeSta nah
this? Truly not yet I am seeing (have seen) now
6855—06 2
Digitized by
Google
18 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Tag. ganiyan.'' I?gay6n pumdsok ang dagd sa bfbig nang
Pro. gahneSyahn, nouydhn poomdhsoke ahng dahgdh sah be^beea nahng
Eng. the like. Then entered the rat into mouth of the
Tag. taklobo, tinignan ang lamdn nit6, i^uni't nasfpit
Pro. tahkldhhOf teeneignahn ahng lahmdhn neeidh^ ngodneeH nahseipit
Eng. giant clam, looking at the meat of this, but was caught
Tag. siy^ hangang nasinl ang kaniyane ulu, at
Pro. seeydh hdhn-gang nahseha ahng kahneeydhng 06I00, aht
Eng. he until was destroyed the his head, and
Tag. napiitol ang kaniyang liig.
Pro. nanpodtole ahng kahneeydhng Meeg,
Eng. was cut off the his neck.
FREE TRANSLATION.
Once upon a time there was a rat who said to himself, because his liver
was out of order: **I do not wish to remain here in this town of mine; I
will go and ascend the mountains, looking for another town, where I can
see some of my friends, some agreeable food for rats, and some good liv-
ing." The rat went out, traveling daily, until arriving at the seashore it
saw a giant clam (Tridacna), with slightly opened mouth. Quoth the
rat: * * W hat is this? Truly, I have not seen anything like this yet. * * Then
the rat went into the mouth of the pant clam (taklobo) to look at the
meat, but was caught (by it) until his head was cracked, and it was cut
off at the neck.
ACCENTS.
From the foregoing examples it will be seen that there are three accents
used in Tajralog, the acute (''), the grave (M, and the circumflex C*^)
"aole, ' • -
The acute accent may fall upon any syllable, but in Tagalog is generally
to be found upon the last (ultuna) or the next to the last syllable (penul-
tima). The acute accent upon a word ending in a vowel indicates that
the final vowel has an open, broad sound, and that the suffixed particles
^*an^^ and '*m" prefix an "/i" when joined to such words. Example:
Maganddf "elegant;" kagandahdny "elegance;" 6i/i, "trade, barter;"
ang bUhiny "What bought.'* Words ending in a consonant take "an" or
"m" only, even if bearing the acute accent, which is onlj^ written in such
words when occurring upon the penultima or antepenultima. Example:
Umutang, "to borrow;" magutang, "to lend;" magpadtang. " to lend freely
(or with goodwill);" kautangariy "debt;" pautana^ "credit." In many
cases the suffixing of *^han'^ or '*hin^^ draws the accent one syllable
farther toward the end of the word. This also applies to "an" or "tn."
Example: Paidyy "idea of killing or death;" kamatdyany "death" (ab-
stract noun); ang kamataydn, "the place of death." The acute accent is
not written with words ending in a vowel, unless the accent is upon the
final vowel. It may be taken as a rule that words unmarked with an
accent, if ending with a consonant, take the accent upon the ultima,
words ending with n and 8 being excepted. Words ending with an unac-
cented vowel or "n" or "«" generally take the accent upon the penultima.
This is also the rule in Spanish.
The grave accent in Tagalog merely marks those words ending in a
vowel, which take *^an^^ or ^^iny^^ instead of *^han^^ or ^'hin,*^ The stress
is not laid upon the syllable marked with the ^rave accent, but upon the
one preceding. Example: Batd^ "child" (m general), pronounced
"bdhta," the final vowel having an obscure sound; kahaiaan^ "childish-
ness" (pro. kah'bah-tdh-an). The grave accent is not used with words
ending in a consonant.
The circumflex accent is only used upon the flnal vowel of those words
ending with an abrupt, obscure vowel soimd, upon which the stress of the
voice is placed. It admits only *^an^* or "m" as a suffix. Example:
Dumalitd, "to suffer, to endure;" kadaiitaany "suffering, endurance;"
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 19
tumurdj *' to signal;*' katuroan, '* signaling;" ang tinuroan, " person or sta-
tion signaled to."
Practice is the essential requirement to become familiar with the accent,
which is most important in Tagalog, as many words are only distinguished
by the accent, although differing totally m meaning. Example: Asd,
"smoke;" dso, "dog;" gdim, "milk;" golds, "path, trail;" mmUang,
"to rise" (as the sun); mmilang (ultima), "to pass between;" bumcisa,
"to read;" bumashy "to moisten."
As has been already mentioned there are some 17,000 "roots" in the
Tagalog language, many of which are nouns, pronouns, adverbs, and prep-
ositions, etc. , in themselves. Verbs are generally formed by the use of
certain particles, of which there are some 17, of which all except one
(um) have a definite and indefinite form. Together with the noun and
adjective forming particles, of which there are several, the possible num-
ber of intelligible Tagalog words can not be far from 50,000 to 60,000, quite
sufficient to express any nontechnical ideas of any language whatsoever.
Yet with all this there are some curious facts about the language and its
vocabulary. Many general terms can not be expressed in one word, but the
modifications of a general act have many words to express them, some-
times far more than exist in English or Spanish. A similar parallel is
offered by the lack of a verb in early English to express the idea of motion
in general, although Anglo-Saxon had manv words for different kinds of
motion, which are used daiJy by all English-speaking people. Upon this
point Brian H. Hodgson, the noted oriental scholar, says, in his work
upon the aborigines of India, published at Calcutta in 1847, page iii:
<«* * * Home-bred words are all very particular, and proportionably
numerous; while general terms, if more conveniently few, are less charac-
teristic and very apt to be of exotic (foreign) origin; take the English gen-
eral term *to move;' it is Latin and one; but of the numerous sorte of
special motion (to hop, to skip, to jump, to tumble down, to get up, to
walk, to fly, to creep, to run, to gallop^ to trot), all are * genuine Saxon, by
the soul of Hengist.'" This idea will be more fully explained under
"The verb." In addition to such particularizing words, there are also
many synonyms or words meaning the same thing in Tagalog, many of
which are local or provincial and are not beard in the same locality. For
this reason Crawfurd's remarks upon Tagalog and Visayan, as expressed
in his "Malay Grammar," London, 1852, page cxix, are still pertinent.
He says:
"The languages of the Philippine Islands may be described, not as copi-
ous, but wordy. In the state of society in which the natives of the Philip-
pines were formed, ideas are considered more in concrete than in abstract,
and bjj an importance being attached to trivial matters a profusion springs
up which, in a more advanced state of society, are considered unworthy
of retention, or which, if retained, would only be productive of perplexity
and distraction. * * * In Tagalog there are 12 names for the cocoa-
nut, including its different varieties and conditions as to maturity and
preparation for use. * * * In the same language there are 11 words to
express the verb *to boil* (with variations), and 75 (really about 50) for
the verb *togo.'"
It may be added that the verb " to carry" with its variations has some
eighty words to express all combinations m Tagalog, and there are many
other verbs which have been particularized in this manner, which will be
more fully set forth in the appropriate place.
The main object of this work is to facilitate the acquisition of an ele-
mentary knowledge of the Tagalog language. It should be borne in mind
that Tagalog is not constructed on English or Spanish lines, either in gram-
mar or syntex. The universal tendency upon using a new language is to
translate one's own language word for word, or phrase for phrase, into the
foreign one. The native may understand, but the result is not elegant.
No language can be learned entirely from books, and to supplement the
special ne^s of each person constant practice in speaking witn educated or
Digitized by
Google
20 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
intelligent Ta^logs is necessary. Even with a considerable vocabulary,
the American will find difficulty in conveying just what he wants to say
in Tagalog, unless he masters the idioms and peculiarities of the language.
This will not be a very easy task, but, once mastered, the key is held to
all the Philippine lan^ages, and it might be said to all the Malayan lan-
guages of the East Indies.
To those who have had to depend upon ignorant or untrustworthy inter-
preters, a knowledge of the local tongue will be felt to be indispensable,
and this knowledge will also be a protection to the people ignorant of
Spanish or English who in many cases have been so unmercifully fleeced
by unscrupulous interpreters.
This work has been divided into sections, and the use of technical terms
has been avoided to as great an extent as possible. Where cases, etc. , have
been used, it has not been because such exist in the Tagalog language, but
as an aid to the memory of those who are more or less familiar with
Latin, French, Spanish, German, and other European tongues.
The essential peculiarities of Tagalog are its ** roots," which may be
made into nouns oy the use of the article, into adjectives by other prefixed
particles, into adverbs in other cases, and finally into verbs by the use of
a large number of particles; and the great use of the definite, which is
grammatically a "passive," and is so treated by all grammarians who
nave been consultea, although many times this ** passive " must be trans-
lated into English by an "* active" verb. For this reason the terms
" definite " and ** indefinite " have been used in the present work. This
point is more fully explained under the verb.
Examples have been given wherever possible, and the vocabulary given
has largely been found^ on actual experience. It is impossible to invent
a series of phrases which will serve for any two people. The questions
may be given according to the book, but the answer, coming from a speaker
of the language, will oe constructed out of that vastly more extensive
vocabulary existing in his brain, and the whole scheme be thrown out of
joint. For this reason a careful study of the examples of the language and
the manner of building up the sentences will in the end prove of more
solid benefit than the memorizing of a large number of set phrases, which
may or may not be appropriate.
Some phrases suitable to certain situations have been inserted, such as
matters relating to the procuring of something to eat, directions to the
house boys, distances to places, the weather, and other similar matters,
the careful perusal of which will enable more complex sentences to be
uttered with success and a mastery of the idiom acqmred.
SOME ORDINARY PHRASES IN TAGALOG.
What do you call that (this) in the And ang panaalan niydn (nitd) sa
Tagalog language? wikang Tagalog?
That (This) is called in our ly&n {ltd) ay tinatdwag aa
language. dming tuikd.
GREETINGS.
How are you? Komuatd ( Como estd) p6 kaydt
Well; and you, sir? Mahuti; at kayd p6f
Not as well as you seem to be. Hindi lubkang mabuii na para ninyd.
Good morning, sir. Magandang draOj p6.
Good morning, sir, to you. Magandang drao p6 namdn.
Good morning, everyone. Bigydn p6 silang lahat nang magan-
dang drao.
Good afternoon (evening), sir (used Magandang hapon p6. {P6 used as
from noon to dark). word of respect to both sexes. )
Good evening (night) ( used either Magandang gabi p6.
on meeting or retiring after dark).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
21
How is your father? (mother?)
Well, by the grace of God.
Not very well.
Is that so? I regret
"feel") it.
How is the sick one?
to hear (lit.,
Getting better now.
Is there anything I can do for you?
(lit., Have you any orders for me?)
No, thank you.
Sit down, sir.
Thank you.
I am in a hurry. I wish only to
speak to Pedro.
I will regard it as a great favor if you
will tell Pedro that I was here
to-day.
Don't worry about it, sir; I will tell
him.
Pedro just left this minute.
Where did he go?
I think (It seems) he went to buy
some cloth.
I am going away now.
Are you going?
Until later.
Until to-morrow.
Until day after to-morrow.
Until we meet again (lit., ** Until we
see each other").
Well, Fm going (lit, **you there").
Where are you going?
I am going home.
When are you going back to Manila?
On Sunday.
When are you going (down) to
Manila?
When are you going up to La
Laguna?
Come up! Come down!
Come in! Get out of here!
Move on! Clear out!
Don't move! Come near.
Move away, all of you.
Wait a little way l>ack.
Come here! Accompany me.
Wait a moment. Go back (return)
now.
Come back here. Go quickly.
And ang lagay nang amd (ind) mof
(ninydf)
Mdbutif sa aud nang Poong {Dios),
{Bat-hakty used by some, is of San-
skrit origin, derived from avcUdra,
"descent," through Malay batdra^
**a god." There is no connection
with the Arabic word Alldhy used
by the Moros for "God," the lat-
ter being derived from ai, "the,''
and Ildh, "God," allied to the He-
brew Eldah; Eldhim.)
Dtpd lubhang maigi.
Paid? Kun ganiydn ay dinadamdam
ko.
Maand ang may sakitf or And anff
lagay nang may sakitf
Gumiginhdua na.
Mayro&n kayong anmnang ipaguiUos
sa dtinf
Hindi p6, saldmat,
Umupd p6 kayd.
Saldmat.
Ak&y nagmamadalt Ibig ko Idmang
kausapin »i Pedro.
Malahing iUang na looh Hkilalanin
ko sa inyd kun masabi ninyd kay
Pedro na akd'y naparito ngaydn.
Magioald p6 kayd banalaHsasahihin ko
sa kaniyd.
Si Pedro* y kaaalis Idmang.
Saan pumaroonf
TUa namili nang kaniyang babaroin.
Yaydo na akd.
Yaydo kayd naf
Hangang mamayd.
Hangang bdkas.
Hangang makalawd.
Hangang tayo ma^kitd,
Diydn ka na.
Saan ka parorodnf
Akd^y papasabdhay.
Kailan kayd uuul {magbahalik) sa
Maynildf
Sa Lingo (Domingo).
Kailan kayd Ixduas sa Maynildf
Kailan kayd susuba sa La Laguna f
Pumanhik ka! Manojoa ka!
Pumdsok kayd ! Lumaods ka diio !
Lumdkad! Sdlong.
Houag kang gagalao! Lumdpit ka.
Lumayd kayo.
Umurong ka nang kaunti sa likurdn.
Pumarito ka! Samahan mo akd.
Magantay ka sandali. Muui ka na,
Bumalik ka dini. MagmadaM ka.
Digitized by
Google
22
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Get out of there! Don* t run!
They do not wish to.
I did not wish to. He wishes to.
I don't know. I can not understand
what you said.
Umalis ka diydn ! Houag tumakbd!
Nandyao did.
Ndyao akd. Siyd ibig,
Auan ko, Di akd naalaman
sinabi ninyd.
ang
GOING ABOUT.
Driver, take me to the Walled City.
Go by Palacio street (Calle Palacio).
Straight ahead. Look out!
Go to the side. Stop!
To the right. To the left.
Slowly. Whoa!
Let us go by this road.
Which is the shorter of the two?
This is shorter than that.
Are we far away yet?
We are near now.
What is the distance from here to
the river?
Three hours riding, seven walking.
What are you doing there?
I am getting water, sir.
Is this good water? Yes, sir.
What is your occupation?
Housebuilder, sir.
Where do you live?
My house is here, sir.
Where are you from?
I live in the country.
I am from the mountains, sir.
Where is the town (pueblo)?
I can not tell you.
Show me the road leading to the
pueblo.
I want you to go with us to show us
the road (trail).
Don't be afraid and don't try to run
away.
If you guide us well, you will be paid
for your trouble.
Ask that person there where there is
a spring or well.
What are you looking for?
I am looking for .
Go across the river as far as the
crossroads.
I want a blacksmith (horseshoer).
I want a saddler (leather worker).
I need a banca (canoe) with outrig-
gers.
One large enough to hold twenty-
five people.
CocherOf ihatid mo akd sa loob nang
MaynUd.
Tumuloy ka sa daan nang Palacio.
Maiuid ( derecho ). Tabi! ( Quedao ! )
Tumabi ka. Humintd ka (para).
Sa kanan {mano). Sa kaliivd (tnUa),
Hinayhinay ( despaeio ) . Luayluay.
(This latter to horse, etc.)
Magtuloy tayo sa daang ii6.
Alin ang kUong maiksi sa dalawdf
ltd ang lalong maiksi sa ro6n,
Malayo pa ba tayof
Maldpit na tayo.
And ang layo muld dito hangang sa
ilogf
Tatlong oras kung cabayohin,pitd hang
lakarin.
And ang ginagawd mo diydnf
Akd'y nai{iib, pd.
Mabuti ba itong tiXbigf Opd.
Alin kayd ang iyong katungkuUmf
AnloaguBj p6.
Saan ka namamayanf
Ang bdhay kOy pdy dito,
Taga saan kaf
Akd'y namamahay sa bdkid,
Taga bundok akdj pd.
Saan narodn ang bayant
Hindi ko rmalamang sabihin sa inyd.
Iturd mo sa dkin ang daxing patungo
sa bayan.
Ibig kong sumama ka sa amin para
iturd ang daan (gatds).
Houag kang matdkot at houag kang
tumakbd.
Kung iturd mong maigi, ay magka-
kamtam ka nang kaupahdn sa iyong
pagod.
Itanong mo do6n sa tduong (mamd)
iydn kun saan mayroon isang bdkal
d baldn.
And ang hinahAnap mof
Humahdnap akd nang .
Tawirin mo ang Hog at lumdkad ka
hangang sa sangd-daan.
Ibig ko nang isang panday (ta^a pag-
la^ay nang bdkal sa cabayo).
Ibig ko nang isang mananahi nang
balat (talabartero).
Kailangan ko isang bangkd na may
kdtig.
Isang malaki na makakadald nang
isang dalawang poud^t limang ka-
tduo.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
23
Steer straight for the ship.
Land there at that point.
Do not land where it is very muddy.
DonH make a noise at the landing
place.
Port! Starboard! Stop!
Go ahead! Astern!
See that everything of mine is taken
down to the boat.
Put everything iuto the cart.
Wrap something around that bundle
so it will not get wet.
Set that basket down here; I want
to get something out of it.
Unfasten this cord.
From here to Manila, how many
hours by road (walking)?
Ituid mo ang sasakydn.
Isatsat mo do6n sa ddkong iydn,
Houag hang mmatsai m kaputlkan,
Houag hang magingay sa pagsatsat
Sa kaliwdf Sa kanan/ Hintd iia/
Siilong naf Urong!
Inaatan mo na lahat ang dking kasan-
Kapan may padald sa sa^akydn.
Ilagay mo lahat sa carretdn.
Sapindn mo iydng balutan at bakd
Ilagay mo dito iydng tampipi; may-
roon ak6 kukunin.
Tastasln mo itong l-dhid.
Buhat dito hangang sa Maynild,, ilang
oras lakarin nang daanf
THE WBATHEB (ANG PANAH6N).
How is the weather?
The weather is fine.
The weather is bad.
We are in the dry season now.
We are having the wet season now.
The sun is becoming obscured.
There is much fog.
Is it going to rain?
It looks like it.
It has been raining fearfully all day.
The rain is coming down now.
Give him the umbrella.
It is thundering and lightening.
A bolt struck that tree.
The wind is increasing.
It is possible that this may turn into
a typhoon (hurricane).
Come in under the shelter of this
house.
The moon is rising now.
The stars are coming out.
Look and see if it is raining, because
I must go now.
Come back here at sunset (lit, At
setting of the sun, return here).
It is growing dark.
It is growing light.
also
Maano ang panahdnf
MabtUi ang panahdn,
Masamd ang panahdn.
Na sa tagdrao tayo ngaydn.
Na sa taguldn tayo ngaydn.
Nagdidilim ang drao. {Arao
means **day.'')
May mardming iHlap.
Vuldn hagdf
Tilapd.
Katakottdkot nautdn sa maghdpong
its.
Bumubugsd na ang uldn.
Ihigay mo sa kaniyd ang pdyong.
Kumukulog at kumikidlat.
Isang lintiK ay nahdlog sa iyang kdhoy
iyan.
Lumalakds ang hangin.
MardhU it6 ay mauui sa bagyd,
Pumdsok kayd sa sUong niiong bdhay.
SumisUang na ang buan.
SumisUang na ang manad bituin.
Tigndn mo kun umuulan^ at aalis na
akd.
Paglubog nang drao, ay magbalik ka
dint
Dumidilim na.
Lumiliwdnag na.
FOR TAKING LEAVE (8A PAGPAPAALAM).
I must say good-by to you now.
Why must you go? Sit down first.
I can not sit down, because I am in
a hurry.
And where are you going?
I am going to see a friend who is
leaving for Manila to-morrow.
I will come back later.
Padlam na p6 akd sa inyd.
Bdkit ka nagpapadlamf Maupd
ka
Hindi akd makauupd sapagkaH akd ^y
nagmamadali.
At saan ka paroroonf
Makikipagkitd akd sa isa kong kaibigan
aalis pasasa Maynild bdkas.
Magbabalik akd mamayd.
Digitized by
Google
24
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
We will see each other in the after-
noon.
Good-by.
Magkikitd tayo sa hapon.
Adios (Sp.).
PIOUS EXPRESSIONS OF GOOD WILL.
May God guard you.
May God help you.
God be with you.
Dio8 ang uminbai sa inyd.
Dios ang tumulong m inyd,
Dio8 ang mmarna sa inyd.
FOR EATING AND DRINKING (SA PAGKAIN AT PAGINUM).
G«t me something to eat; I am hun-
gry.
Get me a drink; I am thirsty.
What do you wish to eat?
Whatever you have.
Would you like roast chicken?
Yes, and a little wine.
What else would you like?
Give me some eggs, if there are any.
Biaydn mo akd nang kaunting maka-
kain; nagugtitum akd.
Painumin mo akd; nauuhao akd.
And ang ibig ninyong kaninf
Kun and mayroon dtydn.
Ibig ninyd ang inihao na sisiuf
OOf at kaunting dlak.
And pa ang ibig ninyd f
Bigydn mo akd nang iUog kun mayroon.
Note.— See list for things to eat, pp. 28-29 and 39-40.
The meal is nice.
Wash (wipe) this plate.
I have eaten enough.
Eat some more, sir.
Just a bit more.
Only a bite more.
I am satiated now.
Don't give me anything more.
Bring some water to wash the hands.
Masarap ang pa^kain.
Hugasan (kuskusin) mo Uong mankok
{pingdn) itd.
Marami akong kinain.
Kumain pa kayd pd.
Kapiraso pa.
ha na lAmang subo.
Busog na akd.
Houag na pd ninyd akong bigydn nang
anoman,
Magdald ka nang t-dhig pagkAgas nang
kamay. ( Idiomatic ex pr. is: /«angr
tabong (cocoanut shell) tijibig. )
FOR THE toilet (SA PAGRIRIHIS).
Shall I get the clean clothes now?
No, bring me a towel and soap first,
1 am going to take a bath.
Get some water and put it in the
bath tub.
The bath is ready, sir.
Benigno, i)ut some water in the
wash basin.
Lay out a shirt, a pair of trousers,
and a coat.
Khaki, sir? No, white clothes.
Bring me my shoes.
Hand me that cap.
Get a handkerchief out of the trunk
(chest).
Open that door. Shut the window.
Take care of the house; I am going
for a walk.
Ibig ninyong ikuha ko kayd nangdamit
na malinisf
Houag^ dalhdn mo muna akd nang
isang pamdhid at sabdn at akd ay
malUigb.
Kumuha ka nang tiSbbig at ilagay mo
sa paliguan.
Ang paliguan pd ay handd na.
Benigno, lagydn mo nang tUbig ang
hitamosan.
Ikuha mo akd nang imng bard, isang
salnwal at isang americana.
Kaki pdf Houag, damit na mapuH.
Dalhln mo sa dkin ang sapln.
IdbtU mo sa dkin iyang gorra iydn.
Maglahds ka nang isang panyo sa
kabdn.
Buksdn mo iyang pinid iydn. Finddn
(Sarhdn) mo ang durungauan {bin-
tana).
Ingatan mo ang bdkay; at akd ay
maglalakadldkad.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
25
If anyone calls, say that I will be
back soon.
What time is it?
It is five o'clock, sir.
Wake me up later, at six; don't for-
get what 1 tell you (lit., **my or-
ders")..
Please get up, sir; it is six now.
Do you know of a good barber?
There is one, sir, I know well.
Then call on him and tell him to
bring a good razor.
Do you know how to shave well?
Yes, sir. All right, shave me.
Does it hurt you, sir?
No, it is all right.
Cut my hair.
Do you wish it very short, sir?
No, leave it a little long.
How much do I owe you?
What you like, sir; what you wish.
How much a month, shaving me
every other day?
Three pesos, sir. Then come, begin-
ning with to-morrow.
There is a man downstairs who
wishes to work for you as a serv-
ant.
Tell him to come up.
Have you any recommendations?
I have, sir.
Where are you from?
From Malolos, sir.
How old are you?
Are you married? Yes, sir.
Have you father and mother yet?
No, sir. I have not.
Stay here and I (we) will pay you
if you care for it five pesos a month,
and if this does not suit you, look
for another place.
You are falling into bad habits.
Look for a substitute right now.
Don't be impertinent.
Keep still! or Shut up!
Where is your employer?
He is not nere, sir.
Don't you know where he went to?
No, sir.
About what time will he be back?
Later, after eight o'clock.
Tell him, when he comes, that I have
been here.
Are you the tailor?
This suit does not fit well.
Kun may sinomang pumaritOf mhUiin
mong na akd^y madaling bahalik.
4nong oras naf
A las cinco napd,
Gimngin mo ak6 mamayang dlas seis;
hotmg mong kalilimutan ang bilin
ko.
QumUmg p6 kayS; d las sets na.
May naHkilala kang mdlmting mang-
angdhit (barber o)f
May isd p6 akong nakikilalang mabuti.
Kun gaydn ay tauagin mo at sahihin
mong fnagdald nang mahuting labasa
{pan^/dhit),
Marunong kang umdhit na mabuti?
Op6, Kun gaySn, ahUin mo akd.
Nasasaktdn p6 kaydf
Hindis ganiydn nga ana mabuti.
Gupiiin mo ang buhok ko,
Ibig po ninyong sagad na mgadf
Hoaagy pabayaan mong mahahd-habd.
Magkano (gaano) ang ibabayad ko sa
iydf
Kay 6 p6 ang bahala; ang loobinpd
ninyd.
Magkanong ibig mo buanan, sa tuing
ikalawang drao ay aahitan mo akdf
TaUong pisOj p6. Kun gaydn ay
pumanto ha muld bdkas.
May isang tduo sa ibabd na ihig mag^
paalUa sa inyd.
Sabihin mono pumanhik.
May taglay ka katunayanf
Mayroon akd p6.
Taga soAxn kaf
Taga Malolos^ p6.
Mayroon ka nang Hang taSnf
May asdua kaf Op6.
May amdH ind paf
Hindi p6. Waldpd.
Tumird ka at uupahdn kitd kun ibig
mo nang Umang piso isang 6itan,
at kun hindt humdnap ka nang ibang
panginoon.
Masamd ang pinagkaratihan mo.
Humdnap ka nang kahalili mo ngaydn
din.
Houag kang magpayamot.
Houag kang maingay!
Nasaan ang panginoon mof
Wald p6 rito.
Dt mo naalaman kun saxin naparoonf
Hindi p6.
Anong oras siyd babalikf
Mamayang makd d las ocho.
Sabihin mo kun dumdting na akd'y
naparito dito.
Ikdo ba ang mananahif
Itong damit na it6 ay hindi maigi ang
pagkagagawd.
Digitized by
Google
26
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
That is too dear.
I must have it this week.
Totoong napakamalml iy&n.
KaUangan ho sa loob nang lingong
its.
MISCELLANEOUS PHRASES.
Are you teaching English?
What did you teach this morning?
I taught arithmetic.
When did they write any English?
They have written some within a few
days.
I wish to rent a house.
I shall be here some time — several
months at least.
I wish to rent from month to month.
I will pay you in advance.
A long time. A short time.
I will go there.
What do these men want?
They wish to speak to you.
What do you (thou) want?
What is your name?
Is that work finished yet that I told
you to do?
Not yet, sir. Then, when?
To-morrow, sir.
How much is this (all)?
How much for eggs?
There is no answer.
Wait, I am going to write a letter to
your employer.
I am under great obligations to you.
Don't mention it (lit, It is nothing).
You are mistaken.
It is the truth.
It is a lie.
This woman, sir, is asking that her
husband be released.
Tell her to state her reason for ask-
ing.
Who, among you, know this woman?
Tell me what you did to Pedro.
Tell me the truth, for if you do not I
shall send you to the guardhouse
(prison).
Wny did you leave the barracks
without permission?
Tell Pedro that he is wanted by the
captain.
What you did was far from the duty
(orders) of a soldier.
Ungmddral (nagtuturd) hay 6 hagd
nang ingUs (Ang wikang nang
maiigd americano)
And kayang inidral (Uinurd) ninyd
sa agdf
Ang inidral (Uinurd) ko^y arUmStica.
Kaildn sungmulat aiid^y nang inglis.
SungmMat sild^y nang kamakailang
drao.
Ibig ko isang bdhay paupahdn.
Ak&y matitird dint mardhil mangd
Hang buan.
Ibig ko umupd huang-buan.
Manguuna ang bayad.
Mahabang panah&n. Maiksing pana-
h&n.
Paroroon ako dodn.
And ang ibig nitong mangd tduof
Ibig nild makipagdsap sa inyd.
And ang ibig mot
And ang pangalan mof
Yari na ba^d ang gawang ipinagbilin
ko sa iydf
Hindi pay pd. At kaildn f
Bdkas pd.
Magkano iidt
Magkakano ang itlog f
Walang sagod.
Maghintay ka^ susdlat akd nang isang
sdlat sa iyong panginoon,
Akdpd ay malaki ang pagpapasaldmat
sa inyd.
Wold pd anoman.
Kayd pd malt,
ltd ang katotookanan.
Itd^y kabulaan.
Itong babaye itd pd ay namamanhik
napawaldn ang kaniyang as&ua,
Ipasaysay mo sa kaniyd ang katuiran
na hinihingi niyd.
Sino ba sa inyd ang nakakikilala sa
babaye iidf
Magsaysay ka sa dkin nang mangd
ginawd mo kay Pedro.
Sabihin mo ang kaiotoohanan, at kun
hindiy ipapadald kitd sa bilangoan.
AndH ikao lumabds sa cuartel nang
walang sabi.
Sabihin mo kay Pedro ^a siyd^y kai-
langan nang capitdn.
lyang ginawd mo iydn ay laban sa
mangd dtos nang i^ang sundalo.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 27
You should always inspect the men's Dadalaoin ninyd tui-tuing ang mangd
quarters. kinalalagydn nang manga mndalo.
The rijfles (carbines) must be cleaned Ddpat linisin drao-drao ang mangd
daily. baril.
I especially warn you not to be off PlnagbibUing ho sa iyd mahigpit na
guard (or relax vigilance) for a houag ka mallbang isang mandalt
moment.
The obligation of a soldier on duty Naudkol sa sundalo taga-pagtdnod
is to know the orders. umain ang mangd tXtos.
Those who disobey orders will re- Ang lumaban sa utos ko ay kakamtdn
ceive severe punishment. nanp mahigpit na parusa.
Tell the people here that what we Sabihin mo sa toga dito na ang dting
are going to do is for the benefit gagawin ay kagalingan nang lahat,
of all.
Section One.
vocabulary.
Thomas. Tomds. Father. Amd,
Mary. Maria, Mother. Ind,
John. Juan, Brother. Kapatidnalalaki.^
Joseph. Josi, Sister. Kapatid na babaye,<*
THE ARTICLE OP PROPER NOUNS (si).
In Tagalog a definite article, Si^ is generally prefixed to the names of
persons related to or well known to the speaker or writer, as well as with
names of relationship and terms of affection. It may also be used with the
proper name of an animal belonging to the speaker. In some of the prov-
inces diminutives are much used, especially within the family. There are
also some terms of this nature largely used in Sangley, or Chmese-Tagalog
families, which are taken from Chinese and will be discussed later.
Older brother (first bom). Koya; si koya, my elder brother. The pro-
noun is understood.
Elder brother. Manung (Manila and southern dialect).
Elder sister. Kakd; si kakdy my elder sister.
My father. Si amd.
My mother. Si ind.
This article is declined as follows:
Nom. John. Si Juan,
Gen. John's; of John. Ni Juan; kay Juan.
Dat. To, for John. ^
Ace. John. >- Kay Juan.
Abl. From, with, John, j
When a name is to be used in the plural, the article of common nouns,
angi is used, as: The Johns, ang mangd Juan; or better, ang mangd Una-
tdwag na Juan (those who are called John).
The article of names has a special plural when coupled with certain
words, as of the parents, relatives, companions, or the home.
Nom. John and his . Sind Juan.
Gen. The field of John and his family. Ang bukid nind Juan.
Dat. To, for, Pedro and his . ]
Ace. The field of Pedro and his family. > Ang kand Pedrong hdHd,
Abl. From, by, Pedro and his . J
a These two words are derived from " patld " and *' ka," meaning '• tied with the same
cord." ' ' Lalaki " is male and " babaye " is female. In Tagalog, however, separate words
are used to express *• elder brother," " elder sister," " younger brother or sister," etc.
Digitized by
Google
28 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Si is not used alone before names of persons unrelated to the speaker
except in a joking way; in other cases the Spanish word Seflor, Mr., is
inserted as: Si Seflor Blanco^ Mr. Blanco. Gm6o is the Tagalog equiva-
lent for **Sefior" and Gat for **Don.'' Dayang is "Dofia." These terms
are used by purists.
THE ARTICLE OF COMMON NOUNS.
The article ang (the) is used with all common nouns, and also those
proper nouns not applying to persons — i. e., the Pasig, ang Pdsig; the Phil ip-
fines, ang Filipinas. Sometimes this article is prefixed to names of cities.
t is declined both in the singular and plural, the word mangd (sign of
plurality) being added in the latter case.
DECLENSION OF "aNG.**
Nom. sing. The. Ang.
Gen. sing. Of the. Nang; sa,
Dat. sing. To, for, the. Sa.
Ace. sing. The. Nang; sa.
Abl. sing. From, by, the. Nang; sa.
Nom. plur. The. Ang mangd.
Gen. plur. Of the. Nang mangd; sa mangd,
Dat. plur. To, for, the. Sa mangd.
Ace. plur. The. Nang mangd; sa mangd.
Abl. plur. From, with, the. Sa mangd; nang mangd.
The forms ni and nind of the article of names and the form nang of the
article of common nouns are used when a word in the genitive follows a
nominative in the sentence. Examples: The mother of John, ang ind ni
Juan; the house of Thomas and his family, ang bdhay nind Tomds; the
darkness of the night, ang kadilimdn nang gab-i.
The forms kay, kand, and sa are used with the genitive when inserted
between the nominative article and its noun. Examjjles: The mother of
John, ang kay Juan ind; the house of Thomas arid his family, ang kand
Tomds bdhay; the darkness of the night, ang sa gab-i na kadilimdn. Ancient
Greek has almost this same construction.
THE COMMON NOUN.
Nouns in the Tagalog language are of various classes; some are root
words, whose derivation can not be traced; others are built up from roots,
and many are foreign words, mainly from Spanish, although some Arabic
and Sanskrit words are to be found, as well as a few from Chinese and
other sources. They are indeclinable, and the sign of plurality is generally
indicated by the word mangd placed before the noun pluraUzed.
VOCABULARY.
Banana (in general). Sdging.
Bed. Papag.
Bedquilt. Kitimot.
Beer. Serbesa (from Sp., cerveza).
Blanket. Mania (Sp. ) .
Bread. Tindpay (from tdpay, idea of knead-
ing, i. e., kneadedf).
Breadfruit tree. Antipolo; tipolo. Antipolo is also a
town in Rizal Province.
D, .. „. i„.j (Mantica (Sp., manteca).
ttutter, lara. \MantiquiIla (Sp., mantequiUa).
Carabao (buffalo). Kdlabao; dam-dlag; anuang. First is
general.
Cat, domestic. Pusa. ifitsan^' is Malay for the palm-
cat (Paradoxurus).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANOUAOE.
29
Cheese.
Chicken; fowl.
Child.
Chocolate.
Cocoanut.
Cocoanut oil.
Coffee.
Corkscrew.
Com (maize).
Cow.
Cup.
Dog.
Drinking vessel.
Fish, dried salt.
Fish, fresh.
Flour (in general).
Food.
Fork.
Goat.
Grape fruit.
Hog; swine, domestic.
Honey.
Horse.
House.
Lamp; light.
Man (person).
Mango.
Mat.
Meat (pulp).
Milk.
Native spoon.
Orange.
Pepper.
Plate.
Rat.
Rice (cooked).
Rice (hulled).
Rice (unhulled).
Salt.
Sheep.
Soap.
Spoon.
Sucking pig.
Sugar.
Sweet potato; yam.
Table.
Table knife.
Tea.
Tumbler.
Vinegar.
Water.
Wine; liquor.
Woman.
QwUo (Sp., queso),
Manuk.
Batd. Also applied to house boy,
servant (muchacho).
Siculate (Mex. Sp., chocolate; from
Aztec).
Niog. Also applied to cocoa palm.
Langis.
Cape(8p,, ccrfi; from Arabic, qahwa).
Tiramndn (Sp., tirabuzdn).
Mais (Sp., malz).
Baca (Sp., vaca),
Tom (Sp.).
Aso; ay am (rare), Bicol word.
Lumbo; inuman (from inum, idea of
drinking).
Itlog.
Dding.
Isdd.
Galapung,
Pagkain,
Panduro (Sp., tenedor),
Kamhing.
DaUmdan.
Bdbuy.
Palvi.
Gahayo (Sp., cabaUo),
Bdhay,
Baodn (from Uao, light).
Tduo,
Mangd.
Banig (Sp., petote.).
Laman.
Gatas.
Sandok,
Suha; lukban,
Lara; paminta. (Possibly from Sp.,
pimienta.)
Pingdn.
Dagd.
Kanin.
Bigds.
Palay, Also applied to the grain.
Asin.
Tupa (from Sp., topavy "to butt ") .
Sahdn {Sp. J jabdn),
Cnchara (Sp.).
Biik (Manila ) ; Kvlig ( Laguna ) ; Buldo
(Marinduque).
Aff&cal (Sp., azdcar). Old name
tubSf now "sugar-cane."
Camote (Sp.). l^rge yam, ubi,
Ddlang; lameaa.
Kampit ( Sp. , cuchUlo ) .
Sa (Chinese, cha),
F<wo (Sp.).
Sukd.
Tdbig.
Alak (from Arabic, araq),
Babdye.
Digitized by
Google
30
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The definite and indefinite idea runs throughout the Tagalog language,
./I fKn irr^T.Ho *« to have," ** not to have," "there is,'* "there is not,*' etc.,
and the words
bring this out plainly.
VOCABULARY.
Mayrdon (lit., "there is;'* from ddorij
*nhere.")
Na 8a.
iMayrdonf ^Mayrdon ha hagdf iMayf
iNa sa iyof (lit., Is with you?)
Ak6 (form with nominative; indef. ).
hga.
Salapt, Also means half peso.
Akin; ko (latter postfixed to def-
inites).
Hindt
Kayd.
Bagd.
Wald.
iAnd; and bagdf
O'O.
Op6.
Ka (form with nominative; indef.).
Akin requires the article and is prefixed or else is preceded by a
preposition.
Ex. : 1. Have you anv rice? (^Mayrdon kang bigdsf) Have you that rice?
UNa sa iyo iydng bigdsf) 2. Yes, sir, I have some (Op6j mayrdon ak6).
Yes, sir, I have it ( Op6, na sa dkin) .
Mayrdon is used when asking in a general waj^, as in the market or in a
shop or store; na sa is used when a certain object is meant. Mapkano means
"how much;" aydo is "I do not wish to," and alin is "which." With
the foregoing vocabulary all ordinary comforts and supplies, except cloth-
ing, can be asked for throughout the provinces where Tagalog is under-
stood, and these words are generally understood throughout the island of
Luzon on account of their general similarity to the corresponding words
in other dialects. The most conspicuous exception is tdbig (water) , which
is danum in Pampango, Ilocano, and other northern dialects of Luzon.
Have (all persons; indef.).
Have(def.).
Have you (some, any)?
Have you (that, this)?
Indeed; truly.
Money.
My.
No.
Perchance.
Perhaj)s; some; any.
There is not.
What?
Yes.
Yes, sir.
You (thou).
VOCABULARY.
Afternoon.
American.
Bottle.
Custom; habit.
Day; sun.
Dress; clothes.
Every day; daily.
Ganta (3 liters).
Glass; crystal.
Gold.
Inkstand.
JjSLTge jar.
Mirror.
Morning.
Night.
Hdpon,
Americano (Sp.); Ta^a America.
(Boten (Sp., botella),
\Prongo.
Ugali.
Arao.
Damit.
Arao-drao.
Salop (English equivalent, 3 quarts
If pmts— 3.1701).
Bubog.
Gintd (said to be from dialectical
Chinese, Hn, "gold," and tMy
"of," i. e., "golden;" Malay,
amas; native gold, balUok).
Tintero (Sp. ).
Tapdyan.
Saiamln (Malay, chdrmin),
Aga.
Gab'l.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 31
Priest. Par^ (Sp., padre) .
Ring. Singsing (Malay, chinchin).
Silver. PUak ( Malay, perak, also place name ) .
Son or daughter (child). Anak,
Spaniard. Espafiol (Sp.); Taga Castila (from
CaMiUay Castile).
Stone. Batd.
Tagalog. Tag&log.
Town. Bayan,
Well (noun). Bcd-dn.
Sex is distinguished by the addition of the words lalakij "male,'* or hah&ye,
"female,^* witn the appropriate *'tie" (g, na^ or no), Ex. : My sister {Ang
ahing kapatid na babdye — lit., The my female brother); my son {ang aking
anaknalalaki).
A few words indicate sex in themselves, but they are very limited in
number compared with those in Aryan languages.
VOCABULARY.
Aunt. Alt
Father. Amd.
Girl, unmarried woman. Dalaaa.
KleT woman. ^e}^->^ «^ - ««1^-«-.
Miss; young lady. Binibim.
Mother. Ind,
(Amain.
Mamd. Principally heard in Ma-
nila.
Young man; bachelor; youth. Binatd (from batd^ boy, child).
Young man, unmarried. Bagongtduo (lit, "new man").
THE "ties."
The Tagalog ear dislikes the sequence of certain sounds, and for this
reason three ties, **5'," *'n^," and *^na,** are much used, more especially
when an adjective is prefixed to a noun or a noun in the genitive modifies
another in the nominative.
The tie ^'^r" is added to such an adjective or nominative if ending in
"n,'' the genitive following the nominative modified. The adjective may
precede the noun, as in English, or follow it, as is generally the case in
Spanish. The tie is added to the noun in the latter case, if it ends
in**n." Ex.: (1) Wisdom (karunungan); ^reat (dakild); great wisdom
(karunungang dakild) . (2) Bilver (pUak) ; mirror («aZamin); silver mirror
{salaming piiak).
The tie **n^** is added to words ending in a vowel not preceded by
another vowel. {7, as in tdtw^ is considered as a consonant, as it sounds
nearly like the English ** w," and is written with this letter by many natives.
Ex.: A dutiful child (Batang mabait); a bottle of wine (isang boteng dlak);
a beautiful woman (babdyeng magandd); a Manila man (isang tduong
Maynild).
ihe tie **na^^ is used when the first word ends in any consonant (except
**n") or in a diphthong. Ex.: A dutiful child (Mabait nabaid); a large
house {bdhay na malaH); clear water {tiibig na malinao, or malinao na
tUbig),
NO INDEFINITE ARTICLE.
There is no special indefinite article (a or an) in Tagalog, although the
numeral isd (one) may be used.
Digitized by
Google
32 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
THB VERB "TO BE."
The English verb "to be** may be sometimes represented in Tacalog by
the particle ay, chansine to 'y for euphony after a preceding vowel. Ex. :
Is your horse white? JlAng cabayo m&y maputif) The bird is singing
{Ang ibon ay hungmuhuni). Generally in Questions the verb **to be'* is
understood, as: lAtid angsabi mof (What dia you say?— lit, What the said
your?). The verb is understood also when a predicate adjective is used;
as, My father is good (MabtUi ang dking amd ) . Ay also connects two clauses
of equal force; as, If John comes, go away {Kun damdting si Juan, ay
umalh ka).
FUTURE AND PAST OP **AY."
The particle ay is invariable as to tense, the idea of past or future being
expressed by the answer or an adverb of time. Ex. : Beautiful then, she is
is ugly now {Magandd tiyd no6n. ngaydn ay pdngit). You will be sick
to-morrow (Bijikaji ikdo ay masakit).
Some Tagalog writers use ai in place of ay, especially in newspaper work.
THE CONJUNCTION **AND."
Atf changing to *<, under the same circumstances in which ay changes
to *y, represents the conjunction **and.*' It may also stand for ** because**
in compound sentences when a cause is expressed; as, I can not read,
because I have no spectacles (Hindi ak6 makahabasa sa pagka H wald akong
aalamin).
When ay and at are followed by a monosyllable, as «a, the vowel is not
dropped.
Section Two.
The principal interrogative pronouns and adverbs are as follows:
What? iAndf W^hen? iKaildnf
Who? iSinof How? iPapa-andt
Which? iAlinf How much (value)? iMagkanof
Where? iSadnt How many? illant
Andy ** what,** is declined as follows:
SINGULAB. PLURAL.
Nom. What? iAndf No change.
Gen. Of what? ^Sa andf iNang andf No change.
Dat. To, for what? iSa andf No change.
Ace. What? iSa andf iNang andf No change.
Abl. (Loc.) In, atwhat? iSa andf ' No change.
Abl. (Ins.) By, with what? iNang andf No change.
This pronoun is used only in speaking of things, never of persons. The
expression iAnd kaf means '* What do you want?**
iSinof, **who,** is declined as follows:
Nom. Who? iSinof iSino-sinof
Gen. Whose, of whom. iKaninof iNinof<* iKanikaninof ^
Other cases. iSa kaninof iSa kanikaninof
«Used only when the question is not heard or understood.
b Not kanino-kanino, as the first form is a trisyllable, and in Tagalog repetitions stop at
at the second syllable (or letter, as the case may be). Kaninong mangd and ta kaninong
are also used.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 33
Example: iKardnong buMd iydnf (Whose field is that?); Sa capitdn
(Of the mayor or presidente) ; 4 Nino f (Whose?); Sa capitdn sa bay an (Of
the mayor of the town) .
From early times the title of the mayor of a town or "pueblo** was
"gobernadorcillo" ( little governor) . This name was changed in 1893 to
** capitdn municipal,'* and in 1898 to *' presidente/* a name retained under
American administration. Natives ignorant of Spanish generally speak of
the *'capitan.**
While and is used for things and sino for persons, the pronoun aZiw,
"w^hich,** is used for both. It is declined:
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
Which?
4Alinf
iAlin-alinf
Gen.
Of which?
iSa alinf iNang alinf
iSa atin-alinf
Dat
To. for what?
sSa alinf
iSa alin-alinf
Ace.
What?
iSa alinf iNang alinf
sSa alin-alinf
Loc.
In, at which?
iSa alinf
iSa alin-alinf
Ins.
By, with, etc..
which?
iNang alinf
iNang alin-alinf
Sa with the genitive is preferable in answering a question . iAling mangdf
may also be used for the plural. The form iMangd alinf is rather inele-
gant. Thus the English ** Which men?** maybe expressed by ^^iAlin-
aling tduof^^ '^iAlin mangd tduof^^ or ^* iMangd aling tdxwf^*
THE INTERROGATIVE ADVERBS.
These adverbs present no peculiarities and are used as in Enelish.
fllanf (How many?) obviates the use of the pluralizing particle manga; as,
illang tduof (How many men?) In inquiring the price of an article in the
market the restrictive form magkakano is generally used; as, ''iMaaka-
kano ang mangd iilogf * * ( How much for eggs?) But in speaking of purchase
ing the entire quantity magkano is right.
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
These are four in Tagalog, two being translated by "this,** another by
**that,*' and the fourth by the poetic form "yon.**
The first is yari, and means *'this.** Strictly speaking, it should be used
only to indicate an object nearer to the speaker than to the person
addressed, but practically this pronoun is dropping out of use. For exam-
Ele, Yaring dking puso (This heart of mine), while more exact, is little
eard, the following word itd (this) being used: itong dking puso. Yerl is
a dialectical form.
YaH is declined as follows:
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
This.
YaH.
These.
Yaring mangd.
Gen.
Of this.
Niri; dini sa.
Of these.
Niring mangd.
Dat.
To, for this.
Dini sa.
To, for these.
Dini sa mangd.
Ace.
This.
Niri; dini sa.
These.
Niring mangd, etc.
Loc.
At, in this.
Dini sa.
At, in these.
Dini sa mangd.
Ins.
By, with this.
Niri.
By, with these.
Niring mangd.
The ordinary word meaning *'this'* is itd, and strictly denotes objects or
persons equidistant from both speaker and the person spoken to. It is
declined as follows:
Nom. This. M. These. Itong mangd.
Gen. Of this. Nitd; ditd sa. Of these. Nitong mangd, etc.
Dat. To, for this. Dito sa. To, for these. Dito sa mangd,
6855—06 3
Digitized by
Google
34 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Ace.
This.
Ditosa.
These.
Dito sa mangd.
Loc.
At, in this.
Ditosa.
At, in these.
DHo sa mangd.
Ins.
By, with this.
Nit6.
By, with these.
Nitong mangd.
**That" is expressed in Tagalog by the word iydn, especially when
applied to persons or objects nearer to the person spoken to than to the
speaker. It is declined as follows:
SINGULAR.
PLURAU
Nom
That. Jydn.
Of that. Niydn; diydn m.
Those.
lyang mangd.
Gen.
Of those.
^iyang mangd, etc.
Dat.
To, for that. Diydn sa.
To, for those.
Diydn sa mangd.
Ace.
That. Niydn; diydn sa.
Those.
Niyang manga^ etc.
Loc.
At, in that. Niydn sa.
At, in those.
Niydn sa mangd.
Ins.
By,withthat. Niydn.
By, with those.
Niyang manga.
The fourth demonstrative pronoun, yadn^ means **yon,'* although at
present generally translated "that.'* Yo6n is a dialectical form. It is
declined:
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. Yon (that). Ya6n. Yon (those) Yadng^ mangd.
Gen. Of yon. NiyaSn; ddon sa. Of yon. Niya&ng mangd, etc.
Dat. To, for yon. D6on sa. To, for yon. D6on sa mangd.
Ace. Yon. Niyadn; ddon sa. Yon. Niyaong mangd.
Loc. At, in yon. D6on sa. At, in yon. D6on sa manga.
Ins. By, withyon. iV{2/a(5n. By, with yon. Niyaong mangd.
The particle sa follows the pronoun in each ease as given, but it, as well
as the pluralizing particle mangd, belongs to the person or object pointed
out, and not to tne pronoun.
These four demonstratives have a peculiar idiomatic use in that they are
repeated in the nominative after the person or object modified as well as
preceding the same, in the latter ease agreeing in number and case.
Examples: This man (Itong tauong ii6), both nominative singular. That
boy's clothes {Ang damit niyang batnng iydn); first, genitive singular;
second, nominative singular. That man (has) much money (Maraming
salapi niyang (niyaong) muongyadn); lit., "much money of that man that."
(Generally with -nominative. J Itong bulaklak na itd'y diydn sa batang iydn
(This flower is for that child). In the second clause, the first pronoun is
in dative and second in nominative.
ADVERBS OP PLACE.
From the four demonstrative pronouns the following adverbs of place
are derived:
Here (close to the speaker). Dini.
Here. Dito.
There ( near addressee ) . Diydn.
Yonder (there). D6on.
With the particle na prefixed to this class of adverbs, the idea of "am,"
"is," "are'^ is expressed. It will be noted that the initial letter d is soft-
ened to r where the particle na is used alone.
Am, is or are here (close). Narini; nayeri; nandini.
Am, is or are here (more distant). Narito; naitd; nandito.
Am, is or are there. Nariydn; naiydn; nandiydn.
Am, is or are yonder. Narodn; nayadn; nandodn.
The particle dt with the same class of adverbs expresses the past tense.
For euphony the particle changes to do with do6n.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
35
Was or were here (close). Dirini.
Was or were here (more distant). Dirito.
Was or were there. Diriyan.
Was or were yonder. Dor don.
The particle pa with the same adverbs expresses the future.
Will be here (close). Parini.
Will be here (more distant). Pariio,
Will be there. Party an.
Will be yonder. Parion.
Ex. Is the man there? (Nariydn bagd ang t&uo?) He is not here, he is
yonder ( Wald rito, nardon). Where is Captain Tino (Faustino)? (^Sadn
nardon [or naandodn] Si Capitdn Tinof) In Manila {Na^n MaynUd).
When will he come back? QXaUan hahalikf) Possibly within a week
( Marahil sa isatig lingd) . Who is his agent? (^iSino ang kaniyang katiwalaf)
The Chinaman Ong Laico on Calle Real {Ang insik Ong Laico sa Calle Real),
Thank you {Saldmat),
THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
The personal pronouns in Tagalog should receive careful study, as they
exhibit several peculiarities of form and use not found in English.
All personal pronouns have two genitives, the first form being prefixed
to the accompanying noun or verb, and the second form suflSxed. The
two forms are not used in the same clause, the second form being preferred
with the definite form of the verb. However, if the sentence commences
with an adverb or negative particle, or is a question, the suffixed forms are
placed before the verb.
The first person plural, like nearly all Malayan and Melanesian lan-
guages, has two forms, the first corresponding to "we" in a general sense,
and including those spoken to, while the second form, like the editorial
** we," excludes the person or persons addressed. There are also two
dual forms, which may be translated **thou and I." These dual forms
have the same meaning, the first form, kitdy being more general and used
in Manila, Rizal, Laguna, Batangas, and Tayabas, while the second form,
katdf is found in Bulacan, Nueva Ecija, and the Tagalog-speaking parts of
Pampanga and Tarlac. Bataan probably follows Bulacan in style, while
in Cavite the usage is like that of Manila, etc.
In the use of the personal pronouns together, a very different order is
observed from English. The Tagalog order is '*I (we), thou (you), and
he, she (they),'* ignoring the European custom of mentioning the listener
first, the absent or third person next, and the speaker last. The Tagalog
says *'I and vou, **I and John," and with the further peculiarity that
he literally pluralizes the first pronoun and gives the pronoun or noun
following its genitive form in the correct number. The examples will
explain the matter more clearly.
The use of the word **it" is avoided by spjeakers of Tagalog. It is only
used when objects are personified, as in stories, etc. See example.
FIRST PERSON SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen.
Othercases.
Of me; my.
To, for, with, by me.
Ak6.
Akin (prefix)
Sa dkm.
ko (suffix).
INCLUSIVE FIRST PERSON PLURAL.
Nom. We (and you).
Gen. Of us; our (and your).
Othercases. To, for, etc., us (and
you).
Tayo.
Atin (prefix); naiin (suffix).
Sa atin.
Digitized by
Google
86
TAGALOO LANOUAOE.
EXCLUSIVE FIRST PERSON PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Other cases.
We (not you).
Of us; our.
To, for, etc., us.
Kami.
Amin (prefix); namin (suffix).
Sa amin.
FIRST PERSON DUAL.
Southern fonn. Northern form.
Nom. We (thou and I). Kitd. Katd,
Gen. Of us (we two); our. Kanitd(p,);ta(a.), Atd(p.);ta(8.).
Other cases. To, for, etc., us ( we two). Sa kanita. Sa cm.
SECOND PERSON SINGULAR.
Nom. Thou (you).
Gen. Of thee, thy (your).
Other cases. To, for, etc., thee.
Ikdo (prefix); ka (suffix).
Iy6 (prefix); mo (suffix).
Sa iyi.
The singular forms are still used in Tagalog, and when respect is intended,
instead of using the plural, as in English, or the third person singular, as
in Spanish, the particle pd is suffixed. The plural, also with p6y is used
in Manila in many cases, but may be said to be an imitation of the Spanish
vo8otro8 (ye).
SECOND PERSON PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Other cases.
Nom.
Gen.
Other
Nom.
Gen.
Other cases.
You.
Of you; your.
To, for, etc., you.
Kay6.
Inyd (prefix); ninyd (suffix).
Sa inyd.
THIRD PERSON SINGULAR.
He, she.
Of him; of her; his; her.
To, for, etc., him, her.
SiyA.
Kaniyd (prefix); niyd (suffix).
Sa kaniyd.
THIRD PERSON PLURAL.
They.
Of them; their.
Them (to, for, etc.).
Sild.
KanUd (prefix ) ; nild ( suffix ) .
Sa kanild.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
These are the same as the genitive
generally preceded by the article ang.
the variations:
My child.
Thy child.
His (or her) child.
Our (of we two) child.
Our children (all of us).
Our child (excluding person spoken
to).
Your child.
Their child.
of the personal pronouns and are
The following examples will show
{Ang dking anak.
Ang anak ko.
iAng iyong anak.
yAng anak mo.
jAng kaniyang anak.
\Ang anak niyd.
lAng kanitang anak. Ang aiang anak.
\Ang anak ta. Ang anak ta.
(Ang aling mangd anak.
yAng mangd anak natin.
jAng aming anak.
\Ang anak namin.
(Ang inyong anak.
^Ang anak ninyd.
iAng kanilang anak.
\Ang anak nUd.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 87
The genitive forms of the personal pronouns used without a following
noun are expressed with the article prefixed to the first genitive:
Mine. Aiig dHn.
Thine (yours). Angiyd.
His; hers. Any kaniyd.
Ours. Ang atin \ incl. ) ; ang amin ( excl ) .
Yours. ^ Ang inyd.
Theirs. ' Ang kanild.
The oblique cases with sa and the article also express this idea in Taga-
log; as, Mine, Ang sa dkin.
Examples of two pronouns, or a pronoun with a noun:
He and I (lit. "we of him'*). Kami niyd.
He and his father (they and his Sild nang kaniyang amd,
father).
John and I (we of John). Kami ni Juan.
You and they (you of them). Kay 6 nild.
You and we (we of you). Kami ninyd.
In Manila and large towns these forms are dying out of use, the Spanish
style being used; as, John and I (Si Juan at ako).
To avoid the use of siydy **it,** to indicate an inanimate object, the word
itself is repeated, or in answering a question a particle like nga (certainly)
is used. Ex. : ^Mabati bagd ang lakatdn [a species of banana]? (Is the
lakatan good?) Mahuti nga (Certainly [it is] good).
The third person plural is used to indicate great respect for a person,
coupled with p^, and for still greater respect the word kamahalan (ex-
cellency) is used. Your excellency (Ang inyong kamahalan).
THE AFFIRMATIVE PARTICLES.
This name is applied to several adverbs, and also to some words which
by themselves have no signification, which, added to pronouns, give them
an intensive or indefinite meaning. The following are the ones most gen-
erally used. None begin a sentence except kayd.
Self; selves. Din. (i^inafter preceding vowel.)
Perhaps. Bagd. ( Generalljr with i ndef . verb. )
Perhaps; for that Kayd. (May begin sentence.)
Also. Man.
Also. Man din. (Southern Tagalog only.)
Now. Na. (No meaning alone. )
Certainly. ifga.
Certainly. ffgani. (Southern Tagalog; Bicol,
gflani. )
Yet. Pa.
Actually! Is that so! Paid. (Idea of wonder inherent.)
At; in; to; for, etc. Sa. (Greatly used word.)
Own. Sarin.
Enough now; plenty. Siyd na.
Ex.: Ak6 rin; akd man (I myself). Siyd nga{hef certainly). Ikdo man
(you also). Ang mrili kong cabayo (my own norse). 06 nga (yes, cer-
tainly). Hindt nga (nOy indeed) .
The particle man attached to an interrogative pronoun converts the lat-
ter into an indefinite pronoun. Ex.: Anoman (anything; something).
Alinman (whichever; whatever). Sinoman (whoever). Sinomang tduo
(anyone whomsoever).
These particles follow the monosyllabic pronouns, but precede the pro-
nouns of more than one syllable, unless the latter begin the sentence, in
which case the particle follows, as with a monosyllabic pronoun.
Digitized by
Google
38 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Besides anoman, alinman^ and sinomarif there are several words which
may be used at times as indefinite pronouns, and at other times with
adverbial force. One of these is bdlang^ which can be used for **8ome, any,
and each/' Ex.: B&Umg drao (someday). Anghdlang tduo (any man).
Sa bdlang M (for each one).
The numeral isd (one), prefixed to words like drao (day), and tduo
(man) gives the idea of "one day; a certain man,'' etc. It is also used
with demonstrative pronouns as follows: /ton^ M (this one); diydnsaisd
(to that other); do6n «a wd (to that other yonder). lad may be said to
mean "other" among a few persons or objects, and the word ibd to desig-
nate "other" among many. Ibang tduo (another man completely) ; ibang
bdgay (another thing entirely).
Tanan, dilariy and paita mean everyone, "all" (persons). "AH" (the
adjective) is lahat.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
These pronouns, which in English are expressed by "which," "that,"
* * who, ' ' etc. , are expressed very obscurely inTagalog by means of the article
angy and the ties </, ng^ and na. The Tagalog also has a negative relative
pronoun dt, translated by "who not," "which not," "that not." Ex.:
He who is well behaved is esteemed by all. Aug mabuting dsal ay minama-
hal nang lahat.
The book which you are reading is mine. Ang librong binabasa md'y dkin,
I did not receive the letter that you sent Dt ko tinangap ang adlat na ipi-
to me. nadald mo sa dkin.
The man who does not disobey the laws Ang tduong dt mmasaJansang
will be protected in his rights. ipagtatangol nang katuiran.
The phrase "each other" is expressed by the particle iiagka or magka^
together with the appropriate noun or pronoun. Ex.: Do they under-
stand each other? ^Nagkakaalam slid (from alam)?.
The principal diflaculty the student of Tagalog will experience here will
be in the use of the exclusive and inclusive forms of the first person plu-
ral. The dual forms are little used in the nominative, but are quite fre-
quently heard in the oblique and accusative cases. As has been remarked,
these exclusive and inclusive forms are to be found in nearly all the
Malayan languages, while in some of the allied Melanesian tongues, such
as that of Fiji, the second and third persons have not only a dual, but a
triple form, in addition to the ordinary plural. The Fijian first person has
also the dual and triple forms, each of which are divided into an inclusive
and exclusive form.
Section Three.
As has been previously explained, Tagalog root words may be used as
nouns, verbs, 'adjectives, and adverbs in many cases, either by the context
or particles afl&xed or suffixed. Naturally the noun is generally the sim-
plest form, especially the concrete noun, but secondary or derivative
nouns may be quite complicated in their construction. The noun is inva-
riable in form, number being expressed by the word mangdy or such words
as "all," " many," etc., for the plural. Cases are expressed by the article
or prepositions, and no gender is known. A great many common nouns
in Tagalog are derived from the Spanish, a few from Chinese, and some
from Arabic and Sanskrit sources. All Tagalog nouns may be used with
the article.
The words for meals and some articles of food, cooking utensils, etc.,
vegetables, and fruits not previously mentioned are:
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LAirOUAOE.
39
Ang ahnusal (Sp., almueno) .
Angtanghcdian (ianghaMy midday ) .
Angminindal (Sp., merienda).
Ang hiipunan (hapon, afternoon).
Ang ulam (Sp., manda).
Ang BobAo.
Ang patis.
Ang sausauan. {Sumanson means to
dip any viand into liquid. The
word "chowchow," so often
heard, is Cantonese or Hongkong
" pigeon English '' for food. )
Ang achara (Sp.y achm^ from Hin-
dustani, achdr, pickles).
Ang inihao. ( ifmihao means " to
roast or bake".)
Ang mangd hita nang palakd.
Lamdn nang biih
Lamdn nang usd.
Lamdn nang babuy dam 6; lamdn nang
pagil.
Ang labuyo.
Ang Uik,
Papan,
Ang gansd (Sansk., haffiMf not from
Sp. gansa^ a goose).
Ang pavo real (Sp. ).
Ang pavo (SpA
Ang kalupati (Sansk. pardpdtl; old
Tag., palomili).
Ang batobato muirii,
Ang balombalonan (from balon^ a
well; dim.).
Ang atay,
Ang puso.
Ang dalag (commonest fish in Luzon ;
Ophioeephalus) .
The following fish are much eaten in Luzon, and, having no English
names, the Spanish names are given instead:
Breakfast.
Midday meal.
Afternoon lunch.
Supper.
Meat or fish.
Broth.
Salted fish sauce.
Salty or sour sauce.
Pickles (bamboo sprouts, etc.).
Roasted or baked meat or fish (what
baked or roasted).
Fr(^' legs.
Sucking pig.
Venison.
Wild pork.
The jungle fowl.
The duck.
The tree duck (Dendrocygna),
The goose.
The peacock.
The turkey.
The pigeon.
The dove.
The gizzard.
The liver.
The heart.
The mudfish; walking fish.
The pampano {Scatophagus).
The sdbalo (Caranx).
The corvina (Osteochilus).
The liza.
The boca-dulce.
The sea products eaten are:
The oyster.
The shell of a clam, etc.
The lobster.
The crab.
The small crab.
The shrimp.
Vegetables.
The moneo.
The radish.
The eggplant.
Ang kiiang (best fish in Luzon).
Ang bangos (large fish, common).
Ang apdhap.
Ang bdnak.
Ang mamcdi.
Ang talabd.
Ang kabibi. (Macabebe is said to
mean "Where there are clams,"
Pampangan dialect. )
Ang ulang.
Ang alimango.
Ang alimasag.
Anghipon, (^i/aran^r-Ziipon, village,
norttieast of Manila, "shrimp-
drying place.")
Ang gulay.
Ang baldiong.
Ang labands (Sp., rabano).
Ang iaiong.
Digitized by
Google
40
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The gabe root.
The peanut.
The lomboy (fruit).
The guayava.
The lime.
The apple.
The watermelon.
The cook.
The kitchen (cooking place).
Crumbs; scraps.
The dining room.
The fireplace.
Earthen cooking pot (medium size).
Small earthen pot.
Large earthen pot.
The frying pan.
The gridiron (broiler).
The pitcher.
Earthen pitcher.
The bowl.
The jug.
The saltcellar.
The i>ot cover.
The sieve.
The bamboo tray.
The basket.
The fire.
The smoke.
The firewood.
Ang gabi.
Ang manly Arawak (West Indian)
word.
Ang diihat.
Ang bayabas,
Ang ddyap.
Ang iruxnsana» (8p., manzana).
Ang pakudn.
Ang taga pangosina.
Ang pinaglulutoan (from lutb^ cook-
Munio.
Ang silid na kakandn.
Ang kaldn; ang dapog.
Ang palayok.
Ang anglit,
Ang kating-an.
Ang kawali.
Ang ihaoan (from umihaoy to roast).
Ang bangd; ang galong.
Ang tdbu.
Ang mankok.
Ang saro ( Sp. , jarro ) .
{Ang jmlaasinan (from oMn^ salt).
Ang souik (without cover).
Ang tuntong.
Ang bithay.
Ang bildo.
Ang bdkol.
Ang apuy.
Ang as6 ( accent distinguishes from
a80y dog).
Ang kdhoy nang pangatong.
The names for parts of a house, household furniture and articles, and
ordinary tools, are given in the following list. Many of these names are
borrowed from the Spanish language:
The house.
The room.
The bathroom.
The water-closet.
The door.
The doorway.
The window.
The ladder (stairway).
The step (round of ladder).
The balcony.
The post or pillar.
The kitchen platform.
The roof.
The gable.
The gutter pipe.
The corner.
The window sill.
The balustrade.
Ang bdhay (possibly Sansk., valaya,
an inclosure, through Malay, bdlei^
hall, court; but the Hawaiian is
hahy and there are similar words
in other Polynesian dialects).
Ang silid.
Ang paliguan ( lit. , * * bathing place' ' ) .
Ang cumdn (Sp. word).
Angpintd.
Angpintoan.
Ang linib; ang durungauan (from
dungaOy to appear at the window);
ang bintana (Sp.).
Ang hagddn.
Ang baitang.
Ang tanauan (lit.,
Ang haligi.
Ang bataldn.
Ang bubong.
Ang balisbxsan.
Ang alolod.
Ang sulok.
Ang palababahdn.
Ang guyabndn.
'watch to wer'M
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOQ LANGUAGE.
41
The proj) (against winds).
The partition ( wall ) .
The household furniture.
The chair.
The table.
The clothes press (or cupboard).
The bed.
The quilt.
The pillow.
The head (of abed).
The mosquito net.
The wash basin.
The water.
The soap.
The towel.
The tooth brush (foreign).
The tooth brush (native).
The clothes brush.
The pail or bucket.
The night vessel.
The trunk.
The valise.
The key.
The padlock.
The lock.
Thread.
The needle.
The pin.
Silk thread.
The scissors.
The thimble.
The eyeglasses or spectacles.
The picture; image.
The household shrine.
Wick for cocoanut-oil lamp.
Cocoanut-oil lamp.
The lamp (old name).
Matches.
Fire-making sticks.
The flint.
The steel.
The tinder.
Rice mill (hand).
The rice mortar.
The rice pestle.
The small mortar.
The small pestle.
The broom.
The mop (cloths).
The razor.
The sadiron (flatiron).
Ang sUfiay.
Ang dingding.
Ang kasankapan sa bdhay.
Ang uupdn (from umupdf to sit
down).
Ang lamesa (Sp., we«a).
Ang dmpanan.
Ang pdpag; ang cama (Sp.).
Ang k&moL
Ang Unan.
Ang olohdn; ang olondn,
Ang kuUambd.
Ang hilamusan.
Ang tubig.
Ang sabon (Sp., jab&n).
Ang balindang.
Ang cepillo nang ngipin {cepiUOf Sp.
for ** brush'').
Ang sipan.
Ang cepillo nang damit,
Ang tlmbd.
Angihidn; ang orinola (Sp.).
Ang cabdn.
Ang tampipi; ang takbd.
Ang susi (Chinese, sosi).
Ang candiido (Sp. word).
Ang cerradura (Sp. word).
Sinulid (spun, from sdlidy spin).
Ang kardyom,
Ang oJBpiler ( Sp. , alJUer ) .
Sinuliana sutld (Sansk., 90ira),
Ang gunting.
Ang dedal (Sp. word).
Ang salamin sa matd.
Ang larauan.
Ang altar sa bdhay.
Ang tinsim (from Chinese tientsim),
Ang tinghoy (from Chinese).
Ang Bombo; ang simbo {liaodn now
used).
Apuyan; posporos (Sp.,/(5»/oro«).
Ang puyosan (similar to those of
North American Indians).
Angpingkian; ang pantingan (local).
Ang binalon.
Ang lulog.
Ang gilingdn (from gilingf to grind).
Ang lusong (said to be origin of
** Luzon," but improbable).
Ang halo.
Ang lusonglusonpan.
Ang kamay (lit., *' the hand" or
*'arm").
Ang waits ( verb walls means " to re-
move").
Ang pangoskos.
Ang pangdhit (from dhity to shave;
also called ang labasa^ from Sp.
navaja^ razor).
Ang prinsa (Sp., la prensa, the
Digitized by
Google
42
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The tongs.
The balance.
The hook.
The clothesline.
The tablecloth.
The gaff (used in cock fighting).
The bird whistle.
The rope.
The twine.
Chinese twine.
The wire.
The chain (iron or gold, etc.) .
Yard (of house).
Garden.
Plant (any sown plant except rice).
The hoe.
The sickle.
The shovel.
The spade.
The pincers (small).
The vise.
The wrench.
The saw.
The hammer.
The hatchet.
The ax.
The plane.
The chisel.
The auger.
The gimlet.
The file.
The wood turner.
The anvil.
The stake.
The pulley.
The lever.
The adze.
The rule.
The pick.
The painter's or carpenter's scaffold.
The plow.
The beam.
The plowshare.
The guiding cord.
The yoke.
The rice field.
Ang sipiL
Ang timbangan (from timbanqf a
weight); also ang tcUard (local
wora).
Ang pangalduit.
Angsampayan (from sampay^ to hang
out clothes).
Ang mantel (Sp. word).
Ang tdri.
Ang pangall (used to lure or decoy
birds).
Ang liXbid,
Ang pisi,
L'eteng.
Ang kauad; ang kauar (rare).
Ang tanikcUd (old word, talikald).
Bahayan ( lit. , * * house place " ) .
Halamanan (lit, ** plant place").
Halaman.
Ang asarol.
Ang kdrit.
Ang panalok (from salokf to stir up).
Angpala (Sp. word).
Ang Hani (Chinese word).
Ang gato (Sp. word).
Angpamihit nang tomillo [\it.y * * screw
turner").
Ang lagari.
Ang pamdkpok (from pokpoky to
strike) .
Ang puthao.
Ang palakol.
Ang katam.
Ang pait,
Ang pangbutas,
Ang pusod.
Ang Hkil,
Ang lalikdn,
Ang palihan,
Ang tulo8.
Ang kal6,
Ang panghikuat.
Ang dards.
Ang pan'dkat (from «ito, to meas-
ure).
Ang piko (Sp.,pico).
Ang palapala,
{Ang araro (Sp., arado).
Ang sudfmd.
Ang ugit.
Ang »dyud (also means "fine
comb").
Ang pamitik (from pitikj to snap with
a line).
Ang padd.
Ang palaydn.
Practically all names connected with horses are Spanish, as that animal
was introduced by the Spaniards, and the Spanish terms are understood
throughout the Tagalog region. The following words, however, are useful
in connection with feeding animals:
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
43
Forage; grass.
Rice and rice straw.
Molasses (also honey).
Shed; shelter.
Stable with peaked roof.
SaccUe; damd (Sp., zacaie).
Palay,
Pulot (much fed to native ponies).
Tayakad.
Barongbarong.
Nearly all names of edifices are also Spanish, but a few are native, or
have been invented from other words. Among them are:
Ang simbahan (from simha^to hear
mass; samha^ to adore or worship).
Ang tribunal (Sp. word).
{Ana esciiela (Sp. word).
Bdhay nang araldn (from dral, to
teach; to learn).
Ang kamdlig
Angbigamn (from bigdSy hulled rice).
Ang alilisan.
Ang alakdn (from alak^ wine).
Ang apugan (from dpug, lime).
Ang aampa; ang kubu; ang saumig
(mountain term).
Ang campo santo ( Sp. ) ; ang libingan
(Tagalog word also means
"grave'').
Angsabungan (from mbung^ to fight
with gamecocks. )
Ang langsangan.
Ang ddan.
Ana ladnds; agtds (narrow trail).
Bolaos; onog; bagnios,
Ang pUdpU.
Ana bukirdn; ang hacienda (Sp.).
Tubigan (from tdbigy water).
Ang tulay,
Ang ttday na kawayan.
Ang tnbohdn (from <u6<5, sugar cane).
Ang bukid.
Ang padalnyan.
Ang hilangiian, ( Bilibid is the Manila
prison only. )
Ang bantayan (from bantay^ guard) .
Ang iatagudn.
Ang pangdo.
Ang sunog.
Ang alipato,
Ang si^d.
Ang nidgan.
Ang karurukan.
Ang labangdn,
Ang sahig.
Words pertaining to the office are generally Spanish, although a few
are used of native origin. The most useful are:
The church.
The townhall.
The schoolhouse.
The warehouse.
The rice mill (water or steam
power).
The sugar mill.
The distillery.
The limekiln.
The hut.
The cemeterv.
The cockpit.
The street.
The road.
The trail or path.
Trail (of animal).
The dvke.
The plantation.
Irrigated land.
The bridge.
The bamboo bridge.
The sugar-cane field.
The field; the country.
The ditch.
The jail or prison.
The guardhouse or sentry box.
The asylum.
The stocks.
The fire (conflagration).
The spark.
The bonfire (signal fire).
The cocoanut grove.
The corral or mclosure.
The manger.
The floor.
Office.
Desk (writing).
Book.
Library.
Letter.
Pen.
Opisina ( Sp. , oficina) .
Sulatdn; escritorio (Sp. ).
Libra (Sp.).
Biblioteca (Sp.).
SMai (from Arabic s'urat, a chapter
of the Koran).
Panulat; pluma (Sp.).
Digitized by
Google
44
TAOALOO LANQUAOE.
Pencil.
Lapis; l&piz (Sp.).
Ink.
Tinta (Sp.).
Red Ink.
Tintang puld.
Mail.
\Padalahan (from rfa/a, to carry).
\Correo (Sp.).
Post-office.
Administracidn de correos (Sp.).
Letter carrier.
Magdadald nangstUat; cartero (Sp.).
Telegraph office.
Esiacidn de teltgrafoR (Sp. ).
Telegram.
TeUgrama (Sp. ).
Messenjrer (orderly).
Sugo; Ordenama (Sp.).
M&quina de escribir (Sp.).
Typewriter.
Paper (in general).
Papel (Spanish heavy paper, papel
debarba).
Blotting sand (fine).
Margaha (Sp., common sand is bu-
hangin. Tag.).
Blotting paper.
Papel secante (Sp.).
The globe (world).
Ang sansinukuban ; sandaigdigan.
The earth (ground).
Ang lupa.
The mountain.
Ang bundoh
Mountain country.
Ang kabundukan.
The precipice.
The hill.
Ang bangin.
Ang burol; gulod.
The crack; crevice.
Ang bitak.
The cave.
Ang lungd; ang yungib.
The wilderness.
Ang ilang.
The hole.
Ang butas.
The prairie; pasture, meadow.
The forest; timber.
Ang pdrang.
Ang gubat.
The bush; the brush.
Ang damuhan.
The bamboo thicket.
Ang kawayandn.
The reedy ground.
Ang katalabahdn.
The rocky place (quarry).
The thorn bush.
Ang batohan.
Ang katimkan.
The muddy country.
Ang kaputxkan ( from pTutik^ mud).
The spring.
Ang bukal nang tubig.
The stream; brook.
Ang batis.
The river.
Ang ilog.
Ang hold.
Source of river.
The bank.
Ang pungpang.
Bank of river or seashore.
Ang dalampdsig.
The pool.
Ang danao (danum^ water in Pam-
pango, Ilocano, etc.).
Ang sdlog (sdlog, river in Bicol) .
The pond.
The swamp; slough.
Ang latl; ang labdn {Malabdn,
The ravine or gulch.
Tidewater creek.
Deep (unfordable) river.
The depth.
The shallowness (of river)
The ferry.
The ferryboat or raft.
The bend (of river).
Hole (in river).
The waterfall.»
The whirlpool.
The bottom (of river).
Muddy bottomed.
swampy place).
Ang Hat.
Sapa (Sp., estero).
Ilog na maldlim.
Ang kalaliman. •
Ang mababao na ilog ( also * * ford' * ) .
Ang tawiran.
Ang tabdo.
Ang likd (also * * curve ' ' ) .
Lungd (also **cave*').
Ang tal6n nang tiibig.
Ang ulxuli; ang ipuipu; ang alimpuyd,
Ang ildlim nang ilog.
Ang ildlim nang ilog na putikan.
a The most famous Tagalog region waterfall is that of Botokan, near Majayjay, La
Laguna Province.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
45
Gravelly or rocky bottom.
Sandy bottomed.
Steep bank.
Low bank.
The landing place.
The current.
Strong current.
Weak current.
Very weak current.
Place where there is a strong cur-
rent.
The mouth (of a river).
Ang ildlim nang Uog na baiofuin,
Ang ildlim nang Hog na huhanginan.
Pangpang na matarih
Pangpang na mababd.
Ang dalampagigan,
AY\g ago8.
Maagos.
Mahinang agos.
Maiining agos.
Agumn.
Ang wawa (also **bar." Sabang
means ** mouth*' also; Bicol '*«a-
bang'').
Tagalog is rich in nautical terms, the principal ones being as follows:
The high sea; ocean.
The sea (in general).
Lake ( large) .
Lakelet.
Everything in the sea.
The seas themselves.
Warm water.
Salt water.
Fresh water.
The coast (sea or lake).
The reef.
The sunken rock.
The port; anchorage; landing place.
The bar.
The channel.
The light-house.
The cape; point.
The island.
The gulf.
The bay.
The wave.
The tide.
High tide.
Ebb tide.
The strait.
Ang Idot (Malay, laut).
Ang ddgat.
Dagaian.
Dagatdagatan.
Sandagalan.
Karagatan (singular in Tagalog).
D. toR.
Malaragat. D. to R.
TMibig na dlai.
Tdbig na iabang.
Ang bay bay,
Ang bankota,
Ang bato sa ddgat.
Ang dodngan (also dalampasigan) .
Ang wawa (also "mouth of a river" ).
Ang canal (Sp. word).
Ang jmrol (from Sp., /aro).
Ang Longos; ang Tanguay is Cavite
Point only).
AngpiUo,
Angwald.
Ang look,
Ang alon.
Ang alagouak (rare) ; ang vxarea (Sp.
word) .
Ang laki.
Ang kati.
Ang kitid.
The principal terms for the heavenly bodies, divisions of time, points of
the compass, and meteorological phenomena are as follows:
The sun; the day.
The moon; the month.
The year.
One year.
Every year.
Each year.
Monthly.
New moon.
Full moon.
Old moon.
Ang drao. ( Bayan is a rare word for
"day." Ex;: maldlim ang bayan,
midday or a great day.)
Ang budn.
Ang tadn.
Sangtadn,
Taontadn.
Manadn; mamanadn.
Buangbudn,
Bagong budn.
{Kabilugan nang budn.
Palabang budn (rare).
{Kamatayan nang budn,
Bugtong (rare).
Digitized by
Google
46
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
Time.
The star.
Venus; the evening star.
The Pleiades; the seven stars.
The morning star.
The shooting star.
The comet.
The sky.
The break of day.
The dawn.
The morning.
Midday.
Afternoon (evening).
Night.
The daylight; sunlight.
Moonlight.
To-morrow.
Yesterday.
Day before yesterday.
A few days ago.
After a while.
(Three) days ago.
(Ten) days ago.
One week.
Every week, weekly (adv.).
Ang drao,
Aug bituin.
Tanglao dagdl (lit., "light of the
sea").
Mapolon,
Ang tola,
Ang huUdakao.
Ang bituin may buntot.
Ang langit.
Ang liwayway.
Ang madcUing drao.
Ang umaga; aga.
Ang tanghali (Malay, tdngdh-ari),
Ang Kapon.
Ang gam.
Ang sinag nang drao.
Ang sinag nang budn.
BUkas.
Kahapon.
Kamakalaud.
Kamakail&n.
Mamayd-maya.
Kamakatatlo.
Kamakapouo. (Kamaha expresses
"days ago."
Isang lingo (corruption of Sp., Do-
mingo, Sunday).
Lingollngo.
The names of the days are Spanish, Sunday being called Lingo, corrupted
from Domingo. Lingo is also used for "week." The word "minute" is
also taken from Spanish, and the word for hour is a corruption of the
Spanish word hora. The names of the months, days, and other divisions
of time from Spanish are given below for convenience of the student.
January.
February.
March.
April.
M!ay.
June.
July.
August.
September.
October.
November.
December.
The month of January.
Sunday.
Monday.
Tuesday.
Wednesday.
Thursday.
Friday.
Saturday.
The beginning.
The middle.
The end.
The hour.
Watch; clock.
Half hour.
Minute.
Enero.
Febrero.
Marzo.
Abril.
Mayo.
Junio.
Julio.
Agosto.
Septiembre.
Octubre.
Noviembre.
Didembre.
Ang buang enero.
Lingo (from Sp., domingo).
Lunes.
Maries.
Miercoles.
Jueves.
Viemes.
Sdbado.
Ang muJd.
Ang pagitan.
Ang katapusan; ang hangdn,
Ang oras (from Sp., hora).
Orasdn.
Kalahating oras.
Minuto. (Sp. word).
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LANOnAQE.
47
Second.
The dry season.
The wet season.
The daylight.
The darkness.
The north.
The east.
The south.
The west»
The northeast wind.
Wind or air.
The weather.
Reasonableness.
The heat.
The cold.
The earthquake.
The dew.
The earth smell.
The mist or fog.
The cloud.
The rain.
The drizzle.
A hard shower.
The inundation (flood) •
The rainbow.
The lightnine flash.
The thunderbolt.
The thunder.
The storm.
The hurricane; typhoon.
The cyclone; tornado.
The tempest.
The whirlwind.
The ice.
The hail.
Heavy rain cloud.
The snow.
Segundo (Sp. word).
Ang tagdrao (from drao^ sun).
Ang taauldn (from uldn, rain).
Ang kalivHinagan (from liwanag,
light; Ilocano, Laoag^ capital of
Ilocos Norte), noun.
{Ang kadilimdn (from dUinif dark),
noun.
Ang karUimdn. (D. to R.)
Ang hilaga (also "the north wind ** ).
Ang silanganan (lit, ** rising place,"
sun, etc.).
Ang habdgat (also "the south wind' M.
Ang kalunuran (from lunod, drown).
Ang amihan,
Ang hangin,
Ang panahdn,
Kapanahonan; also musin. (Kapn-
nahonan also means "opportu-
nity,** in some cases.)
Ang (nit. Heat ( abstract ) , Kainitan .
Ang lamig. Cold (abstract), kalami-
gan.
Ang lindol.
Ang hamog,
Ang alimodm. (Smell of earth after
rain. )
Ang iilap,
Ang alapadp.
(^Rare words arelauiingay
a little rain; lawa-
lauUf a drizzle; anuta^
moderate steady rain ;
iikaiiky ^ntle, contin-
uous ram, and lonrak,
a rain with great
drops.
Isang bugsd nang uldn,
Ang bahd,
Ang hahag?tari (lit, "the king's
sash").
Ang kidkU,
Ang lintik,
Ang kuiog,
Ang onds.
Ang baayd.
Ang bohaui,
Ang sigwd,
Ang ipoipo.
Ang hielo (Sp. word. Also tubig
na batd malamig or "cold-stone
water.")
Anggranizo(Sp. word; rare in Philip-
pines).
Ang godt (rare).
Ang nieve (Sp. word; known from
books only).
Ang tUdn.
Ang ambdn.
a As the Tagalogs were originally sea rovers, the heavenly bodies sunk in the sea to
them, so they say, the "drowning place" for the west.
Digitized by
Google
48
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Navigation was considerably developed by the Tagaloffs prior to the
arrival of the Spaniards, and a considerable maritime vocabulary developed.
The words in ordinary use are:
The vessel.
The sail.
The art of sailing; navigation.
Anyone aboard.
Sailor; mariner.
Pilot.
The rudder.
The compass.
The mast.
The yard.
The outrigger.
The bow.
The stem.
The boat pole.
The paddle.
The paddler.
The oar.
The oarsman; rower.
Paddling.
Rowing.
Sculling.
The cover (of boat or canoe).
The canoe.
The prau.
Political and natural subdivisions are as follows, in so far as they pertain
to social relations:
Ang aamkydn,
Aug Idyag.
Ang paglaldyaa.
Ang sakay (formerly "oarsman/*
**paddler'').
Tagaragat (lit., **sea dweller").
Malim (Arabic) ; prdctico (Sp.) .
Ang ugit.
Ang brdjtUa (Sp. ).
Ang polo (Sp. word); ang sundortg
(rare).
Ang batangan (Batangas Province).
Ang katig,
Ang do6ng.
Ang hull nang sasakydn.
Ang tikin.
Ang sagwdn.
Ang mananagwdn (S. to N.); (Fil.
Sp., banquero).
Ang gdod.
Ang mangagdod.
Ang pagsagwdn.
Ang pag-gaod.
Ang pagliuliu (Chinese word, /iu).
Ang karang»
Ang bangka,
Ang parao.
The Philippine Islands.
The Visayan Archipelago.
The Tagalog country.
The Visayan region.
The province.
The jurisdiction (of a municipality,
township).
The court.
The town.
The town proper.
The fellow-townsman.
The house.
The neighbor.
The settlement; hamlet.
The barrio (ward).
The head man of a barrio.
The mayor; alcalde.
The secretary.
The treasurer.
Ang kapvluan Filipinos,
Ang kapvluan Bisayd.
Ang katagalugan.
Ang kabisayaan.
Ang lalatuigan (formerly this word
meant ** anchorage," **port").
Ang sdkop.
Ang hokoman (from hokom^ a judge;
Arabic hakim^ doctor, philoso-
pher, judge).
Anq bayan (including the rural bar-
rios) .
Anq kabayanan (excluding rural bar-
rios).
An'j kababayan.
Ang bdhay,
Ang kapidbdhay,
Angnayon (Sp., sitio).
Ang barangay (old word for vessel).
{Ang pulo nang barangay.
Ang cabeza nang barangay (Sp.
term).
Ang presidente; ang capitdn (Sp.).
Ang secretario sa bayan; ang kalihim.
(Lihim means *'a secret." )
Ang tesorero; ang taga inaat yaman
(lit., the ** wealth guarder").
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
4y
The chief of the town.
The upper part (of town, river,
country).
Ang sangunian bayan (old name for
the civic head of a town).
Ava ilaya (lower part of same is ang
ioabd).
The terms for metals, minerals, are mainly native, one or two having a
foreign origin. They are:
Gold.
Gintd.
Silver.
PUak (iromperak. Malayan).
Iron.
Bdkal.
Copper.
Tangsd,
Steel.
Patalim f from toZim, an edge).
Ang batdbcUani.
The loadstone (magnet).
I..ead.
Tingd (from Sanskrit, tivra, tin).
Tin.
Tingdputi (lit, '* white lead").
Mercury.
Azogue (Sp.).
Gold and copper (alloy).
Tumbaga (from baga, anything red-
hot; some say from Sansk. tdmra).
Lime.
Ivory.
Apog.
Oaring (Malay, gadding; orig.
Sanskrit.).
Whetstone.
Baiong tagisan.
Horn.
Sdngay,
Rust.
Kalauang.
Tortoise shell.
Kala.
Sulphur.
Sanyaua (rare); azufre (Sp.).
The ordinary terms used by fishermen are:
Fishing.
Ang mangisdd. (from isddj a fish).
Casual fisher.
Ang mamiminuit (from binuit^ a
hook).
Ang mangingudd.
The fisherman (trade).
The fish pole.
The fish line or line.
Ang baliwdsan.
Ang pisi.
The hook.
Ang tagd (large); ang binuit (small).
The bait.
Ang pain.
The net (small).
Ang dala.
The seine; large net.
Ang pdkot.
Ang baklad.
The fish trap.
Wicker basket for catching fish.
Ang bobo.
The arrow.
The bow.
Ang palaso; ang pand (Sansk, vdna.)
Ang bumg.
The principal parts of the human body, together with some terms for
animal bodies, are named as follows
The head.
Ang ulo.
The body, the person.
Ang katauan {trom taiioy human be-
ing, person).
The bone.
Ang but6.
The flesh.
Ang Imndn,
The blood.
Ang dugd.
The pulse.
Ang sanhL
The skin.
Ang balat.
The pore.
Ang kildbot nang balat.
The skull.
Ang bungd.
The brain.
Ang 'dtak.
The nerve.
Ang litid.
The vein.
Ang ugai.
The membrane.
Ang lamad.
The hair (of the head).
Ang buhok.
6855—06 i
Digitized by
Google
50
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Hair (pubic).
The crown of the head.
The temple.
The forehead.
The eyebrow.
The eyelid.
The eyelash.
The eye.
The pupil of the eye.
The white of the eye.
The tear duct
The nose.
The lip.
The mouth.
The chin.
The cheek.
The mustache.
The beard.
The tongue.
The ear.
The tooth.
The molar.
The gum.
The hard palate.
The soft palate.
The throat.
The larynx.
The lower jaw.
The stomach.
The intestine.
The anus.
The neck.
The nape of the neck.
The shoulder.
The shoulder blade.
The arm.
The hand.
The palm.
The linger.
The thumb.
The index finger.
The middle finger.
The ring finger.
The little finger.
The wrist.
The elbow.
The nail.
The knuckle.
The armpit.
The breast.
The bosom.
The rib.
Bulbul, (Body hair or festbers,
bcUahibo),
Ang bumbunan.
Ang pilipisan,
Ang noo,
AngWap.
Anff bubang nang matd (lit., the roof
of the eye).
Ang pilikmatd,
Ang maid.
Ang balintatdo,
Ang bilig nang maid,
Ang daloyan nang luha.
Ang Hong.
Ang labi (probably from Sp., labia ,
hp).
Ang bibig (Malay, bibir^ lip).
Ang baba (Sp., barba^ chin).
Ang pisngi.
Angbigote (Sp.; old word, misay).
Ang barbas (Sp.; old words, guml,
baang, yangot),
Ang dlla.
Ang taiiiga,
Ang ngipin.
Ang bagang.
Ang gUdgid.
Ang iTgalangald.
Ang gutil.
Ang lalamunan.
Ang gulung-guluiTgan (dim. of gu-
lungy a wheel).
Ang sihang.
Ang sikmura.
Ang biiuka.
Ang tumbong.
Ang liig.
Ang bdtok.
Ang halikat.
Ang Inddgat.
Ang baraso (from Sp., brazo).
Ang kamay (also ** arm '* ).
Ang pdlad nang kamay.
Ang daliri.
Ang hinlalaki.
Anghintuturd (from, tuturdf to point
to).
Ang data (the chief, datto; Malay,
datoh, grandfather).
Ang msuoiang singsing (from susuot^
to put on).
Ang kal'mgkingan.
Ang galanggalangan (from galangany
jewelry).
Ang siko.
Ang kukd.
Ang bukd nang daliri.
Ang kilikili
Ang dibdib.
Ang siifto.
Ang tadiang.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
51
The side.
The heart.
The lune.
The back.
The spine.
The thorax.
The abdomen.
The waist.
The umbilicus.
The lap.
The liver.
The gall bladder.
The kidney.
The bladder.
The womb (uterus).
The placenta.
The vulva.
The penis.
The testicle.
The groin.
The hip.
The buttock.
The thigh.
The leg.
The knee.
The calf.
The shin.
The foot.
The heel.
The ankle.
The shinbone; the tibia.
The sole of the foot.
Some of the ordinary diseases
follows:
The cholera.
The bubonic plague.
The smallpox.
Sickness (illness); pain.
The relapse.
The fever.
The chills.
The headache.
Blindness.
Deafness.
Lameness.
Dumbness.
Insanity.
Seasickness.
The cough.
The asthma.
The mumps.
The nosebleed.
Strangury.
Flatulency.
Ang tagiliran.
Any puso.
Ang bagd,
Ang likod.
Ang gulugod,
Ang tian,
Ang pusdn,
Ang bdywang.
Ang ptisod,
Ang kandungan.
Ang a toy.
Ang apdd,
Ang batd.
Ang pantog,
Ang bdJiay haUn (lit. , * *child house " ) .
Ang inHnan,
Ang puquL
Ang tilt
Ang bayag.
Ang singit,
Ang balakang.
Ang pigt
Ang hitd.
Ang bintt.
Ang tuhod,
Ang alak-alakdn.
Ang lolod.
Ang pad (Sansk., pada) .
Ang sdkong.
Ang biuikongbdkong.
Ang bias nana bintt
Ang talampakan.
known to the Tagalogs are named as
Ang cdlera (Sp. word).
Ang veste bubonica (Sp. word).
Ang ouhitovg,
Ang sakiL
Ang binat.
Ang lagnat (Sp., calentura),
Ang pangiki.
Ang sakit nang ulo.
Ang kabulagdn (from bvldg^ a blind
person).
Ang kabingihdn (from bingtj a deaf
person).
Ang kapilaydn (from pilay, a lame
person) .
Ang kapipihan (from pipi^ a dumb
person).
Ang kaololdn (from oldly an insane
person).
Ang kilo.
Ang ub6.
Ang hikd,
Ang biki.
Ang balinbdyngdy,
Ang balimoido,
Ang kdbag.
Digitized by
Google
52
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Ang pamamagd,
Aug latay.
Ang pulikaL
Ang sinok.
Ang lipak.
Ang kulugd.
Ang alipungd.
Ang sugat.
Ang kulani
Ang pigsd,
Ang nand.
Ang agihap,
Ang tagulahay,
Ang galis (Sp., sama).
The swelling; inflammation.
The discoloration; lividity.
The cramp.
The hiccough.
The corn.
The wart.
The foot-sore (similar to chilblains).
The wound or sore.
The inflammation of the lymphatic
glands.
The boil.
The pus.
The Aleppo button (ulcer).
The pimple.
The**dhobeitch.''
Articles of clothing have native names, as a whole, but many have also
been taken from other languages. The leading terms are:
The clothing; dress.
The style of dressing.
The hat.
The native helmet.
The coat; shirt.
The trousers.
The shoe.
The drawers.
The socks.
The stockings.
The slippers.
The skirt.
The underskirt.
The petticoat string.
The apron ; o verskirt.
The ruff; neckerchief.
The handkerchief.
The ribbon.
The mantilla.
The comb.
The fine comb.
The button.
The ring.
The earring.
The rosary (beads).
The scapular.
The fan.
The parasol.
The cane; staff.
The staff of office.
The pipe.
The native pipe (of leaves).
The coat of mail.
The breech-cloth; sash.
Ang da mil.
Ang pananamit (from damit). (D.
toN.)
Ang sombalih {irom Sp., sombrero^ a
hat).
Ang salakot.
Ang baro.
Ang salaudl (from seluar (Arabic),
trousers).
A ng mpin ( lit. , * * underfoot* ' ) .
Ang calzoncillos (Sp. word).
Ang calcetines (Sp. word).
Angmedias (Sp. word).
Ang sinelaa (Sp., chineUt).
Ang saya (Sp., say a).
A ng naguas ( Sp. , enagua ) .
Ang pamigkis.
Ang tapis.
Ang alampay.
Ang panyd (Mex. Span., pafiOy ban-
dana).
Ang listSn (Sp. word).
Ang lambong.
Ang suklay.
Ang suyod (also ** plowshare *').
Ang bttones (from Sp., botdn^ a but-
ton).
Ang singsing (Malay, chinchin),
Ang hikao,
Ang cumtds (fromSp., cuenta^ a bead
of the rosary).
Angcalmhi (from Carmen^ **Mt. Car-
mer').
Angpaypdy.
Ang pdyong.
Ang tungkod.
Ang bards (from Sp., vara, yard-
stick).
A ng kuako,
Ang patupaL
Ang baluti.
Ang bahag.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
53
The principal parts of trees, plants, etc., are named as below:
The tree.
The trunk.
The root.
The bud.
The flower.
The shoot; sprout.
The branch.
Lumber; wood; timber.
The leaf.
The bark.
The sap.
The fruit.
Ang kdhoy (also ** wood").
Aug puno.
Ang ugat.
Ang fmko (also the young cocoanut
fruit).
Ang bulaklak,
Ang usbong; ang labong,
Ang sangd,
Kdhoy.
Ang dahon.
Ang upak,
Ang gatas.
Ang hunga
areca palm).
{Gatas is also **milk*
(also used for fruit
The terms for cif<ar, cigarette, and tobacco are of Spanish origin, but the
practice of chewing betel nut, rolled with the leaf of the betel and spiced
with slaked lime, has given some native terms.
Ang hunaa (fruit of Areca catechu).
Ang itmo (leaf of Piper betel).
Ang dpog.
Ang hitsd.
Ang kallkut.
Ang apugan.
kiln.")
The following list of dignities, professions, and trades, etc., gives the
principal terms used by the Tagalog race:
The areca nut.
The betel leaf.
The lime (mineral) .
The **buyo" or chew.
The nutcracker (long).
The lime stick.
(Same word for **lime-
The President.
The governor-general.
The provincial governor.
The judge.
The Pope.
The archbishop.
The bishop.
The priest.
The general.
The colonel.
The lieutenant-colonel.
The major.
The captain.
The lieutenant.
The second lieutenant.
The sergeant.
The corporal.
The trumpeter (bugler).
The soldier.
The kine.
The noble.
The noblewoman.
The gentleman.
The lady.
The lawyer.
The doctor.
Ang Presidente sa AmSrica.
Ang gobemador-general.
Ang aobemador sa lalauiaan.
Ang hokom (Arabic word).
Ang papa (Sp. word).
Ang arzobispo (Sp. word).
Ang obtspo (Sp. word).
Ang pari (from Sp., padre, a priest).
Ang general ( Sp. ) . «
Ang coronet (Sp.).
Ang teniente coronet (Sp. ).
Ang comandante (Sp.) (also com-
manding officer) .
Ang capitan (Sp.).
Ang teniente (Sp.).
Ang alfhez.
Ang sargento (Sp.).
Ang cabo.
Ang corneta (Sp. ).
Ang sundalo.
Ang hart.
Ang gat (equal to Sp., Don) .
Ang day ang (equal to Sp., Dofla).
Ang magindo (eaual to op., Seflor).
Aug gindo (equal to Sp., Seflora).
Ang tagapagtangol (from tangol^ to
protect).
Ang mangagamot (from gamotj med-
icine").
a All military termf« are taken from Spanish, except a few like hokbd, army,
is true of naval terms.
The same
Digitized by
Google
54
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The merchant.
The seller.
The buyer.
The teacher.
The pupil.
The preacher.
The clerk.
The interpreter; translator.
The writer.
The reader ^professional).
The reader (casual).
The student.
The printer.
The chief; head; boss.
The partner.
The companion.
The carpenter (housebuilder).
The wood sawyer.
The tailor; dressmaker.
The shoemaker.
The butcher.
The field hand.
The sower.
The reaper (crop gatherer).
The day-laborer.
The metal founder.
The smith (any metal).
The maker of .
The potter.
The inventor.
The peddler.
The washerman or washer-woman.
The cook.
The salt maker.
The oil maker.
The weaver.
The dyer.
The house servant.
The collector.
Aug maiTgangcdakal (from kalahdy
business).
Ang tagapaghili (from maghiliy sell-
ing).
Ang tagapamili (from pamimiliy
buying).
Ang mangadral (from dral^ teach-
ing, etc.).
Angardlan{iTom dral, learning, etc. ).
Ang mangangdral (from dm/, teach-
ing, etc.).
Ang manunulat (from sulatj letter).
Aug daluhasa (from hnsay reading).
Ang mmugdlat (from sulat, letter).
Ang tagabasa (irova hasa, reading).
Ang bumabasa (from basoy reading).
Ang nagadral (from dralj learning,
etc.).
Ang manlUimbug (from limbagy
printing).
Ang phmkapuno (from pu7iOf trunk).
Ang kasama ( from sama, association ) .
A ng kasama ( from samay association ) .
Ang anloaaue
Ang manialagari (from lagarlf a
saw).
Ang mananaht (from tahi, sewing).
Anggumagawd nang 8apin{ from gawd^
to make).
Ang mamamaiay nang baca (from
palay, to kill).
Ang magmsaka (from saka^ to till).
Ang magtatanhn (from tanbuy to
sow).
Ang mangagapas (from gapas^ to
cut, reap).
Ang upahan (from upOy pay, salary).
Ang viagbububd (from buodj to cast
metals).
Angpanday (Sansk., panddy science,
Ang mangagawd nang (from
gawdy to make).
Ang magpapalayok (from palayoky a
jar).
Ang mapaglalang (from lalang, in-
vention).
A ng m ciglalako ( from lakOy to peddle ) .
Ang tagapaglaba (from Sp., lavai-y to
wash).
Ang tagapaglutd (from lutd to cook) .
Ang tagapangosina ( from Sp. , cocinay
kitchen) .
Ang viagaasin (from aainy salt).
Ang maglalangla (from langisy oil).
Ang manhahahi ( from habiy to weave.
Angmaninina (from tinay to dye).
Ang alila.
Ang tagapanuTgil (from aWjily to
collect, dun).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
55
The cashier; paymaster.
The hunter (professional).
The creditor.
The debtor.
The bearer.
The predecessor.
The successor.
The heir.
The grass cutter.
The nurse.
The wet nurse.
The midwife.
The pawnbroker.
The beggar.
The thief.
The slave.
A7ig tagapagbayad (from bayady to
pay a debt).
Ang mangangaso (from aso, a dog).
Ang pinagkakauiangan (from utang^
a debt).
Angmayutang (from utangy a debt).
Ang maydcdd (from rfa/d, to carry).
Ang hinalinhan (from Jialilif to fol-
low).
Ang kahalUi (from halilif to follow).
Ang magmamana (from mana, heir-
ship).
Ang magdadamd (from damdy grass,
herb).
Ang tagapagalaga (from cUagay to
care for).
Ang sisiwa.
Ang hilot
Ang mapagpatubd (from tubdf a
pledge).
Ang pulube.
Ang magnandkao (from nakdo, to
steal).
Ang alipin.
Section Four.
THE ADJECTIVE.
The adjective is a word used in a grammatical sense to qualify, limit, or
define a noun, or a word or phrase which has the value of a noun, and it
expresses quality or condition as belonging to something: Thus, "black-
ness'* is the name of a quality and is a noun; " black'* means jjossessing
blackness and so is an adjective. The adjective is used (1) attributively,
(2) appositively, and (3) predicatively. Examples, (1) **A good man,'*
(2) "A man good and great, (3) ** The man is good.**
Equally in Tagalog as in English, this is the meaning of the adjective,
and owing to the greater flexibility of the former the construction of such
words is much more clearly to be seen. Like English, some root words
are adjectives by intrinsic signification and may be called ** simple adjec-
tives.** Among the simple adjectives are bago (new), mahal (dear, precious,
noble), hdmak (vile), hunghan (foolish), tahlmik (quiet, tranquil), and
totdo (true). But the greater number of adjectives in Tagalog, as in Eng-
lish, are compounds formed from roots, which may be sometimes nouns,
bv means of prefixes, infixes, and suffixes like the English suffixes **ly,**
'*hke** "able,** etc., as in *' friendly,** *' childlike,*' "remarkable,** etc.
The ordinary particle in Tagalog used in the formation of adjectives is the
prefix may undoubtedly a contraction of ^nay, to have or possess, as there
are nouns with which may is still retained with the noun to form an adjec-
tive. Among such ma adjectives may be mentioned magandd (beautiful),
from ganddy the root expressing the idea of beauty or good appearance,
and marunong (wise), from diinongy the root expressing the idea of wisdom.
It will be observed that may like some other particles softens d to r when
d commences a word.
When prefixed to nouns denoting things which may be had or possessed,
ma denotes an abundance of whatever may be signified by the noun.
Examples: Si Juan ay magintd (John has much gold); maailid ang bdhay
(the house has many rooms).
The particle ma has at least nine other functions, which will be explained
in the appropriate places.
Digitized by
Google
56 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
May is used really as the verb "to have" in the phrase AWy may mkit
( I am sick [ill] , literall v, * * I have sickness or pain ' ' ) . In asking if a person
is ill or in pain the verb is sometimes reduplicated; e. g., May maysakit kaf
(Are you ill [or in pain]?).
Ma adjectives may be conjugated with the definite infix in to express
opinion; e. g., minamardnong koU6 (I think this is wise). Ma is redupli-
cated to express the present tense; mina'Himmg ko U6 would mean "I
thought this was wise."
Conjugated with the indefinite particle mag {nag in present tense), the
adjective assumes a verbal form, with the implied idea of boasting or pre-
tending what may be signified by the root; as, nagmamarunong si Felipe
(Philip boasts of being wise); naamamagandd d Loleng (Dolores [Lola]
pretends to be beautiful). The idea may also be conveyed by '* believes
himself" (or ** herself"), what may be denoted by the root; e. g., **Lola
believes herself to be beautiful."
The particle na also forms some adjectives, in which the first syllable of
the root is generally repeated. These na adjectives also have an indefi-
nite verbal meaning. Ex.: Nauuhdo (thirsty, to be thirsty), from uMo;
napagal (tired, to be tired); pagalin (a tired person): namatay (dead, to
be dead, from patay). P is here changed to m for euphony.
Some adjectives are also formed from roots by the prefix mapag^ as
mapagtungayao (abusive, insulting [words or acts impliedj).
Others are formed by the prefix mapa; as, mapamansag (boastful, vain-
glorious, ostentatious), from hansag, ostentation. B is softened to m.
The indefinite particles mag and nag, when prefixed to some roots, gen-
erally with reduplication of the first syllable of the same, form adjectives
in some cases. Ex.: Magdarayd (fraudulent, cheating), from daydj the
initial d being softened to r; and na^iisd (sole unique, only), from wd, one.
The particle maka, in its signification of cause, forms adjectives similar in
meaning to those in English ending in **able," '*ing," etc., when prefixed
to roots capable of such significations. The first syllable of the root is gen-
erally reduplicated, but not always. Ex. : Makatotdua (agreeable, pleasure
causing), from t6iui; makatatdua (laughable, comic), from tdua, and maka-
9dua (disgusting), from sdua, etc.
A few adjectives are formed bv the prefixed particles mala and pala, as
malahininga (lukewarm, applied to water), malakoko (quite warm), and
palaaudy (quarrelsome), from audy (quarrel, enmity).
Some adjectives are formed by the reduplication of a root when the root
has no more than two syllables. If there are more than two syllables the
first two only are reduplicated. This rule is general in Tagalog. Ex.:
Hdlohdlo (mixed), from hdlo, root of the idea **to mix;" mnodmnod (con-
secutive), from sunody root expressing the idea of following, etc. The
restrictive particle ka is sometimes prefixed to these reduplicated roots,
implying a lesser degree than with ma or ynay; as, kasakiisakit (painful),
from sakitf root expressing the idea of illness or pain. An example of how
far a polysyllable is reduplicated is furnished by the word kaginhaginhdxw,
( wholesome, salubrious) , from ginhdua, idea of relief, betterment, rest.
There are a very few adjectives formed by the union of two words of
opposite meaning, of which urong-sulong (neutral, indecisive), from urong
(to go back), and »ulong (to go anead), may be taken as the type.
The particle in {hin after an acutely accented vowel) sufl5xed to many
adjectives gives the idea of a person or object having the qualify denote<l
by the root. Ex. : Masintahin (a loving person), from sintd, love; tamohin
(a useful [or available] article), from tamd, use, utility, and babasagin (a
broken or frail thing), from bosag, idea of breaking, fracturing, etc., any-
thing like glass, a plate, the head, etc. The first syllable of the root is
here reduplicated.
An {han)y which is generally a place suflSx, is sometimes added to
adjectives in which the idea of place or location is inherent, and occa-
sionally with those which do not admit the suffix in for euphonic or other
reasons. Ex.: I>i madaanan (impassable or impenetrable), from di (not).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 57
and ddan froad), and maliimn (patient person), in denoting what may be
suffered when suflfixed to maim; as, matiisin (what suffered or endured).
This, however, belongs more properly under the particles, where the dif-
ference in the use of in and an is set forth at length.
In when inserted after the first consonant of some nouns gives the idea
of like, and one at least is sometimes used as an adjective. It is binatd
(youth), from batd ^ child), and is sometimes used to mean '* young,"
although bago (new) is sometimes used with the same idea, as in the words
bagong tduo (unmarried man or bachelor, literally " new person").
The English nouns and phrases which are used as adjectives are ex-
pressed in Tagalog by means of the ties g, vg, or nor, the word which is
modified preceding the modifier, the opposite to what is done in English.
The tie is attached to the modified word and answers somewhat to the
English *'of." Ex.: Salaming pilak (a mirror of silver, a silver looking-
glass) {g); tinterong hubog (an inkstand of glSiss, a glass inkstand) (ng);
singsingna gintd (a ring of gold, a gold ring) ; bdhay na batd (a stone house,
a house of stone), the last two examples showing the use of the tie na.
Sometimes the tie is omitted if the modified word ends m a consonant
other than n, but it is not considered elegant to do so.
Adjectives like the English ** golden,*' ** silvery," "wooden," etc., are
expressed in different ways in Tagalog, generally by means of the ties
or by different particles indicating ** likeness," which will be explained
hereafter.
Negative adjec^tives like those formed in English by the prefixes un
(Anglo-Saxon J, in (before 6 and p softening to m for euphony), im (Latin),
a, an (Greek), are formed in Tagalog by the particles di (not), wald
(without), and sometimes hindt (no). Ex.: Di malapitan (unapproach-
able), from lapitf idea of approaching; dt mabilang (innumerable), from
bilang (to number); di maaaar*an (impassable or impenetrable), from
d&an (road) ; walang bahala (apathetic, indifferent, careless) ; ivalang hangdn
(without end, lasting, eternal, infinite), and hindinamumunga (unfruitful),
from bunga (fruit), with na and reduplicated first syllable of root (softened
to m from o) to indicate present tense (literally, **not fruit-bearing").
The use of dt and tuald is illustrated by di makabayad and walang maybayad,
the first meaning "not able to pay" and the second " without means of
payment," both oein^ about equal to "insolvent."
As in English, there is no variation in the adjective for gender and case, but
the adjective may be pluralized. For the plural (the modified word being
understood in some cases) the word manga is used with simple adjectives —
as, angmangd hunahang (the foolish [persons] ) — and the first syllable of the
root is repeated if it consists of one or two letters for compound adjectives.
If the first syllable of the root contains more than two letters, the first two
letters only are reduplicated. Mangd is also used by many with the plural
compound adjective. Ex. : Ang marurunongy or ang mangd marurdnong
(the wise [people]).
The adjective may precede or follow the noun modified, and it would
seem that the latter form is to be preferred, as it agrees with Malay (as
with Spanish) construction. However, with the spread of English it is
not unlikely that the custom of using the adjective before the noun may
become the usual construction, as it is equally as correct as the other way.
Ex. : Ang mangd babayeng magandd; ang manga magandang babaye; ang baba-
yeng magagandd; ang magagandang babaye; ang mangd babayeng magagandd,
2iiiiang mangd magagandang babaye. All six of the iforegoing phrases mean
simply "the beautiful women," the first four being preferable.
Tne following list of adjectives will give the principal ones in ordinary
use. The plan has been followed of giving adjectives with certain mean-
ings, followed by those of opposite significations, or at least in well-defined
groups. Words having substantially the same meaning are called syno-
nyms; those of opposite meaning, antonyms. Words with the same sound
but different meanings are called homonyms. Some Tagalog adjectives
require several different words in English to express their varying mean-
Digitized by
Google
58
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
ing, just as occurs in translating English into Tagalo^ or any other lan-
guage. Practice alone will fully instruct the student, owing to the localisms
and provincialisms of the language. As many examples will be given as
space justifies.
Dear; noble; precious; esteemed.
Cheap, ignoble, etc.
Useful, available (thing).
Useless; without benefit.
Good.
Bad.
Harmful; hurtful; slanderous.
Strong.
Weak.
Large, big, grand.
Small.
Bulky; massive.
Much; plenty.
Excessive; superfluous; remaining.
Little; some.
Spacious; ample; wide (as room,
road, etc.).
Broad; wide; level; flat.
Disproportionately wide (or broad).
Narrow (as street, door, opening).
Tall; high; noted (metaph.).
Deep.
Low; shallow; humble (metaph.).
Long; also gigantic.
Short; brief.
Mahal, Ang minamahaif the es-
teemed, dear, etc., person or thing.
Mura,
Tanwhin. Tamo, use, utility, benefit.
Walanq kabolohdn. Ex.: Walang
kabolohdn ang gawd mo, your work
is without value; useless.
MabtUL MahUing tauo, a good per-
son.
Masamd. Kasamaan, evil.
Makapapanganydya. From anydya,
pan, and maka, with pa, A good
example of the building up of
words in Tagalog. Panganyayang
tauo, a man who destroys the
property of another.
Malakds. Malakda na tduo, a strong
Malakds na hangin, a high
Kahina/in, weakness.
Kalak'hdn, grandeur; size.
Karamihan,
person.
wind.
Mahind.
MaLaki,
Maliit.
Matarnbdk.
{Marami ( from dami. )
plenty; abundance.
Madid,
Lubhd (also means **very*' before
another adjective. ) Lubhang sakit,
serious illness.
Kaunti, sMarunong kang Tagdlogf
iDo you understand Tagalog? Op6,
yes, sir. ilngUsf Kaunti, p6, a
little, sir.
Maluang. Maluang na silid, a wide
(or spacious) room.
Maldpad. ^a/a/)aran, breadth. Ma-
Idpad na isip, broad minded.
Maluag. Maluag na hob, a magnan-
imous heart ( metaph . ) .
Makipoi. Makipot ang ddan, a nar-
row road. Makipot na isip, nar-
row-minded. Kakipotan, narrow-
ness.
Makitid, Mahitiran, narrowness.
Mataas. Kataasan, tallness, height.
Maldlim. Kalaliman, depth. Maid,-
lim na gdlit, deep anger.
Mababd. Kababaan, low ground;
also humility. Mababang loob, a
submissive (humble) disposition.
Mahabd, Mahabang tulay, a long
bridge. Mahabang tauo, a gigan-
tic man.
Maikli variation (maiksi), Maikling
bdhay, a short life.
Digitized by
Google
TAGAIiOG LANGUAGE.
59
Close; short (as hair, beard, etc.)
Square; equal on all sides.
Round; circular.
Thick (as a board, book, etc.).
Thick (as liquor, clothes, etc.).
Coarse; rough.
Rare; thin.
Slender; fine.
Heavy.
Light (not heavy); easy (metaph.).
Strong; intense; heavy.
Solid.
Pressed; compact; packed; solid.
Hollow (as a tree, etc.).
Clean; neat.
Pure; limpid; clear.
Turbid; muddj^ (as water); bleared
(as eyes); thick (as the speech). '
Pure (and without mixture).
Light; fine (like chaff, paper, etc.).
Dirty; filthy; disgusting; nasty.
Dirty; disgusting, etc. (Southern).
Filthy; indecent.
Innumerable; numberless.
Full; complete.
Insufficient; not enough; less.
Empty; sometimes wide.
Kanipisan^ slendemess.
na katauarif slender
Sdgad.
Paritdkat (from «Ua<, to measure,
and oari«, equal, as).
{Mahitog. KabUogariy ox pagkahilogy
roundness.
Malingin (rare).
MakapaL
Malimit. Mallmit na damit, thick
clothes.
Magdspang. Magdspang na kanin,
coarse food. ( Synonym, maydpang
kanin. )
Maddlang.
Manipls.
Manipis
bodied.
Mahigat. Mabigat na looby heavy
hearted.
Magadn. Kagaanan^ lightness. Ma-
gadn itong kdhoy, this wood is light.
Matindi. Matinding garno!, strong
medicine. Katindiy a counter-
weight or balance. Matinding looby
heavy hearted.
Maigting (this word is provincial and
not gjenerally used to-day).
Mamisin.
Maauang. Guangan itong haligi itd,
this harigue (house pillar) is hol-
low.
Malinis. AaZmi^an, cleanliness. Ma-
linis na damity clean clothes. Ma-
linis na looby clean hearted.
Malindo. Tubig na malindOy or ma-
Undo na tubigy pure or limpid
water. Malindo na looby pure
hearted.
Malabo.
{Tagands.
Waya.
Tahas. Tahas na gintd, pure gold.
Kabd (a local word is galbok or galbo) .
Madumi. Karumhan (contr.), dirti-
ness, filthiness, nastiness. Madu-
mihany dirty, etc., object.
Madiri. Madirihiny dirty, etc., per-
son.
Salauold. KasalauolaaUy filth, inde-
cency.
Di mab'dang. (from dly not, and
bilangy idea of counting, number. )
Pund. Magpund ka itdy complete or
fill this.
Kulang. Kakulanginy waste, lack.
Kaiang na banta^ a lacking idea.
PakuUangin mo sa apuyy diminish
the fire.
Pouang, Also walang lamdnj with-
out pulp or meat.
Digitized by
Google
60
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Contracted; cramped (as a room).
Mixed.
Consecutive; in order.
Entire; whole; unbroken, etc.
Broken; fractured, etc.
Cooked (as food) .
Raw; crude (as food, fruit).
Edible; esculent.
Poisonous (as toadstools, arsenic,
etc.)
Venomous (as the bite of the dahong
palay, or rice snake).
Fresh (as meat or fish, etc. ).
Spoiled; putrid.
Impure; adulterated.
Sweet.
Sour; acid.
Bitter.
Salty; saline.
Peppery; pungent.
Rancid.
Nauseating; unkempt.
New.
Old; stable; permanent.
Stale; musty (as rice, tobacco, wine).
Dry.
Wet.
Thin; watery; fluid.
Thick; dense; curdy.
Sticky; adhesive.
Juicy.
Fleshy; pulpy; meaty.
Hot.
Burning; ardent.
Lukewarm.
Cold.
Chilly.
Hard; solid; stiff.
Soft; flexible; bland.
Masikip.
Hdlo'hdlo, KahcUOf mixture. May
kahalo itong dlahy this wine is
mixed.
Sun6d-mn6d (from mndd, idea of
following, obeying, etc.)
Bod.
Basag. Babasamn^ broken article,
from hcuag^ iaea of fracturing,
breaking, etc., as the head, a plate,
glass, etc.
MalvAb.
Hildo. Hildo pa^ green yet.
Makain,
Gabon; makamandag,
Malason.
Sariiid,
Mabolok. Bolok na^ putrid already.
Hindi pulos (from hindif not, and
puloSy alike; of one color.
MOiamis, Katamisan, sweetness.
Tinamis, sap of the nipa when
freshly drawn. Matamis na wikdy
sweet speech (synonym matamis
na mangump).
Madsim, Kaasiman^ sourness; acid-
ity.
Mapait. Kapaiian, bitterness.
Ma&lat. Kaalatanf saltiness. Ala-
talatan mo ang kanin^ salt the food
a little more.
Mahanghang,
iAla,
\Maantd.
Masuklam.
Bago,
i^alagl. Palagian mo itong gawd^
make this work permanent.
Loon.
Matuyd.
Basd.
Malabnao»
Maldpat.
Malagkit.
Makatds.
Malamdn.
MainiL Kainilany heat. Mainit ang
drao, the hot sun (or day).
Madloh. Houag mong paalabalabin
ang ningaSy do not add fuel to the
flames.
Malahininga. ( Malakoko expresses
a slightly greater degree of heat. )
Malamig.
Magindo. Maginauiny a chilly per-
son.
Maiiads. Katigamn, hardness.
Malambot.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO liANOUAOE.
61
Spongy; porous; soft.
Ductile; flexible.
Sharp.
Sharp-pointed.
Sharpened; ground.
Dull.
Hacked; notched.
Rusty (as iron, etc.).
Slippery; slimy.
Anything oily or smeared with oil.
Buhaghag. Hindi buhaghagj not
porous; im porous.
Also a kind of taffy
Rocky; stony.
Muddy.
Rough; rugged.
Sandy.
Swampy; boggy.
Gradual; little by little.
Sudden; abrupt; hasty; eager.
Impassable; impenetrable.
Difficult; laborious.
Difficult; intricate; slow.
Inaccessible; not to be reached.
Unapproachable.
Unfathomable; abysmal.
Distant; far.
Near.
Rare; scarce.
Common; ordinary.
Kakiliman, sharpness.
Kntulisan^ pointedness.
TinagiSy what ground, etc.
Makunat.
candy.
Matalim.
Matulis,
McUagis.
' MapuToL
Matomal. Matomal na sundang, a
dull sword. This word is often
applied to business, trade, etc.
3ingdo. Also noun with forward
accent. Malaki ang hingao niiong
mndang, this swoi^ is very dull
(lit., great is the dullness of this
sword).
Nakabilauangan or KinakcUauang
( from kalauang^ rust ) . A Iso name
of town in La Laguna Province
with C. Calauang,
Madulds; marulds.
Malangisan or Nabalangisan.
Mabatd.
MaypMik; malAsak.
Pusakal (rare). Malaki ang kamisa-
kalan nang bundok y the rugged ness
of the mountain (s) is very great.
MabuharTgin. Kabuhanginy sandy
beach, or sandy ground.
Malabdn. Also name of town in
Rizal Province, Luzon.
Unti'UntL Unti is probably a varia-
tion olmunti; kauntiy means ** lit-
tle," ''small," etc.
Bigld. Kabiglaarty eagerness. Pdl-
tiky syn. Biglang gawd; pdltik na
gawdy quick work.
Dt madaanan ( from ddany road, and
•diy not, with place ending an).
Mahirap. Mahirap gawWy a difficult
or laborious tast. Ang mangd
mahirapy the working classes.
Maliuag. Dt maliuagy easy. Walang
liuagy without difficulty.
Di maratingan (from ddting, idea of
arrival, and dty not, with place
ending an).
Di malapitan (formed like the above
from the root Idpity idea of near-
ness).
Di matdrok (formed like the fore-
going from tdroky "to sound the
water").
Malayo.
Maldpil (also babao).
ang Pasig sa atinf
anywhere near us?
Bihira.
Karaniuan. Karaniuang darrUWy
usual dress. Karaniuang tuikd, an
ordinary word.
Babao bagd
Is the Pasig
Digitized by
Google
62
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Straight.
Crooked; bent.
Curved.
Fragrant; odorous.
Fetid; stinking.
Delicious; pleasant.
Noxious; malignant.
Powdered; pulverized.
Sonorous (as a bell).
Equal.
Unequal.
Transparent.
Opaque.
Concave.
Wholesome; salubrious.
Horrible.
Fearful; dreadful.
Past.
Present.
Future.
Right (hand).
Left (hand).
In the middle.
To one side.
Matouid.
BaluktoL
McUiko. Likolikong ddan, a road
with many turns. Minsan pang
lumiko, one turn (or bend) more.
MabangS,
Mabaho, Kahahoariy fetidity.
Kalugod'lugod (from lugody idea of
pleasure, etc.).
Makasdsamd (from samdy idea of evil,
the particle maka and tense redu-
plication sa for present).
Dorog (means putrefied in some
localities).
Matunog (from tunog, sound).
Kaparis.
Hindi pari»,
Maaninag.
Koyaa; koyap (both rare).
MaluKong. Malukong na plngan, a
deep plate, like a soup plate.
Kaginhaginhdua ( from ginhduay idea
of relief, rest).
Kakilakildhot (from kildboty idea of
trembling with fear).
Katakotidkot (from tdkoty idea of fear.
Kalakotariy fear, dread).
Nakardan (from ddarif idea of pass-
ing).
Ngayon.
Dardting (from ddting^ idea of ar-
riving) .
Kanan, Kanankanan^ a little to the
right. Kanankonanin mo, go a lit-
tle to the right. Ang naJcakanan,
what lies to the right. Pakanan ka,
go to what lies on the right.
Kaliud (same compounds as the
above).
Sa gitnd. Gitnang gab-iy midnight.
Satabi,
A few of the foregoing are not strictly adjectives, either in Tagalog or
English, bnt are put here for convenience.
All; entirely; wholly.
All.
All (kinds or classes).
Each one.
Everyone.
Paua (generally used with adjec-
tives). Pauang maga/higy whollv
good. Pauang magagaling sUdy
they are all good. Pauang maiitim
sildy they are all black. Houag
mong pauaing tauaginy do not call
all.
Lahat (generally applied to persons ) .
Lahatin mo ang pangungusapy
speak to all of them.; syn., tanm
(provincial). Tandng tduOy all
men.
Dildn (provincial). Dilang sdgingy
all kinds of bananas.
Bdlang isd. Bdlang draoy some day.
BduaH isd.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
63
The following ifl a list of what colors are generally used by Tagalogs,
with some names also not now ordinarily heard.
Maputt KapvUariy whiteness. Ang
kaputian nang iUogj the white of
an egg.
Maiiim, Kaitiman^ blackness.
Mapuld. Kapvlahan, redness. Hi-
mitM, blush; redness of the face.
MadUao; marilao (from dUaOy a root
dyeing yellow ) . Marilao na damitj
yellow clothing. Also name of
town in Bulacdn Province, named
from same plant {curcuma delagen).
Also name of harrio of Manila (San
Fernando de Dilao).
Bughao ( Bataan Province ) . Buk-hao
(var.).
Ginxday (fromf gulay, vegetables,
herbs).
Halongiiang (rare).
Kayumavgi.
{MamvUd. KapuUaarif pallor; pale-
ness.
HimtUld, pale, discolored.
Mabanaap.
Maningning. Maningning parang li-
wayway, bright as the dawn.
Madilim. KcSHlimariy darkness, etc.
Houag mong ipandilim Uong cabayo,
do not take this horse while it is
dark.
Pulus. Maitim na puluSy black all
over (as a horse).
The following list comprises the majority of Tagalog adjectives pertain-
ing to physical conditions of the body:
White.
Black.
Red.
Yellow.
Blue.
Bluish-green.
Green.
Brown; brunette.
Pale; discolored.
Bright; clear; light.
Bright; shining (as the dawn, the
sStrs, gold, etc.).
Dark; obscure.
All of one color; unicolorous.
Old.
Young.
Tall (in stature); high.
Short (in stature).
Dwarfish; short.
Fat.
Elegant; beautiful.
Pretty.
Ugly; deformed.
Stuttering; stammering.
Mute; dumb.
Blind.
Matandd, Kaiandaan, age.
Bago. Binatdf youth, is sometimes
used, as ang mangd binatdf the
youths (from batdj child).
Haguay; mahaguay. Haguay na
i&uoj a tall person.
Lipoto (rare).
Pandak.
Matabd. Katabaanj fatness.
Magandd, Kagandahan^ beauty;
eie^nce.
Marikit (from dikit, idea of pretti-
ness). Karikilariy elegance, pret-
tiness. Karikiang wikd^ a graceful
word.
PdngxL
Magaril. QariliUy a stutterer; stam-
merer. IJtal'Vial is another word.
Pipi. Kapij)ihan, dumbness.
Pisakf variation Lapisak. Pisak ang
isang matdy blind in one eye.
Digitized by
Google
64
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Deaf.
Nasal; snuffling (as in the speech).
Cross-eyed.
Blinking.
Big-eared; long -eared; flap-eared;
large-eared; megalotine.
Thick-lipped (person).
Wry-mouthed.
Toothless.
Pockmarked.
Left-handed.
Lame in hand; one-handed; unable
to use hands, etc. •
Bandy-legged; bow-legged.
Lame (on account of having legs of
unequal length).
Quick.
Slow; deliberate (in work or
speech).
Hairy; feathered.
Bingi, Kabtngiharif deainees. Bing-
ingbingif totally deaf, but bingi-
bingij somewhat or a little deaf.
(The higher degree is formed with
the **tie," the diminutive without
it. This is a general rule. )
Humal.
Dvling.
KikirapHrap (from kirap).
McdaH ang tainga.
Sgusoin (from nguso, lip).
Ngiwi.
Tvpo, ManipOy lacking teeth.
Gatol-gatol.
Kaliuete.
Kimdo,
Sakang.
Hingkod.
MadcUt; maralt.
Mahinay. Possibly a variation of
mahina, weak.
Mabalahibd. Di pa makUd ang bala-
hibd nang kamayy the hair of the
hand can not yet be seen; an ex-
pression used to express that it is
not yet day.
BangU,
Ubanin. Adjective, mauban.
Kulot,
Ikal.
Upauin,
Bolbolin.
Walang buhok.
Sungayin. SAngay, horn, also a
twining plant resembling the con-
volvulus or bindweed.
May kaliskis.
Magutomin. Kagutoman^ hunger.
Nauuhdo. Kauhauan, thirst.
Sandat.
Napdgal. KapagaJan^ fatigue.
Himanday.
May sakit. Walang sakit, without
illness, i. e., healthy; well.
KasakitBaMt {{rom mkit, idea of pain;
sickness; illness).
Sugatin (from sugat^ wound).
Mutd. Mutain^ sore-eyed person, etc.
Mabuhay.
Patay. Patayin^ dead person, ani-
mal, etc. Namatay, to be dead.
The list of mental or moral attributes given below does not, of course,
embrace all in the language, but the most usual are given:
Omnipotent; all powerful. Makapan^arihan (from yarij idea
of finishing, etc., compounded
with panj maka^ and suffix han).
Bearded.
Gray-haired; gray-headed (person).
Curled; crisp; curly (as hair).
Curly or waving (hair).
Bald (person).
Hairy (on body);
Hairless (as some animals, etc.).
Horned (animal).
Scaly.
Hungry (person).
Thirsty; to be thirsty.
Replete; satiated.
Tired; to be tired.
Numb or ''asleep," as the hands,
feet, to become.
Sick; ill; to be ill.
Painful.
Wounded (person); having sores.
Sore-eyed.
Living; alive.
Dead.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
65
Brave; valiant.
Cowardly.
Timid (person).
Abusive (person or act).
Bashful; timid; shame-faced.
Bashful; modest (especially in char-
acter).
Modest-eyed.
Modest in speech; moderate in play.
Modest; quiet.
Modest; slow.
Modest (in carriage); slow; delib-
erate.
Peaceable; quiet.
Tranquil; quiet.
Gentle; tame; quiet (as animals).
Quiet; pacific.
Quarrelsome.
Odious; rancorous.
Fierce; savage; wild.
Quiet (in sleep, or in eating).
Abstemious; moderate.
Gluttonous; voracious.
Bold; gallant; elegant.
Bold; daring; insolent.
Vain; proud; haughty; arrogant.
Boastful; vainglorious.
Neutral; indecisive; undecided.
Influential.
Famous; celebrated; noted; noto-
rious.
Famous; celebrated; illustrious.
Famed; honored.
Celebrated; noted.
Famed; honored (person).
Dignity; honor; fame.
6855—0« 5
Matdpang (applied to wine,
** strong," matdpang na dlaky
strong wine. Katapangan^ brav-
ery).
Dudg. Kaduagan, cowardice.
Maiakotin (from tdkoty idea of fear).
Mapagiungayao (from tungayaOy in-
sulting words).
Mangild. Ang ikangild^ the cause or
reason of timiditv, etc. Ang
pan^ngilahanj of whom or what
afraid, etc.
3fahmhin.
Mamasid.
Mabini.
Matining. Also means "high^
pitched," (as a voice).
Mahinahan; mahandyad.
Marahan (from dahan, idea of delib-
eration).
Malouay,
Mabayang Idoby a tranquil
Mabayd
heart.
Maamb.
tleness
Kaamoan^ tameness; gen-
. Ang pagkaamd, the act of
taming, breaking, etc. Maamong
looby a gentle disposition.
Tahlmik. Katahimikan^ quietness.
Itahimik mo ang bibig mo, keep
your mouth quiet (shut up!).
Paladuay. Kaduay^ an enemy. Ang
mangd kaduay^ the enemy. Maitgd
kadunyy enemies.
Mapagianim (from towim, idea of ran-
cor, hate, etc., with mapag pre-
fixed).
Mailap. KaUapan^ fierceness.
Matigil.
Matingting.
Matdkao.
Matikas.
Mapangahas. Kapangafiahasan, in-
solence.
Palald. Kapalaloany pride, vanity,
etc.
Mapamansag (from bansag^ osten-
tation).
Urong-sulong (from tiroitgy to go
back, etc.; sulong^ to go ahead; to
move on).
Dakila.
Mabantog. Kabaniogan, fame; noto-
riety.
Mabunyl (rare).
Marangal (from dangal, fame;
honor).
Bulallat.
Purihin. Kapurihanj fame; honor.
Sanghaya.
Digitized by
Google
66
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Fame; noted; talked about.
Mean; vile; worthless; unfortunate.
Mean; vile; worthless.
Loving; amorous (person).
Affectionate.
Affectionate; loving.
Polite (person).
Polite; courteous; respectful.
Courteous; respectful.
Respectful.
Ironical; sarcastic.
Honest; right; straight.
True; refined; perfect; pure (in
body).
Patient; firm; constant (person).
Impatient ( person ) .
Changeable; inconstant.
Treasonable; treacherous; ungrate-
ful.
Two-faced; double-faced; treacher-
ous.
Giddy; thoughtless; careless.
Blundering; wild.
BcUUd,. KabaJitang lAuo, a noted
person. Magbahalibalitang tdiLOy a
newsmonger. Ano ang oaliid m
bayarif What news in town?
Hdmak. Hdmak na t&uo^ a worth-
less person.
Timaua (originally meant **freed-
man;" ** liberated slave.*' An-
other word is bvlisikf variation
biUisiksikf literally "slave of a
slave." Kabulimkariy slavery;
servitude).
Masintahin (from sirUdy love, origin-
ally Sansk. chinidf thought, care,
through Malay chinUXy care, anxi-
ety, etc.).
Maibia. Kaibigibigy amiable. Kai-
bigariy affection. Kaibigany friend;
beloved. ( Notice the difference in
accent. )
MapagpcUayao (from palayaOy affec-
tion, ana mapagy prefixed). Irog
means '* great love."
Masagapin. Ang sagapaiiy person to
whom polite.
Mapagpitagan (from pitagariy honor,
respect, and mapag). Ana pagpi-
pilaganauy the person honored
(from pitagany prefixed by pagy
reduplicated first syllable pi for
present tense and suflSx any here
indicating person, but generally
indicating place).
Maxdangdlang. Ang kinaaalanga-
langanany the person to whom
courteous (from alangalang, idea
of courtesy, compounded with ka
and in (kina) prefixed and an re-
duplicated as a sufiSx).
Magalang. Kagalanganj reapecty rev-
erence. Magalangin, courteouSi
respectful person.
Mapanuyd.
Matuid. Katuiran, honesty.
Tunay.
Matiisan.
Mayayamutin (from yamoty idea of
annoyance, etc.).
Salauahan. Salauahang Idoby a
changeable character.
Malilo. Pinaolililohan niyd ang ina-
ampdUy he is ungrateful to his
benefactor.
Sukab.
Matuligy variation maiuling.
Mahild. Partial synonym dulingaSy
which means ** restless, unquiet"
more than * 'blundering" or
"wild."
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
67
Restless; turbulent; fidgety.
Restless; mischievous.
Restless; uneasy; mischievous.
Intolerable; insufferable.
Unspeakable; unsayable; untellable.
Untouchable.
Joyful; contented (person).
Contented.
Happy; lucky.
Laughter-causing; laughable; comic.
Waggish; jesting; scoffing (person).
Sad.
Just; fair; upright.
Barbarous; tyrannical; despotic.
Cruel; rigorous; severe.
Agreeable; pleasing; joyous.
Indulgent; generous; liberal.
Charitable.
Merciful; charitable; liberal.
Learned; wise; etc.
Discreet; able.
(1) Accomplished; (2) excellent.
Mdgasldo. Magasldo na tduOy a rest-
less person.
Gaso. Ang gasohany person dis-
turbed.
Magcddo. Probably variation of ma-
aaslao. Magcddo ang kamay niydj.
his hand is re8tle8s(said of a thief).
Kagalauan, mischief. Anggalauin,.
the mischief. Ang gaJanarij person
annoyed.
Di madalitdy {from dalitd, idea of suf-
fering, and dtf not).
Dima^ahi (from «a6i, idea of telling,
and di not).,
Di masalang (from solangy idea of
touching,' with di, not). Latin,
noli me tangerCy taken by Rizal as
a title to one of his works. He
signed many articles ''Dimas
Alang".
Matuainy (from totuly pleasure; con-
tent).
Kaayaa.ya(iromayay variation ligaya.
Kaligayahany contentment) .
Mapdlad. Walang pdlady unlucky.
Makatataud (from taudy laughter,
with makay and reduplicated first
syllable ta to indicate present
tense).
Mapagbird; palabird, Tauong birdy
an inconsiaerate person.
Malungkot.
Mardpat (from ddpat). KarapaiaVy
merit.
Mabagsik. Also ** power '* in some
cases. KabagsikaHy power; tyr-
anny; etc. Ang pagbagsikany the
oppressed.
Maoangw. Kabangimny cruelty ;
severity.
Ma^ayd.
Mapagbigay. Also mapamigay. Both
words are from bigayy idea of giv-
ing. The second is more properly
the adjective.
MaatLct. Maauainy a charitable
person. Kaauaany charity, com-
passion.
Mapagbiyaya (from biyayay idea of
mercy, charity. Mabiyayang tduoy
a merciful or'liberal person).
Marunong (from dunongy idea of
wisdom. Karunongany wisdom).
Marunong kang IngUaf {Castilaf).
Do you understand English?
(Spanish?)..
Masikap. Kofdkapany discretion;
ability.
( 1 ) Paham na tduOy an accomplished
man. (2) Mapahan na dlaky ex-
cellent wine.
Digitized by
Google
68
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
Able; accomplished.
Fine (in bearing).
Prudent; judicious.
Discreet.
Thoughtful; grave.
Vigilant; awake; known.
Incomprehensible; inimitable.
Simple; silly.
Stupid; foolish; beast-like; cracked
(as a plate).
Foolish; stupid.
Useless; stupid.
Stupid; foolish; malicious.
Foolish; stupid; dull; gaping.
Childish; foolish.
Idiotic; simple.
Crazy; insane.
Laborious; diligent; industrious.
Lazy; slow.
Slow; tardy; lasting.
Pantds. Pant6s na tduoy an able
man. Kapantasan^ ability.
Btimhis. Busabumbua na magindOy
a very fine gentleman. Kabusa-
busan, excellence, etc.
Mabait, Mabait na tduOf a prudent
person. Dalagang mabait^ a pru-
dent girl.
Timtim (provincial word).
Mabigat. Really "heavy** (from
bigat).
Magisinq (from gmng^ idea of
awaking). Definite is in nan^ not
an. Nagisnan ko ang lindol kagab-iy
I was awakened by the earthquake
last night. Ginisnan ko na kapag-
saona ang asal na. yadn, I have
alwavs knowji of that custom.
Tinkald.
Maang. Timang, foolish; stupid.
Mangmangy fool, dunce; alpo lack
of memory, forgetfulness. Mangdy
variation mangaly silly, foolish.
Mamangalj to act foolishly. Nag-
mamangdmangahauy to feign stu-
pidity. This meaning of mangd
must not be confused with the
homonvm indicating plurality,
w hich IS made up of the particles
ma and ngd.
Bangdo (rare). Bangauiny a Ftupid
person.
Taksil. Taksil na tduo, a stupid
person. Kataksilany stupidity.
Banday. Kabandayany foolishness.
Ang pagkabandayy the error.
Bangahiny one regarded as a fool
or dunce. Hmiag mo akong banga-
kanydo not try to fool me (make a
fool of me). Also kahangalany
foolishness, from hangaly foolish.
Tungaky variation tungag.
Hunghang.
Tangd. Magtangdtangahany to feign
stupidity. A rare word for ** fool-
ish^* is lankas.
UngdSy variation ongd.
BaliH. Kabaliuany idiocy. Baliuin,
a foolish or idiotic person. Caba-
yong babaliuiny a foolish or runa-
way horse.
Ululy variation olol. Kaululany in-
sanity.
Masipag, Kasipagany industry, etc.
Tamad (Mapagtamad). Katamarany
laziness.
Malonat. Malouat na kdhoy, durable
wood. (Malouag is * * slack, loose, ' '
and mahigpil is "tight.'*)
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
69
Trae.
Lying.
Fraudulent; cheating.
Evil-lived; criminal.
Drunken.
Desirous.
Importunate.
Obedient (person).
Disobedient; contradictory.
Bold; shameless.
Forgetful (person).
Rich; prosperous.
Poor; miserable.
Miserable; stingy.
. Miserable.
Talkative (as a child).
Loquacious (as many persons).
Garrulous (as an old person).
Silent; reserved; secretive.
Economical; stingy.
Economical; saving.
Destructive.
Totdo. Tinototdo ko ang uikdy I am
keeping my word. Tunay has
more the sense of real, perfect, re-
fined.
Bulaan, Mahubulaanan na iyang sa-
litd mo, you are lying in your ac-
count. Sinungdling is a **liar" or
* * prevaricatC'r. ' ' Pinagmnungali'
ngan ko^ I told him you lie.
Magdarayd (from dayd, fraud de-
ceit, with mag and reduplicated
first syllable of root). Nodayaan
akd nang l6ob ko, my heart de-
ceived me.
Madual. Masiual na tduo, an evil
doer.
Ixmng, Another word is derived
from langd. Kalangohan, drunk-
enness. A rare word is aslak.
Naaaslakan ka yata, you act as if
you were drunk. Drunkenness is
a rare vice among Tagalogs.
Mapagnasa (from nasa and mapag).
Another word is derived fromptto,
desire, longing. Arao na kapita-
pitOy a longed-for day. Magpita
kayd sa dhin nang ibig ninyd, ask
me what you desire.
Mnpaghingl (from hingi, to ask po-
litely, and mapag).
Mamnorin (from aunod. See Con-
secutive).
Masouay. Kas<mayan, disobedience.
Masiuiil.
Malimotin (from limot, idea of forget-
fulness).
Maydman, Kayamanan, wealthi*
ness.
Dukhd, Kadukhaany poverty.
Mardmot (from ddmot), Ddmot akd
nang salapi, I am short of money.
Makingkina. Tauong makingkingy a
miserable person.
Mawikd (from wikdy word).
Matabil (from tahily idea of talking
much).
Masalitd (from salildy a story, news).
Matinip. Matinip na Idoby a secretive
character.
Matipid. KatUipdany parsimony.
Maarimohanan ( from arimohan) . A ri-
mohanin mo itong pUaky pave this
money. Two rare words for the
same idea are maimpok and maagi-
mat.
Makamsird (from sirdy idea of destruc-
tion, and makay with reduplicated
first syllable of root).
Digitized by
Google
70
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Traveling; peregrine.
Unbaptized; infidel; pagan.
Belonging to; pertaining to.
Abandoned.
Guilty; culpable; sinful.
Fruitful; to bear fruit.
Other; different; diverse; distinct.
Sole; unique; only.
Lasting; eternal; infinite.
Perishable.
Immortal.
Hopeful.
Hopeless.
Public.
Reserved; set aside.
Secret; to be secret.
Occupied; to be occupied.
Idle; without work.
Passionate; quick-tempered (per-
son).
Hasty; of a bad disposition.
Thankful; to be thankful.
Grateful.
Ungrateful.
Naingibang bdyan (from bdyan, town;
town, ibdy other, and the redupli-
cated particle mariy in the present
tense, hence changed to nang and
ing. Literally, **from another
town").
IH binyagan (from binyag^ to bap-
tize, and diy not). Bmyag is said
to have been a Bornese (Arabic?)
word brought by Mohammedans
to the Philippines. Its original
meaning is said to have been ** to
pour water from above."
NawCikol (from tiifeoZ). Naw&kol 8a
Dio8 at nawdkol sa Ctsar^ belonging
to God and belonging to Csesar.
Pabayd.
Nagkakasald (from said). Walang
saldy innocent, not guilty.
Namumunga (from bungay fruit, with
ma (na) and reduplicated first syl-
lable of root, which is here soft-
ened to m from 6). Hindi namu-
munga, unfruitful. BurTgahaUy a
fruitful tree or plant.
Nagiisd (from iad, one).
Walang hangdn ( lit. , * * without end, ' '
"endless").
Natatapm (from tapiLSy end, finish.
Tapusna, finished now).
Walang kamatayan (lit., ** without
death").
Maasa.
Walang asa.
Mahayag. Kohayagan, publicity.
Nagkakabukod (from bukod^ idea of
reservation, setting aside, etc.
Bukdan mo akd nana dalawd^ put
two aside for me. Kabukoran, res-
ervation, etc.).
Malih im . Lihim na gawd^ secret work
or deed.
Naaabala ( from abala^ idea of occupa-
tion; the particle rm (present tense
of ma) and a, reduplicated first
syllable of root for present tense).
Abalahin or MaabaUxhin^ a busy
man.
Walang gawd.
MagalUan (from galit, idea of anger).
Gahasd. Kagahaaaan, hastiness.
Sinasaldmat (from saldmai^ thanks;
derived from Arabic, saldmat,
peace; safety).
Nakalulugod (from lugod^ gratitude,
naka^ and the reduplicated first
syllable of root).
Walang lugod; also maHlo.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
71
Licit; legal.
Immaterial; useless.
Naked.
Libidinous; sensual.
Asleep, to be; sleepy, to be.
Aged; venerable; mature.
Tired, to be.
Alone; unaccompanied.
Companioned; chaperoned.
Iraorant.
Married.
Unmarried.
Taxed.
Exempt.
Present.
Absent.
Ready, to be.
Unready, to be.
Salable.
Unsalable.
Valuable.
Clean; neat.
Dirty; unclean (as the clothes).
Doubtful.
Certain.
Lucky.
Original.
Copied (thing, etc.).
Methodical ( person ) .
Suitable.
Unsuitable.
Orderly.
Disorderly.
Profitable (thing).
Unprofitable.
Ornamented.
Plain; clear (as a room).
Manufactured; made up.
Raw; crude (as material, etc.).
Woven.
Span (also thread).
Plaitea (as a mat).
Matuid;&\BO *'right,'* "straight, ''etc.
Hindi matuid, illicit, illegal, etc.
Walang gamit.
Hubaa.
Malihog.
Matulog. MaiviMog baad kaydf Are
you sleepy? Natutmog bagd siydf
Is he asleep? Patulognin mo siyd^
let him sleep (or tell him, or her,
to go to sleep).
Maaulang. Ang mangd magHdang^
the aged; parents; ancestors.
Mapdgod.
Nagiisd; walang kasamd.
Map kasamd.
Hindi madiam.
May asdua.
Walang asdiui,
Buma£dyad nang bonis,
Hindi bumubouis,
Narito.
Wald rito.
Mahandd.
Hindi handd.
May pagbibUi,
Hindi pagbibili,
Mahalagd. Walang halagdf worth-
less. Ma^kano ang halagd niiof
What is the value (price) of this?
Nagkasisinghalagdy of the same
value, at the same price.
Masayd.
Masauo. Masauong damity dirty
clothes.
Alinlangan.
Tanto.
Mapdlad. Walang pdlad, unlucky.
Nauuna (from una, first; not Sp.J.
Sinalin (from saliuy idea of transter-
ring, transplanting, etc.).
Maparaanin. Walang paraan, with-
out method.
Naaayos (from ayos); nauukol (from
ukol).
Hindi ayos, Hindi ddpat, unfit.
Manyos. Walang gulo, without con-
fusion.
Magulo. Kagvlohan, confusion, dis-
order.
Mapahinabangin (from pakindhang^
idea of making a profit, etc.).
Walang pahindbang.
Gayak.
Aliualas,
Ginawd (from gawd and in),
Hindi yari.
Hinabi (from habi, idea of weaving) .
Sinulid (fiomihUidf idea of spinning).
Salosala.
Digitized by
Google
72 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Cultivated; plowed. Naaararo (from Sp.,firaclo, plow).
Hindi naaararo y uncultivated; un-
plowed.
Open. BukAs. Buksdn mo itong pintd, open
this door.
Shut; closed (thing). Pindan. Pindan mo ang durunga-
nan, shut the window. Some na-
tives say sarhan mo^ undoubtedly
a corruption of the Spanish verb
cerrar, to close.
Spread; extended. Laiag. Xakakdlat, stretched; taut.
Folded; doubled, etc, Tiniklop (from tiklopt idea of dou-
bling).
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
The Tagalog adjective, like adjectives of other languages, has the three
degrees of quality to be indicated— the simple form (wTiich is. generally
called the positive), the comparative, and the superlative. Of course, as
in English, some adjectives are excluded from comparison by their mean-
ing, such as those for "dead," "alive,'* "entire," and some others.
The positive adjective is that form discussed in the preceding pages, and
the comparative will now be taken up. Of this there may be said to exist
three varieties, the comparative of equality, that of superiority, and that
of inferiority. In English the first form is expressed by "as (adjective) as
(noun)," the second by "er"or "more," and the third by "er" or" less."
In Tagalog there are three ways by which the comparative of equality
may be expressed. The first is by using the adverb para (variation paris)^
meaning "as," "so," etc. In some cases "like" expresses the Tagalog
idea best. With adjectives or common nouns para ( parts) takes the tie ngy
but with names of persons, etc., and pronouns is followed by what is
compared, which takes the genitive case. Ex.: Parang mabttti (how
good), maputt parang gatas (as white as milk), nmiiim parany uling (as
black as charcoal), parang patuff (like a dead person), parang hdyop (like
a beast); Akd^y paramof (Am I like you?) Myd^y parts ko (he [she] is
like me), maliit paris ko (as small as I am [small like me]), siyd mahait
para ni Jxian (he is as prudent as Juan), ang ilog sa Naga*y malouang
para nana Pasig (the river at Naga *[Nueva Cdceres] is as wide as the
Pasig). With the particle ka denoting likeness, para indicates equality,
the particle being prefixed to the adjective in such cases. Ex.: Para
niyong mangd tduoy kahubnti (equally good as these people). This word
para, which as a root denotes "equality," "close resemblance," etc.,
should not be confused with the Spanish word para, meaning "to," "for,"
etc., as the resemblance is purely accidental. The Tagalog word is Ma-
layan, the Javanese word pad* a having substantially the same signification.
The second way of expressing equality with an adjective is by means of
the particle sing, which denotes this idea precisely. Ex. : Itd^y singhabd
niydn (this is as long as that), siyd^y singlaki ko (he is as large as I am),
singlaki si Pedro ni Jvan (Pedro is as large as Juan). It will be seen by
the examples that the object or person compared takes the genitive case
and the subject the nominative.
The third wav of indicating equality with the adjective is by means of
the consolidated particles ka and sing, i. e.,'kasing, the syntax being the
same as with sing only. Ex.: It6*y kasinghabd niydn (this is as long as
that), si Pedro* y kasingfadsni Juan (Pedro is as tall as Juan) .
When equality is to be indicated for more than two objects it may be
expressed m two ways. The first is by prefixing singUy the root, of which
the first syllable is reduplicated. Ex. : Singhahabd (equally long [things] ) ,
singbubuU (equally good [persons or objects]), singtatads ang magind ni
Bangoy (Maria) (Maria and her mother are the same in height). The
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. , 78
second is by prefixing karnig to the root, the particle mag being prefixed
to leasing, forming magkaging, Ex.: Magkasingdiinong (equally wise
[learned]), maghmngyaman (equally wealthy [rich]), ang magind ni
Bangoy {Maria) ay magkamigtads (Maria and her mother are the same in
height [equally tallj), ang manga cabayoat ang manad kalabao ay map-
kamngdami sa bayan ttd (there are as many horses as there are carabao m
this town ) , mayr6on kang bagd bigds na kadngdami nang palay f ( Have you
as much hullea rice as you have of the unhulled?).
Equality in quantity mav also be expressed by magkapara, magkaparisi,
or magkapantayy the two oDJects compared taking the nominative, and the
root denoting quantity having ka prefixed to it. Ex. : Ang bigds ko at ang
bigds niyd magkaparis karami (he and I have the same quantity of rice).
Literally **ray rice and hia rice is the same in quantity." Those influ-
enced by Spanish are liable to say "his rice and my rice," but the other
order is that of the Malayan languages generally.
The comparative by decrease is formed by the use of the adverb kulang,
(less), preferably with the negative particles dt or hindt^ as kulang alone
has many times the force of **not," "without," "un-," etc., but, as in every
language, the context serves as the best guide. Ex.: Itong bigds na itS^y
kdking sa dkin binili (this rice is less than the amount I bought), ang halagd
Hong cabayo it6*y kdlang sa halagd nang ibd (the value of this horse is less
than the value of the other), ang manga kalabao kulang nang dami sa mangd
cabayo sa bayan U6 (there are fewer carabao than horses in this town) , ang
mangd Tagalog ay kdlang nang tads sa mangd Americano (Tagalogs are not
as tall [literally, "less in stature"] than Americans), ang kakulangan (the
difference in price, the balance, the difference in amount, etc. ).
Alan^an ( lacking, insufficient, etc. ) is sometimes used in place of k'dfang.
Ex.: Ang kayamanan ni Capitan Tino^y alangan sa kayamanan ni Capitan
Luis (the wealth of Captian Faustino is less than the wealth of Captain
Luis), alangan pa Hong batd U6 (this child is not old enough yet).
There are three ways in which the comparative by increase may be
expressed. The first is by the position of the words only, what exceeds
taking the nominative and what is exceeded the ablative with kay or sa,
these two particles expressing "than." The particle ay is sometimes used
with the nominative word.
The second method is by prefixing the adverb laid (more) to the
adjective, with the same construction as the foregoing.
The third way, which is only used correctly for comparing qualities, is
formed by suffixing pa (yet, still to the adjective) either alone or in
conjunction with laid. Ex. : (1) MataAs akd sa iyd, or akd'y maiads sa vj6;
(2) akd'y lalong mntadssaiyd; (3) muladspaakd sa iyd, or Uilong matads p'l
akd sa iyd. All the foregoing may be translated by "I am taller than you
are." (1) Payai ka sa dati (you are thinner than you were before), si
Pedro* y masipag kay Juan (Pedro is more industrioua than Juan), aXin ang
maliksi, kay Pedro ni Juan) (Which is the more alert, Pedro or Juan?); si
Juan (Juan); si Juan ay mabait sa kaniyd; (2) si Juan ay lalong mabait sa
kaniyd; (3) «i Juan ay mabait pa sa kaniyd (Juan is more prudent than he
[or she] is). (1) Ang kabanala^y mahal sa kayamanan; (2) lalona mahal
ang kahanaJan sa kayamanan (worth is more precious than wealth), itd^y
lahng magaling sa diydn (this is better than that), iydn ay lalong maputt sa
dito (that is whiter than this), lalong marami ang manga cahayo sa mangd
kalabao sa bayan itd, ngunVt ang mangd toga bi^kia mayrdon lalong kalabao
sa ang mangd taga bayan; (3) there are more horses than carabao in this
town, but the farmers have more carabao than the town people, si Ciriaca
ay batd pa sa akin, ngunVt ang kapatid kong babaye^y marikitpa sa kaniyd
(Ciriaca is younger [literally, "more of a child yet"] than I am, but my
sister is prettier than she is), siyd^y laid pang kayumangi sa kaniyang
ind*t maliit pa siyd sa dkin (she is still darker [more brunette] than her
mother and is shorter yet than I am ) .
A laconic but correct form of comparison is expressed by using pa after
a pronoun, especially in asking a question. Ex. : Hindi mo nadbut, akd pat
Digitized by
Google
74 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
( It was not reached bv you ; shall I? ) . Hindi ko naaalaman ; ikao paf ( I do
not know it; do you?).
For the negative form of the comparative, as in such phrases expressed
in English bv ** without comparison," "there is nothing like it,**
"there is nothing resembling it,'* etc., Tagalog has several expressions
almost alike in meanine, which are formed by prefixing ka to various
roots; the negative waldy (there is no [t]) with the tie ng preceding the
root and its prefix. An is sometimes found as a suffix with these expres-
sions. Ex. :
Walang kahalimbdua, without comparison;
WcUangkahcUintdlad^ without similarity (generally in speaking of objects) ;
Walang kalMad^ without similarity; unlike; both the foregoing from iulad]
Walang kahambing, without resemblance; synonym;
Walang kawangiSf without resemblance;
Walang kaholilipy without likeness (this phrase is rare);
Walang kamukhd, without facial resemblance, from muk-My face;
Walang kapantay^ without an equal; referring mainly to height, length,
rank;
Walang kaialamitan, without resemblance (a rare expression) ;
Walang kawangkiy without resemblance (also a rare phrase).
To ask questions as to comparative equality, inferiority, or superiority is
done in Tagalog with ga (how) prefixed to alin (which), or an6 (what),
in conjunction with ka prefixed to the root of the quality. With many
adjectival roots ga and ka thus serve to show that the degree of the quality
is the subject of inquiry. Ex.: Gaalin kalayof (About how far is it?);
Gaanong kalakif (About how large is it?); Gaanong kahabdf (About how
long is it?) ; Gaalin kapvitf ( How white is it?) . The answer may be given
with the same construction, prefixing ga to a demonstrative pronoun or
a noun, as the case may be, but if an adjectival root be used, it should be
prefixed by ka, Ex.: Gaitd; ganitd (like this); ganiydn (like that);
gagatas kapvii (as white as milk); ganitong kalaki (about as large as this);
gandong kahabd (about as long as that). Gaya is a variation. Ganga,
another form, is generally used to indicate plurality. Ex.: Ganga nitd
kalaki (about as large as these); ganga niydn kahabd (about as long as
those). The noun, pronoun, or adjective compared sometimes takes the
nominative and sometimes the genitive in these answers. Ga and its vari-
ations may be said to express likeness, and is but an offshoot of ka. In
many cases na is also inserted in the sentence. Ex. : Gaoling na gaitd
kaonlt? (How small is it, like this?^. The letter n instead of rTg is us^ in
some phrases. Ex.: Ganan dkin (that which belongs to or affects me);
ganan inyd (that which affects you), etc.
THE SUPERLATIVE.
The superlative degree of the adjective may be divided into the simple
and the absolute forms. The first, usually expressed in English by the
use of the adverbs "very,*' "extremely," "excessively," "exceedingly,"
"surpassingly," etc., is expressed in Tagalog by the following adverbs:
(1) Lubkdy very, very much, exceedingly.
(2) Masdkit, extremely, exceedingly, hard (as in the phrase, "to rain
hard"). Distinguished by difference in accent from masakity (ill).
This adverb is used more with verbs than with adjectives. In some
places sadyd has the sense of "very;** ex., sadyang linis very clean.
(3) Dtsapalay extremely, exceedingly, from diy not, and sapalay humble,
unworthy, the idea of the adverb being that of plenty or sufficiency.
(4) Dt hdmaky extremely, from di, not, and hdmaky vile, worthless, mean,
the whole idea being "not paltry,** "not mean.**
(5) Dipalaky far, widely.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 75
(6) Labis, too, too much. This adverb has sometimes a slight idea of
craft, cunning, or slyness.
(7) TotdOf truly, exactly, precisely.
The adverbs formed with dt always follow the adjective in the sentence,
but the simple adverbs may eitlier follow or precede the adjective.
Ex.:
IMatandd siyd
Matandd aiyd
dt sapala.
dt hamak,
dt pcdak.
luhhd.
labis,
totdo.
siyd matandd: He (she) is very old (too, truly, etc.).
or
Luhhd
Labis
Totod
The following phrases will illustrate the various idiomatic uses of the
adverbs with the adjective: (1) Lubhd ang pagkapagal ko (I am very tired;
lit., "very great is my fatigue*'); (2) ngani, lalong masdkit ang kay Pedro
(That's so, but Pedro is still more tired; lit, **but more excessive is [that]
of Pedro " ) ; Iniibig katang masdhit ( We like you very much ) ; Pinagsisisihan
silang ma^Jdt (They are repenting deeply ) ; ( 3 ) Mayaman dt sapala siyd (He
is exceedingly wealthy [very rich]); (5) Ihigmuldn nana labis (It rained
too much); (verbalized) Napakalabis ang kabutihan mo (You are entirely
too good [honest] ); Lindlnsan ang utos ko sa inyd (You exceeded your or-
ders; you did more than I told you to do) ; (6) Tlnototdo niyd ang wikd (He
is complying with his word [verbalized form of 10160"]).
The absolute superlative degree of the adjective (in the singular number)
which is made in English by the suffix ^'est" and by the adverb **most"
is generally expressed in Tagalog by repeating the entire adjective, whether
it be simple or compound, by means of the proper tie, which is deter-
mined by the ending of the adjective. Ex.: Mabuting mabuti (best); ma-
samang masamd (worst) ; banol na banal (most virtuous); mosipagna masi-
pag (most diligent); mahal na mahal (dearest, most precious); maputing
maptUt (whitest, very white); maitim na maitim (blackest, very black).
The plural of such superlatives as the foregoing is formed by using the
particle mangd with those formed from simple adjectives, and either with
mangd or the reduplication of the first syllable of the root with those com-
pounded with ma, the superlatives thus formed, either in the singular or
{)lural, generally being printed as two words in order to avoid unnecessary
ength and also to distinguish more clearly from some diminutives. Ex.:
The dearest [persons or objects understood] (ang mangd mahal na mahal).
The best [persons or objects understood] (ang mangd mabuting mabuti;
ang mabubuting mabubuti).
The worst (persons or things understood), ang mangd masamang masamd;
ang masasamang masasamd.
The bravest men (ang mangd matdpang na matdpang na lalaki; ang matatd-
pang na matatdpang na lalaki).
The ugliest animals (ang mangd pangit na pangit na hdyop).
What may be called the relative superlative degree, made in English by
adding the expression "of all" or a similar phrase to the superlative, is
formed in Tagalog by adding the words sa lahat (of all), sa kanildy
(among them) , etc. Ex. : Sino sa kaniWy ang lalong matdpang? ( Which
of those two is the braver?) ; Sino sa kanild*y ang matatdpang na matatdpang?
(Which of them is the bravest?); Ang maliit sa lahat, siyd^ y matdpang sa
lahat (The smallest of all; he is the bravest of all).
Superlatives are also formed by prefixing ka and suflSxing on (han) to
reduplicated bisyllabic words, and in the same manner with polysyllabic
words, in the latter case only the first two syllables being reduplicated.
Digitized by
Google
76 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Ex.: KatamistamiBan (sweetest), from tamis; kabanalbanalan (most virta-
OU8), from banal; kaginha^inhauahan (most wholesome), from ginhaua.
The first two roots have two syllables and the last has three. This form
may also be applied to abstracts formed with ka and an (han), and inten-
sifies them. Lx. : Kaiamwan (sweetness) ; katamistamisan (sweetness itself) ;
kabavalan (virtue); kabanalbanalan (virtue itself); katamaran (laziness);
kataniartamaran (laziness, laziness itself).
Verbs have a certain superlative form, which may be mentione<l here
for the sake of association. It is made bv repeating the verbal root united
by nang. Ex. : Hingi nang hingi ( ask and ask over again ) ; l&kad nang lakad
(walk and walk); ^^yes^* nang **ye8^* ang wikaln mo (say yes over and
over). This form is also found with nouns, etc.
Section Five,
the numerals.
The numerals form a small noun-group by themselves, having the three-
fold character of substantive, adjective, and adverb. While the distinction
between adjective and noun is not so sharp as with some other words, yet
it is clear that the cardinals in Tagalog are nouns, as they show by always
precedinj^ the noun affecrted that "of" must be understood. Thus limang
kalabao literally means "five (head) of cattle," and this holds good in ail
cases.
In Tagalog there are four classes of numerals — cardinals, ordinals,
adverbials, and distributives.
The cardinals are:
isang
As in English, decimal numeration, by tens, if^ that used in Tagalog and
throughout the Malayan family of languages. But Tagalog uses a peculiar
form in the numerals from eleven to nineteen, inclusive, which differs from
the method followed in every other language of Luzon. iMbi^ meaning
"adding," and a variation of labis^ is prefixed to the digits by means of
the euphonic tie 7Tg\ pou6, ten, being understood.
Eleven. Labing M. Sixteen. Labing dnim.
Twelve. Labing dalawd. Seventeen. Ijabing pitd.
Thirteen. Labing tatld. Eighteen. Labing wal6.
Fourteen. Ixibing dpat. Nineteen. Labing siyam.
Fifteen. Labing limd.
The multiples of ten below one hundred are formed by prefixing the
digit used as the multiplier to the word poud^ united by the proper tie.
Twenty. Dalawang pou6. Sixty. Anim na pou6.
Thirty. TcUlong pou6. Seventy. Pitong pou6.
Forty. Apat na pou6. Eighty. Walong pou6.
Fifty. Limang pou6. Ninety. Siyam na pou6.
The intermediate digits, when used with the foregoing, are joine<l by
means of '<, a contraction of at (and).
Twenty-one. Dalawang poudH isd. Fifty-five. Limang pou6H limd.
Thirty-three. Tat! ong pou6*t tatld. Sixty-six. Anim na poudU dnim.
Forty-four. Apat napoudH dpat.
One.
Isd. Seven.
Pitd.
Two.
Dalawd. Eight.
Wal6.
Three.
Tatld. Nine.
Siyam.
Four.
Apat (accent on first sylla- Ten.
Sangpoud (contr. of
ble).
poudj "one ten").
Five.
Lima.
Six.
Anim (accent on first svlla-
ble).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 77
The word for ** hundred" is dAarty which has a homonym meaning
**road.'' It is always preceded by the appropriate multiplier, to which it
is connected by the proper tie, d softening? to r before na.
One hundred. Isanp ddan; sang- Five hundred. Limang daan,
daan. Six hundred. Anini na man.
Two hundred. Dalaiuang ddan. Seven hundred. Pilong daan.
Three hundred. Tatlong ddan. Eight hundred. Walang d&an.
Four hundred. Apat na rdan. Nine hundred. Siyani na r&an.
Numbers below twenty added to hundreds are united with '<, the n of
ddan l)eing dropped.
One hundred and one. SangddaH isd.
Two hundred and eighteen. Dalawang ddaH lahing wal6.
The n is retained with multiples of ten.
Two hundred and fifty-three. Dalawang ddan limang poudU tatlS.
Six hundred and sixt^-six. Anim na rdayi dnim na poud't dnim.
Eight hundred and eighty-eight. Wahng ddan walong ynjudH wal6.
Nine hundred and ninety-nine. Sty am na rdan myam na poudH siyam.
The word for *' thousand*' is libo, which is found as ribo and rilu in other
Philippine languages.
It 18 governed, like ddcrn, by multipliers and suffixed numbers. The
purely Malayan numerals end with Ubo, those for higher numbers beins of
foreign origin. Some higher numbers are said to have Malayan names, I mt
it is doubtful as to whether their values are definite or not. They are noteU,
however.
One thousand. Sanglibo.
One thousand and eight. SangliWt wal6.
Nineteen hundred and five. Sanglibo siyavi na rdaH limd.
Two thousand. Dalawang libo.
Six thousand. Anim na libo.
For ** ten thousand" the term lahd is U8e<l. This is from the Sanskrit
laksha (one hundred thousand), through the Malay sa-laksa (ten thou-
sand), the latter people mistaking its value. Lakh^ with the original value
of ''one hundred thousand," is used by Anglo-Indians, as in the phrase
** a lakh of rupees."
For **one hundred thousand" another Sanskrit term is used, also with
altered value. This is yuUiy from the Sanskrit ayuta (ten thousand).
"One million " is now expressed by sangpouong yvia, or "ten one hun-
dred thousands." Gaioa and angao-angao are given in old dictionaries as
equivalent to "million," but the former is the word used for "hundred"
in most Philippine dialects, and the latter seems to have more the idea of
"uncountable," "infinite," etc.
In expressing numbers Tagaloffs sometimes eive a round number, less
the few taken off, as "three hundred and sixty less two" for "three hun-
dred and fifty-eight;" e. g., kdlang nang dalawd sa tatlong ddan dnim na
pouo.
Cardinals may be preceded by ang (the), when a concrete noun is modi-
fied, as in the phrase Ang dalawang piso8 na ibinigay mo sa dkin (the two
dollars which you gave me).
Mangd preceding a numeral indicates the idea of "about," "some,"
etc., as in the phrase mangd pilong tduo (about seven men). When the
exact number is indicated mangd is omitted as a sign of plurality. Ex.:
Mangd tduo (men, people); pitong tduo (seven men, persons).
By reduplicating the first syllable of the cardinal the idea of "only" is
brought in. Ex.: lisd (only one, alone, etc.); dadalawd (two only, only
two), etc. For greater emphasis upon the idea of limitation the number
may be repeated with the initial syllable reduplicated. Ex.: lisdisd (one
only); dadaladalawd (only two). The adverb Idmang (only) may also be
Digitized by
Google
78 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
used for this same idea, the adverb following the cardinal affected. Ex. :
Isd Idmana (only one) ; dalawd Idniang (only two), etc. It will be observed
that the first two syllables only of polysyllabic numerals like dalawd are
repeated, following the general rule in Tagalog.
The question "How many?*' is expressed in Tagalog by ildnf
Tagalog has no abstracts like "a dozen," **a score," etc., these phrases
requiring roundabout means of expression. * * A dozen ' ' may be translated
by isang kapimnan nang labing dalawd^ which literally means **a join-
ing of twelve." The same is true of English abstracts like "monad,"
"decade," etc.
"More," with a cardinal following, is expressed by laMs or higity which
precede the numeral and are united with it by «a, which expresses "than."
Ex.: Labis m limdy or higit sa lima (more tnan five). Labis is the more
correct, as higU has an idea of excess in weight rather than in number.
KiLilang (less) is used in the same way.
The indeterminate numeral "some," "a few," is expressed in T^^log
by ildn. With the first syllable reduplicated or with Idmang the idea of
"only" is expressed; as, iildn or ildyi Idmang (only a few).
"Much," "many," and similar words are expressed hy marami (from
dami)j and "a great many" may be translated by maraming marami.
By making an abstract of dami and prefixing the definite article of com-
mon nouns is expressed "the most," "the majority," etc. Ex.: Ang
karamihan.
For the meaning of the numerals, see the work by T. H. Pardo de
Tavera, entitled " Consideraciones sobre el Origen del Nombre de los
Ndmeros en Tagalog," published at Manila in 1889.
ORDINALS.
The ordinals, which are the numerals designating the place or position
of the object in some particular series, have more of the character of adjec-
tives than have the cardinals. They answer the question Ikaildnl (In
what order?) and are formed in a very simple manner in Tagalog for all
numbers except "first," which is quite irregular, ika being prefixed to the
cardinal. It should also be noted that the first syllable of dalawd (two)
is omitted, as well as the initial letter of tatld (three) and d^at (four)
when preceded by ika. * * Twentieth, ' ' however, is formed with ilea and the
entire cardinal.
The ordinals up to "tenth "are:
The first. Ang nadna.
The second. Ang ikalawd.
The third. Ang ikaild.
The fourth. Ang ikdpat.
The fifth. Ang ikalimd.
The sixth. Ang ikdnim (initial letter dropped).
The seventh. Ang ikapitd.
The eighth. Ang ikawald.
The ninth. Ang ikasiyam.
The tenth. Ang ikapoud; ang ikasangpoud.
In the southern provinces ang ikapold is sometimes heard, due to Bicol
and Visayan influence. Pol6 and pol-lo is also to be found in the dialects
spoken to the north of the Tagalog region, and this form may be found in
the north, but should be regarded as extraneous to the language.
The following synopsis of the ordinals above "tenth" will give an
accurate idea of their formation:
The eleventh. Ang ikalabing isd.
The twenty-fifth. Ang ikadalawang poudH limd.
The thirtieth. Ang ikatlong pou6.
The fortieth. Ang ikdpat na pou6.
The forty-fifth. Ang ikdpat na poudH limd.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 79
The fiftieth. Ang ikalimang pou6.
The sixtieth. Ang ikdnim na pou6.
The seventieth. Ang ikapitong pou6.
The eightieth. Ang ikawalong pou6.
The ninetieth. Ang ikamyam na poud.
The one hundredth. Ang ikasangddan.
The one thousandth. Ang ikasangliho.
The one ten-thousandth. Ang ikasanglaksd.
Nouns following ordinals are tied to them according to the ending of
the numeral. Ex. : Ang ikalimang tduo (the fifth person) ; ang ikatlong arao
(the third day).
In Tagalog, contrary to what obtains in Spanish, the ordinals are used
for all days of the month, and thus agreeing with English. Ex.: Ikaildn
drao ngaydn nang buang U6f ( What day of the month [is] this?) ; angikada-
lawang pouo* t pU6 ( the twenty-seventh ) . Anong drao kayd ngaydn «a sang-
lingo f (What day of the week is to-day?); Ngayo'y viemes (to-day is Fri-
day). Anong ta&nf (What year?); sangliboy siyam na rda't limd (nineteen
hundred and iive), Anong buan ngaydn nana tadnf (What month is
this?); ang bvuin nang enerOy p6 (the month oi January, sir). And ang
pangalan mof (What is your name?); Glicerioy p6 (Glicerio, sir). Angika-
lauang pangalan (The second name [surname]?) ; ManalOy pd (Manalo, sir).
Taga sadn kaf (Where are you from?); BatangaSy pd (Batangas, sir).
lldn ka nang ta&nf (How old are you?) ; Mayro&n akong dcUaivang poudH
limd (I am twenty-five years old) . Sadn naroon ang presidentef (Where is
the presidente [mayor]?) ; Nariyan ^a ikalaxvang bdhay (There in the second
house) .
Fractions are expressed by the use of ang (the) if the numerator is one,
the denominator being the ordinal desired, and bahagi (a part) following
the denominator either expressed or understood. Numerals may replace
ang. Ex.: Ang ikalawang bahagi (the second part); ang ikdpat (the
fourth), etc. Also isanp bafiagi (one t)art); tatlong bahagi (three parts).
Where the numerator is greater than one it is placed in the nommative
and the denominator in the genitive, the two being connected by nana and
the phrase followed by bahagi. Ex.: Tatld nang dpat na bahagi (three-
quarters); dalawd nana tatlong bahagi (two-thirds).
"Half" is expressed by kalahatiy as kalahaiing tindpay (half a loaf of
bread). The noun **a half is expressed by kahatiy meaning generally a
a half-salapi or 25 centavos.
It should be mentioned that unauna means **in the first place,'* and
when made an abstract and preceded by the definite article of common
nouns, as in the phrase ang kaunaunahany means **the very first." In like
manner, huli (last), when made an abstract in the same way, as ang kahuli-
hulihan means **the very last"
ADVERBIAL NUMERALS.
Adverbial numerals, expressed in English by **once," "twice," etc., and
answering the question ifakaildnf (past tense) and Makaildn (present
. and future tenses), "How often?", "How many times?" are formed like
the ordinals except that maka is prefixed instead of ika to the cardinals.
The word for "once" is whollj^ irregular. In some districts these adver-
bial numerals also express the idea of "fold," as "twofold." "threefold."
As with the cardinals the sense of "only" may be imparted by redupli-
cating either the first syllable of the prefixed particle or following the
adverbial numeral with Idmang.
Once. Minsany var. niman Nine times. Makasiyam.
(rare). Ten times. Makasangpoud.
Twice. Makalawd. Fourteen times. Makalabing dpat.
Digitized by
Google
80
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Thrice. Makatatld. Twenty times. Makadalawang
Four times. MakoApiit^ var. ma- poud.
kalpat (rare). Twenty-five times. Makadalawang
Five times. Makalima. poudHlimd.
Six times. Makadnini. One hundred times. Makasangddan.
Seven times. MakapUd, A thousand times. Ma kasanglib o;
Eight times. Makawalo. makalibo.
Naturally, as in all languages, the restrictive form is not used for very
high numbers.
Only once. Mlminsan.
Only twice. Mamakalawd.
Only three times. Mamakataild.
In this connection it should be remembered that ka'ddnf means ** when?'*
used interrogatively.
DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS.
These numerals, expressed in English with **by " between the numerals,
as "one by one,*' **two by two," etc., answer the question Ildn ildnf (How
many at a time?) and are formed in Tagalog by the simple repetition oi
the cardinal if bisyllabic, or the first two syllables thereof if longer, no
tie being used.
One by one.
Two by two.
Three by three.
Four by four.
Five by five.
Six by six.
Seven by seven.
Eight by eight.
Nine by nine.
Ten by ten.
Eleven by eleven.
Twelve by twelve.
Twenty by twenty.
One hundred by one hundred.
One thousand by one thousand.
Isdisd,
Daladalawd,
TutldtaUd.
Apatdpat.
Limdlimdf
Animdnim.
PUdpitd.
Waldwald.
Siyamsiyam,
Sangposangpoud,
Labilabing tad.
Labilabing dalawd,
Daladalawang poud,
Sangdasangdd nn .
Sanglisanglibo.
Nouns rei>eated in this manner acquire the idea of '* every."
Every day; daily.
Weekly (also every Sunday).
Yearly; annually.
Hourly.
Arao-drao.
Lingo-lingo.
Tadn-tadn.
Onis-oras (from Sp.,
hora).
The Tagalog word for ** every" is iuvn^ which may also be used.
Distributives, answering the question Tigiildnf (How many to each one?)
are formed by prefixing the particle tig to the cardinals, the first syllable of
the latter being reduplicated in those greater than "four". The first syl-
lable is dropped from dalawd and the initial t from tatld.
Tigisd. Six to each one. Tigadnim,
TIgalawd, Seven to each one. Tigpipitd.
Tigalld. Eight to each one. Tigwawald.
Tigapat. Nine to each one. Tigmiyam,
Tigldimd. Ten to each one. Tigaasangpoud.
One to each one.
Two to each one.
Three to each one.
Four to each one.
Five to each one.
These may be also translated by "one apiece," etc.
Tig prefixed to cardinals may also express the stamped, coined, or fixed
value of money, stamps, etc. In this case the initial syllable of those
numerals above four is not reduplicated. Na is now more generally us<*d
Digitized by
Google
TA0ALOG LANGUAGE.
81
than tig for this purpose. Ex.: Seyong tiaalawang centavoa (a two-cent
stamp); salaping tiglimang pisos (a live-peso oill or gold piece); iigdalawang
pouong pisod (a twenty-peso bill or gold piece). It must be borne in
mind that the Philippine peso is equal to a naif dollar United States cur-
rency, and that it is the legal currency in the islands. Hence the old de-
bates over **gold" and **mex.'* should be relegated to the past.
In the southern dialect tig is sometimes used to express the time at
which something may be done or has been done, as in tigaga (to do some-
thing in the morning); tighapon (to do something in the afternoon).
The particle marij prefixed to nouns denoting money, weights, and
measures, imparts the idea of **each," "apiece," etc. This particle causes
euphonic changes with some initial letters of roots, as follows: b and p
change to m, the final n dropping from the particle; initial c (k), and a drop
out, modifying n to ng; 8 and t drop out; d drops out in most cases; initial
rw, n, and ng also drop out, and an initial vowel (a, t, o, and u) modifies
the final n of the particle to ng.
The former monetary system was founded upon the salapiy or half peso,
nominally worth 25 cents at a gold basis, and now restored to that value.
Salapi also means money in general. The peso of one hundred centavos
is worth two salapi. In the old system the salapt was divided into 80
cuartos, and upon these the people reckoned their market and other minor
transactions. As these values and terms will linger for some time to come,
especially in districts where Tagalog only is spoken, the following examples
will prove of use:
A peso each or apiece.
A half peso each or apiece.
A half (salapi) each or apiece.
A real (12} centavos) each, etc.
A half real (6} centavos) each, etc.
Mamisos.
ManalapL
Mangahatl (from kahatl^ 25 centavos).
Manikdpat (from sikdpaty a contrac-
tion of sa ikdpat, to the fourth of
a salapi).
Manikold (from sikM, a contraction
of sa ikawaldf to the eighth of a
salapi).
Mangaliu (from aliu),
Mangualta ( from cuaUa, a corruption
of cuarto).
A cuartillo (5 cuartos or $0.03125, or
?-0.0625) each, etc.
A cuarto (Jl^'0. 00625, or 1^0.0125) each,
etc.
The only measure of weight incorporated into Tagalog appears to be the
tdhil (from the Chinese tael, which was a very uncertain standard) . By
treaty the haikwan tael or customs tael of China is now 3 J ounces avoir-
dupois. As a monetary unit the haikwan tael varies from 55 to 60 cents,
but is only quoted in banking operations and is not used by Tagalogs.
The Philippine tdhil may be regarded as slightly heavier than a troy
ounce, weighing 509.75 grains, the troy and apothecaries' ounce weighing
480 grains, and the avoirdupois ounce 437} grains.
One tahil each. MandhiL
One pound Spanish each. Manlibra (1.0144 TJnited States
pounds) .
One kilogram each. Mangilogramo (2.2046 United States
pounds).
One arroba (dry) each. Mangaroba (25 libras or 25.36 United
States pounds).
One **fardo" each. Mamardo (33 Sp. or 33.475 United
States pounds; used in weighing
tobacco).
One quintal each. Mangintal (4arrobas or 101.44 United
States pounds).
6855—05 6
Digitized by
Google
82 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Rice and grain is sold by the cavdnand its fractions, which areas follows:
One '*apatdn" each. Ma-ngapatAn (0.1981 of a pint, dry).
One **cnupa" each. Mangatang (4 apaldn or 0.7925 of a
pint).
One "ganta" each. Mancdop (8 chupas or 3.1701 United
States quarts) (from salop).
One **cavdn" each. Mangab&n (25 gardas or 19.81 gal-
lons).
There are 8 gallons to the United States bushel. United States dry
measure is slightly different from British imperial. To reduce United
States to British divide same named measures by 1.031516, and to reduce
British to United States multiply by same. For common purposes use
1.032, which is close enough. Trautivine,
A **cavdn" of rice weighs 133 **libros.**
One "picul" each. ifamtA:tAZ( 137. 9 United States pounds.
Two piculs constitute a **bale*' of
hemp, abakd).
The metric system is now official in the Philippines, and its use is gradu-
ally spreading to all sections.
Among the native measures of length used with man are the following:
One inch each. Mananall (from sangdaR^ which in
turn is contracted from sang,
**one," and daliri, "inch*').
The Spanish inch is 0.91 of an inch. DaliH also means finger or digit,
and the length of a Tagalog *'inch" almost exactly corresponds to the
** digit" of the early Hebrews, which was 0.912 of an inch.
One "span" each. Manangcal {iromdangcalfSi^* palm'*).
The American "span" is 9 inches, while the Tagalog dangcal is one-
fourth of a vara, hence 8.25 United States inches.
One "vara" each. Mamara (from vara, a Spanish
yard, equal to 33 United States
mches, approximately, and actu-
ally 0.914117 of a yard).
One "braza" each. Mandipd (from dipd, a braza, equal
to 5 feet 5.8 inches United States,
approximately 5 J feet).
To express the idea of "at such a price apiece" the former monetary
units were used with in (kin) suffixed to the unit, of which the initial syl-
lable was reduplicated. The article or object of which the price was to be
denoted preceded the unit of value, the two words being linked with the
appropriate tie, according to the ending of the first word. Ex.: Pipi-
sohin (at a peso each), librong sasalapiin (books at a half peso each), tind-
pay na sisicapatin (^ bread at a real a loaf), iabacong aaliuhin (cigars at a
"cuartillo" apiece).
These terms will now only be found used with those people still unfa-
miliar with the new currency, but as these people speak only Tagalog as a
rule they will naturally retain the old terms the longest.
The following dialogue fairly represents what may be said in making a
purchase in the market:
A. Magkano bagd ang halaga niid? (What is the price of this?)
B. Irnng pisos, p6 (a peso, sir).
A. Mahal na totdo lydn (that is too dear).
B. Hindi p6Hmura (no, sir; cheap).
A. Anong muraf ( How [is it] cheap?)
B. Kay 6 na*y tumauad (you set a pnce, sir).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 83
A. Tatlong pesetas ang ibibigay ko (I will give 3 pesetas [60 centavos] ).
B. Hindi pong mangyayari; dpat napeseiaSypd (I can not do it; 4 pesetas,
sir).
A. Mabuti (very well [offers a peso]).
B. Wald akong sukll, p6 (I have no change, sir).
A. Dald mo nga sa aming bdhay^ do6n babayaran kitd (bring it [them] to
our house, we will pay [you] there).
B. Malayoyatdf (Is it far?)
A. Hindi, at do6n Idmang sa may cuartel (no, it is there close to the bar-
racks [quarters]).
It should be borne in mind that **magkakano'' is used when pricing
objects of which a part only is desired, such as eggs, bananas, etc.
"Magkano" indicates that the entire quantity is priced.
The verbalized forms of the numerals will be given under the respective
particles, as too lengthy explanations would be required in this place.
Section Six.
the adverb.
By the name of adverb is distin^ished that class of words used to modify
the sense of a verb, adjective, participle, or other adverb, and usually placed
near what is modified, as he writes welly I readily admit, you speak correctly ,
very cold, naturally brave, very generally acknowledged, much more clearly.
(All but one of the foregoing are from the Century Dictionary.)
Adverbs may be classified, according to the same authority, as follows:
(1) Adverbs of place and motion, as /tere, there, up, out, etc. (2) Of time
and succession, as now, then, often, ever, etc. (3) Of manner and quality,
as so, thus, well, truly, faithfully, etc. (4) Of measure and degree, as much,
more, very, enough, etc. (5 ) Of modality, as surely, not, perhaps, therefore, etc.
According to Earle, one of the most distinguished authorities on English,
there are three kinds of adverbs, the flat, flexional, and phrasal.
(1) The flat adverb, which is a noun or adjective used in an adverbial
position, is not considered as correct in books and papers, but is to be
heard daily in conversation, as in walk fast, walk slow, speak loud, speak low,
etc. In German, this form of the adverb is also literary, as ein ganz schones
Haus ( a wholly beautiful house) ; er schreiht gut (he writes well [lit. , good] ) .
Adjecti\es of certain classes may be used this way in Tagalog, and espe-
cially those of manner or degree, such as magaling (well) ; masamd (badly) ;
madali (quickly, brieflj^), etc., which are also adjectives. There are also
flat adjectives by signification, which are explained under the section to
which they belong by meaning.
(2) The flexional adverb, which is that distinguished by a termination
in English and allied languages like ward, ling, long, meal, and ly, as in
backward, darkling, headlong, piecemeal, and the great number in ly, such
as quickly, quietly, rapidly, etc. Tagalog has no particle which thus marks
out an adverb from other parts of speech.
(3) The phrasal adverb, which is also called an adverbial phrase, is
greatly used in English, and is to be found in abundance in Tagalog.
Among English examples may be cited at best, at length, by all means, for
good and all, on every side, etc.
There are also both in English and Tagalog what may be styled the ad-
verbial pronouns, such as yes and no, together with the negatives not, nor,
and neither.
Unlike English adverbs nearly every Tagalog abverb may be made into
a verb if the proper particle is used, and the border between adverbs and
prepositions is very indefinite in some cases and must be determined by
the aid of the context.
As the form and composition of a word is subordinate to its meaning, the
Tagalog adverbs hereafter considered will be classified according to mean-
ing, irrespective of form.
Digitized by
Google
84 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
I. Adverbs of place and motion which answer the question adanf
* * where? ' ' are usually expressed in Ta$ralog by sa followed by a root. This
root so»iietimes has the expulsive particle i prefixed.
Where. Sdan.
Where? Sdanf
Where indeed? Sdan nga.
Anywhere, wherever, somewhere. Sdan man,
Everv where. Sdanadan man. Sdan reduplicated.
Nowhere. Sdan ma^y wold.
From all parts, may also mean to or Sa sdan man,
in all parts.
Where are you from? Taga sdan hat Siyd "he** and snld
' • they ' * may be used in place of ha.
Sdan may be verbalized with um inserted, forming sumdan (to be some-
where permanently), and also with ma {na)^ in the latter case taking the
idea of to be somewhere either temporarily or permanently, as the case
may be. Ex.: Nasdan ana inabahao na ilogf (Where is the ford of the
river?); Masasdan siyd hagaf (Where will he be?).
Saan may be further verbalized by pa^ in which case ** to go* Ms inherent
iu the meaning. Ex.: Napasdan siyd? (Where did he go?); Napasasdan
dydf (Where IS he going?); Pasasdan siydf (Where will he go?).
Sdan has been corrupted to hdan in some districts, owing to Bicol and
Visayan influence, the former using haen and the latter hain.
Sdan has an entirely different meaning with pa following or even alone
in some cases, expressing a negative idea similar to **not yet," etc. In
Ilocano sdan is also the negative participle **no.*'
Saan pa f also means * * where then? ' ' in rather a sarcastic manner. With
di added to s&an pa an affirmative interrogative meaning is expressed, as
Sdan pa dt tol6of (How can it not be true?).
It must also be noted that in Manila and places where Spanish is largely
spoken that some particles are used in a different manner than is the
custom in rural districts. Thus, ** Where are you going?" is expressed in
the country by sdan kn parorodn^ but in Manila by sdan ka paparodn.
Other expressions of like nature are Sdan ang paroroonan mof in which
the definite is used, and sdan ka nagmuldf (Where did you start from?).
Another similar question is Sdan ka nangagdling? (Where are you coming
from?). The answer is generally given with sa in the sense of from: Sa
Malabdn (from Malab6n); sa Irhvis (from Imus); sa hdhay ko (from my
house), etc.
There are four simple adverbs of place, which have heretofore been
explained at length, and here only some idiomatic uses will be set forth.
These adverbs are dini, ditdy diydn\ and ddon,
Diniy meaning *' here" (toward the speaker), is verbalized by mtw, in
the sense of taking a place near the speaker, etc. Ex.: Dumini ka (take
your place here); dungmidini ako (I am taking my place here}; dungmini
akd (I took my place here); dirini akd (I will take my place here).
With mag (nag) it is verbalized in the transitive sense, requiring an
object. Ex. : Magrini ka niyang tindpay (put some bread here by me).
With pa the idea of motion toward the speaker is expressed. Ex.:
Parini ka (come here toward me). This last form may be further com-
pounded with the particle pa, definite, corresponding to magpa, indefinite,
to express the idea of commanding, requesting, etc. Ex. : Paparinihin mo
81 Carlos (tell Carlos to come over here). **Over there" is expressed by
sa rini.
DUdf meaning **here" (equally close to both speaker and person ad-
dressed), is verbalized in the same way as dim, Ex.: Dumitd ka (take
your place here) ; parito ka (come here) ; paparitohin mo si Carlos (tell Carlos
to come here) ; Pinaparitd mo siydf (Did you tell him to come here?). The
four adverbs under discussion admit thedefinites of i and an. That in i is
compounded with ka^ forming ika, ikina; and in may be used when united
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 85
with pa, the definite of magpa, as may be seen in the last two examples.
The future is Papanritohin mo sivd? (Will you tell him to come here?) and
the present PinaparirUS mo Hyaf (Are you telling him to come here?).
Reason or cause is expressed by tfca, ikina prefixed to the adverb as a rule,
although ** why?*' can also be expressed by anof as in Aand ka ritdf (Why
are you here?). The more idiomatic way, however, is with ikina, as An6
ang ihinaparitd mot (What was the reason you came here?). Han is used
if the idea of place is to be made emphatic, as Sino InigA ang jnnaritohan mof
(Who did you come hereto see?). "Time*' is generally expressed by pa-
nahdn, which also means "weather," as An6U dt ka naparitd sa kapanaho-
nanf (Why didn' t you come here in time?) . * * What ' ' is expressed by and,
as Nagaand ka diid? (What is your business here?); Magaand »iyd ditdf
(What is he going to ao here?); Anhin bagdf (What of that?) or (What is
there to do?); Inaand kaf (What is being done to you?); Inand kaf (What
was done to you?); Hindi ha maaand (nothing can be done to you). Du-
mitdy with the particle magka and its variations, signifies ** to come here for
a particular reason or cause." Ex. : Ay at nagkadumiio ka? ( For what par-
ticular reason did you come here?) ; Ang ipinagkakadamitd ko^y si Cabemng
Tomds ( the * * cabeza ' ' Tomas is particular! j^ responsible for my being here) .
The first of these two sentences is indefinite, grammatically speakmg, and
the last definite. For their grammatical construction see the particle
magkoy which is used with this signification with all four of the simple
adverbs of place under discussion. For a tabular conjugation of ditd see
the tables of verbs. To express simply the time or reason for "coming
here," i with pa may also be used, although ikina is more correct. Ex. :
And ang ipinaritd mof ( Why did you come here?). The indefinite is more
usual with kaildn, "when." Ex.: Kaildn ka naparitdf (When did you,
come here?); Kahapon (yesterday).
Dlydny "there" (near at hand), has the same construction as the fore-
going adverbs. Ex. : Mapdiydn ka nang idhig ( put some water over there ) .
Doov, there, yonder, is perhaps more commonly used in its various
modifications than the other three simple adverbs of place. It may be
verbalized with urn, pa, puma, and magka as they are, with the same effect
upon the root. Fa an<i magka modify the dtor.
Ex. : Dumdon ka (station yourself there). Pardon ka (go there). Papa-
rooninmosi ( arloM (tell Carlos to go there). Pinapardon mo siyd? (Did
you tell him to go there?) Sdan ka parordonf (Where are you going?)
Some localities, notably Manila, repeat the particle pa with the present
and future of the adverbs of place; but this is irregular and incorrect. It
is unknown to the early writers. Aling bayan angparoroonanmof (What
town are you going to? Lit. "Which town will be your going place?")
And ang ikinaparordon mo sa Maynildf (Why are you going to Manila?
Lit. "What the cause of going there your to Manila?") Ay al magka-
dumdon kaf (For what particular reason are you going there?) Ang iki-
naparordon kd'y dalauin ang dking kapaiid na babaye (I am going there to
visit my sister).
Jfa^ita prefixed to ddon alone means "to have."
Ex. : Ku7ig magkardon sand akd nang maraming pilak, ay hindi akd mag-
knkaganitd (If I had plenty of money, I would not be in this fix). Ang
pinagkakaroonan niyd ang Bulacdn (He has considerable property in Bula-
cdn) . Ang ipinagkakardon niyd ang pamana sa kaniyd nang ind niyd, ( He
[she] has plenty on account of the inheritance to him [her] from his [her]
mother. )
The foregoing illustrates the indefinite idea of the third singular personal
pronoun, which may mean either " he" or "she." In Enghsh this is con-
fined to the plural, "they" indicating either sex, as Tagalog «iW, while
Spanish distinguishes bv ellos, "ellas." Man gives the idea with d6on, "to
be there," "to have there," magka indicating really "to have plenty."
Ex.: Bigydn mo sild nang manddon (take one of those over there), isanp
manddon (sangddon) (one out of many things over there); «awd<5on^ larni-
lang sukd (a small bottle of vinegar); isang madordon (a person who has
Digitized by
Google
86
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
plenty). The word Toay prefixed to ddon forms the well-known and much-
used indefinite mayrdon^ to have. Ex.: Mayrdon hang bagd nang tind-
payf (Have you any bread?) Mayrdon kang paroroonanf (Do you have
to go tnere?) 06 nga, mayrdon akong paroroonan ( Yes, indeed, I have to
to go there?). Mayrdon ka nang Uangtaonf ( How old are you? Lit. Have
you of how many years?) Mayrdon akong dalawang poud (I am twenty;
lit. Have I twenty.) With some suffixed particles ddon is modified as
follows: Ddon din (in the same place there); ddon sa ibd; ddon dao (in an-
other place); sa ddon (over there); sa ddon man (anywhere over there).
Many phrasal adverba are made by the particle sa which means among
other things at and in when placed before a root. Among the most impor-
tant phrasal adverbs of place with sa are:
In front; facing.
In the presence of ; before; opposite;
to the front.
Behind; back of.
Joined to.
At the edge or side of.
On the other side of; beyond.
Outside.
Inside; within.
Above; up.
Below; down.
Sa tapat; iapat sa. Ex. : Itong hdhay
ay tapat sa silarTgan (this house
faces the east) . Tapat has also the
idea of setting out in rows, regular
order, etc., such as trees, plants,
etc.
Sa hdrap, Sa hdrap nang capitdn
(before the captain).
Sa likod, Ex. : Ang mangd hdhay sa
likod nang cuartel (the houses back
of the barracks). Ang likod (the
back).
Sa piling.
Sa tabi; synonym sa siping.
Sa kabild. With mag the idea of
**both»' is brought in. Ex.: Sa
magkabild (on both sides); and by
the reduplication of the first two
syllables of the root the idea of
* * air ' is expressed. Ex. : Sa mag-
kahikabild (on all sides). Napa-
rodn Slid sa kabild nana Hog (they
went over there beyond the river).
Sa magkabild nang katauan (on
both sides of the body). Kabild
has also the idea of "partly" and
is used idiomaticallv when speak-
ing of rice. Ex.: itong kanin ay
kahildn (this rice is but half
cooked ) . In speaking of anything
else, with the same idea in mind,
the usage is quite different. Ex. :
Itong sisiu ang kahiUVy lutdH ang
kabild' y hindi (this chicken is
partly cook and partly not).
Sa labds.
Sa Idob. This phrase is much used
to express the idea of the hearty
speaking in a moral sense. Ex.
Sa tanang Idob (whole-heartedly
with all the heart).
Sd itdas (from tdas and expulsive
particle i).
Sa ibabd (from babd^ idea of low,
humble, with expulsive particle i).
This word should not be confused
with the following.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
87
Upon; on; above.
Sa ihahao (from hahao and i) . Ex. :
Sa ihabao nang bundok (upon the
mountain [mountains] ). Bah&o,
with accent upon the last syllable,
means past^ as hahdo sa hating
gab i (past or after midnight). It
also means " near** in some places.
Ex.: Babdo bagd ang bayan sa
atinf (Are we perchance near the
town? ) Maldpit is now the ordinary
word used for **near."
Sa ildlim ( from IdHm^ root of idea of
depth and expulsive particle i).
Sa gilvd. Ex.: Nasagitud tayo sa
paglakad (we are halfway in the
march [trip or journey]).
Sa pagitan ( from gitnd ) . Sa pagitan
nang lansangan (in the middle of
the street ) . Also means ' * term. * *
Ex.: Walong buan ang pagitan
(a term [period] of eight months).
Sa may. Ex. : Sa may cuartel (close
to the barracks).
Hangdn. Ex. : Sdan ang tungo mof
( Where is your trip to?) Hangdn
MaynUd, Hangdn ditd (up to
here). Also has the meaning of
** until." Ex.: Hangdn bukas
(until to-morrow).
Sa kanan.
Sa kaliwd,
Pahdrap,
Paialikod,
Sa bdhay.
Sa bayan.
Sa biikid.
Sa bundok.
Under; beneath; at the bottom of.
Halfway (between two points).
In the middle.
Around; about; close to.
As far as; up to.
To the right.
To the left.
Forward.
Backward.
At home; in, to, or from the house.
In, to, or from town.
In, to, or from the country.
In, to, or from the mountains.
These adverbial phrases can be indefinitely increased by the use of sa
with the proper root.
Toward. Dako. Ex. : Dako sdan ang tungo ni
Juanf (Toward where is John's
trip?) Dakong Maynild (toward
Manila ) . Dako sdan ang tungo mof
Toward where is your trip?) Da-
kong bayan ko'y ang tungo ko (my
trip is toward my town). Taga
sdan kaf (Where are you from)?
BosobosOy p6 (Bosoboso, sir). Da-
kong kanan (toward the right).
Dakong kaliwd ( toward the left) .
Approaching. Ddpit. Ex.: Dopit Maynild (ap-
proaching Manila). Ddpit ibabd
(approaching the lower country).
Da}nt sa iyd (approaching you).
Ddpit has also an idea of ** be-
yond," "on the other side of."
II. Adverbs of time and succession, which generally answer the ques-
tion kaildnf (when?), are quite numerous in Tagalog, showing that the
conception oi time was well developed for a primitive people, only the
hour and its subdivisions being unknown to the language, except as de-
Digitized by
Google
88
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
rived from Spanish. However, the day was quite minutely subdivided
according to the position or absence of the sun, and while now generally
out of use these terms are also given.
When?
When (used relatively)
Then.
Always; constantly
"whenever").
Kaildnf Ex.: Kaildn sUd naparUdf
(When did they come nere?)
iTai^n man (always). With neg-
ative, translated "by never. Ex.:
Kaildn man hindi (always
not or never ) . Kaildn man nyd^ y
hindi ungmiinum nang capi (he
[she] never drinks coffee) . Kaildn
pa man (no more), also kaikailan
ma^y hindi. Dl mamakaildn (many
times).
(1) Kun. Commonly used only with
present and future tenses, but may
be used with past indefinite if ac-
tion is represented as customary.
Ex.: Kun dardting ana capitdiiy
alamin mo ak6 (when the CAptain
comes, let me know [future]).
Kun akd'y narordon sa Maynild
napasasaluneta akong malimit
(when I was in Manila I often
went to the Luneta [past time with
customary action]). Kun tuwi
( whenever) . Kung minsan (some-
times). Kun is also used as a
preposition, "if ". See under "if".
(2) Nang. Used with both definite
and indefinite past tenses. Ex.:
Nang sild^ y dindlao niyd kagahi^ wold
ritd sildf (when he came to visit
them last night, they were not
here) . Nang dumnting tiyd naka-
kain na ak6 (when he came I was
through eating).
(3) N6(m^ niy&n, niydon. These
words mean really "in those
davs," "at that time," etc. Ex.:
NSon isang drao ay vangyari ang
pagbahakd sa Imv^ (on that day
the fight at Imus took place).
N6on, nariid pa sa Maynild ang
mangd Castila (while the Span-
iards were yet here in Manila).
Perhaps "then" in some cases
would be the best translation.
D6on. Ex.: Kun kumain ka^ doon
mxiaalaman mOy kun and ang kanin
(when you eat then you will know
what you are to have) . With pa
following doon has an idiomatic
use. Ex.: Bald pd'y gumagawd
nang ganitS, ddon pa kun lumaki?
(A boy yet, and doing so, what
will he be then when grown up?)
(sometimes Tuiul, Ex.: Tawing iuwi {tuvAnang
tuwi) mayrdon kang gawd ( you have
something to do always ) . Tawing
sumulat ka (whenever you
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
89
Never.
Sometimes.
Seldom.
Often.
Since.
Ago; since.
As soon as.
write ). As adjective tutvl
means * * every. " Ex. : tuwing drao
(every day). In some cases it
means ** as long as.' ' Ex.: Tuwing
dt rnapoul ang pagkatauo (as long
as manhood is not extinct).
Among other expressions may be
mentioned walana humpay, with-
out end ; walang likaty without fail ;
wcUang tafiarij without stop, inces-
santly; walang togot, without rest.
There are two expressions used for
** eternally," formed with the pre-
fix magpa to a root which is fol-
lowed by man sdan. Ex. : Mag-
patidoy man sdan; and magpardling
(ddting) man sdan. Another
phrase is magpakaUdn man, or
ma>gpamkailan man, both of which
signify always.
KaUdti man hindi.
Kung minsan. Maminmnminaan,
{ from time to time ; now and then) .
Misandoud ( rarely ) . Ex. : Misan-
doua Idmang ang pagparitd mo
(your cominc here is rare).
Bihira, Ex.: Bihirang tungmaiangis
itong batang itd (this child seldom
cries).
Malimit. Ex.: Malimit akong mng-
musMat (I write often).
Tamhay. Ex.: Tambay hang nalis
(ungmalis) (since you left).
Muld. Ex.: Muld kahapon (since
yesterday). The particle pagka
sometimes denotes "since," as in
the phrase pagkabaid ko (since my
childhood). "From" would be
an equally correct translation.
Kamaka ( from ka and m aka) . Kama-
kailang drao ( some days ago ) . Be-
fore a cardinal followed by drao,
"day," ifcamaA^a indicates the num-
ber of days which have elapsed.
Ex. : Kamakalawd ( day before yes-
terday ) , lit. , * 'two days ago ;' ' kama-
kalimang drao ( five days ago ) . Ka
prefixed with pa following a root
also indicates "since." Ex.: ^a-
hapon pa (since yesterday). Ka
alone indicates past time, with
some roots. Ex.: Kahavon (yes-
terday), from hapon (afternoon).
Kagabi (last night), from ka and
gabi (night).
So, usea adverbially, denotes imme-
diate action, usually beginning a
subordinate clause, which refers to
a principal clause. Ex. : Sa pag-
kamMay niyd nang lindol siyd'y
tungmakbd sa labds (as soon as he
Digitized by
Google
90
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Now.
Already.
Yet.
Before; withal; as it may be.
Before; a while ago.
Anciently.
he felt the earthquake he ran out-
side. Sapagsabl niyd nitong mangd
tvika ay namatay (as soon as these
words were said by him, he died).
Pag, the definite oimagr, sometimes
indicates this idea. Ex.: Pagsabi
ko sa kanild (as soon as I told them) .
Pagka may also have the same
. meaning, as pagkapagadral ko, mag-
papasial ko (as soon as 1 have
studied, I^will go for a walk).
jffgaydn, Ngayon din (right now).
This is also expressed by iigay&n
ngayon, Nagpangaydn or nagpa-
kangaydn ( up to no w ) . Magpanga-
ydn (for the future ) . ifgayong drao
(this day).
Na. This particle is in constant use,
and is always placed last. Ex.:
Napardon na siyd (he has gone
already). There are many other
uses of na in Tacalog, which will
be set forth as they occur in the
examples.
Pa. This particle, as an adverb, is,
like na, always placed after the
word modified. Ex. : Isd pa (one
yet); may rian paf (Is there any-
thing there yet)? It is also used
speaking ironically. Ex. : Ak6 pa
ang parordonf (Will I have to go
there yet ? ) . Indi pa ( not yet) ,
Bago. Ex.: Bago kang burnasa,
walisan mo ang silid (before you
read, sweep the room). — L. Bago
pa (a while ago). Bago, as an ad-
verb of time, always precedes the
verb it modifies.
Kangina, variation kanina. Kangi-
nang tanghali (beioTenoon) ; kan^-
nang umaga (this morning a while
ago). Balanain mo yaong sinabi
kangina (go back to what you were
talking about before). [Keturnto
the th read of your story. J Kangi-
kangina pa (a, little while ago, a
short time ago). Ex.: Kangi-
kangina nariio did (they were here
a short time ago).
Sa una. Sa una pang sa una ( very
anciently). Ex.: Sa unang drao
(in the days of old). Muna, which
always follows its verb, means
** first" either in time or place.
Ex.: Mdsok ka muna (you enter
first [polite expression]). Bago
kumain ka, manhinao ka muna ( be-
fore you eat, wash first [i. e., your
hands] ). — L. Gawin mo muna (do
it first [def.]). Hintay ka muna
Digitized by
Google
TAaALO0 LANGUAGE.
91
Formerly; anciently.
Afterwards.
Later; presently; by and by.
At once; immediately.
At once; immediately; suddenly;
abruptly.
Instantly; at once.
Instantly; like a flash.
Suddenly; in a moment.
Offhand; suddenly. (Used with
verbs of doing and speakinj?. )
After beginning; upon starting, etc.
(wait first [indef.]). Muna, used
with a pronoun without a verb,
comes first, and governs the nomi-
native. Ex.: Muna kayS (you
first); muna ka na (you ahead).
Sa datl.
Sakd. Ex.: Ginavnl ang Pangindon
Dio8 ang langity sakd ang lupa (the
Lord God made the Heavens,
afterwards the earth). Bib. Na-
taud siyd (she laughed); at sakdf
(and afterwards?) L. SakariHsakd
(long afterwards). Manakanakd
(after a long delay). Nagmsakd-
sakd (one who is dilatory in his
work or duties).
Mamayd, Ex. : ^usulat akd mamayd
(I shall write by and by). — L.
Mamayang hapon (later in the af-
ternoon). Mamayamayd (one tirae
or another, little by little). Ex.:
It6*y minamayamayd ko {1 did this
little by little). Magmayd (to do
anything little by little). Magpa
imparts the idea of waiting to this
root and its combinations. Ex.:
Nagpapamayamayd ak6 (I am go-
ing to wait a little while).
Tambina. This word is out of use in
Manila. Ex.: Kumain ka tambing
E indef.]; tambingin mo kumain
def.] (eat at once). Tambingin
mong kunin (take it at once) ; itam-
bing mong ibigay (give it at onCe).
A gad. Ex. : Agarin mong gawin (do
it at once). Commonly used in
Manila.
AlipaJa. Ex.: Alipala nagdlit siyd
(he became angry at once). Also
means "one by one*' in some
places. Ex.: Alipala Hdking kunin
(I will take them one by one).
Kagiat. Ex.: Kagiat na^tagihvXaa
siyd sa ahing maid (like a flash
he disappeared from my view; he
was out of sight instantly ) . Ta^i-
bula^j idea of disappearing or be-
commg invisible.
Kaginsaginsa (from ginsa^ repetition
of root and prefix ka). Varia-
tion kahinsahinsa. Kaalamalam
sometimes means suddenly (from
aUim reduplicated, and prefix iba).
Karakaraka.
Kapag . Ex.: Kapagkain ko
(after I commenced to eat). Ka-
pagpagdral ko (after I began to
study). — L. A'apa^daA;a (from the
beginning), syn. kapagkoudn.
Digitized by
Google
92
TAGALOG LAKOUAGE.
After fininishing; upon finishing.
Until; while.
While; in the meantime.
Early; soon.
Late; tardy.
Yesterday.
Last night.
To-day,
To-morrow.
Midday; noon.
To-morrow.
Midnight.
The ancient Tagalog divisions of the day were:
Kapagka . Kapaakapagdral ko
i after I had finished studying). —
i. Kapngkaraka (from the bigin-
ning; since time eternal).
Hangdn. Ex.: HangdnbUkas (until
to-morrow). Hangdn nabumhay
giyd (while he [she] is living)'.
Bagkds also means ** until".
Sa marUala.
Maagn (from aga, morning). Ex.:
Magtipon kang maagOf hang dumd-
ting ang draOy houag kang rVpima-
pangapa (get ready early, so when
day breaks you will not be grop-
ing around looking for anything).
J^gapay root of **to look around
in haste for something*. — T. P., 3.
Hull. Ex.: Nahuli siyd (he was
late). Ang huling drao (the last
day).
Kahapon. Kahapon sa hapon (yes-
terday afternoon).
Kagabl.
J^gaydn drao.
Bukas. Bukas sa aga (to-morrow
morning).
TanghaH (evidently from Malay,
tanga arif with the same meaning) .
Ex.: Anona horas ang idindting
niydf ( What time [hour] did he
[she] come [arrivej?) Aug idi-
ndting niyd ang tangnah (he came
[arrived] at midday [noon]).
Magpakatanghali (to wait until
noon). Ang ipinagpakatanghaH
(the cause oi having been delayed
un ti 1 noon ) . Mananghall ( to work
or eat at noon) . Ang pananghalian
(what done or eaten at noon).
But mananghalif with acute accent,
means to travel at midday.
Bukas. Ang kabukasan (the follow-
ing day). Walang buhukasin
(without care for the morrow).
Ex. : Bukas kung makalipaSy sa lingo
hung makalampas ( to-morrow when
passed, on Sunday when gone). —
T. P. , 1 60. Really means * * to-mor-
row and to-morrow and to-mor-
row," Shak., when there is no
reason to believe that it is intended
to do anything. Bukds is the root
of the verb *' to open," and is only
distinguished by the accent.
Hating gabi.
Cry (crow) of the chicken.
Commencing to be light.
Breaking of day.
Becoming morning now.
Tungmikim ang manuk.
Magmamaraling drao,
Bukang liwayway,
Magumaga na.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 93
Morning now. Umaga na.
Day now. Arao na.
The sun is rising now. SisUang na ang drao,
Bisen now. SungmUang na.
A little up now (the sun). Mattdastdas no.
About 9 a. m. Ipangingitiog manuk (lit., "egg laying
of the hen'*).
About 10 a. m. Masai*aolt na ang drao (lit., ** return
now of the sun*').
Midday; noon. Tanghatt
About half past 12. Bagong nakiling ang drao (lit., **the
sun inclines again '* ).
About 1 p. m. Lampdsna (lit., **pafit now**).
About 5 p. m. Hampasin tiJcin ang drao (lit., "to be
touched by the *tiquin* or pole
used by casco men " ).
About sunset. Kauitin palacol (lit., "to be caught
by an ax**).
Sun is beginning to set. Bagong Bvt^ikmk ang drao.
Set now. Lungmuhugna. Another expression
is lunamunod na (lit., "drowned
now**).
Between daylight and dark. Masilim na. Also takip silim.
Night now. Gabi na.
Midnight. Kahoong gabi. The usual word at
present is hating gabi.
The following adverbs of time are also used in Tagalog;
H ourly . Oras-ora^ ( from Sp. , hora^ * * hour * * ) .
Daily. Arao-drao.
Weekly. Lingo-lingo (from Ungo, **week,'*
which also means "Sunday,'* and
is derived from Sp., Domingo^
"Sunday*').
Monthly. Buan-buan {from bttan^ "month and
moon**).
Yearly. Ta6n-ta6n ( from to(5n, * * year * ' ) .
Continually. Parati. Verbalized, this word has
the idea of "perseverance,** and
in the phrase magparating man
«dan means "eternally.** A syn-
onym for parati, in the sense of
* * continually, * ' is paldgi.
Some day. Balang drao.
The particle maJta, in addition to its meanings as a verbal particle, sig-
nifying power, ability, cause, etc., indicates completed verbal action with
verbs of doing, saying, etc., translated by the word "after** with the verb.
Ex.: Makayari nitd^y pardon ka (after you do this, go there).
III. Adverbs of manner and quality, which generally answer the ques-
tion maand? "how?** are numerous in Tagalog, many adverbs of manner
being the corresponding adjectives used adverbially, especially those
compounded with ma. Not all ma adjectives can, however, be so used,
and neither can adjectives which are roots by themselves be used as
adverbs. Thus adjectives like wori/wor?^ (wise), mabait (prudent, etc.),
ulul (crazy) are not used as adverbs in Tagalog.
How? Maand f Ex.: Maand kaydf (How
are you?) Magaling (well).
Maand ang amd ninydf (How is
your father?)
So; thus; in this way. Ganitd (from ditd).
Digitized by
Google
94
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
So; thus; in that way.
So; thus; in that way.
Like (requires genitive); thus.
Like; as; so.
How large; how much in extent?
Ganiydn (from diydn). Oumaniydn
(to act in that manner).
Oandon (from ddon).
Gaydn (from yadn), Gumaydn (to
act in that way). Ex.: Gaydnni
Pedro 81 Juan (Juan is like Pedro) .
Gaya.
Gaalinf Ex.: Gaalinkalayof (How
far? fabout]). Isang horas, pd
(one hour, sir.)
Ga has been quite fully explained under the comparative of adjectives,
to which the reader is referred. Among some examples may be quoted
ga batd ang l6oh mo (your heart is like stone), and gaitohin mo (make it
like this). **Both alike *' is expressed by kaporid, as may be seen by the
examples: sauain mo kapoud sUang dalawd (prohibit them both alike);
ang kapoud mo tduo (like you, a person [fig., your ^'neighbor'*]); akd
wari kapoud mOy walang hail? (Am I perhaps, like you, without judg-
ment?)
Intentionally; purposely.
Voluntarily; willingly.
By force.
Especially; only.
As well as, etc.
As well as; conjointly.
Hurriedly or more quickly (said to
be applied only to whipping).
Paksd, Ex.: Pinaifc«<i m7<i (they did
it intentional 1 v) . Syn., sadiyd.
Another word is tikis. Ex.:
Tinikis nild ( they did it purposely ) .
Kusd. Ex.: Kinusd bagd niydaf
(Did he [she] do it willingly?)
Kinusd niya ( He [she] did it wil-
lingly). With verbs kuM follows
the same construction as to the
particles as do the verbs. Ex.:
Kusain mong tauagin siyd (call
him purposely, i. e., do not for
get to call him). Ikusd mong ita-
pon ltd (throw this out purposely,
1. e., you should have thrown
this out yourself). Pagkusaan
mong bigydn si Juan ( give it to John
voluntarily). Kusd is intensified
by reduplication. Ex.: Waldkang
kusakusang gumawd nang anoman
(you do not do anything with the
least willingness).
Sa pilitan ( from pUit ) . Ex. : PUU na
akd^y pardon ( I am going perforce) .
Bukod. ^x. : Bukod siyang natduag
(he was [has been] summoned
especially). Bukod ka sa lahat
(you are the only one among all).
Marami man ang aindo^y bukod
mayaman si CapHan Luis (there are
many *'principales," but the only
rich one is Captain Luis).
Tangi is sometimes used in this
sense.
Akbay^ var. agbay; agabay; agapay,
Sabay. Ex .:Ang lalaki kasabay nang
bayabe (the man as well as the
woman, or the male as well as the
female). — L.
Sinasandopikd (from sandopikd^ idea
of punishing another).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LABGUAGE.
95
Quickly; hastily.
Except; besides.
Except; excuse me; by permission.
Hardly; scarcely.
Scarcely; hardly.
Nearly; almost.
Accordingly.
Agreeably.
Inside out.
Upside down; reversed.
Slowly; smoothly; noiselessly.
Biald. Ex.: Namatay siyang higld
(he died quickly). — L. Verbal-
ized. Ex.: Biglainmoangtuiolmo
(hasten [abbreviate] your account
[or ston']).
Libdn, Ex.: Libdrk sa iyd, walang
ibang makaparorSon (except you,
there is no other person who can
go there) . Libdn sa iy6 ana muha,
ay dUi ho ibibigay (except that you
are to be the one taking it, I should
not give it).
Tabi. Ex.: Tabi p6, aWy dardan
r excuse me [for going before you,
lor leaving first, etc. ] . ) This is the
shout "cocheros'* use, Tabi/ It
literally means thus: "Aside."
Tabi is also used for a polite cor-
rection or contradiction: Singtabi
sa iydy hindipaydn (you will pardon
me, but it is not just like that).
Tabiharij refuse heap, rubbish
heap, etc.
Bahagydf var. bahagid. Ex.: Ba-
hagid na makasiya (it is hardly
sufficient). — L. A synonym is
bulinyd,
Bihird. Syn. ara; dat-Jui. Ex.:
Datha kong inabutan (I scarcely
reached it). Bihird also means
** seldom.*' Ex., as ** hardly:"
Binibihird ko na ang nagsiparUo (I
think scarcely anyone has come
here yet). Bihirang di riapardon
(scarcely anyone was not there);
i. e., nearly everyone was there).
Mahina pa siyd*y bihirang makald'
kad (she [he] is weak yet, and can
hardly walk [is hardly able to
walk J ) . Bihird is verbalized with
mag axid magka. Ex.: Pagbihirain
mo ang kanin (change the food).
Nagkakabihird sild nanp pagda-
ramit (they differ in their manner
of dressing).
Hdlos. Ex . : Hdlos namatay 8iyd{he
[she] almost died) .
Ay on.
Alin»dnod (from sdnod, to follow,
obey).
Balikiad. Ex.: Baliktad ka niydn
(indef.); baliktarin mo iyan (tiim
that inside out).
Touarik (from touad). Syn, Umandik.
Ex.: Tovurik na banld (light-
headed; injudicious).
Marahan (from dahan). Marahan
dahan or dahan dahan^ very slow-
ly. Dumahan, to go away slowly.
Magdahany to go slowly. Magpa-
karahan^ to go very slowly. Ex. :
Digitized by
Google
96
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Well.
Carefully; in an orderly manner.
Badly.
Hard; roughly; vigorously.
Briefly; quickly.
Strongly.
Magpakarahan hang lumdkad (go
very slowly [indef.]). Pakara-
hanin mo ana paghila (throw it
deliberately [def.]). Mapakara-
han, to go verv smoothly; slowly,
etc. Ex.: Napakarahan na (it
has slowed up already; it has
quiete<i down already, etc.).
There is also a definite with an.
Ex. : Dahanan mo iyang gawd mo
( do that work quietly, etc. ) . Met.
adject. Ex.: Marahan ang l6oh
niyd (he has a magnanimous
heart). Inot inoL very slowly;
** little by little" is not much m
use. Louay louay, little by little,
is about equal to whoay etc., and is
used generally calling to animals.
Mahuti, MabiUing mabuti, very well.
Syn. Maigi.
Mamisay. Mahusay na mahdsay,
very carefully; in a very orderly
manner. Ex.: Itd^ygatvinninyong
mahxisay (do this carefully).
Baloiin mong makdsay (wrap it up
carefully). Hnmdsayy to put in
order; to arrange; to disentangle.
MagpakahtUayy to arrange well; to
settle things with care. Adj.:
* * well kept, ' ' etc. Ex. : Hdsay na
buhok ( well kept hair) . Ang hinu-
my (what disentangled or set in
oriler). Husay na iisap (a care-
ful conversation).
Masamd. Masamang masamAy very
badly. Ex. : NaMogakong moAama
kagabi (I slept badly last night).
Mafakds. Ex. : Houag mo akong lak-
kasan nang pangurupisap (do not
talk to me so much in such a
rough manner) . Kalalakda kang
lumdkad (walk with vigor). Iti-
nolak niyd nang malakds ang bangkd
(he pushed the banca [canoe]
vigorously).
Madalt, var. marali. Combined with
both um and magj an anoma-
lous verb is formed, magdumnltj
to make haste, and in turn this
is used with a noun to indicate
time. Ex.: Magdumaling drao (a
short while, or time) . Examples
as an adverb of madali are: Gnwin
mong madali (do it quickly) ; sabi-
hin mong madali (tell it quickly).
Matibay. Ex. : Talian mong matibay
(tie it strongly) . Walang vunang
tibay pagka8ird*y halinhan (there
is no repairing stronger than to
replace what is destroyed ) . — T. P. ,
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
97
Manihay, to prop up; to sup-
Ex. : lyang ba-
Finely.
Frequently; often; closely.
Wisely.
Swiftly.
Judiciously; prudently.
Oustomarily; commonly.
Openly; publicly.
Secretly.
Do you understand?
6855—05 7
822.
port; to sustain. Ex.
Umg ang pinaninibayan nang hdhay
(that stone is the prop of the
house).
Magaling. Magaling na magalingy
very finely. Ex. : Kungmain akong
magaling (I ate finely). Ang
nagagaling^ person improving (as
from an illness). Gnmalingy to
grow better (as a sick person).
Maggalingy to prepare. Galingm,
what prepar^. Mangaling, to
improve greatly. Makagaling^ to
do good. Ex. : Ang mangd gamot
ay siyang ikinagagaling nang mangd
may sakit (medicines are what
cause the sick to recover) . Mag-
pagaling, to prosper. Magpakaga-
ling J to improve; reform, or cor-
rect one's self. Ex. : Magpakaga-
ling kayd nang mangd dml ninyd
(improve yourselves in manners) .
Kagalingan, goodness. Ang pina-
gagcUingj thing bettered (present
tense).
MaJimit, Ex . : Malimit akong natUigd
(I bathe often). Also name of a
close-woven basket made around
Bosoboso, Rizal Province.
Not expressed by a single word, but
by pn rases, tne adjective mani-
nong, wise, being expressed with
the subject in the nominative, and
the verb in the infinitive. Ex.:
Mardnong nyang umdral (he
.teaches wisely), not ungmadral si-
yang mardnongy which would be a
proper construction if mardnong
were an adverb.
Maiulin, Tumulin^ to do anything
swiftly. Mcigtulin, to go swiftly.
Ang ipa^uliny the cause of going
swiftly. Ex. : Papagtvlinin mo ang
bangkd Tmake the banca [canoe]
go swiftly) . Matuling tumakbd to
run swiftly). KatuLinan [abet)]
swiftness).
Sa bait.
Sa ugallj also with abstract, aa kau-
galian,
Sa hdyag,
Sa lihim. lAhim na gawd, a secret
deed. Ang gawang lihim ay naha-
hdyag din (secret deeds are the
very ones found out). — T. P., 515.
Ang lihim ay siyang hdyaq (the hid-
den is what is discovered). — ^T. P.,
414.
Hanit var. ''hanidr'
Digitized by
Google
98
TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
Differently.
Jointly.
Inasmuch.
Forthwith; instantly.
Why not?
Why?
It would be better.
If it were not.
Certainly.
Truly.
Certainly; indeed.
Truly; really.
Ibd. This word also means * * other, * *
* * different, * ' etc. In some ph rases
it has the idea of * * better. ' * Ex. :
Iba angpogong hvM no, sa sungayan
dadakpin pa (better a auail already
caught than a hornea animal yet
to be caught).— T. P., 443; i. e.,
**a bird in the hand is worth two
in the bush.'* — Cervantes. The
earliest form in English says, * * bet-
ter one byrde in hand than ten in
the wood," Hevwood, abt. 1565. —
T. P. , 442, is iba ang pogong hull na,
sa huhuUhin pa (better the quail
already caught than the one still
to be caught). This is found in
Greek: **He is a fool to let slip a
bird in the hand for a bird in the
bush."
Sampun. When followed by nanq,
nitd, namaiiy etc., the final n is
dropped. Syn.,jwa/i.
Oagauntt (from untty idea of a little) .
Ex . : MurUing tiibig ( a 1 ittle water ) .
Kaunttf a little, as in speaking a
language, etc.
Sa mndali. Ex.: Houag hang ma-
balam ddon, sumandali man lamang
(do not delay there more than an
instant). *S!a isang kisap matd (in
the twinkling of an eye).
Sdanpa dtf var. Sadtf Sdan pa dt
gaydnf (Why not that way?)
At and? Ay and f ( Who doubts it?)
At or ay joined with certain parti-
cles means **why?" Ex.: At dit
(Why not?)
Mahanga. Si mahanpa ( better ) . Ka-
hangahanga (admirable) .
Kun dangan, Pakundangan (for the
sake of).
Tantd. Verbalized tantd means to
undertstand. Y.yi.'. Nataianidmo?
(Do you understand it?) Dili ho pa
nataiantd (I don't understand it
yet).
Totdo mandin. Also totdo din; toido
nga ; totoong totdo ( very tru ly ) . To-
tdo manding totdo (very truly, in-
deed).
nga, var. nganit. Ex. : ^yd nga ang
nagnakao (he is certainlv the
thief).
Din. (Changes to rin after some
words. )
IV. Nearly all the adverbs of measure and d^ree have been fully
explained under the comparative and superlative of the adjective. It may
be noted here that the adverb is made superlative by the reduplication of
the adverb, with the proper tie, in the same manner as the adjective.
Many examples have been given on the foregoing pages. The only adverbs
noted here will be Idmang, "only;" dyd na; and sukai na, "enough."
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
99
V. Adverbs of modality, such as "surely," not, ** perhaps," etc., have
been treated under other adverbs or will be included with the adverbial
pronouns and expressions of affirmation, negation, and doubt.
Affirmative adverbs are fairly numerous in Tagalog. The principal are:
Yes.
Indeed; without doubt
Also; likewise; as well.
Should.
Would; should; could (idea of com-
pulsion).
Oo. Op6 (yes, sir [or madamj).
Oo nga and 60 nganit (yes, in-
deed). Pa6o (to say yes). Ang
ipado ( what said ) . Ang pinaoohan
(person to whom yes has been
said).
Pala. Siyd pcUa (it is he, indeed).
This wora is used in asserting
when a thing is certain. Ex.:
Tndi pala si Pedro ang nagnakao?
(Is Pedro the thief without
doubt? ) Siyd pala ( he is, indeed ) .
Kapala pa (it is clear). Ex.:
Kapala pa*y parordon akd (it is
clear that I am going there).
Kapala pa^y dl parordon akd (it is
clear [of course] that I am not
going there).
Namdn, Man (even).
Dmn, Ex.: Kun nyd^y mMai di-
siny ay parordon sana akd (if he
should write, I would go there).
Sana. Ex. : Ibig ko $ana°y mmUlat,
rwunft wald akong kapanahonan
(I would like to write, out I have
no time). Akd ang pardon sana,
bago ikatt^y naparitd (I had to go
there, before you came here).
The principal negative adverbs are as follows:
No.
Not
I don't want to.
Not
Not
Hindi
Indl, Indi pa (not yet ) . Indt man;
iwdfrtn (neither; not either). Indi
na (not now). Ind{ Idmang (not
only, solely ) . Indt iydn (not that) .
Aaydo akd. A* [pronounced abrupt-
ly] (I don't like it). Kaayavuin
[abst] (dislike). Ang inaayauan
(what disliked or refused).
Di. Ex. : Di isa man; di man naud
(in no way). Dt man; di pa (not
yet). Di anhinf (What matter?)
Di anhin dao na (for it is said
that ). Dt umand (it is said).
Di andpaf (How can it be?) Dt
nga salamcU (may it be thus).
Itd*y dt maigi (this is not good).
Di sino ( to who else) . Ex. : Di sino
ang daingan two, kundt ang capitanf
(To who else should your com-
plaint be made except the cap-
tain?)
Dilif varia. diri, Mapadirty to say
no. Ang pinadirinan^ person to
whom no is said (present tense).
Magpadiriy to say **no*' repeatedly.
Ang pinagdirian, the person to
Digitized by
Google
100
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
whom **no'' has been said many
times (past tense). Padili kaj
say no. Dill rin, no indeed. At
the end of a sentence dill some-
times means ** or not." Ex. : Ba-
bdyad sildf dilif (Will they pay or
not?)
No (forbidding). Houag. Ex.: Houag na (do not do
it now [presupposes previous com-
mand] ) . Houagi iyan ( leave that !
drop that ! ) Houagan mo iydn ( let
that alone ) . Houagan mong kunin
(do not take it). Houagan mong
itapon (do not throw it out).
Houagan mong tingnan (do not
look at it). Houag kang pardon
(do not go there). Pahouagin mo
iyang tduo niydn (tell that man not
to do that). Pahouagan mo iydn
diydn aa bold (forbid that to that
child).
There are a few adverbs of doubt in Tagalog, as well as some phrases
meaning the same. They are:
Perhaps.
Possibly.
Why? For what reason?
Perhaps.
I don't know.
If it could be thus.
Bagd.
Kayd. Kayd nga (just because, just
for that reason). Used with af-
firmative sentences. Kayd nganit
(as soon as ) . Kayd iTggani ( since ) .
Used with negative sentences.
Makakayd, to be able (in a phys-
ical sense). Kayd is also any
hunting or fishing utensil or in-
strument.
Wari. Ex.: At akd wari pardon f
(Why do I have to go there?)
With neg., At di wari ak6 pardon f
(Why don't I have to go there?)
Upan. It is never put last in a
sentence.
Audn. Do not confuse with adyao
(I don't want to).
Naud. Siyd naud (it may be this
way). IJsed for *'amen."
THE PREPOSITION.
The preposition, which serves to connect a noun to the sentence, in the
same manner that the conjunction introduces or attaches sentences, is not
as highly developed in Tagalog as in English, and for this reason the same
preposition means what it would take several different ones to express in
English. The principal Tagalog prepositions are:
Sa, Ex.: (in) Sa bayan (in town);
In; to; from; against; at;
per; between; with; of;
tor; across.
by; on;
among;
8c bdhay (in the house); (to) aa
ali Aro (to my aunt); sa amain ko
(to my uncle); sa amd ko (to my
father); sa ind ko (to my mother),
these also mean **for" my aunt,
etc.; sa bdhay (to the house); sa
iydn bdhay (to that house) ; (from)
sa bdhay (from the house);
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 101
(against) laban sa kaauay (against
the enemy); (at) sa bdhay (at the
house); (per) tcUld sa sangdd (8
per cent); (between) sa magaling
at masamd ( between good and bad ) ;
(with) sama sa kaniydng dnak
(she is going with her child) ; (of,
rare ) ; ( among, anusual) ; ( f or )
patungo ko sa America ( I am leav-
ing for America); (across, rare).
Sa is verbalized, the verbs thus
formed being explained later.
Without. WaM. Ex.: WaJd akma salapi (I
am without money ) . Magwaldy to
run away; to ^et rid of. Mawald^
to lose; to miss. Ex.: Nawnldn
akd nang lakds ( I lost the strength ) .
Makawaldy to be able to run away.
Ex. : Hindi makawald ngaydn (it is
not possible to run away now).
Magpawald, to pardon, forgive.
Wald with in also means to remit
or cancel. Ex. : Walin mo na ana
iUang ko sa iyd (cancel the debt I
owe you ) . Magkatuald, to go apart,
to break away. Ex.: Papagka-
walin mo kami (let us quit [as
partners]) (excl.). Sinongwaldf
(Who is absent?) Wald ka kaha-
pon (you were absent yesterday).
May ikinawawald ka nang balang
naf (Isthereanythingyoulack?)
Walang wald (absolutely nothing) .
Nawald sa kamay ko (it escaped
from my hand). Mawald man
isang anuang kalakian, houag ang
isang salilaan (better to lose a cara-
bao bull than a moment of conver-
sation. — T. P., 869. Ibd ang may
ay-ay sa wald (it is better to have
a scarecrow than to be without
one). — T. P.,866. Nagmamayr6o*y
wald (they pretend to have some-
thing, but are destitute). — T. P.,
867. Mapipilit ang mardmot, ang
waWy hindl (the miser may be
forced [to give something], but he
who has nothing, no).— T. P., 868.
Walang masamang kaniyd^ walang
maigi sa ibd (faultless what is his,
good for nothing what is of
another).— T. P., 870. Wald also
means " the open sea, a gulf," etc.
Magpawald (to put to sea). Ex.:
Nagpawald ang Moro nang kani-
yar\g samsamin (the Moro put to
sea with his booty).
Of (and family or associates). Kand, Ang bukid kand ali ko (the
field of my aunt and her family).
Paka nd sa Juan kand (go to Juan
and his family).
Digitized by
Google
102 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
Of ( genitive of « ) . Ni, Ex.: Ang niogan ni Lvis ( Louis'
cocoanut palm grove). Angbdhay
ni Tomas (Thomas' house).
Of (gentitive of ang), Nang, Ex. : Ang bdhay nang amd ko
(my father's house).
To (dative, etc. of *i)' Kay. Ex.: lUmg tungkdd ay hay
Juan (this cane is John's [is to
John]).
Against. Ldban; Idban sa. Ex. : Ikao^y Idban
sa dtin (you against me). Isang
hokbo ldban narmn sa ibd ( one army
against another). Ma^ldban (to
resist or struggle against).
From. Bdhat. Ex.: iSdan ha nagbdhatf
(Where did you come from?)
From. Muld. Ex. : }fuld ngaydn (from now
on). Sa muld (from the begin-
ning). Ex. : Muld sa lAnes hangdn
sa viemes (from Monday until
Friday ) . Muld sa Maynila hangdn
sa Santa Mesa (from Manila as far
as Santa Mesa). Magmuld (to
start; to commence).
THE CONJUNCmON.
Genuine conjunctions are rather scarce in Tasalog, but many other words
may be used as a conjunction would be in English to join sentences together.
The principal ones are:
And. At. This loses the vowel in many
cases, being pronounced with the
word preceding as a final t, and in
such cases is written '^
Together with. Kasamd (from ka and samd) .
Not only — but. Hindt Idmang — kundi bagkds.
Unless. Houag Idmang.
Even; as well as. Sabdy.
Or. Kayd.
Or not. Dili. Also man.
Either — or. Magin — magin.
Or. (Sp.)
The foregoing are called binding conjunctions as to the first four and
alterative conjunctions as to the last four. The following are called adver-
sative conjunctions. They are:
But. ifguni; kundi; datapoua; subali; cdin-
tana. I^uni never begins a prin-
cipal clause, but alwavs a subordi-
nate one, and ^nerally in an an-
swer. Ex. : Ibig kosanang kumain,
ngunVl hindt ak6 mangyayari (1
would like to eat, but I am not
able to). — L. '<, from a<, is almost
invariably joined to nguni. Kundt
is used for subordinate clauses, gen-
erally when the principal one has
a negative meanmg. Ex.: Hindi
lalaki, kundf babaye ang ibon (the
bird is not a male, but a female).
Datapoua^ which generally take H,
means *'but" still stronger than
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
103
But rather.
Neither — nor.
Although; though.
Although ( more formal than above) .
Ever so much, although (giving a
reason or making an excuse).
Although.
Since; whereas.
No matter if; even if.
What; because .
But; yet.
Some conjunctions may be styled
Tagalog are:
Why?
Because (giving reason).
kundit denotine a sharper contrast,
as between rich but miserable, etc.
Suhali means **but for,** etc., as
conditional, yl/tn/ana, which takes
H in beginning a clause, means
"but for all that,* 'etc. Verbalized
the two foregoing words mean ** to
except.*' Bago is sometimes used
in the sense of * * but. * * Ex. : Tan-
ghaH najbago^ y wald pa siyd (noon
already, but he is absent yet).
Kundt bugkds. These words may be
used alone in this sense, and may
also be joined together.
Man — man. Man — manhindi rin,
Ex.: Wald kami bigds man, itlog
man (we have nothing, neither
rice nor e^.
Bagamdn. j£x.: Bagamdn dukhd n
Juany sa puri namd/y maydman siyd
(though Juan is poor, he is rich in
a good name).
Bistd* L Butd' t napopoot siyd sa akin,
ay bibigydn din ako (although he is
angry at me, it will be given to me).
Mataymdn. ILx,: Mataymdnakdynaa
kaibig paritd, ay dt ko makayanan,
(although I wished to come, I was
not able to [I had no strength]).
Kahi, var. kahimatf kahinydy kahi-
nyd man, kahVt. Ex. : Kahima H
di mdyaq sild, parordon din akd,
(although they do not consent, I
shall go there).
Palibhasa (from Sanskrit, paribhd-
shd, sentence, reprimand, etc.) . It
is followed by *t/ in sentences. As
an adverb it is eoual to kayd nga ;
kayd pala, as well as to ** since *'
and ** whereas.** As a noun it
means * * irony. * * Magpalibhasa ( to
speak ironically).
SukdAn, Ex.: Magpapakabusog muna
siyd, sukddn siya*y magkasakit (he
will gorge himself first, even if he
makes himself sick).
Mayapd, var. mayapdU, little heard.
Bago. Ex . : /St/a* y ang may sola, bago
akd ang pinarusahan (they are the
ones at fault, but I am the one who
has been punished).
* causative.** The piSncipal ones in
Bakinf \2iT. bdkit. Bdkit dtf (Why
not?) Bdkit also means **as,'*
**how," etc., in sentences. As a
noun bdkit means an old monkey
with developed teeth. AndHf also
means *'why?"
Sa jmgkaH.
Digitized by
Google
104
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
A fifth group of conjunctions is generally that called ** conditional."
Tlie significations of the members of this group are self-explanatory.
If; rather. Kun,
Unless. Kun diri Idmang; kun dt Idmang;
liban na.
As if it were. Kun sana m.
Were it not for. Kun dangan; dangan.
Provided. Kun Idmang; houag Idmang,
Lest. Baka, var. makd.
The sixth and last group of conjunctions is that of the class called "con-
clusives'* in some ^mmars and "illatives'* in others. In Tagalog the
principal ones of this class are:
That (relative).
That.
Consequently; that is to say.
Therefore (consequently).
In order that
Inasmuch; in so far as.
Nang. Ex.: Magpagamot ka^ nang
ikdo ay gumaling (allow yourself
to be treated, so that you may be
better). — L.
Na. Ex.: Nagsabl siyd na akd'y
natulog (he said that I was asleep).
Dt yata.
Sa makatouid ( lit. * * in other words ' ' )
Ex. : Nakita ko sild kagab-i, sa ma-
katouid hindi sild sungniakay (I
saw them last night, therefore
they did not embark).
Upan, It is never put last in a
clause.
Yamangy var. yayamang; yayang;
hayamang; hamang. Ex.: Manq-
yayaring gavAn niya yayaman siyd^y
goheniador-general (he is able to
ao it, inasmuch as he is governor-
general) .
THE EXCLAMATION.
The exclamation, or interjection, can hardly be regarded as a part of
speech, compared with verbs, nouns, adjectives, etc., but for want of a
better classification they may be treated here. They are generally self-
explaining, and many seem to be roots used as imperatives of the verb.
The most characteristic Tagalog interjections are:
Dear me! Alas!
Ouch! Wow!
Oh how ! (Always follows.)
Oh how ! (Always follows. )
Good! Fine!
Poor thing!
Would that it may be so! Oh
that !
Quick!
Be silent (to one)!
No talk! Silence!
Lightning! (Oh, hell!)
My mother!
What a pity!
Move on! Go ahead!
Ahd!
Aroy! Aray!
AyaA! (mostly used by women).
Bapda. May be used together,
bapda preceding. Bapda is more
in use by men.
Buti nga!
Kaauaaud!
Kahimanuari! Naud! Maand!
DaW
Houag kang magingayf
Houag kayong magingay!
Lintik!
Nakd/ Nakd! (Contraction from
ind ko, )
Sayangf
Sulong/
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 105
Look out! Aside! Take care! TaM/ Hag/
Stand back! XJrong!
Look! Behold! Here it is! Manad!
Tagalog cursing is rather peculiar. It has evidently been derived from
native sources and not from contact with the Spaniards. Among the most
usual expressions are:
May a crocodile eat you! Kanin ka nang huaya!
May the earthquake swallow you up! Lamunin ka nang lindol!
May a snake bite you! Takain ka nang ahas!
May the lightning strike him! Tinamadn siyd nang liniik!
Section Seven.
THE VERB.
I. * * The verb is distinguished from all other words by marked characteris-
tics and a peculiar organization. *' — Earle. The eminent philologist speaks
thus of the English tongue, but his remarks apply equally to Tagalog. He
further defines a verb as '* the instrument by which the mind expresses
its judgments,'^ a definition which was first enunciated by the Danish
philologist Madvig, in his Latin grammar (Copenhagen, 1841, 8th ed.,
1889). Madvig calls a verb udsagnsordy literally ** out-saying- word."
Other characteristics of the verb have beien noted and have given names
to the class, such as the German ZeUwort (time-word), and Ewald's
Thatwort (deed- word). But in Tagalog the line between nouns and
verbs is much less than in English, where it is still less than in Latin,
Greek, and other languages of southern Europe.
II. The simplest verbal form is the imperative, which consists of the
root, followed by ka (thou) or kayd (you; ye). An adverb of time is some-
times added to the phrase for emphasis. Ex.: Ldkad ka na! (walk
on, now!) Mp ka! (Think!) Aral ka! (Teach!) Dald mo ddon {take it
there). Dald mo ditd (bring it here). As in English, many of the roots
used as imperatives may be used as nouns also. Araly as a noun, means
*'doctrine" or "teaching.*' Ex.: An^ dral ni Monroe* y ang dral nang
America ngaydn (the Monroe doctrine is now the doctrine of America).
III. By prefixing ka to the imperative, and reduplicating the first sylla-
ble of the root at the same time (sign of the present tense) the idea of
quickness, intensity, care, etc., is imparted to the command. Ex.:
Kalaldkad ka! ( Go quick ly ! [to one] ) . Kalaldkad kayd! (Go quickly ! [ye] ) .
Kaildp ka! (Consider it well!) Kadadald mo ddon (take it there care-
fully). As a general thing the agent takes the indefinite form, as will
be seen by the examples, but the definite is used when necessary. Ka
with the reduplicated first syllable of the root has a very different mean-
ing with any other person than the second. With the first and third per-
sons it has the idea of ** time just past," when followed by ^a, as will be seen
by the following examples. Sometimes pa may be omitted. Din may
also take the place of pa, as may also Idmang, In English the time may be
expressed by * * has " or " had, ' ' according to the contex. Karardting kopa(l
have [had] just arrived). Karardting ni Gat Tomds (Don Tomds has just
arrived). Ibig mono makakain sa dminf (Do you wish to eat with us?)
Saldmatf aydoakdUkdkdkain kopa (thanks, I do not care to, I have justeaten) .
Kagagdling nang kapatid na habaye ko sa hayan (my sister has just come
from to w n ) . Kahinigd ko din ( I had j ust lain dow n ) . Kapapanaog ko din
at hapapanhik Idmang nild (I had just gone down and they had just gone up
[i.e., the house ladder]). Kapapdaok Idmang niyd ml bahay (he had just
entered the house) . Kapapdsok din ngaydn ni Esteban sa basahan ( Esteban
[Stephen] has just entered the reading place [i. e., the master's place]).
Kasusulat ko (I had just written it). Katotapm ko (I have just finished it) .
KatojUigpt ko (I had just mended it). Kauutas nako{l had already finished
Digitized by
Google
106 TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
it ) . Kaaalis Idmang niyd ( he has just gone away ) . Kaaalis pa nang dhing
amd (my father has just gone away). Kaaalis din ngaydn nang camtdn
(the captain just now left). With roots like dral^ which have several dis-
tinct meanings according to the verbal particle prefixed, ka does not
require the first syllable 5> be repeated. Ex. : Kapangangdral din ngaydn
nang parS (the priest has just finished preaching). In this case the prefix
is red uplicated , mangdral meaning * * to preach. * ' Kapagalis din ni Benigno
nang datnit (Benigno just took the clothes away). Magalis means '^to
takeaway.'*
IV. Ka has many other functions, which will be taken up later. It is a
most important pajrticle and should be carefully studied. It should be
noted that the pronouns with the imperative are mostlv in the nomina-
tive, while with the first and third persons they are in the genitive.
V. All such sentences are in the definite or so-called ** passive," which
is by far the most usual form in Tagalog, but which would look very
strange many times if translated by the English passive.
VI. The foregoing form is also used to express opposites, the words
being linked by ay. It may be expressed in English oy '^now, again,*'
or ** now, then.'* Ex.:
Now he sleeps, then he wakes. KattUiUog ay kagigising niyd.
He comes in and goes out. Kapapdsok ay kalalabas nivd.
He is coming and going. Karartding ay kaaalis niyd.
Sometimes he walks, then he rests a Kalaldkaaay kahihinldhintd niyd.
little.
Now she laughs and then she cries. Katataua ay kaiiyak.
VII. When a prefix changes the meaning of a word, it is retained in the
imperative. Ex.: Aral ka (teach); pagdral ka (study); pangdral ka
(preach).
VIII. With the exception of the forms already cited, the verb is always
accompanied by particles, which sometimes modify the root itself for
euphonic reasons. Nearly every word in the language can be made a verb
of some kind or another by the use of these particles, which are the strik-
ing peculiarity of the Malay o-Polynesian languages, but have been re-
tained in the primitive tongues of tne Philippines much more than in the
Malay, Javanese, or other cognate dialects. There are some twenty of
these verbalizing particles, o? which seventeen are used as prefixes to
roots, and three are the definite auxiliary particles tn, t, and an. Of these
particles, which are tabled at the end of the handbook, the most impor-
tant are m, i, an, unij mag^ and ma, the last three being indefinite particles.
Pagy corresponding as a definite to mag, is also important. The mastery
of these particles is the mastery not only of Tagalog, but of every other
Philippine dialect, as well as a valuable aid in learning Malay or any simi-
lar tongue of the family.
IX. The root with any one of the indefinite particles prefixed may be
translated as the infinitive, provided the particle is merely attached to
give the meaning of the root so modified, but whenever a tense is expressed
the particle or the root is modified, and sometimes both. Besides the
imperative and infinitive, Tagalog has really but one other mode, the indic-
ative, as the subjunctive, includmg those modifications known in various
European languages as the optative, conditional, dubitative, potential, etc.,
is expressed by certain words corresponding to the English *' could,
should, would, mav,/' etc.
X. Strictly speaking, there are but three tenses in Tagalog, the past,
present, and future; but it is possible to render the imperfect, pluperfect,
and future perfect tenses by means of auxiliary particles. The first three,
however, are those in common use. The participle is also in use, corre-
sponding literally to the English participle in some cases, and in others
must be rendered by a phrase. The same remark may be made of the
gerund in English, which is variously rendered in Tagalog. One tense
IS sometimes used for another, when the context clearly indicates the lime
of the event, as happens in English.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 107
XI. As in English, Tagalog verbs may be transitive, requiring an object
to comi)lete the meaning; or intransitive, in which the meanmg is com-
plete within the verb. These do not always correspond in the two lan-
guages, and a Tagalog root may sometimes be intransitive with one prefix
and transitive with another, which may reverse or modify the meaning.
XII. Within the tense the verb does not change for the person or num-
ber, and requires a noun or a pronoun to indicate the same.
XIII. The eminent Indo-Tibetan philologist Bryan H. Hodgson (1800-
1894) , in his Monographs upon the Tribes of Northern Tibet, reprinted in
Part II, pages 73-76, of '* The Languages, Literature, and Religion of Nepal
and Tibet'* (Ix)ndon, 1874), gives it as his opinion that the Gyarung dialect
of Eastern Tibet has a very similar structure to that of Tagalog, quoting
Leyden and W. von Humboldt (the latter at secondhand) in support of his
views. Rockhill, the Tibetan scholar, now United States minister to
China, who has a wide acquaintance with Tibetan, says that Gyarung is
merely a variation of ordinary Tibetan, and this being the case there can
be no possible affinity between the two languages. As Hodgson's error
has been given wide publicity by its incorporation as a footnote to the
article by de Lacouperie upon Tibet in the Encyclopedia Britannica, it
should be corrected as far as possible by any student of Tagalog.
XIV. As quoted and corrected by Hodgson, the remarks of Leyden, as
taken from the Researches of the Bengal Asiatic Society, Vol. X, page 209,
upon Tagalog are as follows: '* Few languages present a greater appearance
of originality than the Tagaia. Though a multitude of its terms agree pre-
cisely with those of the languages just enumerated (western Polynesian),
yet tne simple terms are so metamorphosed by a variety of the most sim-
ple contrivances that it becomes impossible (difficult — B. H. H.) for a
person who understands all the original words in a sentence to recognize
them individually or to comj)rehend the meaning of the whole. The arti-
fices which it employs are chiefly the prefixing or postfixing (or infixing —
B. H. H.) to the simple vocables (roots) of certain particles (serviles),
which are again (may be) combined with others, and the complete or par-
tial repetition of terms in this reduplication may be again combined with
other particles.**
XV. Hodgson notes upon the foregoing as follows: " I may add, with
reference to the disputed primitiveness of Ta-gala, owing to its use of the
* artifices* above cited, that throughout the Himalaya and Tibet it is pre-
cisely the rudest or most primitive tongues that are distinguished by useless
intricacies, such as the interminable pronouns, and all the perplexity caused
by conjugation by means of them, with their duals and plurals, and in-
clusive and exclusive forms of the first person of both. * * * The
more advanced tribes, whether of the continent or of the islands, have,
generally speaking, long since cast away all or most of these * artifices.' **
As has already been noted, the Tagalog pronouns do not modify the verbs,
which have the same form within the tense for all persons and numbers.
As compared to tongues like Fijian and other Melanesian dialects, Tagalog
has made long strides toward becoming a vehicle of a much higher culture
than it now enjoys.
XVI. W. von Humboldt says in his Kawi Sprache, Vol. II, page 347:
**The construction of the Malayan verb (to speak of the entire linguistic
stock) can be fully recognized from the Tagalog verb alone. The Malagasy
and true Malay contain but fragments thereof, while the Polynesian lan-
guages have a more primitive scheme of the verb — fewer in forms. It
therefore seems appropriate to present:
First, the Tagalog verb complete without any regard to the other
languages;
Second, the Malagasy (verb), which has in itself very much of the same
construction;
Third, to show what the Malay language in its discarding and grinding
of grammatical forms has still retained; and
Digitized by
Google
108 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Fourth, to make a research as to how the simple but uncultivated Poly-
nesian verbal construction stands in relation to the partially cultivated
Tagalog.
THE DEFINITE.
I. As has been stated before, the definite form of the verb, which is really
a verbal noun with tense-indicating particles, is more common than the
indefinite form, which is more of a true verb in construction. One of the
great diflSculties to be overcome by speakers of non-Malayan tongues is the
improper use of the definite and indefinite. It is as easy to begin right as
wrong, and if attention is paid to the conditions existing, an idiomatic
mastery of Tagalog may readily be required.
II. The true definite particles, in (hin after the final vowel with acute
accent, and nin in a few cases for euphony), V, and an {han after a final
vowel with acute accent), are used either alone or in combination when
emphasis is to be placed upon the object or there is a special idea implied.
These three particles are further combined with pag^ the definite verbaliz-
ing particle corresponding to the indefinite mag; i, in, and po^many times
commencing a definite verb with the combinations ipag and ipinag. The
root begins after these combinations, subject to tense reduplications, as
will be seen by the table at the end. The subject takes the genitive with
the definite, the object taking the nominative case. Ex. : Root gavni ( idea
of making or doing) . Gumawd ( to make or do ) . And ana qawd mof ( What
is your work?; i. e.. What are you doing or making?), lliis is an indefinite
question, with the verbal idea almost absent, the verb "to be'* being under-
stood. With an adverb of time, such as kahapon (yesterday), ngaydn
(now), or bukas (to-morrow) the verb could be **was,*' **is,*' or **will
be. ' * But the more usual form is with the definite particle in and the proper
tense. And ang ginawd mof (What did you do? [or make?]). For the
past tense in is inserted with consonant roots between the initial con-
sonant and the rest of the root. And ang ginagawd mo ditdf ( What are you
doing here?) As will be seen, the present tense is formed by the redupli-
cation of the first syllable of the root, in which in is infixed. And ang
ga^auin mof (What are you going to do? [or make?]; what will you do?;
what will you make?) The future of this verb is formed by reduplicating
the first syllable of the root and suffixing in. And ang gagavAn nang amain
mo niyang kdhoy na iydnf (What is your uncle going to do with that lum-
ber?) Amainy from amdj father, with in as a suffix, also means ** step-
fat her,'* as well as "uncle." Kdhoy also means "tree.** Isang bdhay
ang gagawin niyd ( He is going to put up a house ) . The imperative is f ormea
by suffixing in to the root. Ex.: Itd''y gaxiAn ninyong makdsay (Do this
carefully [in an orderly manner]).
III. In 18 the principal definite particle in Tagalog, corresponding to the
same particle in Ilocano and to on in Bicol and Visaya, the two last men-
tionea also using in in combination with other particles.
WHICH DEFINITE.
IV. While it is not so very hard to lay down fairly clear rules as to when
the definite and indefinite should be used (the former laying stress upon
the object and the latter upon the subject or the action), it is extremely
difficult in some cases to say which one of the several definite particles
should be. As ageneral rule, in signifies motion toward the ajjent, or some-
thing by which uie agent obtains control of something; i indicates motion
away from agent, or an action by which the agent loses control of some-
thing, and an generally has either the idea of place or of person connected
with its use. /joined with ita, resulting in ika^ and further combined with in
to produce iih'na, denotes cause, etc., with roots when joined to them, either
alone or with verbalizing particles. For this reason the proper definite to
be used in sentences having a definite object without other modifying cir-
cumstance is determined by the nature of the action, subject to some
exceptions, mainly for euphonic reasons. Such words, however, as require
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 109
arif for example, in place of in are not numerous. / can not be replaced
by in or an^ and an only replaces in as a suffix, never as a prefix or infix.
The following examples will show the different use of the same verb:
Root, panhik. Panhik ka! (Go up! Come up!). Panhikin mo akd sa hag-
dan (come up [to me] by the ladder). Ipanhik mo sa bdhay itong mangd
sdging (Put tnese bananas up into the house). Panhikan mo akd nitong
mangd sdging (Put these bananas up there for me). Pumanhik (to ascend) .
Magpanhik (to hoist, or put something upstairs [or up a ladder]). Ang
panhikin ( the person upstairs ) . Ang ipagpanhik ( what hoisted or taken up ) .
Ang panhikan (the ladder [stairs or place] ascended).
V. With sentences containing but one direct object which is directly
connected with the action, the prevalence of cause, instrument, or time
requires i, and place an, Ex. : Ihdnap ninyd akd isang cabayong mxxhuti
(look out for a good horse for me). Ang bayan ang hahanapan mo nang
cabayo mo (You will have to look around town for your horse). With in a
proper use would be: Hanapinmo ang cabayong nawald (Look for the horse
which has disappeared). Ang pinaghanapan ko ang corral nang cabayo j pd
(Where I did look for the horse was at the corral, sir). Hinanap ko ang
aking cabayo sa bayan ay nahdnap ko (I looked for my horse in town and
found him ) . Humdnapy ( 1 , to look for) ( 2, to claim ) . Manhdnap ( to scout,
to reconnoiter). Ang panhanapin (what scouted for). Ang paghdnap (the
act of seeking ) . Ang paghxmapan ( the place of seeking) . A ng panfianapan
(place scouted or reconnoitered over). Ang hindnap (what sought for
[past tense]). Ang hinahdnap (what is being sought for). Ang hanapin
(what is to be sought or looked for). Ang hanapan (person from whom
something is claimed or sought). Ang ihdnap ( the means for something to
be looked for). Ang ihindnap (the means with which something was
sought). The foregoing illustrate the ease with which verbal nouns can be
formed from verbs and vice versa.
VI. When a sentence has more than one indirect object, and stress is to
be laid upon one or the other object, the nature of the action determines
the particle to be used. The following examples, taken from Lendoyro,
show this excellently: Svlatin mo itong siXlat sa lamesa nang kdmay mo
(** Write this letter" yourself at the table [i. e., with your own hand]).
Jsiilai mo nitong sdlat ang iyong kdmay sa itong lamesa (Write this letter
* * with your own hand * * at this table ) . Sn lamesa ang sulatan mo nitong sMat
nang iyong kdmay (write this letter with your own hand, using the table as
a writing desk). It will be seen from the foregoing that many of the defi-
nite verbs are verbal nouns with ang (the) left off. Bearing this in mind
the use of the definite is made much easier.
VII. Circumstantial members connected with the action should be care-
fully distinguished when using the definite from adverbs or adverbial
expressions. Some examples of the definite with adverbs or adverbial
expressions are: Sadiyang ginawd niyditd (He did this willfully). Dina-
lohang nihd siyd nang boong bagsik (They assaulted him [her] with great
barbarity).
VIII. Ipagt ipinagy and ipina, the two first being combinations with pag
and the last of i with pa, the definite verbal particle corresponding to magpa,
confuse the student at first, but are simple when analyzed. Ipina, i^a,
when followed by a root commencing witn g, should not be confused with
ipag and ipinag, as the idea ot pa is "to order to do*' what is signified bv
the root. Combinations with other particle?, like magka, are also found,
forming ipagka (imp.), ipagkaka (fut.), ipinagka (past), and ipinagkaka
(present). It will be noticed that the last syllable of the particle is redu-
plicated with pagka for the future and present tenses. Ex. : Ipagabutan
ninyd iyang mangd libro (Pass those books from hand to hand). Ang abu-
tan (the person reached for or overtaken ). Sino ang ipinaglulutd mof { Who
are you cooking it for?) And kayd ang ipinagutos mo sa kaniydf ( What
were your orders to him?) Ipaghuhugas sana kitd nang itong damit ngunVt
waM akong sabdn (I would wash your clothes, but I have no soap). Kitd
is really **we two,*' but here means **I." Ipaglagd mo nang sa itong ofi-
Digitized by
Google
110 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
cial ltd (Make some tea for this officer). Ang inUagd (what boiled or made
[as tea, coffee, etc.])» Ang ipaglagd (the person for whom boiled, made,
etc.). Ang lagadn (the teapot, coffeepot, etc.). In the foregoing exam-
ples pag is used because the sentence expresses the person for whom an
act is performed. Pag is also used with in and an combined in like cases.
Ex.: Itong bdhay na itd^y ang pinagauayan nild (This house is where they
quarreled). Root, duay.
IX. Pa^ must also be used with the definite whenever the sentence
expresses plurality of acts or agents, or of feigning or reciprocal actions.
The article being generally used, the idea of a verbal noun is most promi-
nent. Ex.: Ang ipinagsakitsakitan niyd^y ang hindt dusahin (He was
malingering so as to escape punishment). Root, 9akit (illness). (Diminu-
tives made by repeating a bisyllabic root or the first two of a polysyllabic
one, add an to impart a scornful or contemptuous meaning). Ang cuartel
ang pinagmurahan nild (They insulted each other in the barracks).
Pinagsird nang mangd tulisdn iyang mangd bdhay (The lad rones have
destroyed many of those houses). Maraming bdhay ang pinagsird nild
(Many houses have been destroyed by them).
X. With verbal roots which have different meanings with um and mag,
the definite is accompanied by pag when the verb formed by ma^ is used.
Ex.: Root, bili (idea of trade, barter, etc.) Bumili, (to buy). MagbUi (to
sell). Itong bdhay ang ipinagbUi ko, or Ipinagbili ho itong bdhay (I have
sold this house). Itong bdhay ang binili ho, or Binili ho itong bdhay (I
have bought this house). Pag (pinag) prefixed to bill with hnn suffixed
indicates the i)urchaser; the place or the price (past tense). For the pres-
ent tense the first syllable of the root is reduplicated. Ex. : Ang pxnag-
6i7i/ian (past); ang pagbibUihan (pr. ). Ang dhing kapaiid na lalaJd ang
mnagbilihan ko nitong bdhay (Isold [have sold] this house to my brother
[lit, **my brother was the purchaser from me of this house"]). Root,
titon^(debt). Umdtang (to borrow). Magidtang (to lend). MagpaiUang
(to lend willingly). MagkaiLitang (to owe). Ex.: Pinagdlang ko iyang
salapt «a kaniyd (I lent him that money).
XI. The use of the particles gives a great freedom in Tagalog for the
variation of sentences, which, however, have the same idea. Thus the
English ** Didn't I order (or tell) you to do this?" may be rendered by the
following with equal accuracy: Hindi ko ipinagdlos sa iyd na gawin mo it6?
(def. ). Hindt ak6 nagutos sa iyonggumawd nitdf (indef., stress on action).
Hindi akd nagpagawd sa iy6 niiof (indef., stress on action). Hindi ko
pinagawd nitd ( def. ) . Hindi ko ipinagawd sa iyd itdf ( def. ) . Dt ipinagawd
ko sa iyd il6f (def.).
XII. J?i and i are combined with each other also. Ex.: And ang Uinulutd
mof (What are you cooking?) For euphony the verb with this combina-
tion is much varied, there being also found the forms inalvdutd, iniltUutd,
and even nilulutd.
XIII. The verbs mayrdon and may (to have) and vxild (not to have)
require the definite form of a verb following them in a sentence which
expresses what is had or done, or vice versa. Both subject and object,
however, take the nominative in such cases. Ex. : Mayrdon kanggagawinf
( Have you anything to do?) Wald pd, wald akong gagawin (No, sir; I have
nothing). May silang ginawdt (Have they done anything?) Wald pd,
wald silang ginawd (No, sir; they have not done anything).
XIV. The definite is also used in sentences having a person for the
object, or in which the object is modified by an attribute or attributive
adjunct. Ex.: Tauagin mo si Pedro (Call Pedro). Dalhin mo ritd iyang
librong binasa kong kagab-i (Bring me that book I was reading last night).
Houag mong wikain iydn (Don't say that). Lutoin mo Hong manuk (Cook
this chicken). Dalhin mo iyang tubig (Bring that water).
XV. Further discussion of the definite particles is reserved until the
indefinite has been explained.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Ill
THE INDEFINITE.
I. The indefinite particles most in use are lew, mag (nag)^ and ma {na)f
which will be explained in detail hereafter. These are called active par-
ticles by the Spanish grammarians, but indefinite seems to be more appro-
priate and correct.
II. Sentences in which the subject is emphasized have this in the nomi-
native, the verb being expressed with the proper indefinite particle which
is sometimes preceded by the article of common nouns. The imperative
indefinite does not require the article in any case. Ex.; Siyd^y babasa
nilong libro (He is going to read this book). Ikao nga nagmbi niydn (You
said that yourself). The object, it will be noted, takes the genitive. Siyd
ang magpapasial (He is going for a walk [lit., **He will be the walker]).
Ikdo ang tumAuag hay Juan (Call Juan [be you the caller to Juan]). Si
Juan ay ang nagndkao (Juan was the thief).
III. The indefinite is generally used in an intransitive sentence, where
an object is not required to complete the meaning. Ex. : SungmuMai ak6
(I am writing). SungmMat akd (I wrote). SusMatako (I shall writej.
NagaAral kayd (You are learning). MagaArcU kayd (You will learn).
Kungmakain siya (He is eating). Kungmain kami (We were eating [but
not you] ). Kakain tayo ( We will go eat [all of us] ).
An object may be called indefinite when the idea of **a, an, some, anv"
is inherent, or an undetermined part of the whole is indicated, proviaed
that there are no modifying circumstances of time, cause, purpose, instru-
ment, or place in conjunction with the action. Ex.: (1] Mardnong ka
nang wikang castUaf (Do you understand any of the Spanish language?)
Mardnong ak6 Idmang nang wikang tagdlog^ hindt mardnong akd mangusap sa
wikang castila^ p6 (I understand the Tagalog langus^e only; I do not know
how to talk in Spanish). Magsalitd ka nga sa wikang tagdlog (Then speak
in Tagalog). (2) Maglabas ka nang manga sUla (Bring out some chairs).
Magdald ka dito nangfosforos (Bring some matches here). Magdald ka dito
nang tabacos (Bring some cigars here). Ma{fdald ka diio nang tdbig (Bring
some water here). Maglutd ka nanq irnng manuk (Cook a chicken).
IV. The indefinite is also used with sentences having a definite object if
a part and not all of the object is meant. In some cases the place-particle
* * an ' * is used for this purpose, as it does not indicate an object. In or i would
be used if all the definite object were to be indicated. Ex. : Ak6^ y kungmain
na nUong lamangkati (I have already eaten some of this meat ) . Uminum kayd
nvUmg tilbig na malindo (Drink some of this clear water) . (1) Magbiqay ka
sa dHn niyang tdbig (indef.) (1, Give me some of that water). (2) Bigydn
mo aM iyang tubig (def.) (2, Give me that water). Ibig ninyong magbUi
nltong bigdsf (Do you wish to sell some of this rice?)
V. Actions expressed by intransitive verbs which do not require an
object take the indefinite unless there are modifying circumstances of
cause, purpose, means, instrument, or time in conjunction with the action.
Ex. : Natlsod akd (I stumbled). AndH hindt ka lungmaldkad nang matulinf
(Why don't you walk quicker?) Tungmotaud siyd (He is laughing).
VI. A sentence commencing with an interrogative pronoun takes the
indefinite if the subject of the inquiry is an agent, and the definite if a
determinate object is asked about. Ex. : Sino ang nagdald nitong mangd
kdhoy? ( Who brought [was the bringer] of this lumber [timber]? ) Akd ang
nagdaldy p6 {1 brought it, sir [ was the bringer] ) . And^ t di ka nangungusapf
(Why don't you talk?) Nahihiyd ka bogaf (Are you ashamed to?) Sino
ang nagsalitd nang sinabi mo sa dhinf { Who relateil to you what you have told
me?) [indef.]. Anongibigmof (What do you want?) Anong cabayo ang
binilinildf (Which horse did they buy?) Anong is a contraction iov and
ang (def.).
VII. The indefinite is also used with complex sentences in which the
subject is amplified by an adjectival clause. Ex.: Ang tauo gungmagaua
nang kabaruMy magkakamit nang kapalaran (The person who does right
will obtain happiness [be happy |]).
Digitized by
Google
112 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
VIII. It must be noted that maka in the sense of cause, used with
roots denoting conditions, wron^ (torts) and betterments, has a different
construction from all other particles, even maka with other meanings. In
the definite, which only exists with i, combined with in in the past and
present tenses, the agent takes the nominative and the object the genitive,
like indefinites of other particrles. In the indefinite the agent remains in
the nominative, but the object takes the accusative, which is always pre-
ceded by 8a (not by nang). Some other verbs have this use of aa also.
Roots conjugated by mag and man retain the definite forms pag and pan
with maka.
IX. The Tagalog verb demands that the subject of a sentence shall be
expressed, the tense being indicated by the verb or verbal noun. The
subject may be omitted, however, when a number of verbs depend upon
the same subject, except in the first clause, where the verb must have a
subject. As will be seen bv the examples, the syntax of Tagalog is very
simple, but care must be taken to use the right particles and tenses. If
not, some annoying errors are liable to be made in conversation.
V. For any common verb see the vocabulary (English-Tagalo^). It
must be borne in mind that Tagalog has many words expressing variations
and modifications of the general verb as well as other languages. These
will be noted in the proper place.
THE DEFINITE PARTICLE **IN."
I. The plain root, if capable of being verbali ed, is sometimes used with-
out a definite particle if an adverb of time or the context makes the tense
clear. The definite particle may also be used with an adverb of time, but
as a rule, if the tense is to be emphasized or the context is not clear, tense
particles, according to the rules of the language, are used in the verbal
forms. An6 ang sabi mo kakaponf (What did you say yesterday?) An6
angsabi mo ngaydnf (What do vou say now?) And ang sabi mo bdkasf
(What will you say to-morrow? [with adverbs of time] ). And ang sinabi
mof (What did you say?) Ano ang sinasabi mof (What are vou saying?)
And ang sasabihin mof (What will you say?) Ang sabihin (the person or
thing mentioned) . And bagd ang sasabihin ko kay Ignaciof ( What shall I
say to Ignacio?) Sabihin mo sa kaniyd na tinduag ko siyd (You say to him
that I have been calling him). Ang sablhan (the conversation).
II. In (hin after acute final vowel, and nin in some cases) is the true
definite particle. In is prefixed, infixed, or sufl&xed, as the case may be;
hin and nin are suflSxes only. In is prefixed to a vowel root and infixed
between the initial letter and the first vowel of a consonant root for the past
(perfect) and present tenses. It is suflSxed for the imperative and future
tenses. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated in the present and
future tenses. The tenses called the pluperfect and future perfect may be
expressed in Tagalog in two ways. The first pluperfect is formed by adding
na to the past tense, and the second pluperfect by prefixing na to the root.
The first future perfect is formed by adding na to the future tense, and the
second future perfect by prefixing ma to the root. These tenses are little
used in conversation. Na and ma correspond to the indefinite verbalizing
particles naka and maka respectively.
III. The subject of a verb conju^ted with a definite particle takes the
genitive, exctept in the cases already noted. If the subject is a pronoun, it
may either precede or follow the verb, the latter usage being much more
common than the former. If the subject is a noun or phrase it always
follows the verb.
IV. For the conjugation of a root with in, whether a vowel verb, or
a consonant one see the type-scheme folder at the end of this handbook.
V. In prefixed to or infixed with roots of the following classes forms words
denoting a showing of the properties of the root or a resemblance thereto,
as the word ''like " does as a suflSx in English. (1) Roots denoting flow-
ers, fruits, or other objects imitated in gems or precious metals by jewelers,
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 113
denote ornaments or jewels of the shape or pattern of the object named,
when in is used as above explained. Ex. : Balinghingy an octagonal berry;
binalingbingy a jewel with eight sides like the berry. Sampaga^ Arabian
jasmine; mnampagay a jewel imitating the sampaga flower. (2) With
roots of colorea objects m denotes the color. Ex.: Dumero (Sp. romero),
rosemary; dinumerOy rosemary-colored. Gulay, verdure, vegetables; gi-
nulay, greenish. (3) With some objects in denotes rice which resembles
the object in the shape, taste, or smell. Ex. : Kandd^ a lily-like flower;
kinanddf rice, with an odor like the kandd. Kardyor.i, needle; kinardyoniy
needle-shaped rice. Kamdlig^ warehouse; Lalamgan Kamaliganf Ambos
Camarines ( province ) ; kinamaligy Camarines rice. KasttUi, musk ( f romSan-
skrit kast'driy through Malay); kinaatuliy rice with musky odor. Ang kcUd,
the carabao tick; kinatd, rice of a variegated appearance, resembling the katd,
Kastila ( Sp. ) , white person : kinastila^ a white class of rice. AlangUan, a tree
with fragrant flowers (Cananga odorata), the ilang-ilang; inalangilany rice
with this odor. Bamhang^ an herb; binambang, a class of rice which resem-
bles the bambang when growing. AngdvZong, a very small fish; dinulong^
rice shaped- like the dulong, Batady a kind of pea-like vegetable; binatadf
rice so shaped. Bulaklak^ flower; binulaklakj rice which opens like a flower
when heated, or like pop corn. Poraky the flower of the pangdan or
sabutan; pinorakj rice resembling this flower. Sankly the Chmese anise;
sinangkif rice resembling anise. SumbUang, a species of sea fish without
scales; sinumbUang, rice of this shape. Tuma, body louse, ^rayback;
tinuma., rice shaped like a tuma. Turmagay copper; tinumbagay nee with a
metaUic luster. Tumbaga is copper alloyed with a small amount of gold;
it is from Sanskrit tdmraka (copper), through Malay tambaga; tembaga
Taldhiby common reed grass; tinaldhiby rice which resembles taldhib when
crowing. There are many other names for different classes of rice, but the
foregoing are the principal terms derived with in following the rule cited.
(4) With names denoting relationship in expresses the idea of persons
occupying the place of such relative to some degree. As this condition is
regarded as permanent, the first syllable of the root is reduplicated to ex-
press present tense. Other nouns also follow this rule, with some excep-
tions. Ex. : AH, aunt; inaaliy uncle's wife. Amdy father; inaamdy godfather.
Amainy uncle; stepfather; inaamainy aunt's husband. Anaky child (son
or daughter) ; inaanaky stepson or stepdaughter, also godson or goddaugh-
ter. Asdutty spouse (husband or wife); inaasduay lover or mistress (con-
cubine). BayaOy brother-in-law; binabayaOy husband of sister-in-law.
Biandny father-in-law or mother-in-law; binibiandny wife or husband of
father-in-law or mother-in-law (not parent of wife or husband). Manid-
gangy son-in-law or daughter-in-law; minaman'dgangy one regarded as such.
Kapatidy brother or sister; kinakapatidy half brother or half sister, or foster
brother or foster sister. Hipagy sister-in-law ; hinihipagy wife of brother-in-
law. Bilds is the equivalent for binabayao or hinihipag. Nund, grandparent ;
ninununby one regarded as a grandparent; kanununuany ancestors. Ap6y
grandchild; inaapdy descendant. Ap6 sa tdhody great-grandchild; aposa
tcUampaka'ny great-great-grandchild. PamangMny nephew or niece; pina-
pamangHuy one regarded as such. Pinsdny cousin; pinipinsdny one regarded
as a cousin. Pinsdng boo, first cousin; pinsang makalawd, second cousin,
etc. (5) With verbal roots denoting the preparing of food, etc. , in denotes
the food so prepared, provided the root is conjugated in the infinitive
indefinite with wm, although there are some exceptions. Ex. : Maglagd,
to cook with a spit; such as camotea, etc. ; Linagdy vegetables so cooked.
Magngangy to cook meat or fish with a spit; sinigangy meat or fish so
cooked. I/umugaOy to stew, to boil meal; ang linugaoy the mush or stew.
Maglugao is more usual. Sumaingy to boil rice; ang HnainOy the boiled
rice. Ma^fsaing is also more usual. Magtambong, to cook fish entire; ang
tinambong, the fish so cooked. Tumdpay or magtdpay^ to knead ; ang tind-
pay, what kneaded; bread. (6) With verbal roots conjugated by um, the
product of such action is denoted by in, prefixed to a vowel root or infixed
6855—05 8
Digitized by
Google
114
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
with a consonant root. Ex.: SuinMid, to spin; «inMid, thread, anything
spun. Some mag roots also have the product denoted by in, Ex. : Mag-
pipigy to press, to crack rice, etc.; pirApigy roasted and cracked rice. (7)
With some roots in forms adjectival nouns, the first syllable of the root
being reduplicatd. Ex.: Kuan, known; ang hinuhian, the person known.
Mahal^ dear; ang minamahal^ the esteemed (person). Sinld^ love (from
Sanskrit, chintd^ thought, through Malay); ang ginisintdf the beloved (who
loves in return). Ang nasinta indicates a person loved without being
aware of the fact.
VI. As in has the idea of attraction inherent within it, there are many
classes of verbs, conjugated in the indefinite infinitive by itm, which take
in to form the direct object. (1) According to this rule verbal roots of
taking, asking, and appropriating something take in. There are some
verbs conjugated with mag which also admit in. Ex. :
To buy (general term).
To take (general term ), bring or take.
To carry; bear, etc. (bring or send).
To scoop out, or take anything out
of a hole, or insert the hand into a
hole.
To use.
To choose (between good and bad).
To select (from among good things).
To pillage; to plunder; to loot; to
despoil the enemy.
To seize; to snatch.
To pray for; to plead.
To complain; to entreat; to implore,
to pray (as to a judge).
To request.
To borrow.
Bumili. Ang hinili^ what was bought.
Gumutangy to buy rice by the ga-
tang or chupa, Umdmot^ to buy
one thing out of many. Umangkat,
to buy on credit. Umaapln, to
buy fruits of the country.
Kumulva. Ang kinuha, what was
taken or obtained.
Magdald. AngdinalA, what brought.
Ang ipinadaldy what sent flit,
" what was ordered brought" ).
Dumiikot, Ana diniikoU what taken
out, or what hand was inserted in.
Gumdmit. Ang gindmit, what used.
PumiH. Ang pinill, what chosen.
^napimWan, what rejected (singu-
lar). Ang pinagpilian, what re-
jected (plurality of objects).
Humirang, Ana hinlrang, what se-
lected. Ang hinirangan, what left
out.
Sumamsam. -4n^«inam«am, thespoil;
loot; plunder.
Umagao, Ang inagao, what seized
Agao nang tamis, inagao nang asim^
somewhat of sweetness, and some-
what of sourness (said of any sub-
stance which has this taste, like
some fruits) (idiom).
Dumaldngin. Ang dinaldngin, what
prayed or asked for. Ang dalang-
tnan, the deity prayed to or person
pleaded with.
Dumaying, Ang dinayingy what re-
lief asked. Ang idayingy the com-
plaint. Ang dayinqany the person
entreated, implored, or prayed to.
Humingi. Ang hiningij what re-
Ang hingdn^ person re-
quested,
quested
Umiitana.
rowed.
Ang in'dtang, what bor-
Ex.: Indtang ko iyang
salapt ibinigay ko sa kaniyd kahapon
(I borrowed that monev whicn I
gave him yesterday ) . Ang iiitangy
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
115
the cause of borrowing. Ang
utangan, the person borrowed from
the lender.
Humiram, Ang hiniram. what bor-
rowed. Ang hibndin, the lender.
Tamarahan. Ang tinarahariy what
received as a treat. Ex.: Tina-
tarahan namin itong kakanin (we
are getting these sweets as a treat) .
Dumakip, Ang dinakip, what seized
thus.
HumUhit Ang hinithitj what was
absorbed.
VII. Under this section may be considered in prefixed to or infixed with
the personal pronouns, with which it implies the idea of possession. As a
suffix with these pronouns, in (hin) expresses the sense of regarding, hold-
ing, reputing, etc., in some cast;». Ex. :
To borrow (anything except money ).
To demand a treat (as at a celebra-
tion).
To catch hold of; to catch on the
wing.
To absorb.
Inyo. Ang iniinySy your property;
your. Inyohin ?no, consider it as
your own; take it for your own.
Kaniyd. Ang binakaniydy his [her]
Eroperty. Kakaniyahin ko (I will
old it as his [her's]).
Kanild. Ang kinakanildy their prop-
erty. Kanilahin mOy regard it as
belonging to them.
Atifi, Ang inaatinj our property.
Inatin niyd, he regarded it as ours.
Kanitd. Ang kinakanitdy our prop-
erty. Kinakanitd /ko, I regard it
as yours and mine.
Amin. Ang inaxmiin, our property,
but not yours. Aminin ninyd (you
[plural] regard it as ours, but not
yours).
Akin. Ang inadMnj my property;
mine. Indkin ko (I held it as
mine). Inadkin ko (I am holding
it as mine). Adkinin ko (I shall
hold it as mine).
VIII. Verbs of calling, whether by voice or signs, also follow this mode
of conjugation. Ex. :
Your.
His; her.
Their.
Our (all of us).
Our (you and I).
Our (but not you).
My.
To call.
To call; also to bring; to fetch.
To make signs for; to motion to.
Tumduag, Ang tinduag, who or what
called. Ang itduagj the call, in-
strument, or cause. Ang tauagan,
the person called in order to be
g|iven something. Ex.: Sino ang
tinatduag mof ( Who are you call-
ing to?). Tlnduag ko si Pedro, p6
(1 was calling to Pedro, sir).
Tauogan mo siyd nang isdd (Call
him to come and get some fish) .
KumaSn. Ang kinadn, what called,
or brought, etc.
Kumauay. Ang kauayin^ what mo-
tioned for. Ang ikauay, what mo-
tioned with, or the cause. Ang
kauaydn the person motioned to.
Digitized by
Google
116
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
IX. Verbs of * * searching for ' ' also take in for the direct object. Ex. :
thing
Humdnap. Ang hindnapy
sought for.
Humalihao, Ang hinalihaOy what
searched for.
Samcdilmk. Ana mwlilmkj what
looked for in tnis manner.
Sumunadd, Ang sinungdd, person
sought by another.
Umapdhap. Ang inapdhap, what
groped for.
X. Verbs of moving, when not due to turning away of what is moved,
also take in for the direct object. Ex. :
To look for.
To search about. ^
To look in every comer for.
To go in search of another.
To grope for (as in the dark or like
a blind person).
To move.
To move restlessly.
Kumibd. Ang kinibd, what moved.
Synonym: Kumislot; umibd.
Gumaldo, Ang ginal&Oy the mis-
chief done through restlessness.
Ang galauan the person disturbed
thereby. Magaldo ang kamay niydj
his hand is restless; i. e., he is a
pickpocket or thief ( idiom ) . Kag-
alauan, mischief.
Umugd. Ang inugdy what moved
thus).
Twmugoy, Ang tinugoy, what moved.
Synonyms: Umugay; umvLgd (some-
times). Umugoy also means to
stagger, to totter.
Umugug. Ang inugug, what shaken
or rocked.
Umxdog. Ang inulogy what shaken
down.
Umiling. Ang inUingt what denied.
Lumuglug. Ang linuglugy what sha-
ken, as a tree.
Kumunday, Ang hinundayy the wav-
ing thus. Ex.: Kinunday niyd
(she waved her hands while she
was dancing) .
XI. In is also used to express the result of the action of verbs which
signify carrying, cutting, measuring, or weighing, when the result is con-
sidered on the side of the agent or ended therein. Urn is generally the
indefinite, but mag and other verbalizing particles are to be found. When
the result of a verb necessarily falls upon a person, in is used to signify
the person. Ex. :
To shake (like objects badly packed)
or to move (like loose teeth).
To move anything.
To shake (as something in a sieve) ;
also to rock or dandle (as a child).
To shake a basket or measure so it
will hold more.
To shake the head in negation.
To shake anything, as a tree to
gather the fruit.
To wave the hands while dancing.
To carry (general idea).
To drag along.
To carry on the shoulder.
To carry a child on or suspended
from the shoulder.
Magdald. See under verbs of bring-
ing, taking, etc.
Humild. Ang hinildy what dragged
along. Means also **to arrest."
AnghinUdj the person arrested; the
prisoner.
Pumasdn. Ang pinasdn^ what car-
ried on the shoulder. Ang pasa-
nany the person who carried any-
thing on the shoulder.
Ma^sabi. Ang sinabi or ang sdbihiny
the child carried thus. The cloth
by which the child Was supported
is denoted by ang isabi.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
117
To carry on the head.
To carry in the arms.
To carry a child in the arms.
To carry under the arm.
To carry anything in the lap.
To carry by the mouth (as a dog,
cat, bird, etc., carry food).
To carry in or by the hands (as a
basket, jar, etc.).
To carry hanging from the hand (as a
pail, etc. , by means of the handle).
To carry anything along (by or in
the hand).
To carry on a pole (palanca).
To cut (general term).
To cut clothes (as a tailor).
To tear.
To chop, to hew, to cut with an ax.
To cut down; to fell (as a tree).
To cut into pieces (as sugar cane).
To cut the tuba palm (to obtain the
sap).
Magsunong. Ang sunongin^ what
carried thus; the burden.
Magpangko, Ang pinangko, what
carried in the arms. Pangkohin
mo il6 (carry this in your arms) .
Kumalong. Ang kinalong^ the child.
Kalongin mo siyd (carry him in
your arms). Ang kalongan^ the
mother, nurse, or bearer.
MagkUik. Ang kiniliky what carried
thus. (With accent on last sylla-
ble), magkilikf to carry much
thus.
Magcandong. Ang kinandong^ what
carried in the lap. Kinakandong
niyd (she is carry mg it in her lap).
Magtangay. Ang tinangay^ what car-
ried thus.
Magsapo. Ang sinapo, what carried
thus. Sapohin mo iydn (carry that
in your hands).
Magbitbit. Ang binUbxtj what carried
thus, i. e., the pail.
Magtaglay. Ang tinaglay^ what ear-
ned along. I And ang tataglayin
mot What will you carry along?
Uinusong. Magustmg^ to carry on a
palanca between two. Ang inu-
songy what carried thus, as a pig,
bundle, etc. Synonym of magu-
song; magiuang, Ang tinuangy what
carried thus. Usongin {tuangin)
ninyd ltd (carry this on a pole be-
tween you).
Magpdtol. MamHUoly to cut up (as
cloth , etc. ) Ang pinutdy w hat cut
or cut up, as the cloth, etc. Ex. :
Putiin mo itd nangpahabd (Cut this
lengthwise).
Tumabrs. MagtabdSy to cut much.
Ang tinabdsy what cut out, i. e.,
the cloth or suit, etc. Ang tina-
basauy what left over, also place.
Ang pinagtabasany the cuttings,
clippings, remnants, or places of
cutting out.
Gumwi. Ang ginisiy what torn, i. e.,
the cloth or clothes.
Tumag^. ^n^^iwagrd, what chopped,
e. g., the tree, etc.
Sumapol. Mngsapoly to fell much.
Ang sinapoly what felled or cut
down. Ang isapol, the means of
cutting down, e. g., the axe. Ang
pinagsapolany what remained, e. g.,
the stump.
Umirid, Ang iniridy the sugar cane
thus cut up. Kairidy a piece of the
cut-up cane.
Umarad. Ang ararany the palm thus
tapped.
Digitized by
Google
118
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To cut into pieces.
To cut into equal pieces.
To cut up into equal lengths (as sugar
cane, etc.).
To cut poles or bamboo into pieces;
also to cut at a distance.
To cut into pieces (as a log) .
To cut water grass in order to catch
the fish.
To cut, as with scissors; to snip off,
applied generally to cutting hair,
metals, etc.
To si)lit open (as bamboo); to cut
against the grain; to peel off, as
shavings; to go against the cur-
rent; (fig.) to oppose.
To cut or break a rope, cord, or sim-
ilar object.
To cut off the ears or nose.
To measure (eithergrains or liquids).
To gauge; to measure liquids by
means of a rod.
To measure by palms (8.22 inches).
Magpalas. Ana pinalaSf what cut up
thus. Manga pakmmlas na taluh,
pieces of pure silk. Aug ipalas^
tool used lor cutting up.
Umalas. Ang inalas^ what cut thus.
Pumirdid. Magptnlid^ to cut much
in this way. Ang pininlid, what cut
in to equal lengths thus. Angjnnag-
pirdid, the large amount cut thus.
Ang ipinlid, the utensil used.
Ang ipagpinlid, the utensil used
much.
Pumidjnd, Ang pinidpid (1) what
cut up thus; (2) who cut thus.
Ang ipidpidy the tool or weapon
used. Ang pidpiran, the place.
Gumiling. Ang giniHngy the wood
thus cut up. Ang igUing^ the tool
used. Ang mangigilingj the wood
cutter.
Magtalds, Ang tinalds, what cut thus.
Ang pinagtaldSf the large amount
cut thus. Ang italds, the tool by
which cutting was done. Ang
ipafftaldsy the tool by which much
cutting was done. Ang pinagiala-
san, the place where much cutting
was done.
Gumipit, Maggupity to cut one's own
hair. Ang ginupitj what cut, i. e.,
the hair or metal. Angginupitan,
the person whose hair has been
cut; or object from which some-
thing has been cut off.
Sumaluiigat. Ang sinalungatj what
split open or peeled off thus. Sn-
lungatin mo itong kauayan, split
this bamboo.
Magpatid. Ang pinaiidy what cut
thus. Patarin (Patdan) mo iyang
lubidy cut that rope. Mapatidy to
part; to break in two; to cease
(fig.). Napatid ang kaniyang hi-
ningdy he exhaled his last breath;
he ceased to breath e. Magkapatid-
paiidy to break up completely (as
a cord or rope); or into several
pieces.
PumongoSy variation Pumingas. Ang
pinongosy what cut off, as the sev-
ered ear or nose. Pingas has the
same idea, but is generally applied
to cutting inanimate objects.
Tumdkal. Ang tmdkaly what meas-
ured. Takalin mo itong higdSy
measure this rice. Ang takaldnj
the measure.
Tumdrol. Ang tindroly what gauged.
Ang itdrolj the gauge.
Dumangkal. Ang dinangkaly what
measured thus.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANOUAOE.
119
To compare measures.
To weigh.
To balance, to consider (f).
To verify a weight.
Sumiibok or mag9dhok, Ang siniibokf
( 1 ) one of the measures thus com-
pared. (2) Also to observe closely;
to "shadow." Ex.: Suhukan mo
siyd (watch him closely). Ang
pinagsiiboki the two measures thus
compared. Ka»&boky equal to an-
other thing. Ex.: Kasdbok tduo
. ang tubig (the water is the depth
of a man). Magkamboky to have
an understanding. Ex.: Nagka-
kiwUbok sUd ang bait (they have an
understanding with each other).
Tumimbang, Ang tinimbangj what
weighed thus. Ang timbangan,
the scales or counterweight. Ka-
timbang, equal in weight. Ak6''y
katimbang mo (I am of the same
weight as you are).
Tummard. Ang tinalarb, what bal-
anced or considered.
Tumaya. Ang iinaya, what verified
(obs.).
XII. Verbs which signify destruction, or change or transformation of
the object as a result of the action, take in to express the result of such
action, if no modifying circumstances, such as of cause, instrument, etc.,
are implied.
To destroy.
To tear down; to raze.
To kill; extinguish.
Sumird, Ang sinirdy what was de-
stroyed.
Gumibd. Ang ginibdj what razed.
Pumatay, Ang^ pincUay (1) person
or animal killed; (2) What ex-
tinguished. Ang ipatay or pinag-
vatayy the weapon or means of
Killing. Ang pinagpatayany the
place where a murder was com-
mitted. Siyd pinaiay niyd^ he kill-
ed him. Ang ipinatay niyd sa
kaniyd ang baril, the gun was what
he killed him with. Pmatay niyd
ftiyd nang barily he killed him with
a gun. Mamatayy to die. Ang
kamatayany death (abstr. ). Aug
kinamataydny the place of death
( past time ). Ang ikinamatay, the
cause of death ^past time). Ex.:
Fatay na siyd (he is dead now).
Namaiaydn akd nang amd ( I have
been bereaved of my father by
death). Aling bdhay ang kinama-
taydn niydf (In which house did
he die? ) And ang ikinamatay n iyaf
( W hat was the cause of his death? )
Nahirinan siyd nang tinik (he was
choked by a fish bone). Magpa-
tay^ to sentence to death; to have
another put to death. Mamdiay^
to kill habitually. Tigapagpatayy
butcher or executioner. Man-
himatayy to faint away. Magpaka-
Digitized by
Google
120
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
matap (1) to allow one's self to
be killed; (2) to commit suicide.
Sumiinoa. J4np«intino^, what burned.
Tumcums, Ang tinasias^ what ripped
up, undone, etc.
Pumdit, Ana pinalit^ what ex-
changed or bartered.
Humxisay. Ang hirv&My, what dis-
entangled or set in order. Mag-
pakdhuLsay^ to arrange well, to set-
tle things with care; also to be-
have well.
Magitim. Ang initimf what black-
ened. Ang iitim^ the blackener.
KaUimanj blackness. Umitim, to
become black.
XIII. Verbs of receiving take in for the object of the action; some
taking in for the thing affected and an for the person affected, as will be
seen &om the examples.
To set fire to.
To rip; to unseam; to undo.
To exchange; to barter.
To arrange; to disentangle.
To blacken.
To accept; to receive.
To go out to meet anyone; to wel-
come by meeting.
Tamangap. Ang tinangap, what re-
ceived or accepted. Ang tangapdn,
the person from whom accepted
or received; also the place. Ang
itangap, the cause of receiving, etc.
Sumambong. Ang sinalubong, the
person met or welcomed thus.
magmaluhongy to be received by
many, as a governor, etc. Mag-
kasalilbong, to meet accidentally.
Ex. : Nagkami&hong ang dalawang
magkapatid na bafmye sa Maynilei^
(the two sisters met accidentally
[by chance] in Manila).
XIV. In also denotes the object of verbs of "inviting," etc.
To invite. UrndkU. Ang indkit, who invited.
Umanyayd. Ang anyayahan^ the
person invited.
Pumiqinq. Ang piniging^ the person
invited.
MagpAniq, Ang pindnigy the person
invited.
Magtduo. Ang tindtio, the person in-
vited. Tauohin mo siyd, invite
him. Tauotauohin mo ang pagica-
kainy divide the food for each one
of the guests (i. e., put it on
plates).
Umalok. Ang inalok, the person so
invited.
To invite a person to eat.
XV. In generally denotes the person affected by the action of a verb,
with those verbs which necessarily have a person for the object, on account
of their nature and meaning.
To prevail upon; to persuade with
blandishments.
To wait for.
Magarogd. Ang inarogdj the person
so prevailed upon.
Humintay. Ang hinintaVf the per-
son waited for. Hintin mo sild,
wait for them. Maghintay (1) to
wait and guard something for an-
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
121
To carry in the arms, (as a child);
(2) to aid, to succor, to protect
(rare in Manila).
To reprehend; to reprimand; to find
fault with.
other; (2) to delay. Ex.: Houag
mong ihintay m bukas ang pagpa-
roon mo (do not delay your going
until to-morrow).
Sumaklulu. Ang sinakltUu ( 1 ) child,
etc., carried thus; (2) person aided,
etc.
Sumald, Ang sinaldy the person rep-
rimanded or found fault with.
Ex.: Salahin mo siyd nana kani-
yang ginagawd (reprimand him for
what he is domg) [ginaiudj what
he haa done]. Magsald, to find
much fault, or for many to find
fault, etc. Maqkasaldy to err, to
commit a fault, to sin. Ex.:
Houag mong ipo^kaaalA it6 (do not
commit this error [sin], Ipinag-
sasald ho ang pakikipagatiay sa inyd,
(I am doing wrong in quarreling
with you). Ipina^acUd niyd ang
pakikipagauay sa inyd (he did
wrong in quarreling with you).
Ipagkasasam nildang pakikipagauay
sa kaniyd (they will err in quarrel-
ing with him). Magkakasald, with
reduplication of last syllable of
particle, means "to forbid."
Tumanong, Ang tinanongj what
asked; the question. Magtanong^
to ask about. Ang Hinanong, what
has been asked, or the reason for
askins. Ang mapagtanongy per-
son fond of questioning. Ang
matanongin, the questioner. Ang
iinanongany the person questioned.
XVI. In generally denotes the catch, result, or quarry with verbs of
hunting and fishing. A few other verbs also follow this rule.
To hunt (in general). Vmdkad, AngindkcuiyWhathunted,
To hunt with dogs or hounds. Mangaso (from two, dog). Ang inasOy
the chase, the game caught. Ang
ipinangasOy the dog used thus.
Ang mangangasOy the hunter with
To ask; to inquire.
To hunt with a ** bating'* or
(generally for deer).
net
To hunt with a shotgun; to use a
shotgun.
To catch birds by means of a bird-
call, or by a snare, or with another
bird.
To fish with a hook.
Bumating. Ang binatingy the deer
or game thus caught. Ex.: Ang
binating ko ang bundok (I was net
hunting in the mountains). Ang
binatingany the place of ** net
hunting."
MamarU (from barily shotgun). Ang
mamamarily the hunter with a
shotgun. Ang pinamarUy what
shot thus.
Mangait; magpangail (from kali,
Ang pinangatiy what has been
caught thus.
Maminuit, A ng bininuU, what caught.
Ang ilyinuity the hook. Ang ma-
miminuUy the fisherman. Ang
Digitized by
Google
122
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To fish with the seine or net, called
*'lambat.''
To fish using a light (as also to hunt
with a flare).
pinamiminuitarif the canoe or place
from which such fishing is being
done.
Manlambai (from lamhat,) Ang li-
namhaty the catch; the haul. Ang
ipanlambaty the means for fishing
thus, i. e., the seine or net.
Mangilao. Ang pinangrilauany the
place where such fishing or hunt-
ing was done. Ang pinangilaOj
what caught thus.
Mangisdd (from isdd fish). Ang
pinangiaddj the fish which have
oeen caught. Ang mangtngisdd^
the fisherman.
Magwalis. Ang inwaliSy the sweep-
ings; what was or has been swept
up (from wallSf broom).
XVII. In is also used to denote the object with verbs of eating, drinking,
swallowing, and analogous acts.
To fish (in general).
To sweep.
To eat.
To drink.
To swallow (food) greedily.
To swallow (gulp) liquids.
To sip (as soup).
To suck at (as sugar-cane).
To bite.
Kumain. Ang kinainy what was
eaten. Ex.: Kinain ang kapatld
na IcUabi mo ang iindpayy your
brother ate the bread. Kaniiiy
food (cooked rice). Kakanbiy
delicacies. Ang kan&n, the eating
place. Ang kakandn, the dining
room; or platter. Magkainy to eat
much or by many.
Uminum. Ang ininum, what was or
has been drunk. Inuminy drink.
Ang inumany the drinking place;
trough; cup (drinking vessel).
Maginumy to drink much or by
many. Magpainuniy to give an-
other something to drink; (2) to
water animals or fowl. Ex. : ( 1 ) '
Paiinumin ko »iyd nang tdbigf
(Shall I give him some water?)
Houagy painumin mo siyd nang
alak (No, give him some wine.)
(2) Pinainum ninyd bagd ang
mangd cahayo? (Did you water
[give drink to] the horses?) Op6y
(Yes, sir). Papainum ka kay
Tomds (Ask Tomds to give you
something to drink). [indef.]
Lumamon. Ang linamony what was
or has been swallowed thus. Var.
Lumonlon.
Lamagok. Ang linagoky what gulped
down.
Humigop. Anghinigopy whatsipped.
Pumangds. Ang pinangdSy what
sucked at.
Kumagat. Ang kinagaty what bitten.
Magkagatany to bite mutually (as
two dogs.) Magkagatkagatany to
pretend to bite mutually. Nag-
kakagatkagat ang dalawang aao (the
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
128
To snap at.
To bite (as a pig at people).
To chew.
two dogs are only pretending to
bite each other). Manga^, to
run around biting, as an animal in
a rage.
Suminghal. Ang sininghaly who or
what snapped at.
Kumabkab, Ang Hnabkab, who or
what bitten by a pig thus.
i^gumoyd, Ang nginoydj what
chewed. '
XVIII. Acts of the senses, either general or modified, admit in to
express the definite results of such acts, with two exceptions. These are
tumingin (to look at) and tumimtim (to taste liquor) which take an as a
suflBx for reasons of euphony.
To see; to look at.
To look at.
To watch for; look out for; to sight.
KumitA. Ang Hnitdf what seen or
looked at.
Tamingin. Ang tingndn; ang tining-
ndrif what looked at.
Tamando, A ng tinandoy what sighted.
Tanauan^ watch tower; lookout-
place.
Manando, watchman; lookout.
To look attentively , turning the eyes Lwnmg6n. Ang liningdn^ what
or head.
To look much at things, noting and
considering them; to inspect.
To look sideways.
To behold; to view.
To hear.
To hear.
To listen to; to pay attention to.
To smell.
To scent; to perceive a strong odor.
To taste.
To relish; to like a taste.
To sample; to try; etc.
To taste without swallowing.
To taste liquor without swallowing
it.
To feel; to touch (general) .
looked at thus. Ex. : Dt mo ak6
liningdn (you did not turn your
head to look at me).
Umaninao. Ang inaninao, what in-
spected.
Sumuliyap. Ang sinuliyap, what
looked at sideways.
Pandod. Ang pinandod^ what be-
held.
Dumingig, Ang diningig^ what
heara. Ang dingdn^ person lis-
tened to.
Maghinyig. Ang kininyig^ what
hearcl.
Bumaiyag. Ang binatyag, what lis-
tened to. Var., kinamatyag and
malyag.
Umamoy. Ang inamoyy what smelled,
i. e., odor. Amoyin mo ito (smell
this).
Sumanghod. Ang sinanghod^ what
scented.
Lumasap. ^nyZinasap, what tasted
Numamnam. Any ninamnamy what
relished.
Thimikin. Ang tikmdvy what sam-
pled.
Tumiping (r.). Ang tipiiTgan, wh&t
tasted thus.
Tumimtim. Ang limiimanj what
tasted.
Humipb. Ang hinipd, what felt or
touched. Ex.: Walangmahihipbsa
kaniyang bdhay, [idiom] (there is
nothing to touch in his house, i. e.,
he is very j)oor).
Digitized by
Google
124
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To press down; also to close or seal
a letter.
To touch lightly.
To touch any part of the body lightly
but suddenly.
To touch suddenly.
To run into; to collide with.
To touch carelessly and affectedly.
To touch with the lips.
To feel for in the dark.
To pinch; to soften.
To rub; to soften; to annoint.
To pick (as a guitar) ; to pluck at (as
a sleeve).
To play any instrument or ring a bell
(by strokes).
Magdiit, Ana diitan^ what pressed
or closed. Pandiit; seal ; wax ; gum.
Turminakd {t.), Ang tinangkd, what
touched Syn. Tumam^kil.
Humipik (rare). Ang hipikariy per-
son touched. Syn. taghid (also
rare).
Dumantik (rare). Ang dantikan^ the
person thus touchea.
Magparonron^ var. magparorotig. Ang
pinagparonronf what touched.
Aiig ipinagparonron, the cause of
having touched thus.
Sumagi, var. Sumagoy (latter rare).
Gumumil (rare). Variations of this
root are gamUy gobii, and gombil.
Magdungil (rare). This is not the
verb **to kiss," which is humalik.
Humikap. Ang hinikap, what felt
for thus.
Pumiail. Ang pinisUy what rubbed,
etc. Pisiin mo itd nang kamay mo
(rub this with your hand).
Humilot. Ang hinilotj what rubbed,
etc. Ang hilotan, the person
rubbed, etc. Hilot ( n. ) , midwife ;
manhihilotj massageur.
MagkalabUy var. magkcUbit, Ang pi-
nagkalabit, what plucked at or
picked thus, i. e., the sleeve or the
strings. Ang ipinagkalabit, the in-
strument or means, i. e., the fin-
gers or plectrum (pick). Ang
pangalibitf the instrument played
upon thus.
Tamugtug,
\Dy Btroites;.
XIX. In also expresses acts of the will or mind.
To remember.
To calculate; to consider.
To desire; to like.
(To caress.)
To love.
To think.
Umalaakiy to remember (purposely).
Makaalaakif to remember (cas-
ually ) . Ang inaalacUaj what is re-
membered purposely.
Magb'dlay. Ang pinafbuMIay, what
is being calculated, i. e., the result.
Umibig, Ang iniibigy the person who
is liked (and reciprocates the Uk-
ing); (2) what is liked; also ang
ibigin.
Umirog. Ang iniirog, the person be-
ing caressed.
Sumintd. Ang sinisintdy the person
who is loved and who loves in re-
turn. Ang nasisintdf the person
who is loved, but who is unaware
of the fact or does not return it.
Magsintahan, to love mutually.
Magisip. Ang iniisipy what is being
thought of. Ang inisipy what was
thought of. Ang iisipin^ what will
be thought of. Magisipisipy to
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
125
To esteem; to love.
To think.
To explain.
think deeply; profoundly. Anp
pagkaisipy the opinion ( act) . Kam-
pan (abet.), opinion, thought.
Lumiyag ( rare ) . Ang liniliyag, what
or who esteemed or loved. Sintd
is more common, but is a Sanskrit
word derived through Malay.
Panimdim. Ang pinapanimdim, what
is thought.
Magsalayaapy var. magsaysay. Ang
sinasalaysayf what is being ex-
plained. ScUaysayin mo iid (ex-
plain this).
Umulusithd (r.). Ang inutUusithdy
whatis being inquired, etc., var. cUo-
sithdj idea of verifying, etc., also.
Umumd,, Ang inutmsdf what is be-
ing verified . Taiiong walang umdy
a person without carefulness; a
careless person.
XX. The making of something from raw or crude material is expressed
by using the finish^ product verbally or as a verbal noun with tn, the ma-
terial used taking the nominative, if there are no limitations of cause, time,
place, etc., connected with the action.
To inquire;
verify.
to assure one's self; to
To verify, etc.
To put up a house.
To roll one*s self up in a cloak or
*'baUbaI."
To put a shirt on; to wear a shirt
(occasionally), from hard, a cloth
used to make shirts, and also mean-
ing a shirt itself.
To wear trousers.
To wear shoes (occasionally) ; to put
a pair of shoes on.
Magbdhay(irom bdhay yhouee). This
word has been given as derived
from Malay bald, hall; (!Ourt, from
Sanskrit valaya, an inclosure, but
it would seem rather to be a Ma-
layan name, as in iTgela ( Florida
or Anudha) Island of the Solomon
Group the word is vale and far
away in Hawaii is hale. There
may be said to exist intermediate
words throughout. Ex. : Bahayin
mo itong kdhoy (Put up a house
with this lumber). Magbdhaybd-
hayan (dim.), (to play at building
houses [as children do] ) . Nagbd-
haybdhayan ang mangd bcUd (the
children were playing at building
houses).
Magbaldbal Balabalin mo iUmg kayo
US (make a cloak out of this cloth;
or wrap yourself in this cloth).
Magbarby Itong kayong itd^ y babaroin
niyd (he [she] will make a shirt
out of this cloth). An indicates a
person as the object of the action.
Ex.: Baroan mo iyang baid iydn
(put a shirt on that child). Ma-
maroj to wear a shirt habitually.
Magsalaual, from salaual, trousers
(Arabic, Seluwar). Itong kayong
U6*y sasalatialin ko, I will make
trousers out of this cloth.
Magsapin (from sapin, a shoe or san-
dal). Itong balat naitd^y sasapinin
nUd (they will make this leather
Digitized by
Google
126 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
into shoes). Manapiuy to wear
shoes habitually.
To put an apron (tapis) on; to wear Magtapis. luang kayong iydn ay la-
a tapis occasionally. pisin niyd (let her make an apron
out of that cloth). Manapis, to
wear a tapis habitually.
To carry a cane, or <wn^^(x/. Maglunkod. Itong kdhoy na itd'' y tinu-
tungkod ko (I am making a cane
out of this wood).
XXI. In, used with the name of a destructive agent, denotes the present
or past result of the destructive action. It is prefixed to vowel nouns and
infixed with those beginning with a consonant (w is counted as a vowel) .
White ant (termite). Anay. Indnay ang )nangd libra (the
books were destroyed bv the white
ants [were white-anted^).
Locust. Bdlang. Binabdlang ang pdlay (the
rice is being destroyed oy the lo-
custs).
Rat. Dagd. Dinadagd ang bigds (the rice
[hulled] is being destroyed by the
rats [lit. is h^ing ** ratted"]).
Mandaragdj rat-catcher.
Grow. Uak. Inuuak ang sa^fing (theheii\a.n»^s^
are being destroved by the cro^^ s
[being ** crowed '']).
XXII. In, prefixed or infixed, used with words denoting parts of tiie
body indicates past or present pain or suffering in the part named. The
first syllable of the root is reduplicated to indicate the present tense.
Head. Ulo. Inula ak6 (I had a headache).
Inuulo niyd (she [he] has a heatl-
ache). Masakit ang ula ka (my
head aches).
Chest. Dibdib. Dinibdib niyd ( he had a pain
in the chest).
Stomach. Sikmura. Sinisikmura ka? (Does
your stomach pain you? ) Op6, sini-
dkmura ako (yes, sir; I have a pain
in the stomach).
Abdomen. Tiydn. TiniyAn ak6 (my abdomen
pained me). T'miiiydn ak6 (my
abdomen pains me) .
XXIII. In like manner, in, prefixed to or inserted with roots signifying
diseases may denote the past or present state of the disease. The first
syllable of the root is reduplicated to indicate the present tense. If a
chronic state of the disease is to be expressed, the patient is denoted by
the suffixing of in (hin) to the root. (The future tense, it must be remem-
bered* reduplicates the first syllable of the root. ) The suffix in may also
denote a physical defect or the result of a disease.
Smallpox. Bulutong. Ang binubulutongy the per-
son who is having smallpox. Ang
binulutong, the person who has had
smallpox. Ang bulutangin, the
marks of smallpox. Magbulutang,
to become marked by smallpox.
Magkabuldtang, to have an epi-
demic of smallpox.
Asthma. Hikd. Hikain^ asthmatic person.
Gout. Piy6. Piyahin, gouty person.
Abdomen. Tiydn. Tiyanin, corpulent person.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE. 127
"IN (hin; nin)" suffixed.
XXIV. In (hin) suffixed to names of birds denotes gamecocks of the
general color of the bird named. Some words change the accent of the
root, while others retain the original accent. Ex. :
Hawk (several species). Lawin. Lalamnin^ game cock of a
brown color, like a hawk.
('row. Uak. lluakiUy black game cock. It
will be seen that the first syllable
of the root is reduplicated.
XXV. In (hin) denotes the completed action or result of a verb which
requires an object if suffixed to a verbal root of this nature; provided the
root admits in for the direct object. Ex. :
To drink. Uminum, Inumin^ drink.
To eat. Kumain, Kanin^ food. Kakanin;
kakainy refreshments, sweets, nuts.
These last words formed with ka
mean **food-resembline."
To sew (occasionally). Tamaht TahiiUj anythmg sewed;
tailor work. Magtaht^ to sew in
company (many) or to sew much.
Manahty to sew for a living. Man-
anahty tailor; tailoress; seamstress,
needlewoman ( dressmaker) . Mag-
patahi, to order to sew. Ex. : ltd
ang paUxhi niyd sa dkin (this is
what she told me to sew).
To graze. Sumabsab. ^n^«a&«a6m, whatgrazed,
i. e., the grass. Ang sabmban, the
grazing place; pasture, etc.
XXVI. In used with verbal roots capable of expressing qualities which
may be acquired or extended to persons, animals, etc., indicates the object
of the action. Ex.:
To look out (as from a window). Dumungao. Ang dungauinyWhsit seen
by looking out. This and similar
forms contain no tense idea. Ang
dinungao, what was or has been
looked at thus. Ang dinurungaOy
what is being looked at thus. Ang
durungauany the window. Man-
ungaOy to look by many thus or
sometimes to appear at the window
(also idea of habit thus). Ex.:
Houag kang manungao sa durung-
auan (do not look out of [or appear
at] t he window ) . MarungaOf to be
at the window. Marurungao siyd,
he is at the window. MakarungaOy
to look out of a window casually.
Mag^adungaOy to order to look out.
MalcidungaOy to join another in thus
looking out. Magkapadungax)^ to
look out suddenly, moving quickly
in order to do so.
To swim. Lumangoy. Maghngoyy to swim car-
rying somethmg. Ang langoyiny
what gained by swimming, or ob-
ject swam for. Ang ilangoyy what
carried while swimming, e. g., the
clothes; also by what means.
Digitized by
Google
128
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
To dive for; to dive (occasionally).
Langoyan^ a buoy. Langoydrij a
place for swimming; where swim-
ming may be done. Ptnaglangoyan,
place where swimming was (ione
while carrying something. Ex.:
Marunong kang lumangoy? Hindi
v6. (Do you know how to swim?
No, sir.) Ano/ Tagdlog ka * t /. in dt
maruncnxg kang luma ngo\i? (What!
You a Tagalog and don't know
how to swim?) Taga s&an kat
(Where are you from?) Taga
bundok^ p6 (I live in the moun-
tains, sir). PcM (I did not know
it).
To fly. Lumipad. Ang liparin, the object
of the flight. A7ig ilipad, the
wings, or instrument of flight.
Ang liparan, place of flight. Mag-
lipadf to fly much, or to and fro.
Magpalipadf to cause or teach to
fly. Ang pinalipad^ what set or
taught to fly.
Sumisid. Ang sisiriny what dove
for. The reason for diving or the
body submerged, ang isisid, Ang
sislrany the diving place. MagsiMdj
to dive much. Ang pinagsisid^
what dove for much, ifanisidy to
dive professionally (for a living).
Maninisidj diver.
To run. Tamakhd. Ang tokbohinj what may
be run for. Takbohiny runaway.
Magtakbdy to run much. Ang
itakbdy the cause for running or
what is carried while running.
Ang takbohan (1) the place of run-
ning; (2) the person run away
from; (3) the person for whom
something may be carried. Tu-
makbdtakbd, to rove about; to run
around ; to gad about. Makatakbdy
to be able to run.
XXVII. In used with ?na adjectives which have an attributive sense
imparts the idea of holding, considering, reputing, etc., according to the
meaning of the adjective. This has been fully explained under the adjec-
tive (q. v.).
XXVIII. In suffixed also expresses the act of causing emotion or sensa-
tion in others when used with roots which require no object, and form the
class of verbs called neuters, which are generally expressed in English by
** to be " followed by an adjective. It may also be prefixed.
To be hungry.
To be thirsty.
Magutum. Ex. : Naguguium ang ca-
bayo ( the horse is hungry) . Houag
mong giUumin ang cabavo (don' t let
the horse go hungry). Kagutu-
man, hunger.
Mauhao, Haaag mong inuuhao ang
080 (don't let the dog remain
thirsty, or be suffering from
tJairst.). Ex.: NagugiUum bagd
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 129
kaydt (Areyonhunery?) HindVl
nauuhao l&mang ako (No, I am
only thirsty).
To be afraid. Matdkot. Natatdkot kaf (Are you
afraid?) Op6 nga, akd^y natatdkot
( yes, sir, I am afraid ) . Makata kotj
to cause fear. Ang ikaidkoty the
cause of fright. A ng katakoian^ the
person feared, also thing feared.
Ex.: And ang kinatatakotan mof
(What are you afraid of?) Ang
kinatakotan Ao'v d'ng mangd tulisdn
(I was afraid of the ladrones
[bandits]). Tumdkoty to frighten
or scare another. Ang takotiny the
person frightened. Takotin mo
siydj frighten (scare) him.
XXIX. It will be seen from the foregoing that in is not used with
roots conjugated with ?wa, except in certain senses, as shown by the above
examples.
XXX. In suflBxed to terms for money forms words denoting an object
or material costing the amount represented by the money quoted. The
first syllable of the root is duplicated, but the accent does not change.
Ex.:
Half peso (25 cents U. S. currency). Salapi. Sasalapiiny a half- peso's
worth.
Peso (50 cents U. S. currency). Pisos. Pipisosiny a peso's worth.
XXXI. In suffixed to some nouns when paying compliments, etc.,
indicates that the party addressed resembles or partakes of the qualities
expressed by the word used.
The Candd (which has a sweet odor). Kandd, jRTanda/iir), a sweet person.
Honey. Pulot. Pulotiny honey (term of en-
dearment).
XXXII. Suffixed to roots capable of being expressed with the idea of
plurality, in denotes something to have taken place many times. The
accent of the root changes invariably. Ex. :
Idea of whipping. Hampds, Hampasinj whipped many
times.
To lose; to miss. Mawald. TFa^ain, to lose many times.
To sue another; to litigate. MapiUap. Usapiny a suit tried many
times. Palausapy barrator (one
who is continually engaging in
causeless litigation).
XXXIII. Niny when prefixed to class names of human beings signifies
a resemblance to the class named. Ex. :
Woman; female. Bahaye. 5a6avmn, effeminate man.
BinahayCy has almost same mean-
ing.
Man; male. Lalaki. La/aibmm, masculine or man-
nish woman or girl.
XXXIV. The object to obtain possession of which an intransitive action
is performed sometimes takes in, if not otherwise expressed. Ex. :
To go or come out; to take out. Lumabds, Ang lahamiy who or what
sought thus; object for which ac-
tion performed. MaglaMsy to take
out. Ang labsdny what may be
6855—05 ^9
Digitized by
Google
130
TAG A LOG LANGUAGE.
taken out, (as food from the cook-
ing pot), or what may flow out of
the body (as blood, etc.). Ex.:
Labsdn mo akd nana kanin (take
some rice out for me). Maglahd»-
labdsy to go out and come in.
Lumoksd. JrwrZoA^o/im, what jumped
for. Ang loksohant the place of
jumping. Jfa^toib8($, to jump much,
or by many. Magloksokan^ to
jump by many in competition.
Lummong. Ana IvLsonain^ object
leaped down lor or alighted for.
Ang lusongaUf the place of lighting.
Idiom. Ldsang na r>aladj a leap
(stroke] of luck, ilagliisong, to
throw down or push down.
Pumanaog, Angpwruwgin^ the object
for which action may be per-
formed. Ang panaogan^ the place
or person for whom action may be
penormed . Ex . : Panaogan mo akd
nang iiXhig (bring me some water
down here ) . Magvanaog, to bring
something down tnus, or to go or
come down much.
XXXV. Some transitive (requiring an object) verbs do noty and some
intransitive verbs rfo, admit in.
To jump.
To leap or jump down; (2) to alight
To go or come down (the stairs or a
ladder, etc.).
XXXVI. In prefixed to or infixed with a root to which an is suffixed at
the same time is used to express the result of an action when the said result
is a concrete object. Ex:
To embroider mats (petates).
To do fine needlework; to do fine
sewing.
Magsdbat. ASma6aton7an embroidered
mat (petate).
Sumulam, Sinulamanj fine needle-
work, as a handkerchief or other
article of fine sewing.
XXXVII. The same construction is also used to express the following:
(1) Things prepared for food from the raw material. (2) Acts done with
the object expressed b)[the root. (3) The refuse caused by some actions.
Plurality with the last is expressed by the use of the definite prefix pag in
connection with in (pina^). Ex.:
lUog, Initlogdnj anything made from
eggs, as cake or an omelet, etc.
Pulot. Finulotdny anything made
with honey in it. Pulot&n, sweets
made from honey. Puhi-gatdL,
honey and cocoanut milk.
Kumayds. Kinayasan^ the peeling
(sing.). Ang pinagkayasanj the
peehngs (plur.).
Gumiik. Giniikan, straw. I^na-
giikanj much straw. Magiikj to
thresh much.
Lumagart. Pinaglagarian, sawdust.
Ang manlalagarij the sawyer,
to Pvmili. Ang pinUihany the refuse;
waste.
Egg.
Honey.
To peel rattans (bejuco).
To thresh.
To saw.
To sort Sotton or silk; to cull;
pick over.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE. 131
MA— IN (HIN).
XXXVIII. In (hin) suffixed and ma prefixed to roots ei^ifying mental
emotions, paseions, and involmitary actions form adjectival nouns which
generally require to be expressed in English by an adjective and a noun.
XXXIX. If the root admits of contraction, begins with I, or an intensive
degree is to be expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated.
These words have the accent on the last syllable as a rule. For examples
see under ma.
XL. It may be repeated here that acquisition or assimilation is generally
denoted by in; the instrument, if allowable, and the reason for the carry-
ing out of the action by i; and the place, or the person from whom, by an.
Additional examples:
To reach; to overtake; (2) to con- Umdbui. ^n^ a&ttfin, what reached,,
cl ude ( as a meeting ) . etc. Ang indbuty w hat was reached,.
etc. Ang abutan^ the person over-
taken or thing reachea for. Vma-
buty to reach for one*s self. Magd-
btUy to reach for another. Ang
pagdbuty the act of reaching. Maga-
bvHany to reach for each other mu-
tually. MagabtUabulany to reach
manv things or pass things from
hand to hand in numbers. Maka-
dbiUy to take; to be able to reach.
Makidbuty to ask another to reach
for something. 'E^r. NakidhUako
kay Juan nang tdbig ( I askt d Juan
to reach me [get for me] Pome
water) .
To buy. Bumili. Ang hilhin or ang nabiliy what
bought. Ang ibiliy the purchasing
agent ( money or article) . Ang bil-
hdn or ang nabUhdn, the person
from whom bought, i. e. , the seller.
Ang binilhdny the person from
whom something was or has been
bought. Ang ibinili, (1 ) the money
with which something was or has
been bought; (2) the person for
whom something was or has been
bought. Ang pagbUiy the buying;
purchasing (act). Mamiliy to buy
much. Ang pamimUiy the buying
of many things (act). Ang nami-
miliy the buyer by wholesale, or
liberal buyer. Ex.: Pinamili ka
iyang mangd kaldkal (I bought
those goods at wholesale). Maka-
biliy to be able to buy. Ang naka-
bUiy the person able to buy (past) .
Ang ijnnaMli, the time, reason, or
price in or for which something is
or has been bought. Ang mangd
pinabUhdny the sellers thus (many).
Ang kabiliy the person with whom
a purchase has been agreed upon.
Ang nagkabUihany the buyer and
seller thus agreed (past tense).
Ang pagkabUhdny the cost (past
tense). Ex. : Pagkabilhdn ko man
Digitized by
Google
132
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
ToeelL
To snatch; to pull up by the roots; to
take by force.
To take.
To request; to ask for.
To close the hand.
nang buhav, parorSon akS (even
if it should cost me my life, I will
go).
Maghili. Ang ipaghili, what sold.
Aug ipinagbilij what was or has
been sold. Ang pinaghUhAn, the
person to whom sold (past tense) ;
the place, or the price. Ang nai-
pagbiliy w hat has been sold by error.
Ang napagbUhdrif the money real-
ized from what has been sold. Ang
pagblbiliy the act of selling. (The
act of buying is ang pagbiH. ) Mag-
bibilif to sell by wholesale.
Kumamkam. Ang hinamham^ what
snatched, etc., thus (past tense).
Ang kamkaminj what snatchea,
pulled up, etc. (no tense idea).
Mangamkam^ to go about pulling
up things (as a gardener pulls up
weeds).
Kumuha. Ang kinuha^ what was or
has been taken. Ang ikuha^ the
means for taking (no tense idea).
Ang kunin^ what taken (no tense
idea) . Ang ikinuha^ the means by
which something was or has been
taken. Ang kunduy the place or
person from whom taken.
Humingi. Ang hiningi, what asked
for. Ang nahingi^ what obtained
by asking. Ang hingin^ what asked
for (no tense idea).
Kumimkim, Magkimkimj to grasp;
to close the hand upon. Ang kim-
kimin^ what grasped. Ang Hmw-
kiniy what was or has been grasped.
Ang ikimkim^ the grasping instru-
ment; e. g., the hand.
THE PARTICLE I.
I. The definite particle t, which is almost invariably a prefix and found
as an infix with a very few words for strictly euphonic reasons, is used
with sentences or phrases by which the subject is represented as losing con-
trol of something, expulsion, cause, means, instrument, time (not tense),
and verbs of adjusting, copying into, transferring, translating, transplant-
ing, etc., in the latter case indicating the object of the verb.
II. Sentences or phrases including a verb with i have the agent in the
genitive, the direct object in the accusative (if there is a direct object),
and the word denoting the instrument, time, or cause in the nominative.
The nominative word is emphasized by being placed at the beginning of
the sentence or phrase.
To pinion; to tie the hands.
Gumdpos. Ang igapoSj the means —
i. e., the rope. Ex. : Igapos mo sa
bilangoin iiong pantcUt (Pinion the
prisoner with this rope). Em-
phatic: Itong pantcUi igapos mo sa
bilangoin (with this rope pinion
the prisoner) .
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANCHrAGE.
138
III. /, meaning cause, is generally combined with ^'a, the definite form of
makaj forming Ika; and further with in for the past and present tenses, ibina.
To come here. Pumarito. Ang ipinaritOy the reason
or time of coming here. Ang iki-
naparitOy the reason or time thus
(past tense). 'EiJL.-. And angikma-
paritomof (What did you come
here for?) Si Juan ang ikinaparito
ko (Juan was the cause oi my
having come here ) . Sino ang pina-
ritohan mof ( Who did you come
to see here?) Si Juan (Juan).
IV. Some verbal roots have the idea of going away, leaving, etc., inherent
in themselves, and therefore have the definite in either in or i. Ex. :
To go away; to leave. Umalis, Ang inalis^ the leaving
(pref. to ang ialia). Kahapon, ang
inalis ko (yesterday, I left). Ang
pagalist the act of leaving. Maga-
liSf to take something away. Ang
pa^aaliSj the action of taking some-
thmg away. Kapagaalis ko nit6
ngayin (I have just finished tak-
ing this away). MakaaliSy to be
able to go away. Makapagalis^ to
be able to take away.
V. An indirect object following a preposition takes the genitive with a
sentence or phrase using i, but the construction of the rest of the sentence
or phrase is unchanged. Ex. :
BumUi. Ibili mo ang haid nang kaka-
nln (Buy some sweets for the
child).
Humatid. Ihatid mo ak6 sa bdhay
nang amd mo (Accompany me to
your father's house [to the house
of your father]). Maghatid, to
send; to remit. Maghatidhaiiran^
to send to each other mutually.
Humdnap. Ihdnap mo akd nang isang
mabuting cabayo (Look for a good
horse for me). Ihdnap mo ako
nang mangd itlog (Look for some
eggs for me).
VI. The person for whom some act is done and the indirect object of
an action benefiting or performed for the benefit of another, take the
nominative; the verb being used with i and the proper tense forms. The
foregoing sentences are also examples of this, as well as the following
examples:
To cook ; to make by cooking or like
process.
To buy.
To carry; to accompany.
To look for.
To build a house.
Maglutd. Ex.: Ipaglutd mo ang capi-
tan nang sicolate (Make some choc-
olate for the captain). Ipaglutb
mo akd nang kanin (Cook me some
rice).
Magbdhay. Ipagbdhay mo akd ( Build
me a house).
Digitized by
Google
134
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
yil. /generally replaces in
indirect objects, i being used
and an expressing the indirect
To recommend.
To make a gift; to present with.
To advise.
To give back; to restore.
To tell; to narrate; to report.
To talk; to speak.
with verbs which admit both direct and
to express the direct object (accusative)
object ( dative, etc. ) . Ex. :
MaghUin, Ang ipagbilin, the rec-
ommendation. Ang ipinagbilin,
what was or has been recom-
mended. Ang pagbUinnny the per-
son recommended (no tense idea) .
Ang pinaghilinan, the person who
was or has been recommended.
Maghiyaya. Ang ipinagbiyaya^ what
was or has been given, i. e., the
gift. Ang pinagbiyayadny the per-
son to whom something was or has
been given. Mabiyayang tduo, a
liberal person.
Maghdtol. This verb also means in
some cases to procure women.
Ang ihcUol, the advice. Ang ihi-
ndtol, what was or has been ad-
vised. Ang hxitolan, the person
advised. Ang Mnatolan, the per-
son who was or has been advised.
Ang ipaghdtoly the woman pro-
cured. Mapaghdtol na lalaU, pro-
curer; panderer. Mapaghdtol na
babayCt procuress.
MagsaolL This verb also means to
go back, to return to the place of
starting. Ang isinaoU, what was or
has been restored. Ang mnaolian,
the person to whom something
was or has been restored. Ang
pagsaoldny the place returned to.
MagsalM. Ang salUin^ what told or
reported (no tense idea). Ang
sinalitd; ang isinalUd, what was or
has been told, etc. Ang sinasalitd;
ang isinasalitd, what is being told,
etc. Ang sasaliiin; ang isasalitdf
what will be told or reported.
Ang pagsalitadn, the person told
or reported to (no tense idea).
Ang pinagsalitadn, the person told,
etc. (past tense). Ang plnagsam-
Ivtadn, the person being told or
reported to ( present tense ) . Ang
pagaasalitadHy the person to be
told or reported to (future tense).
Ang ininagmlitd, what was told
and the reason for telling. Ang
nagsalitdy the teller (past tense).
Ang nagsasalitd, the narrator
( present tense ) . Ang magsasalitd,
the teller (future tense). Ang
kamUtaan^ the companion in tell-
ing; the coreporter. Masalitdf
garrulous, like an aged person.
Sumabi. Ang sabihin^ what said or
the person or thing mentioned.
ir I- ^ converse; to say.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE. 135
Ang isabij the reason or cause of
the conversation. Ang isinabi,
what was or has been said. Ang
ipinugaabif what was or has been
said and the reason or cause. Ang
sahihan, the conversation or story.
Ang pinagsabihan^ what said to a
certain person or said at a certain
place.
To signal. Tumurd. Magturb, to point out; to
show; (f.) to teach. Ang itinurb^
what signaled, pointed out or
taught. Ang hnuroan^ person
shown (taught) or signaled to.
Other verbs which have two objects like the foregoing are umdral^ *'to
teach;" maghalUd, "to report;'* magbigay^ "to give;" and magbilij **to
sell, " which have been or will be explained in other places.
VIII. In the majority of cases i expresses the means or instrument by
which an action is brought about. It is prefixed directly to the root for
those conjugated with um in any manner, and to the verbalizing particle
in the other conjugations. This applies to all tenses. The first syllable
of the root or the last syllable of the particle, as the case may be, redupli-
cate in the present and future tenses. In the second pluperfect and second
future perfect tenses the particle i is inserted between the particle na or
ma and the root, whether the latter be simple or compound. (See tables. )
IX. The root denoting an instrument, if capable of conjugation, may
denote the indirect object, if there is no nominal direct object in the sen-
tence. Ex. : An6 ang ipinatay niydf (What was he killed with?) Ibindril
niyd (he was killed with a gun). With in the sentence would be: pinataj/
niyd nang bdril ( he was killed with a gun ). In the last example the nomi-
nal subject bdril is expressed. (See tables for the conjugation of an instru-
ment with 1, and with means for accomplishment of an action. )
X. I is also used, as has been stated, to express the means for the ac-
complishment of an action. Ex. : Wald siyang ibili nitong bdhay (he is
without the means to buy this house) . Mayro&n ak6 ibahayad sa iyo ( 1 have
the means to pay you).
XI. I combined with in may express the direct object (accusative) of
actions performed for the benefit of others, which may also be expressed
by in alone; an expresses place in general with such verbs; and i com-
bined with pag and pinaa according to the tense, expresses the person who
is, was, has been, or will be the beneficiary of the action.
To roast ( meat) ; to bake or fry ( fish Magihao. Ang iniihaoy what is being
or meat). fried or roasted. Ang ipinaaiikao,
the person for whom sometning is
being roasted, etc. Ang ihaoan^
the trying pan or roaster. Ang
pinagihaoany the place of roasting.
To scald or make, as tea; to boil (as Maglagd, Ang inilagd, what boiled
potatoes, etc.). or m£ide thus. Ang ipaglagdy the
person f or w horn to be made. A ng
lagadnj the cooking pot, teapot,
etc. Ex.: Ipaglagd mo akd nang
sa (make me some tea).
To cook. Maglutb. Ang lutoiny what cooked.
Ang inilutby what cooked (see next
paragraph ) . Ang lutodnj the cook-
ing utensil. Ang paglutodnj the
cooking place. «
XII. When roots beginning with hy Z, or a vowel (including tv) are con-
jugated with in and instrumental i, etc., the Tagalog reverses the particle
Digitized by
Google
136 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
in to ni or changes it to na, in order to avoid the harsh sounds of the doable
t, especially with roots commencing with i. Ex. :
To throw down. MagMlog. Ang ikdlog, what dashed
to ground or thrown down (no
tense idea). Ang ihinulog or ang
inahulog^ what was or has been
thrown down, etc. Ang ihinuhulog
or ang inahuhulog, what is being
thrown down, etc. Ang ihuhtdog^
what will be thrown down, etc.
(See tables for these. )
To place; to put. Maglagay. Ang ilagay^ what placed.
Ang uinagay; ang inilagay or ang
incUagay^ what was or has been
placed.
To get rid of; to disappear. Magtvald. Ang iniwaldf what was or
has been gotten rid of, etc.
XIII. With certain classes of verbs such as (1) those requiring two com-
plements, e. g., magmlildf **to tell;*' magutang^ **to lend;" ma^igay, **to
give,'* etc., and (2) with those expressing expulsive or dispersive action,
e. g.yinagtapon^ ** to throw away;" magsdbogy *' to scatter seed, etc.," i forms
a true passive, which may be so expressed in English.
XI\ . With verbal roots not included in the foregoing classes i forms an
expression peculiar to Tagalog and allied languages by denoting either the
instrument, cause, or time of the action. In these cases the cause, reason,
instrument, or time becomes the subject of the sentence in the nominative
case, especially if the sentence should include an indirect complement ex-
pressive of such instrument, cause, time, etc., in addition to a direct object.
( 1 ) To give. Magbigay. Ang ibinigayy what was
or has been given. Ex. : Ibinigay
ni Juan iyang salapt (that money
was the gift of Juan).
(2) To throw away. Magtapon. Tumapon^ to cast (as a
net). Ex. w^ith magtapon: Itina-
pon ko ang sulat ( I threw the letter
away ) . And ang gagawin ko nilong
isddf (What shall I do with this
fish? ) Jtapon wio ( th row it away ) .
Ex. with tumapon: Minsang itapon
nahuU ho itong isdd (I caught this
fish with one throw [of the net] ).
Ang taponany the fisn line; also,
where anything may be thrown;
the scrap hole or heap.
To plant; to sow. Magtanim. (2) Also to bear hate or
rancor toward another. Ahing
itinatanim itong pdlay (I am plant-
ing this rice). Ang tamndnj the
place of planting. As will be seen,
besides being contracted, there is
a transposition with m and n with
this word with suffixed an.
(See tables for conjugation of mmdbog, to sow, with i. )
XV. If the instrument is expressed in full with a verb using the expul-
sive i, the instrument takes the proper preposition in the genitive. Ex.:
Itinapon niyd^ng buhanfin nang panhukay (he threw the sand away with
a hoe).
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
137
XVI. (1) Roots which take mag for the primary idea in the indefinite
generally have i for the corresponding definite, combined with in for the
past and" present tenses. Um roots generally take in only for the simple
definite (direct object) . (2) Roots which vary in meaning according to the
verbalizing prefix or infix tim, inagy etc., generally retain the definite form
oimag, magka, etc., with i, forming ipag, ipinag^ ipa, ipina^ etc., as pre-
fixes to the root. (See tables for conjugation of kumdlaty to spread, to
propagate (of its own accord); magkdkU^ to spread widely (by outside
Ex.:
agency )
(1) To sun ; to put in the sunshine.
To pour out.
To scatter.
To add.
To heap up; to lay in layers.
(2) To spread; to propagate (of its
own accord).
To spread widely (by outside
agency) .
To borrow (money only).
Maghilad. Ang ibinilady what was
or has been put in the sunlight,
as clothes to dry. Ang hilarany the
place. Ang bxlarany the rope by
which suspended, etc. Ang ibilady
what sunned, dried in the sun, etc.
MaghuhoB. -4n^t6w/io«, what poured
out. Ang ibinuhos, what has been
poured out. MamuhoSy to spill
out; (2) fig. to spread out or run
to, as a road. Ex. : Sd an nunuhos
itong daan f (Where does this road
run to?) Nunuhos sa bay an (it
goes to town). MagkabuhoSy to
run together (as two roads). Nag-
kakabuhos ang dalawang daany the
two roads run together. Kabu-
ho8 dugdy of the same blood, as
children of the same mother,
Magbulagmky var. magbtUaksak. Ang
ibulagsaky what scattered. Ang
ibinulagsaky what was or has been
scattered. Ang ibinubulagsaky what
is being scattered. Ang ibubu-
lagsaky what will be scattered.
Magdagdag. Ang idagdag, what
added. Ang idinagdagy what was
added. Ang dagdagany what has
been added to. Ang mandaragdagy
the adder.
Magpdtong. Ang ipdtongy what
heaped up or laid in layers. Also
used for generations. Ex.: Ildn
ang pdtong ang nagmula sa Lakan-
dolaf (How many generations
have there been since Lacandola?)
Kumdlat Ang ikdlaiy what may
spread. Ang ihindlaty what has
spread.
Magkdlat. Ang ipagkdlaty what may
be spread thus. Ang ipinagkdlaty
what was or has been so spread.
Ex. (indef.): Nagkakdlat si kuan
nang wikang nakasasamd sa kopoua
iauo (what*s his name has oeen
spreading bad reports all over
about his neighbor). Kdlatkdlat
ang dild niyd (he has a most tat-
tling tongue).
UmiUang. Ang utnnginy the loan.
Ang utangany the person from
whom borrowed. Ang iuiangy the
cause.
Digitized by
Google
138 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To lend (money only). Magiitang, (Also to borrow mnch. )
Ang ipinagHUangf the loan.
To lend willingly. MagpaiUang, AngipaiUangfthelo&n
made thus. Ang pautangiriy the
person lent to thus. Ex.: Pau-
tangin mo ak6 nang piaos (lend me
a peso). laang salapt Idmang
ang ipauutang ko sa iy6 (I will only
lend you a half peso) . Ipinautang
ko sa iy6 ang salapi ko {1 have lent
my money to you). Bdkithindi
mo ak6 pinauutang nang salapif
(Why won't you lend me some
money ?) Sa pagkaH waldy (be-
cause I have none). PaiUangj
credit. Kauiangan^ debt.
XVII. This is also shown by bumUly '* to buy; " and magbUi, *'to sell,"
already explained).
To buy by retail (on a small scale). Umutay, Ang inutayj what was
bought thus.
To sell on a small scale. Magutay. Ang ipinagutayj what was
sold thus.
XVIII (1) Ika {ikina for past and present tenses) is generally used to
express cause or reason, and also time (for the latter see under ma).
To destroy. Sumird. Magsirdy to destroy much.
Makasirdf to be able to destroy.
Ex.: Angikinasird nang kaniyang
ari ang pagmmgal (gambling was
the cause by which he lost his
property).
To be sad. MaMpis. MakaMpiSf to cause sad-
ness. Ang ikahapiSy the cause of
sadness (no tense idea). Ex.:
Ikinahdpis ko ang pagkamatay
niyd ( I was saddened by his dying
[death ] ) . Ikinahuhapis ko ang pag-
kamatay niyd (I am saddened by
his death). Ikahahdpis mo ang
pagkamatay ni Gat Juan (You will
be saddened by the death of
Don Juan). Kahapisany sadness
(abstr . ) . KahdpishapiSy sad or sor-
rowful object or spectacle; also
great sorrow.
(2) Ika (ikdna) also expresses well-perfected acts resulting from a slow
process or development.
To become better. Gumaling. Maggalingy to adorn.
Ang galinginy what adorned.
MagalinOy to be better; also
* * good , ' * * * clever. ' ' Mangalingy to
become much better. Makagalingy
to do good. Ang ikagoiingy the
cause of betterment. Ex.: Ang
mangd gamot ay siyang ikinagaga-
ling nang mangd may sakit ( medi-
cines are what cause the recovery
of those who are ill). Ang pana-
hffy ang ikinagaling niyd (the
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LAKOUAOE.
139
weather caused hie improvement).
Ang paginum nitong gamot ang
ikinagcUing nUd (the taking of this
medicine was what caused them to
recover). MagpageUingy to pros-
per. Ang pinagagalingy person or
thing prospering. Ang nagagaHng^
person improving. Magpakaga-
ling^ to improve one's self; to
correct one's self. Ex.: Magpaka-
galing kayd nang mangd dscU ninyd
(Improve yourselves m your cus-
toms [or manners] ) . Kagalingan,
goodness; improvement.
(3) Ika, as well as i alone, prefixed to intransitive verbs indicate time
as well as cause or reason. Ex. :
To repent. Magsisi. Ang ipinagsm, the time,
cause, or reason of repentance
({Mist tense). Sumisif to quarrel
with openljr. Ang wm, the cause.
Maapakamiy to repent deeply.
To be asleep or sleepy. Maimog. Natutulogbagd kaydt ( Are
you sleepy?) 06; ihig ko sana ngd
mcUulog (Yes; I would like to go to
sleep). Makatulogy to fall asleep.
Ang ikaiMog, the time or cause of
falling asleep.
XIX. I is generally used alone to express cause or reason with verbs
which do not require an object to complete the meaning^(intransitive8):
To obey; to follow.
To weep (purposely).
To remain behind (letting others go
ahead).
Sumunod. Ang isunodj the cause of
obedience or following. Ex.: And
ang imnumnod nana mangd sundalo
sa kanilang pundf {Why do sol-
diers obey If olio w] their com-
manding officer [chief]?). Ang
panunumpa H pitagan ay ang isinu-
8unod nUd (Their obedience is on
account of their oath and also their
respect).
Thmangis. MagtangiSf to weep much
or by many. Matangis, to weep
( in vol. ) . Ang itangiSj the cause or
reason of weeping. MagpatangiSy
to weep excessively. MakitangiSy
to join another in weeping. Ex. :
Bdkit nananangis yaong hahayef
(Why is that woman weeping
[crying] ? ) . Ang itinatangis niyd* y
ang kanifjiayan nang anak ( Her cry-
ing is caused by the death of [her]
child).
Tutnird. Magtirdj to allow some-
thing to remain. Ang itinirdy what
was or has been left behind; also
the remaining behind. Ex. : Ikao
ang itinird ko dito (I have re-
mained here on your account).
Matirdf to be left behind. Walang
naiird, not one remained.
Digitized by
Google
140 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
XX. In like manDer intransitive verbs also express time (not tense). If
the expression for the time is definite^ it may either precede or follow the
verb, but if the time is indefinite it should always precede. Verbs which
require ika (^ikina) for cause or reason likewise have the same combination
to express time:
To arrive. Dumdting, Ang idAtingf the time of
arrival. Ex.: And ang oras ang
idindiing niydf (What time [hour J
did he [she] come? ) . Ang idindiing
niyd ang tanghah (He [she] came
at noon). And ang arao na idard-
ting nildf (What day will they
come? ) . Ang ikalimang arao nang
bouan (The fifth [day] of the
month).
To embark or travel (also to mount). Sumakay. Ang sakaydn, what em-
barked on or mounted. Ang wino-
kayy the reason or time ( past tense )
of em barking, mounting, etc. £x. :
Ang taong isinakay ko sa Fllipinas
(Tlie year [in which] I embarked
for the Philippines).
To eat. Kumain, Angikinain^ the -reason or
time of eating (past tense) . Ex. :
Dt ikinakain ang bungang hilao
kailan man (green fruit should
never be eaten).
To die. Mamatay. Ang oras na ikinamatay
niyd, the hour at which he died.
XXI. J is also Hsed with verbs of adjusting, conforming, copying into,
transferring, translating, transplanting, etc., to indicate what has been
thus transferred, translated, etc.
To conform; to make suitable; to Magbdgay. Ang ibindgayy whsit was
get ready. or has been mtide suitable. Ex.:
Ibdgay itd doon (Make [do] this
like that). Magbdgay ka nang
manga baia magsasaydo (Get the
children ready for the party).
Mabdgay, to be proper or suitable;
also to be proportioned. Ex. (1)
Nababdgay bagd sa isang dalaga
ang lumdkad na nagiisd sa mangd
lansang anf (Is it proper, then, for
a young woman to go alone about
the streets?) Mababagdyan nang
hirap ang laki nang kasalanan (The
punishment will be suitable for
thegravity of the offense). [The
punishment will fit the crime.]
(2) Dili nababdgay siyd sa kanilang
kataasan ( He [she] is not propor-
tioned to his [her J height). The
act of making suitable, ang pag-
kabdgay. Ex. : And ang pagkabd-
gay nitd doonf (What has this to
do with that?) As a noun, bdgay
means "thing, matter, subject,
size, proportion, appearance.*'
Ex. : And bagd ang bdgay f ( What,
then, is the matter?) Aywdn akd
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOQ LANGUAGE.
141
To compare.
To equalize.
To (1) transfer; (2) translate; (3)
transplant; (4) copy out, and (5)
to change from one vessel to an-
other; to empty.
(I don't know.) And ang bd^ay
niydf Americano kung CaslUa?
(What does he look like, an Amer-
ican or a Spaniard?) Americano
p6 (an American, sir. ) Bdgay sa,
**afl for,*' '*asto." Ex.: Bdgay sa
dhin ( as for me ) . Bagay sa kaniyd
(as for him [her]). Bagay aa
ibang bdgay (as to other matters),
etc. Bagaybdgayt different things
( in class ; species,' etc. ) . Magkaba-
gaybdgayj to differ much. Ex.:
Nagkakabdgaybdgay fdld sapagda-
ramit (They differ much in their
manner of dress)
Maghnlimbaud. Ang ipinaghaUm-
baudj what was or has been com-
pared. Humalimbaud, to imitate
another. Ang halimbauaan, the
person imitated. Kahalimbaud,
like, alike (object). KahaHm-
bauaany resemblance.
Magpard. Ang ipinardj what was or
has been equalized.
Magsalin. Ang isinaliny what has
been or was transferred, trans-
lated, etc. (2) Isalin mo ito sa
wikang Tagdlog (translate this into
Tagalog). (5) laalin mo ang la-
mang nitong busld (empty out the
contents of this basket).
THE PARTICLE AN (HAN).
I. An {han after acute final vowel), sometimes nan^ is suffixed with all
tenses of the verb. The particle in, either alone or in combination with
pag (jyinag), etc., is retained in the past and present tenses. For the con-
jugation of roots with an and han see the tables at end of book.
II. An usually represents place, or expresses the case called locative in
many European languages, replacing an adverb of place or the preposi-
tion which would be employed with another form of conjugation. Thus,
if a sentence with a verb other than those which admit a person or place
as the direct object, or those requiring an for euphonic reasons, includes an
indirect complement of place relating to the action, the use of an with the
verb expresses the relation of case expressed in English by a preposition.
To gather; to pluck (as flowers); to
break off.
To die.
Pumitds. Ex.: And ang pinipitds mo
diydn? (What are you gather-
ing there?) Akd^y pungmipitds
nang bulaklak (I am gathering
some flowers). Ang halamana^y
ang lugar (Sp.) na pinipUasan ni
Ambrosia nang mangd bulaklak
(Ambrosia is gathering the flowers
in the garden); lit., "the garden
is the place where are being gath-
ered by Ambrosia the flowers. )"
Mamatay. Ang kamataydn^ the place
of death, distinguished by the
final accent from kamaidyan, death
(abstract). Ex.: Itong bahay na
its ang kinamaiaydn ni amd (father
Digitized by
Google
142
TAGALOQ LANGUAGE.
died in this house); lit, **this
house was the dying place of ( my )
father/'
III. If a verbal action admits of a place for its direct object, the latter is
generally expressed by an.
To (1) open; (2) uncover.
To sprinkle from the mouth (as
Chinamen do clothes); also to
bubble up (as water from a foun-
tain or spring).
To fill; to make up.
To line.
To plant; to sow.
To cover.
Magbukds, ^n^6wifea*in,whatopened
or uncovered. Ana ipaghik&s,
the means by whicn opened or
uncovered. Ang bukasan^ the
place opened or uncovered; also
the person or object uncovered.
Contracted many times to buksdnj
especially for the imperative. Ex.:
Buksdn mo ang pinto (open the
door).
Magbugd. Aiig bughdn^ the place of
such sprinkling, or the object so
treated. Ex.: Hindi bughdn mo
ang manod damif. (don't sprinkle
the clothes from the mouth).
There is also an idiom: Bughdn mo
natin Hong bago mong damit (treat
us on account of your new clothes) ;
**wet down your new stripes."
Magpund. Ang pundn^ the place of
filling, or making up. Ex. : Mag-
pund ka nang labing dalawd (make
up twelve [a dozen]). Pundnmo
ang manga tarn (fill the cups).
Pupundn ko bagd ang mangd vasof
(Shalllfilltheglasses?) Magpund,
with grave accent, stress on next
to last syllable means to begin; to
govern; to head; to lead; to pre-
side. Mamund, to go ahead or in
front.
Maffsapin. Ang sapndn, the place of
lining, etc., also the imperative.
Ang isapiny the material. Sapin,
shoe or sandal. Karnpin, a leaf
(of a book) or sheet (of paper).
Sapinsapin, many leaves, sheets,
or folds of lining.
Magtanim, (2) also to bear hate or
rancor toward another. Ang tam-
ndn, the place or manner of plant-
ing. Ex.: TlnamndnniToniasang
kaniyang bukid nang mdkina (md-
quina) (Thomas planted his field
by machinery "). As has been
noted before, oesides a contrac-
tion, there is a transposition be-
tween n and m with this definite.
Tumakip. Magtakip (1) to cover
up; (2) to fish from many canoes,
getting the fish in between. Ang
iakpdnj what covered or the place.
Talcpdn mo ang tapayan (cover the
jar).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANGUAGE,
143
IV. An is generally used to indicate the person affected by an action
with verbs which require a person as the direct object.
To menace; to threaten.
To frighten by rushing
hiding and shouting.
To din^inish (of itself).
To give.
To trade or sell rice.
Magbald. Ana paghalaan, the per-
son menaced or threatened,
out from Bumalagd. Maabalaq&^ to frighten
much. Ang balaghin or ang bala-
ghdny the person thus frightened.
Kababalaghang gawd, a marvelous
work. KabaJabalagd itong gavxing
its (this [is] a most wonderful
work).
Bumauas. Maghauas, to diminish
by outside agency. Ang bauasin,
what diminished. Ang bauasan,
the place (corresp. to um). Ang
paghauasan, place (corresp. to
mag) , the person to whom some-
thing is given thus. Mabauas, to
diminish (inan. action). Ang na-
mauas, what taken from. Maka-
bauaSy to cause to diminish. Mag-
pabauas, to order or request to
diminish . Ex. : Bauasan mo iyang
mangd tapayan f take something
out of those jars). Magbaua^ ha
nang halagay reauce the price.
Hindi mabuasan ko sa limang pisos,
I can not let it fall below P"5.
Nabauas na ang liangin (the wind
has diminished now).
Ma^bigay, A ng ibigayy the gift. A ng
ibinigayy what was or nas been
given. Ang bigydn, the person re-
ceiving a gift. Ang Umgydn, the
person to whom something was or
has been given. Mapagbigayy gen-
erous; liberal; indulgent. Mami-
gay, to give much; to lavish. Ex.
And ang ibinigay mo? ( What did
you give?) Bigydn mo akd nang
kauntingmakakainy give me a little
refreshment [to eat]. Bigydn mo
akd nang itlog kun mayrdon (give
me some eggs if there are any).
Si Juan angbinigyang ko {1 gave it
to Juan). Si Tomds ang bibigyang
ko (I will give it to Tomds). Ang
ipamigay, what lavished. Ex.:
Ipinamigay niyd itong lahat (he has
lavished all this). Ipinamimigay
nUd itong lahat (they are lavishing
all this). Ipamimigay ninyd itong
lahalf (You will lavish all this?)
Magbigds. Angpagbigasan, the seller
or dealer in rice. Iyang pilak
ang pinagMgasan niyd (he made
that money selling (trading) rice).
MakibigdSf to ask for a little rice
(see particle maki).
Digitized by
Google
144
TAGALOQ LANGUAGE.
To guard; watch; look out.
To charge against (as a debtor).
To dress one's self.
To deceive.
MagharUay. Also means to make a
bird snare from bamboo. Ma-
marUay, to catch birds with a
* * bantay . " Ang namaniayy what
caught. Ang binabantay or ang
pinapagbabantayy the person stand-
ing guard, watching or looking
out. Ang bantay an^ the sentry
box, post; watchtower; look out
p^ace. Also Ang pagbantayan.
Ang hantaydn (1), thms: or person
g[uarded or watched; also impera-
tive without art. Ex. ; Baniaydn
mo itong bdhay itd (watch this
house). Binanlaydn ko ang cuar-
tel (I was on guard at the bar-
racks). Binabantaydn niyd ang
cuartel (he is on guard at the bar-
racks). (2) arms or scales or
correctness of the balance. (3)
A bamboo bed for sick persons
under which a fire may be made.
Magbaniaydn, to make such a bed.
Ang bantayanin, the material; ang
bantaydnan, the place of such a bed.
Magbinlang. (2) To bear false tes-
timony against another. Ang pag-
bintaiwan{l)y the person charged;
(2) the person sworn against
falsely. Ang ipagbintang, whsit bo
sworn, i. e., the testimony. Ex.:
(1) Pinagbintangan akd nang sam-
pouong pisos (I was charged up
with ten pesos). (2) Pinagbin-
tangan niyd akd (he bore false tes-
timony against me). Ang pagbt-
biniangy the act of swearing falsely.
Ang bintangan, ang mabmtangin^ ang
mapagbintangt the person who ha-
bitually swears falsely; perjurer.
Damamit, Daramiiny clothes (pres.
tense). Ang damtdn^ the pierson
dressed or clothed. Magdamity to
dress or clothe another. Ang pag-
daramitj the act of dressing (pres.
tense). Maaparamit, to cause or
order to be clothed. Ex.: Param-
tdn mo ang walang damit (clothe
those who are without clothes).
Bdkit hindt mo pinadaramtdn ang
anakmof (Why don't you clothe
your child?) Sapagka* i wald akong
maibUi nana damit (because I have
nothing to buy clothes with).
Magdayd. Ang pagdayaan, the per-
son deceived. Ang pagdarayd, the
act of deceiving. Magparayd^ to
permit deception. Magparayd A*a,
permit the deception. Paraydj to
consent or allow one's self to l)e
deceived. Magdarayd, fraudulent;
cheating (adj.).
Digitized by
Google
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
145
To kiss.
To be sorry.
To steal.
To listen to.
To teach.
To be charitable.
Humalih Ang hagk&n, the person
kissed. Maghalih, to kiss each
other (dual). Ang mangd pinag-
/ia^A;(in(the two who have kissed
each other. ) Pahalik, to request to
kiss. Ex.: Pahalik p6 kayd sa
kamay (permit me to kiss your
hand). (Sp. Q. B. S. M.)
MahinAyang Tfrom sdyangj idea of
sorrow ) . Ang kinaMnayangan, the
person for whom sorry, or for what
reason sorrow is felt. Ex. : Kina-
hihinayangan ko siyd (I feel sorry
for him — lit., he is the person I
am sorry for.) Manhinayana^ to
be very sorry. Ang panhina-
yangariy the person for whom felt, or
the cause of much sorrow. Magpa-
hindyangf to regret a loss of any
kind.
Magndkao, Ang pinagndkao^ what
was or has been stolen. Ang
magnandkao, the thief. Ang pag-
nakauany the person robbed. Ex. :
Sino ang magnandkaof (Who is
the thief? ) Sino ang pinagnaka-uan
mof (Who did you steal from?)
Pakinig. AngpaHngdn^ the person
listening?. Ex.: Pakingdn ninyS
ang dral (listen [ye] to what is
taught).
Unidral. Ang aralany the person
taught. Ang idral^ what taught —
i. e., the lesson. Ang inidral, what
was or has been taught. Ana
ungma^raly the teacher. Angpagd-
ralj the act of teaching. Magdral,
to stud y ; to learn. A ng pagaraldny
the source of learning — i. e., the
teacher or the book, etc. Ang
maqdraly what learned. Ana pa-
gairalf the act of studying. {^Note
that the **act of teaching*' is ex-
pressed without reduplication of
the initial sylable of the root.)
Aral is said to be from Sansk.
dchdra^ custom; habit; rule; by
Kern, but Pardo de Tavera thinks
it doubtful. Ajar is Malay, *'to
teach or to learn '* from Javanese.
Asal, custom; habit; is more likely
to be from Sansk. dchdra. For
further modifications of dral with
particles, see under man.
Maaudy also compassionate; charit-
able (adj.). Maauain; mapag-
kaaudy a humane or charitable per-
son. Ang auaan, the recipient of
compassion or charity. Ang pag-
kaaudy the act of charity or com-
passion. Ka^auaan^ (abst. ) charity,
6855—05—^10
Digitized by
Google
146
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To hear (casually).
compaesion. Ex.: Kaauanmosiyd
(have charity [or compassion] for
him) . Ang kinaatmanj what given
in charity or extended in compas-
sion. Ang ikinaaudf the cause of
giving in charity or extending
compassion. Makaaud,^ to move to
compassion. Ma{/makaaudf to be
able to move to compassion. (Audf
is generally reduplicated. Ex.:
Nagmamakaaudaud akd itongdukhd
(this poor [person] moves me to
compassion). Ang ipinagmama-
kaaiidf the cause of being able to
move to compassion. Paaud, to
ask for charity ; to plead or beg for
mercy, etc. Ex. : Napaaud siyd sa
dkin (he begged me for mercy).
Maringxg, Dumingig^ to hear pur-
posely. Ang naringig, what heard
casually. Ang dingin^ what heard
purposely, as conversation directed
to person. Ang dingdny the per-
son listened to. An indicates per-
son, in the thing, with this verb
and the following one, also others
which will be seen in other places.
Makaringig, to be able to hear.
Magkaringig, to be deceived by the
hearing. Magparingig^ to force
another to listen. Ex.: Waldakong
dingig (I heard nothing); lit., **I
( was) without hearing. '^ Naringig
mo ang sinafyi ko? (Did you hear
what I told you? ) Hindi ko naringig
( I did not hear ) ; * * I was not able to
hear.'* Nakculiringig kabagdf (Did
you hear?) Lit.: "Are you hear-
mg?" Nagkarinadn akd (my he&r-
ing deceived me).
Kumalag. Ang kalgin^ what untied
or loosened. Ang kalg&n, person
set at liberty or absolved. Ang
kalagpangaOj' the jailor's fees in
former times, when set free.
V. In actions by which the subject tries to draw something to himself,
an stands for the person from whom that something is drawn.
(1) To untie; to loosen; (fig.) to set
free; (2) to absolve.
To ask for; to request.
Ilumingi. Makahingij to obtain by
requesting. Makihingi, to thank
for. Ang hingiuy what asked
for. Ang hiningt^ what was or has
been asked for. Ang hinadn, the
person from whom asked. Ex.:
Ak6*y humingi nang mangd hunga
*y nakahingt akd (I asked for some
fruit and got it for the asking).
Mapaghingty an importunate per-
son. See also magbili, to sell;
kumuhay to take; dumaing, to en-
treat; humdnap, to look for; and
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
147
tumangapt to accept or receive
which, among others, use these
same forms.
VI. Roots which express the ideas of coming or going, when verbal-
ized, take an for the person affected by the action, and i or ika (ikina) for
the reason or time of such action. Ex. :
To come here. Pumarito. ParilOy come here. Ang
ipinaritOf the reason or time of
coming here (past tense). Also
ang ikinfiparUo. Ana pinaritohan,
the person (or the place) who was
the object of the action. Ex.:
And ang ibinapariio mo sa Pa-
sigf (Why did you come here to
Pasig?) Aling bahay ang ^nari-
tohan mo? (Which house did you
come to? ) ( Pumarito has been dis-
cussed previously. ' Pumardon fol-
lows the same rule as pumarito and
has also been explained.)
VI. An is rare as an ending to the direct object of a verb. Some verbs,
however, which would naturally take in for the direct object substitute an
therefor on account of euphony, as the words are contracted.
To salt; (2) to make salt.
To pay for.
To note; to experience; to perceive.
To pierce.
To grasp; to hold.
Magasln. Ang amdn, what salted;
irvasndny what was or has been
salted. Ang palaasinan, the salt
pan; also the saltcellar. Ang
nagaadn^ the person who eats salt
on rice or food. • Mahiaain, to ask
for a little salt.
Maghayad. Ang hayaran, what
paid for; the obligation. This
verb also has the idea of covering
up, and originally meant '*to buy
or sell slaves.** Ex. : lyong baya-
ran ang Mang mo (your obligation
is to pay your debt [pay what you
owe]).
Magmasid. Ang pagmaaddn; ang
masddn (def. ); ang nama^id (in-
def.) what noted, etc. Magpa-
mamdy to order to note. Ang
papagmxisddny the person ordered
to note. Ang papagmasdin, what
ordered to be noted. Mapagmasid,
one who notes, perceives or ex-
periences a great deal.
Tumalab. Ang tabldn^ what pierced.
Tumalab is also "to become dull'*
(as a knife). Magtalab, (1) to
penetrate deeply; (2) to dye with
the talab root. Ang pagtalabaUy
what pierced deeply. A ng talabin,
what dyed. Ang italab^ the instru-
ment.
Magtangan. Ang tangdn or ang tang-
anan, what graspea or held. Arvg
pagtangndnj what held much . A ng
itanganf the hand or instrument
Digitized by
Google
148 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.
used to gnusp or hold with. Syn. :
Mdghauakf which means generally
. to hold or grasp by two. Ex.:
May hauak ak6 ngay&n (I am busy
now [or to-day]).
(1) To try; (2) to sample; (3) to Tumikim. Ang tikmAn, what sam-
understand a person well. pled. (Admits in combined with
pa.) Ex.: Palikmin mo nga ak6
nitong 6lak (allow me to try this
wine). Hkmdn mo (taste it; sam-
ple it J.
To look at; to view. Tuminainf (2) Magtingin^ to look at
much or by many. Magtinginan,
to look at each other. Ma^ingin'
tinginan, to look at each other
closely. Ang tmingin, what was or
has been looked at. Ang tinitinginj
what is being looked at. Ang ting-
nan^ what looked at; alone impera-
tive. Angpagtingndn,whs.t\o6ked
at much or by many. A ng ilingin,
the cause or with what, i. e., the
eye. A ng ipag- ( ipinag ) -tinginj the
cause of much looking or by many;
also the eyes of many, etc.
To learn. Magdral. Ang pagaraUin^ what is
learned. Anq pagaral&n, the
source of learning, i. e. , the teacher
or book, etc.
VII. Some roots used with in with uwi, wa^, etc., take an when conju-
gated with magpa.
To treat well; to prosper. Magpagaling, Ex.: Galinganmosiydf
(treat him [her] well).
VIII. An sometimes replaces the preposition sa when the latter means
** to," as an implies that the subject parts with something, in the following
examples. Acquisition with the same construction ( " f or * ' ) is expressed by i,
Ex. : Binigy&n nild akd nitong bigds ( they gave me this rice) . Also expressed :
akd^y ang binigydn nild nitong bigds. It will be clearly seen that the defi-
nite is a verbs! noun. Sino bagd ang pina{fhilhdn niyd nang iyong cabayo
(to whom has he sold [did he sell] your horse?) Pinagbilhdn niyd ang kani-
yang kaibigan (his purchaser was a friend of his). Also expressea: Ang
kaibigan niyd ang pinagbilhdn niyd.
IX. An with certain noun or verbal roots indicates place. The first syl-
lable of the root is reduplicated for roots admitting contraction or begin-
ning with L
Buy o-leaf (piper betel). Itmd. J^mo^an, buyo-leaf garden.
Bamboo (bambusa). Kauayan. Kauayanan, bamboo
grove or thicket. May kauayanf
(Have [you, or is there] any bam-
boo? ) Kumauayan^ to th row bam-
boo weapons at another. Ang
kauayaniny the object or person.
Mangauayany to cut bamboo. Ang
pangauayan. the instrument, i. e.,
the bolo or hatchet, etc.
Cocoanutpalm Niog. Niugan^ cocoanut grove.
Kaniugan^ place of many cocoanut
palms. Kapunong niog^ a single
tree. Kaboong niog^ a cocoanut.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANaCAOE.
149
Pasture; grazing place.
Banana. (Mosa nar. and others,
both the tree ana f nrit )
Sugar cane.
Stone; rock.
Water.
Numiogt to throw a oocoanut at
another. Ang nto^n, the person
or object thrown at. Ang iniogj
the nut thrown. Magniogan^ to
throw cocoanuts at each other.
There are many names for cocotr
nut, according to its age and con-
dition.
Sahsaban, Ang Babmbin, the grass
eaten (no tense idea), or what
eaten as animals eat (by the
mouth). Sumabsab, to graze, eat
(as animals). Magsabsabj to eat
much. Magifimbsab, to sraze in
herds, flocks, etc. Pamombf to
allow to graze. Ex.: Pasabmbin
mo itong cabayo; may sabmbin
diydn sa Jiarapan (Let this horse
graze; there is grass there in the
yard) . Sungmasab»ah an^ cabayoj
p6 (The horse is grazmg, sir).
Parang is a large pasture. Sabsor
ban is more a grazing or eating
place for animals.
Saging, Sagingan, banana grove.
Kamgingan, large banana grove
or place where there are many
bananas. Magsdging, to eat ba-
nanas.
Tubs, Tubohdn, cane field. Tubo-
hanan, sugar-cane land. Magtubdf
to plant sugar cane. There is no
Tagalog name for sugar, asAkaly
from Sp. azucaty being used. The
Malay uses shakar and gtUay the
latter from Sansk. guda.
Bat6. Baiohan, quarry. KaJbaiohan,
place of stones; rocky ground.
mabatong bukidj a stonv field.
Batd also means rice which does
not open when toasted; and
kidney. Magbatd, (1) to cut
stone; (2) to lay stone; (3) to
build out of stone. Ex.: (3)
NagbabatS si Juan nang kaniyang
bdhay (Juan is building his house
out of stone). Maginbatdf to turn
into stone. Ex.: Ang asdua ni
Loth ay naginbatong asln (Lot's
wife became a pillar [rock] of
salt).
Tubig, Tubigan^ irrigated land.
Katubigany place where water may
be had. Magtubig^ (1) to put
water into anything; (2) to water
an animal, etc. Manuhig, to go for
water in a canoe or on an animal.
(To go for water with a pitcher is
umigib) . Ang panuhigAn^ the place.
Panubxg, to make water. Makitu-
bigf to ask for water. Si Juan ay
Digitized by
Google
150
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Church.
Cockpit.
Head.
Foot
Stern; last part*
Bow; first part.
To make port (as a vessel).
To bathe; to take a bath.
nahikatubi^ sa dkin (Juan asked
me to help him get water).
Patubigin mo ak6 (Give me some
water). Tubig na hihUamosinj
wash water.
Simbahan. Sumimbd^ to worship.
Sabongan. Sumabongy to fight (one
gamecock agai nst another ). Mag-
sabangy to fight against each other;
also to play one against the other.
Ang sasabongirif the game (cock-
fighting). Ang i-{ipag)-8ab<mgy
the gamecock (s). Palaaabongy
cockfighter by occupation.
U16, Uluhdrif head of the bed; also
a large-headed person. Ulundriy
the head place (pillow). Vnan is
the word for pillow itself. Ex. :
Vmuld ka rim (Put your head
here). Uluhin mo yan (Put your
head here toward me). UluMn
mo ltd (Put your head on this).
Pad (from Sansk. paday foot). The
English is also from the same
Sansk. word. The English paw
does not seem to be from Sansk.,
but to be of Teutonic origin, but
remotely may be the same. Paa-
hdn, the foot of a bed ; place of the
feet. MagpaAy to set the foot
down; to step in or on.
Anghuli. Humuliy (1) to steer; (2)
to remain behind purposely. Ma-
hully to be left behind. Ang hu-
lihdriy the last or hinder part. Ka-
hulihdnj tardinesa. Ang kahulihu-
lihdn, the very last. HumvM is to
catch, etc. (note the difference in
accent).
Und. Lmundy to lead. Houag kang
mund, do not go ahead. Ang una-
Mn, the fore part or place. Kau-
nahdny priority. Unaundy firstly.
Ang kaundunaMny the very first.
Sa und , anciently. Sa und pang sa
undy very anciently. Sa unang
draoy in the days of old. Mang-
undy to precede; to guide (in per-
son) ; to lead, as a guide.
Dumdong. Ang iddongy the vessel
put into port. Ang doongany the
place. Lalauigan is another name
tor port. Magkapaddongy to make
port suddenly. Maddongy to be in
port.
Paligb. Ang paliguany the bathing
place. Ang ligoin; ang paligoiny
the water for bathing. Magligb;
magpaligdy to bathe another.
(See the phrases on p. 24 for use
of these words). Pambo is a rare
synonym.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOG LAHQUAGE.
151
To make a mudhole under the house.
To wound.
To scratch or scrape the ground with
the hands, claws, feet, etc.
Magpmalt. "The place," ang ha-
pumlian. Pumliany ** mudhole.'*
Sumugat. Ang sugatin, the wounded
person or animal, etc. Ang ikasu-
gaty the cause. Ang maataii, the
place or what part wounded. Ex. :
Sinumigatan niyd sa kamay (he is
wounded in the arm [hand]).
There is no separate word for arm
and hand in Tagalog. BarasOy from
Sp. brazoy is someti mes used . Pad,
foot, is also a foreign word. Rus-
sian has exactly the same peculiar-
ity, ruka meaning both hand and
arm, and 7ioga both foot and leg.
Magmgatf to wound much ; makasu-
gaty to cause to be wounded . Sugat
(note the accent) is another root,
with the idea of trading at retail.
Sumugat, to buy at retail, or go to a
retail market. Magmgat, to sell at
retail. Ang mgaidnj the place, i.
e. , the market Tiangi, a Spanish-
Aztec word, is the usual name for
a market.
Kumotkot. Magkoikoty to make a
ditch or trench. Ang kotkotin, the
earth scratchepl iip, or (2) thrown
out of a ditch. Ex.: (2) Kinotkot
nangmangd sundalo ang Iwpa nanq
kamay (the soldiers threw tne earth
out with their hands) . Ang ikot-
koty the means, i. e., the hands,
claws, etc. Ex.: Ang kamay ang
ikinotkot nang mangd auvdalo nang
lupa (with their hands the soldiers
threw out the earth [or dug the
trench] ) . Ang kotkotan, the place.
Ex.:/J53an^ hinotkotan nangmangd
sundalo (this was where the soldiers
dug the trench). Pongotkoty the
instrument used for digging, as a
spade, shovel, etc.
Sumilid, from sUidj a room. Ang
sidldn (c), the room entered (no
tense idea). Ang sistdldn, the
room. MagsUidf to put into a room
or to enter much. Masilidy to be
in a room. Ang pagsmdldny the
room entered much. Svn. , lindohy
from Idohy within; inside.
Humigd. Ang hihigdn (c ) , the place;
the bed . Mahigd, to be lying down,
or in bed. Ex.: Sino kaya yaong
nahihiadf (who is that lying down
there?).
X. Verbs in which the idea of expulsion is inherent do not admit of in
as an ending for the direct object, wnich is replaced by an, hariy etc.
To place. Maglagdy (I root). Ang lalagydn,
the place. Ang ilagdy, what
placea. Ang ilinagay; ang inUa-
To enter a room.
To lie down; (2) to go to bed.
Digitized by
Google
152
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To sow (aa rice, com, etc.).
To use or make soap.
To throw away.
To erect; to set up.
To pay a salary or wages.
gay; ang inalagay; what was
placed, or has been placed. Mai-
agdy, to be placed. Ang Hnala-
laguan, the place. McLopalagAy,
to desert, to abandon. (Root gen.
redup. ) Ex. : PincUalagaylagdy
ana mangd sundah ang bayan (the
soldiers are leaving the town).
Sumdbog, Ang isdbogj what sown,
i. e., the grain. Ang sabugan^ the
place, the field, rice paddy. Ex.
as verbs: Isdbog mo itd (sow this).
Isdbo^ mo ltd sa iyong hdkid (sow
this in your field). Sabugan mo
nitd ang iyong bukidy or ang iyong
bdkidj Babugan mo niid, same trans-
lation as with t, except in the first
the emphasis is on the act, and on
the plaice in the second. Magsd-
bog, to sow much. Ang ipagsd-
bog, what sown thus. (See tables
for conjugation of sdbog. )
Magsabdn^ from ^y.jabdn^ soap. Ex. :
And ang sinambdn mot (wnat are
you washing with soap? ) . Sabonan
mo ang damU (use soap with the
clothes). WcUd akonq mbdn (I
have no soap). MUi ka nana «a-
b6n (buy some soap). It will be
seen that assimilated foreign words
follow the same rules as native
ones in all respects.
Magtapon. Ang itapon, what thrown
away. Ex. : Itapon mo itd (throw
this away). Itapon mo itd sa tubig;
taponan mo ang tAbig nitd; or ang
tubig ang taponan mo nitd (throw
this into the water [in order to get
rid of it]).
Magtavd. Ang i(pag)iaydy what set
up thus. Ang pagtayoan, the place,
ifx.: (i) Itayd mo itong mdngd ha--
lipi (set these posts [pillars] up-
right). Itong loobang itd^y siyd*
hong pagtaiayoan nang dking bdhay
(I am going to put up my house in
this yard ) . Tumaydy to stand erect
(animate being). Ex.: Ang sun-
dalo tungmatayd sa harap nang
kaniyang pund (the soldier is
standing [stands] erect in front of
[before] his commander) . Malay d^
to be erect (inanimate object).
Ang mangd haligi nang dkng bdJiay
natatayd (the posts of my house
stand [are] upright). Matouid
also means upright, but generally
in a moral sense.
Umupa. A ng iupa, the wage or pay.
Ang upahanj person paid or what
paid for, as a rented house, etc.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 158
Ang pagupahan^ the place. Ex. :
Magkano ang paguupahan sa Mn-
ynUctf (how much is being paid
in Manila?).
XI. With some nouns denoting parts of the body an expresses personal
adjectives with an idea of augmentation.
Shoulder. BaUkat, Balihaldn, broad-shoul-
dered. Ex., verbalized : BcUikoHn
mo Hong kauayan (carry this bam-
boo on your shoulder ) . hahalikat
mo itongpanyd (spread this hand-
kerchief over your shoulders).
Balikatan mo iiyd (catch him by
the shoulders).
Mouth. Bibig, Bihig&n, large-mouthed, also
great or reckless talker. Ex. : Pi-
naghibig&n niyd akd (he talked a lot
about me).
Noee. Ilong, Ilong&n, large-nosed.
For places expressed with pag — 6n and ka — An, see under pag and ka,
CONSTRUCTION.
XII. With an the direct object takes the accusative and the agent the
genitive. Ex. : Hinahagkdn nang anak (agt. ) ang kaniyang ind (dir. object)
(the child is kissing his [her] mother). Lit., ** Is being kissed by the child
the h is [her] mother. ' * Tukuran mo iyang kdhoy (prop up that tree ) . Li t. ,
"Let be propped up by you that tree!**
XIII. If an indirect object expressing place is included in a sentence,
however, it takes the accusative case, and the direct object the genitive or
other oblique case, the agent remaining in the genitive, as explained in the
preceding paragraph. Ex. : Tinalamndn ni amd nang sarisaring kdhoy ang
hjUamanan (Fatner is planting different kinds of trees in the orchard [gar-
den])— lit, **The garden (ace.) is being planted with different kinds
(abl. ) of trees (gen. ) by father (ins. ).** JPinaghanapan mo bagd sa cabayo
Hong daang ildf (Did you look for the horse on this road?) — lit., " Was-
looking-place your perhaps (gen.) for horse (dat.) this road? (nom. as
trans., same form as ace. )."
XIV. If an is used modifying a place or person in which to, for, from,
bu, on, in, etc., precedes the place or person when translated into English,
the place or person should be expressed. In these cases the agent, as usual,
takes the genitive and the direct object the accusative. The indirect object
may either precede or follow the verb, except interrogative pronouns or
adverbs of place, which always precede. The person or place is empha-
sized by being placed b€(fore the verb in the sentence. Ex. : Mnulat niyd
ang dking sulat (He wrote my letter for me) — lit, *' Was written by him
(her) the my letter." Sinumlaian ko itong papel (I am writing on this
paper) — lit, "Is-the- writing- place my this paper." Pagsumlatan ko itong
papelitd (I will write on this paper). Same construction as foregoing,
with future tense; Sino ang pinagbilhdn mo nitong cabayo? (To whom
have you sold this horse?) — fit, "Who (was) the purchaser your of this
horse?" Ang anak nang kapidbdhay ko (To the son of my neighbor) " The
son of the neighbor my."
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "UM."
I. Urn is called the first verbalizing particle by the Spanish writers on
Tagalog, and is generally used to verbalize roots when the action is primary
or expressed as the act of the subject without special reference to the object.
Urn also has the idea of action toward another person. Some roots differ
Digitized by
Google
154 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
radically in their meaning with um and magj or rather in opposite wa^s
from a neutral point. With other roots ma^ expresses intensity of what is
expressed primarily with um. Uniy which is found in the so-called indefi-
nite, changes to ungm in the past and present tenses, and drops out in the
future tense. There are also pluperfect and future-perfect tenses, but they
are not generally used. For the conjugation of a root with um see the
tables. There are some irregularities with some roots which are noted in
the proper place. In the mechanical structure of the language um is pre-
fixed to roots beginning with a vowel and infixed between the first letter
and the following vowel of a consonant root
II. The philologist Keane gave G. W. Parker, author of the Grammar
of the Malagasy Lansuage (London, 1883), the following information as to
the use and origin of infixes, ^hich applies to Tagalog as well;
**The infix syllable om (um^ am, om) is a feature which Malajgasy has in
common with Khm^r (Camboian), Javanese, Malay. Tacala (sic) (Philip-
pine Archipelago), and no doubt other members of the Malay o-Poljmesian
familv.
**Khm4r: Slap^ dead; mmlap, to kill. Javanese: Hurubj fiame; humu-
rubf to infiame. Malay: Pilihj to choose; pamilihany choice. Tagala:
Bdsa, to read (idea of reading); humasa^ to make use of reading (to read).
** Originally a prefix, as it still is in Samoan (Ex.: Moto^ unripe; momoto,
to die young), this particle seems to have worked its way into the body of
the word by a process of metathesis analogous to the transposition common
to most languages (compare Anglo-Saxon thridda with third).'*
III. As has been stated, um is generally used to express the simple un-
reciprocated act of the agent, either toward himself or others, provided the
action is not modified by conditions of time (not tense), manner, instru-
ment, number (plurality), or otherwise carried away from its simplest
sense. Many roots admit both um and mag with little difference in mean-
ing, and hence it is often difficult to decide upon a choice between them,
but it is generally safe to use um. Again, many roots differ widely with
the two particles. Um refers more to subject and his action, mag to the
object and the action of the verb upon it.
CLASSES OP "UM" ROOTS.
For convenience of reference the roots conjugated by um have been ar-
rayed into numbered paragraphs, those following the regular conjugation
being given in Par. I-XVII, and those having irregularities coming under
Par. XVIII-XXl. Diminutives are treated in Par. XXII.
I. Roots which denote qualities capable of being slowly assimilated by
the agent form the first class. There are some adverbs which are verbal-
ized by um in certain cases.
To grow dark. DamiHm. Ma^dUvm^ to grow very
dark. Ana diliman, what is ob-
scured by darkness. ( Ang dUimdn,
the osier with which fish corrals
are tied . Dilimdn is also the name
of a village near xManila). Ex.
with um: Dungmidilim ang gabl
(The night is growing dark ) . Ang
pagdidilim nana drao^ the eclipse
of the sun. Madilim, to be over-
taken by darkness; also adj. dark,
obscure. Ex.: Nadiliman kami
(excl.) 8a dadn (We were over-
taken by darkness on the road).
Madilim wa (It is dark already).
Madilim pa ( It is dark yet) . Man-
dilimy to travel in darkness. Ex.:
Houag ipandUim iyang cabayo (Do
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
155
To grow up; to become large, etc.
To ^row cool or cold (as food or
dnnk).
not travel in the dark with that
horse). MakadUimy to become
dark ( not limited to a slow process,
as with um.) Tagdilim^ time or
season of darkness. Twilight,
takipsilim.
Lurnaki. Ex.: Lungmahi akd sa
Maynild (I grew up in Manila).
Mag!akif to increase; to make some-
thing larger. Ang lakhdn, what
made larger. Ang naglalakiy the
agent. Makcdaki^ to cause or to be
able to grow larger. Ang ikalaki,
the cause. Anqpakalakihwywhsit
is to be made larger. KalakMuy
(abs. ) size. Ang kalakilakihany
the very largest. Mapakalaki, to
grow greatly; or too large. Mag-
pcUakif to rear (as a child) ; to edu-
cate. Ex.: Sino ang nagpapalaki
saiydf (Who reared you?) Ang
dking nund'y siyang nagpalaki sa
dkin (My grandparent was the one
who reared me). Malakl (adj.),
big; large.
Lumamig. Ex.: Lalamiq ang sa
(The tea will become cold). Ang
nakalamig (indef.), ang ikalamig
(def.), tne cause. Maglamigy to
cool any th ing. Ang lamigany what
cooled. Ang rmkedamigin, what
put to cool, ifagpalamig, to put
out to cool. Malamig ( ad j . ) , cold ;
(fig.) Malamig na banta or na Idoby
cold-hearted.
PumtUt Ex.: Pungmuputt ang hu-
laklak (The flower is growing
white), ^ngrpit/fn, what bleached.
Magputiy to whiten anything. Ang
iputtf the means or the whitening
material. Ang putian^ what whit-
ened, as the wall, etc. Ang pag-
kapuiln, what whitened greatly.
Ang kaputian nang itlog, the white
of the egg. Kaputianj whiteness
(abs.).
Lumubhdy from lubhd, very (adverb).
Ex. : And ang lagay nang amd mof
(How is your father?) Lung-
mulubhd ang kaniyang sakit (His
illness is increasing). Nalulubhd
na siyd ( He is near death's door) —
lit, *' He is exceedingly ill.'* Mag-
lubhdj to increase much; (fig.) to
be impudent. Naglulubha ka sa
dkin (You are too forward with
me; you are impudent to me).
II. Um is used to indicate intentional acts of destruction, damage, etc.,
by the agency of an animate being. If caused by an inanimate agency,
such destruction or damage is expressed by maka (naka). Ex.: Ang lin-
To grow white; to bleach out.
To increase, etc.
Digitized by
Google
156 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
dol ay nakamrd m bdhay (the earthquake destroyed the house). Examples
in this class with um:
To kill; (2) to extinguish; to put Pumaiay. Ex.: Ak6 bagd ang papat-
out (as a light). tay Hong Uaof (Shall I put this
light out? {Hindi, akd nga ang
papcUay (no, I will put it out my-
self).
To destroy. Sumird, ^n^ «train, what destroyed.
Ex.: And ang sungmird, nang mangd
halamanf (What has destroyed
the plants?) Ang mangd balang
ang siyang lungmipol nang lahat
(the locusts have wiped out every-
thing). {Lumipolf to devastate;
exterminate; wipe out; lay waste;
destroy). Angimrdf the cause of
destruction. Maqmrd, to destroy
much. Ang pagnrain, what thus
destroyed. Ex.: Pinagnrd nang
mangd babuy itang mangd halaman
(the pigs have destroyed these
plants greatly). Maraming hala-
man ang pinapsisird nUd (many
plants are being destroyed [bv
them]; or they are doing much
damage to the plants). Masirdf
to be destroyed; to spoil. Sirdy
spoiled. iSird na ana matamis (the
Preserves are spoiled alreaay).
(akaeirdf to cause to destroy.
Makasisird, destructive. Ang ika-
8ird, the cause of spoiling (ang
ikinasisirdf present tense), ifa-
nirdf to destroy irreparably; com-
pletely; or (2) by many. (Idiom. )
Manirang puri, to destroy the
honor of another; to dishonor.
Magkasirdsirdy to be destroyed
completely. Ex. : Ang mnagkako'
drdsiraan nang manga oaya^y ang
paghabakd (war destroys towns
[fig., countries] completely).
To set fire to. Sumunog. Sino bagd ang mngm'dnog
nitong bdhay na iidt ( W ho burned
this houset) Aywaan akd, p6 {1
don't know, sir). Ang sinunog
(what was or has been set fire to).
Magsunog, to burn up (intention-
ally). Ang pinagstinog, what
burned up thus. Masdnog, to bum
up; to be Durned. Ex.: Nagsunog
siyd ang dming bdhay (he burned
our house). Nasunog ang dming
bahay (our house burned down).
Makasunog, to cause to set fire to;
also to be burned, as from another
house, etc. Magkasdnog, to suffer
( many ) from a conflagration. Su-
nog, conflagration (note accent).
III. As a general rule, um verbs have a corresponding definite with in.
The reverse is not always true, as the acts of causing emotion in others,
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LAKOUAGE.
157
expressed by in with definite sentences, take the indefinite with ma {na).
Certain other roots used with magpa (nagpd) in the indefinite take the
definite in an. These will be noticed in the proper places.
IV. Untj with roots denoting weapons, tools, and instruments, expresses
the use of such objects.
Dagger. Iwd., Umiwd, to stab. Ang iwaxm,
the person stabbed. Magiwd., to
wear a dagger. Mangiwd, to use
a dagger on one's self. Magjoa-
pangiivd, to wound each other with
daggers (as in a m^l^e).
Sibat (syn., tandos). Sumihat, to
spear or to throw a spear. Ang
»ibaiin, the object. Ang isibat, the
spear thrown. Magnbal^ to carry
a spear. Angpagsioatant the place.
Daras, Dumar&Sy to use an adze.
Ang pandardSf the adze itself. Ang
mandarard«, the user. Ex.: Dara-
sin mo itd (plane this off).
Gunting. Gumuntingf to cut with
scissors; to shear. Ang guntim;inj
what cut off. A ng guntingaUj from
what. Maguntin^, to use the scis-
sors on one's hair, etc. Magupit
is the better word for this last.
Kalam, ATtima torn, to plane. Mang-
angatam, planer.
Gimbal. Gumimbalf to drum. Man-
gigimbalf drummer.
V. Urn is used with roots denoting postures to express such postures or
positions when taken voluntarily.
Adze.
Scissors.
Plane.
Drum.
To stand up; to go to the defense of
another; (3) to go to get married.
Tumindig, Angtindigan, the person
before whom standing; the place
or (3) the woman to be married.
Magtindig^ to stand up much.
Ang tindigan^ ( 2 ) is the person gone
against in the defense of another,
and ang itindig the cause. Mag-
tindigan (dual) two on foot facing
each other, as warriors, etc. Ka-
tindigan, one of two opponents
thus. Ang ipagtindigan, the cause
of thus facing each other. Ang
pagtiitdiganan, the place. Ang
tinindigan, the scene of war; field
of battle. Maiindigy to be on one's
feet; (2) to be risen. Akd^ynati-
tindig, I am on my feet. Akd^y
naiindig, I had risen. Magpatin-
dig, to stand another on his feet,
or to stand something upright.
Ang paiindig, the position of being
on one's feet or being upright.
Ex. : Patindigin mo itong tduo (tell
this man to stand up). Ipatindig
mo itong tduo (stand this man on
his feet). Patindigan mo sa itong
lomesa niyang larauan (stand that
image [statuette; picture] upright
Digitized by
Google
158 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
on thia table). Ang ipatindig,
what stood up, or who. Manindig,
to raise, as the hair.
To place one's self in front; to face Tumapat. (2) ^n^r^poftn, the word
the front; (2) to keep one's word. kept. (1) ana iapaian, the person
confronted; also iapatan^ a cutoff,
, yard, etc. Magtapaty to travel,
talk, or do in a direct course or
manner. (2) Ang ipagtapat, what
just in. Ana pagtapcUany before
whom. ( 1 ) Pagtapatinf two things
placed facing each other. Magta-
pat na wika, straigh t talk. Maiapaty
to be facing; (2) to belong to some
one. NatatapcU siyd sa asauang
malang baitj ne (she) has a wife
(husband) without judgment.
Manapat, a just measure. Ex.:
Manapat na gawd (a just deed).
MagjxUurnapatf to feign to be just
Ang nagkaiaiapaty the couple fac-
ing each other (dual). Ang nag-
katapattapatf the persons uu;ing
each other (plural). Ex., with
magtapatj in tne sense of planting
in rows, as trees, etc. : Bdkit hindi
mo pinagtapat iyang mangd hcUa-
manf (Why didn't you set out
those plante right?) Pagiapaiin
mo namdn ang mangd kdhoy (put
the trees in rows, too).
To kneel. Lumuhod. Ang luluhoran. before
whom or what place. iMhorany
cushion. Magluhody to kneel
much; or by many; to cause an-
other to kneel; to kneel with
something. Ang iluhod^ the ob-
ject knelt with. 3fa/u^d, to kneel
involuntarily or unconsciously; to
be kneeling; also adj. kneeling; to
be on the knees. Naluluhod sUdy
they are on their knees. Mapalu-
hody to remain kneeling. Magpa-
tiluhody to kneel suddenly. Ang
paluhiidy the position of kneeling.
Ang tiihody the knee. Tamdhod,
to touch with the knee purposely.
Matuhodj to touch with the knee
accidentallv or casual W. (Malu-
hody to be tumble. ) Tumikluhod^
to kneel ( down ) . Magtiklufvod, to
kneel down much. Ang tikLuho-
ranf the place or the person knelt
to. Ang ikapatikluhodf the cause
of manv kneeling. Also maniklu-
hody to kneel down . A ng paniklu-
Ivoran^ the place or person knelt
to. Ang ipanikiuhodf the cause.
Magpanikluhod, to kneel much.
Ang pagpapanikluhorany the kneel-
ing people ( many ) . See conjuga-
tion of manikluhod.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALO0 LANGUAGE.
159
To lean upon; to recline.
To lie down.
To lie face downward.
To prostrate one's self.
To lie on the side (action); to place
one's self on one's side.
To lie on the back (action); to place
one's self on the oack.
To crouch on hands and feet (not
bending knees).
To sit down ; to take a seat.
To sit down to rest (briefly).
HumUig. Ang ihUig^ what part of
the body leaned upon. Ang hili-
gan, the place; couch, etc. {Hu-
milig is * * to weave. ' ' Note accent. )
Humigd. (Previously explained in
detail.)
Tumaob. Magtaob, to place another
face downward.
Dumapd. Marapdf to fall prostrate
(accidentally).
Tumagilid. Magtagilid, to be lying
on the side ( state ) . Ang paiagUuty
the position of lying on the side.
GUid is side; also entrance to a
house.
Tumihayd. Matihaydf to be lying on
the back (state). Ex.: BdhU ka
natitihaydf (Why are you lying on
your back?) Mapatihaydj to fall
on the back. Ang patihayd, the
position of being on the back.
Tumuad. Magpatuad, to stand on
all four feet (as an animal).
Umupd (one). Magupd (more).
Maupdy to be seated (state). Ang
paupdf the sitting position. Ex. :
It6'y gaaawin mong nang paupd
(This will have to be done by you
while sitting down).
Maglikmd. Ang likmoaUy the resting
place.
VI. Um is used to express voluntarily or involuntarily (but consciously)
performed life-supporting actions and organic functions of the body, except
some which are used with mag^ and a few with man. Some actions of
inanimate objects also follow tliis rule.
To eat.
Kumain. ( Partly explained before. )
Magkain^ to eat much ; or by many.
Magkainkainany to nibble (dim. J.
Ex.: Nagkakainkainan tiyd, he is
nibbling (pretending to eat).
Mangain^ to eat continually; to de-
vour. JfaAram, edible (adj.). Ma-
kakaiuy able to be eaten. Magpa-
kain^ to give food to another person
or animal. Ang pakanin^ who or
what fed. Ang ipakainy the food
fiven. Ang pakaninan, the place.
)x.: Papakain ka kay Juan (ask
Juan to give you something to eat) .
Ipapakain mo sa ^^cocinero** itong
batd ( Tell the cook to give this boy
(child) something to eat). Bdkit
hindi mo pinakakain itong mangd
tduof( Why aren't you feeding these
people. ) Pakanin mo nga tnla, feed
them. And ang ipinakakain mo sa
kanildf (What are you giving
them [to eat]?) Pinakain ko slid
nang kanin^ p6. ( I have given them
some rice, sir. )
Digitized by
Google
160
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To swallow food.
To swallow pits or seeds of fruit.
To drink.
To swallow liquids.
(b.)
To show the teeth; to grin.
To smile bashfully.
To laugh (voluntarily).
To sob.
To shed tears; to cry quietly.
To weep.
To snore.
Lumamon, (Already explained.)
LumunoL Ang lunokin^ what swal-
lowed.
Uminum. Maginum^ to drink much
or by many. (Partly explained
before.) Ana pinainum, who or
whatgivenadrink. Angipainum,
the drink given. Palainumj ha-
bitual drinker. Uminum has an
irregular form of conjugation like
umcUU.
Lumagok, Kalagok, a swallow. Ka-
kalagokf only one swallow.
ifgumisi. Also magngin and ngingi'
nnpUi. Ang ingisi or ang ipa-
ngisi, the cause of showing the
teeth, or the mouth and teeth.
Anp nginingisihan, the person or
animal the teeth shown to. Syn. ,
^gumimgi». The wild hog is called
jfgisi when the tusks begin to show.
NgumUi, Ang ingUt^ the smile or the
mouth. An^ ngitian, the person
or object smiled, at thus.
Tamaua, Magtaua, to laugh much,
or by a few. ifan^a^ua, to laugh
( by many ) . Tataua nang talaua^
to laugh and laugh over again.
Magtauanan, to laugh at each
other. A ng tauanan, what laughed
at by one or a few. Ang pagtau^
andn^ what laughed at by many.
Ang itauGf the cause (one or few).
Ang ipaglaua^ the cause of manv
laughing. Maiaua, to laugh invol-
untarily; to giggle. B&kit ka na-
tatauaf ( Why are you giggling so?)
Makataua or maapataua, to cause
laughter. Ang Icataud, the com-
panion in laughter. Malauanln^
laughing person.
Humibik, Also hibikhibik, Ang
ihibik or anp ikahibik, the cause.
A variation is humimhik or himbik'
himbik.
Lumuhd,. Ang nagluluhdj the eyes
shedding tears. Ang iluhdf the
tears. Ang linuluhaan^ the person
before whom tears are sh^, etc.
MagkcUuhdf to shed tears uncon-
sciously. LungmcUagoslds ang luM,
the tears are trickling.
Tumangis. (Already explained.)
Humilik. Ang hihkj the snorer.
Also Humikah, var. humigab.
These last words also mean **to
ya wn . ' * Maghilik, to snore much.
Ang paghUikf the great snorer.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
161
To spit; to expectorate.
To bite.
To scratch another.
To blow the noee.
To sneeze.
To make water (voluntarily).
To stool.
To drip; to run through a pipe (as
water and other liquids).
To trickle; to run in a small stream.
VII. Roots which express objects which may be produced by slow self-
sustaining processes generally take um to indicate the process, although
some important ones take man (q. v. ), the latter usually commencing with b.
Tumubd, Taboan, plant already
sprouted (usually applied to cocoa
palm). MaatubOf to gain; to win.
Katutubby of the same age; bom
Also maghikab, Ex.: Naghihikah
ang mahakoMog (the sleeper is
snoring a great deal ) . Hihikabhi-
kab, to breathe with great diffi-
culty, as a dying man.
iMmurd. To perform the same act
as a sign of disgust at anyone, man-
lurd. Lulurdn, spittoon; cuspi-
dor.
Kumagat (Already explained.)
Kumdmot. Magkdmot^ to scratch
one's self. Ang pangdmoty the
scratcher (instrument).
Samngd.
Bumahin. PcUabahin or mapcLobd-
hiny a person who sneezes much.
Umihi. Fandbig is a more polite
term.
Tumae. Sadn ang kumdnf (Where
is the water-closet?)
TumuU),
Jjumagoslds. ( Idiom )
To come up, to grow up (as plants);
to bear (^to give birth to), as ani-
mals,
child.»'
Manganak is *'to bear a
To put forth shoots.
at the same time (no relationship
idea). Magpatubb, to invest; to
put out at interest. Ex.: Bdkit
hindi mo giyd pinaudtang nang «a-
laptf (Why don*t you lend him
some money?) Sa pagkaH wald,
at ang dking rnlapt ay pinatuboan
ko (Because I have none [to lend],
and my money has been invested ).
«Sa liming piso na inutang ko kay
Juan, ay pinatutubd akd niyd sa
isang salapt (for five pesos which
I have borrowed from Juan he is
now asking me a half peso as in-
terest). ^n(5/ (What?) laang aa-
lapt ang ipinatutubd ni Juan aa
dkng sa limang piso na inutang ko
sa kaniyd ( A half peso is the inter-
est asked me by Juan on five pesos
which I borrowed from him).
Ex.: ** To come up." Tangmutubb
bagd ang mangd sillf (Are the
peppers [chiles] coming up?)
SumiboL hunamisibol na ang mangd
halaman sa halamanan, the plants
in the garden are already putting
out shoots. (2) Also applied to
the growth of the beard and other
actions of like nature. Masibol, to
6855—05-
-11
Digitized by
Google
162
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To rain; to be raining.
well out, as water from a well or
spring. Ana sibolduy the months
during which the rice sprouts, etc.
To bud. Umusbmigf from usbong^ bud. Magus-
bong ^ to have buds. Sy n. , %isb68 and
ugbds, UmugbuSf to bud, to sprout.
Ex. with usbona: Ungmuusboug na
ang mangd kdhoy (the trees are
budding out now).
Sumuloly from siUol, a sprout.
To sprout (especially of tubers, like
the goM and the camote).
To sprout (as suckers from the trunk Sumupling. Ang mplingan, the tree.
of or at the foot of a tree).
VIII. Um expresses (1) meteorological phenomena, provided the root
does not commence with b; and (2) astronomical transitions, if the change
is represented as occurring and the phenomena are not otherwise expressed.
Ex. (1):
UmtUdn. UmtUaniUdn, to drizzle.
Maguldn, to sow seed or to do any-
thing in the rainy season. Ang
taguldn^ the rainy season. Pana-
gxddn, land which is planted in
the rainy season. Ang uldn^ the
rain. Mauldn, to have many rains;
also to be caught in the rain. Ex. :
NaglalAkad himi^y naulanan (We
were walking along and were
caught in the rain).
Ilumangin (from hanging wind).
Maghanginy to blow continuously
or much. MagpahangiUy to wait
until the wind changes; also to
put anything out in the wind.
MagpahangiUy to place one's self
where the wind is blowing. ( Note
accent. )
Kumidlat (from Iddlat, a flash of
lightning) . MagUdlat, to lighten
much. Old form, Hr^o^. %yn. ^kUat
(rare).
Lumintik (from lintik. The **thun-
derbolt.'»)
Kumulog. Magkulog, to thunder a
great deal.
To blow ; to be blowing; to be windy.
To lighten; to be lightening.
To be struck by lightning.
To thunder.
Ex. (2):
To dawn.
To shine (as the sun) ; to be sunny
(2) to grow light.
Umagd (from agd morning). (2) to
rise early. Magagd^ to rise early
(many), as a regiment, etc. ; (3) to
eat early. Ang agaan, what eaten
thus, i. e., the breakfast. Faaad
to come early. Naagd siyd^ he
came early. Ang ipaagd^ what is
to be done early.
Umdrao (from drao. (1) Sun; (2)
day; (3) weather. ) Magdrao, to be
very sunny. MadraOy to be over-
heated by the sun. Houag kang
malis ngayd^ y moumraudn kaH maii"
nitan (Don't go out now, because
the sun will be out and you will
Digitized by
Google
TAQALOa LANGUAGE.
168
To become late.
To become night; to do anything
at night; to iS overtaken by night.
To grow dark.
To grow cloudy; dark.
To grow dark; to become twiUght.
To ecUpse (lit. "to be dragoned'M.
set overheated ) . Manadrao, to use
daily. Ang pangdraoarao. what is
used daily or something for daily
use. Magpadrao, to wait until the
sun shines; (2) to wait for day;
(3) to sun one's self; (4) to put an
object in the sunshine. Ex.: (3)
Houag kang magpadrao (Do not
sun yourself). (4) Mdgpadrao ka
nang damii (Sun the clothes).
MagpakadraOy to continue at a
thing until daylight. Ex.: Nag-
. pak(mrao «iydng magdral (He
studied until daylight).
Humapon (from hupon^ the time be-
tween noon and dark; afternoon
(Northern United States); even-
ing (Southern United States).
(2) To go to roost, as chickens.
Maghapon, all day. Kakapon,
yesteraay. K, nang umagdj yes-
terday morning. K. nang hapon,
yesterday afternoon (evening).
K. 8a gabiy last night. Mamayang
hapon, later in the afternoon
(evening). Mahapon^ to eat sup-
per. Ang haponany the meal.
Manighapon (from Ughapon), to
do something in the afternoon or
evening (generally applied to
looking after plants, etc.).
Gnmabi (from gabi), night. ICx. :
Magmadalt kaH gagahiMn sa gdhai
(Make haste or you will be over-
taken by ni^ht in the timber).
Nagabihan siyd sa ddan (Night
overtook him on the road). Mag-
pakagabif to continue at a thing
until night. Ex.: Nagpakagabi
silang magdral (They studied until
night).
Dumilim. (Already explained.)
Lumimlim (irom limlim ) . Malirrdimy
to be cloudy, etc. Lumimlim also
means to cluck, as a hen when
she lays an egg. Ang linilimlimany
the egg laid. MagpaUmlimf to set
SumUim. Ex. : Pasilimin ta muna bago
lumdkad (Ijet us wait for dusk be-
fore we march ) . Lit. * * Walk on " .
(2) To penetrate (as the cold).
(2) Sinidlim akd nana lamig (I am
chilled through by the cold).
Lumahb. LumamoUf "to swallow,"
and kumainj "to eat," are also
used. Ex. : Linamon (Hnain) nang
lahd angbouan (The moon has been
swallowed [eaten] by the eclipse
[dragon]). Rahu is the dragon
of Hindu mythology which tries
Digitized by
Google
164
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To rise; to shine oat.
to eat the sun and moon from
time to time.
Sumilang. Sungmilang na ang drao
(The sun has already risen ) . Susi-
lang ang bouang madcUt ( The moon
will rise quickly). SungmisUang
anp manga hitmn (the stars are
shming). Angsilangan, the East.
Ang finilanganj what was lit up
by the rise of the sun or the
moon, or the shining out of the
stars. MagpasUang^ to wait until
one of above-mentioned bodies
rise. Ex. : B&kit hindi mo ptnasisi-
lang muna ang draof ( Why don't
you wait until sunrise? ) PaiUangin
ta muna ang drao (Let us wait until
the sun rises).
Sumikat. Ex.: (1) Sislkat na ang
drao (houan) (the sun [moon] will
rise soon). (2) Sumikkai (nasm-
koian) ang bdhay nana tduo (The
house is filling [fillea] with peo-
ple). Magpasikaty to wait until
rising of sun, moon, etc., takes
place. Ex.: Pamkatinmoangdrojo
(Wait until the sun rises).
Lumunod. Ang kalunoranjiheWesi;
lit. "the drowning place." Ex.:
Lungmunod ang drao (The sun has
set ) . Lungmulunod ang tduo (The
man is drowning himself) . Malu-
nod, to be drowned. With urn
volition may be understood, and
with ma accident.
Lumuhog. Lumuhog ang arao (The
sun basset). Lit. ** dived." Mag-
Idbog, to plunge another or an ob-
ject under the water.
IX. Um is used with roots when attraction toward the agent is expressed,
or when the agent gains control of something. The opposite idea of los-
ing control, etc., is sometimes expressed with the same root, and in other
cases with different roots, the particle mag being then the verbalizer.
To come out; to rise; as the sun,
moon, or stars. (2) To fill up
with people; as a church, house,
etc.
To set (as the sun); primary mean-
ing, * * to d rown. ' ' Application as
to sun from fact that sun sets in
the sea to Tagalogs.
To dive; to plunge into; to go to the
bottom. ( 2 ) To set, lit. * ' to dive, ' '
as the sun.
To buy.
To borrow.
To exchange; to barter.
To take.
To redeem; to ransom.
BumilL Magbili, to sell. (Both of
these have already been ex-
plained. )
Umutang. Magutang^ to lend. (Both
partly explained before.) Ex.:
Uutangan ko si Tomds nang limang
piso (I will borrow 5 pesos -from
Tom ds ) . Kautangan, (abs. ) debt.
Pauiang, credit.
Pumalit. Ang pinalit, what ex-
changed or bartered.
Kumuha. Ang pagkuha, the act of
taking. (Forms with in, i, ika^
ikina^ and an have been explained
heretofore. )
Sumdkop. Magsdkopy to redeem
much. Ma^dkopj to be dominated.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
165
To encounter; to strike.
To purloin; to filch; to steal.
To catch; to seize; etc.
Ang sdkop, the vassel or follower.
Makasdkop, to be able to dominate.
Nasasakopan niyd ana bayan (The
village [town] is under his rule).
Lit.: **The town is ruled by
him.'»
Sumumpong.
Umumii. Ang umitinj what pur-
loined. Maumitin or mapagumitj
purloiner.
Humuli, Ex.: Ihd ang pogong hull
na^ sa huhulihin pa (Better the
quail caught already than that
which has yet to be caught). — T. P.
Manhulij to live by robbery.
Among other words coming under this class may be mentioned tuman-
gap, * * to accept or receive ; ' ' dumdHp, * * to seize or catch hold of; * * umdbui,
**to overtake; to reach;" and sumalubong, **to go out to meet anyone;"
all of which have been explained before.
X. Um expresses voluntary acts of agents upon others when mutuality,
duality, or plurality is not denoted. The latter are expressecT by rnag, an
being generally suffixed for mutuality. Examples:
To accompany.
To leave another.
To join with; to unite with.
To talk to;
bring suit.
(2) to sue another or
Sumama. Magsama, to accompany
each other (two or more). Ang
kasama, the companion (servant).
Ang kasamahan, the person accom-
panying another. Makisama, to
thrust one's self into the company
of another. Magka^ama, to gather,
as a crowd. Sumamd is **to go
into partnership," and Sumamd is
**to become bad or evil." These
examples show the great impor-
tance of accent in Tagalog.
Humiwalay. Ang hiwalayan, the
person left. Maghiwalayy to sepa-
rate mutually. Mahiwalay, to
part accidentally or casually, etc.
Syn. iiwalag, with the same com-
bmations and meanings as above.
Both probably from wald^ without;
not to have, etc. Tiwalag is often
used in the sense of divide, but
waiak is better. Magkawatakwatak,
to be divided into many parts.
Pumiaan. Magpisan or magkapimn,
to associate together. Ex.: Ang
pinagkakapisanan nang manga ka-
runongan, the uniting place of the
sciences (knowledge, ddnong),
i. e., scientific society, university,
etc. PUan as an adjective means
'* merely; purely." There is a
noun pisan meaning " sudden
death." Makapisan^ to kill
another suddenly.
UmiUap, Ang usapin, the person
sued. Ang kausap^ the compan-
ion in conversation. Magusap, to
con verse ( two or more ) ; ( 2 ) to sue
Digitized by
Google
166 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
one another; to litigate. Mang^'
sap, to talk much; to talk to an
audience. £x. : Ilouag mo akong
lakasan nang pangungusap (don't
talk to me so much in such a
rough way). (As the variations
of the idea ** to sue " are derived,
they will be omitted ) . Makipagu-
Bap. to converse with another; (2)
to thrust one's self into a conversa-
tion. Ex. : Ihig mongmahipagii^ap
sa akinf (do you wish to have a
talk with me?). Op6 (yes, sir).
NgayS'y Kindt mangyayari^ it is not
possible just now). MakipaJdumpy
to rush uninvited into a conversa-
tion between others. Palaiisap, a
barrator or perpetual bringer of
groundless suits. MaginpcUausapf
to become a barrator. Ex. : Na-
• oinpnlausap siydH naginmalalango-
m*n(he has become a barrator and
common drunkard). The first
vice, barratry, is very prevalent
with Tagalogs; the second is very
rare. It would be unusual to find
the combination set forth above,
but grammatically it is an excel-
lent example with magin.
To reprove. Umduay. Magduoyy to quarrel with.
Kaduay, antagonist; enemy.
Ang ipagduayj the cause of quar-
rel. Ex.: Ana ipinagdtmy nang
mangd kapidbahay namin ay ang
aso ni FelidanOj p6 (sl dog of Fe-
liciano was the cause for the quar-
rel of our neighbors ) . Itong bdhay
na ltd ang pinagauayan nild (this
house is where they have been
quarrelling [or where they quar-
reled]). MakipagduaVy to pick a
quarrel or to interfere in a quarrel.
Magkaduay, to quarrel (two or
more). Nagkaduay ang dalawanq
maaasaua sa tiangi (the husband
and wife quarrelled in the market
place).
XI. Urn, also expresses movement in itself; movement from an outside
agency being expressed by mag, except for the root hangOf which takes
um. Ex. :
To walk; to pass on; to march; to Lumdkad. Ang lakariny whaXwalked
travel (on foot). for, i. e., the object of walking.
Ex.: AnoH hindl ka lungmaldkad
nana matulinf (why don't you
walk more quickly?). Magldkady
to walk ipuch or quickly; to carry
something while walking. Ang
ildkadf the means of walking, as
the foot, or the object carried
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
167
To run.
To lump.
To leap down.
To leap or jump down; to alight.
To swim.
To dive.
To stop.
To cease; to end, etc.
along. Ang lakaraUy the person
walked to, or the place walked to.
Ang paglakar&n, the route, path,
or road, etc., walked over. Ang
maglaldkad, the walker; traveler.
MaglakacUdkad (dim.), to stroll.
Ang paglakacUakardnf the ground
strolled over. Magpaldkad, to or-
der or cause to walk up or go
ahead. MakcdAkady to be able to
walk . Ex . : Palakarin mo nga iyang
cabayo iydn (make that horse walk
up ) . Hindi makaldkad siyd^ tpUay,
p6 (he is not able to travel; he is
lame, sir). NakcUaldkad akd (I sun
able to walk). Nakaldldkad siyd
mna (he may be able to walk).
Lumakbay is ** to go a long ways
on foot;" **to make a hike.'* It
has the same changes and varia-
tions as Idkad. There are several
other variations of the idea, all
rare.
Tumakbd, Already explained.
Lumoksd. Already explained.
Tkimaldn. Ang talonan^ the place.
Ex.; Tvmaidn ka sa tdbig (jump
into the water).
LumtLsong. Already explained.
Lumangoy. Already explained.
Lumxiwg, Already explained; syn.,
smd.
Tu mahdn, Magiahdn^ to stop another;
Magtahananj to stop each other
( two ) . Nagtahdn street in Manila
means ** stopping place,'* as it ends
at the bank of the Pdsig River.
Humumpay. Walang humpay^ end-
To run away.
To hide (from fear)
To pull out; to take out; to draw out.
To crawl; to walk on all fours.
Tumanan.
TumakciS. Ang maatatakas, mcUaka-
sin. or palatakaSf the hider (person
hiding).
Humango. This form originally
meant to redeem another from
slavery, and um has been retained
while the meaning has changed.
Maghango (now out of use) meant
to redeem one's self from the same
condition.
Gumdpang. Ang bald ay nakagagd-
pang (the child is able to crawl).
XII. Um is used with voluntary actions upon or against another. Ac-
tions affecting the subject are expressed with mag. Um is not used with
involuntary actions, as maiisod, " to stumble." Ex.:
To wash the face of another.
HumilamoSf evidently from damos;
amdSf idea of dirtiness of the face.
Ex.: Amosamosan ang mukhd mo
(your face is very dirty). An
hilamosan, the person wash»
'1
Digitized by
Google
168
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
To comb the hair of another.
To shave another.
To cut hair.
To cure another.
To scratch another.
To whip another.
TuMa na kihUamosint wash water.
Maghilamosy to wash one's face
(occasionally). Marihilamos, to
wash one's mce ( habitually ) . Ang
ipan^t^mo8, the means, i. e., hands,
sponge, wash rag, water used^etc.
Ang panhUamosan, the place, i. e.,
the wash basin» etc.
Svmuklay, Magmklay, to comb one' s
hair. Ana guklayin, what combed,
i. e., the hair. Ang pagmklayin^
what combed much. Ang pagm-
ktayan^ what combed upon. Ang
imklayf the means, etc. Ang m-
May, the comb. Magpasuklay, to
order to comb; also to allow one's
hair to be combed.
Umdhit. Magdhitf to shave ones-
self. Ang pagdhUf the act of
shaving (another). Ang pagadhit,
the act of shaving ones-self.
Mangdhitf to shave (as an occupa-
tion). An^ manadhit, the barber.
Angpandhttj the means, i. e., the
razor. Magpadhit, to order to
shave; also to get shaved. Ex.:
Magpddhil ha kayJuan (Tell Juan
to shave you). Magpadhit kay
Juan si Pedro (Tell Juan to shave
Pedro). Ang pinagaahiian, the
place of being shaved, i. e., the
barbershop. Ang ahitan, the per-
son shavea. (See phrases also. )
Gumupit. Maggupit, to cut one's
own hair. Ang ginupit^ what has
been cut, or the person whose hair
has been cut. Gumupit also means
to cut metal. The use of shears is
implied in all cases. (See the
phrases for examples. )
Gumamot. Maggamoty to cure ones-
self. Mangamot, to cure profes-
sionally, i. e., to practice medicine.
Kagamolan (abs. ), medicine.
Ang manga^amoty the physician.
Ang pangamotin, the person cured.
Ma^amoty to have much medicine,
or to have many kinds of medicine.
(Idiom:) Walang gamot ang limoty
there is no cure for the forgetful.
Ex.: Bago dumdting ang sakit,
lagydn nana gamot (Before illness
comes, apply the remedy). — T. P.
362. This seems to be an adapta-
tion from the Spanish.
Kumdmot. (Already explained. )
Humampds. MaghampdSy to whip
ones-self (as in penance). Ang
hampasiny the person whipped.
Ang hampds sa kaiabao^y sa cabayo
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LAITGTTAOE.
169
To cane or club another.
ang Idtay (the laah to the carabao
and the welt to the horse). — T. P.
376.
Pumald, Magpcdoan, to cudj?el each
other. Ang pamald, the garrote.
XIII. Urn is also used to express voluntary acts of the senses, except*
with those roots which commence with b. Ex. :
To look for; to see by so looking. KumiiA, MagkUd, to look at each
other ( two or more ) . Magkiid, to
look at intently, or at many things.
Makitdj to be seen. Makakitdj to
see (casually). Ex.: Akd^ynaka-
Hkitd (I am able to see). Ak6*y
nakakitd nang uang tduo diydn (I
saw a person there). NakUd mo
bagd siydf (Did you see him
[her] ?) Hindtf ngunVt makikitd
ho Sana J (no but I may be able to
[see] ) . MagkakUdj to be deceived
by tne sight. Ex.: Nagkakakini
hid ak6? (Do I see visions?)
NagkakakinikUaan ak6 (My sight
deceives me). NaakakinUaan akd
(My sight deceived me).
Dumingig. (Already explained.)
Humipd. Maghipdt to touch much.
Ang hipoin, what touched.
Umamoy. Ex.: Amoyin mo it6
(smell this). Maamoy, to smell
casually. Ex. : Naaamoy mo bagd
ang bangong isinasambulal nang
manad buUaklakf (Do you smell
the fragrance shed by the flowers?)
Makaamoy^ to be able to smell
something. Nakaaamoykaf (Can
you smell anything? ) Asd, smoke.
Lumasap. Ang lamping what tasted.
Makalasap, to taste (casually ) ; also
to cause a relish.
XIV. Some roots denoting passions and emotions of a certain kind are
conjugated by ttrw, when the iaea of voluntary action is expressed. Other
roots of this nature are conjugated by mag. When casual, ideas of emo-
tions, etc., are expressed with ma. Ex.:
To love.
To hear (by listening).
To feel; to touch.
To smell of.
To taste; to relish (purposely).
To care for; to desire; to wish.
Sumintd. (Already explained.) Of
Sansk. origin, through Malay. Lu-
mlyag is a synonym, now rare.
Umlbig. Magihig, to long for. Magi-
bigant to like each other (two).
Ang inibig, what liked. Ana ini-
ibig, the person who is liked and
reciprocates the liking. Angpagi-
big J the wish, desire, liking. Ang
pagkaibioy the act of liking, desire,
etc. Ang pinagibigan, what mutu-
al I y longea for. Maibig ( ad j . ) , lov-
infj, (2) capricious, (3) to have
a liking for. Ang naibig, the per-
son liked, but who is unaware of
Digitized by
Google
170
TAGALOO LANGUAGB.
To caress; to fondle.
To like; (2) to desire.
the fact. MaUngin, an amorous
man; a flirt. Makaibig, to care for
naturally. Kaibigdn (abst. ), love,
desire. Ang kotwigan (note ac-
cent) , the friend. Ang kinaiMaanj
what loved. Kaibigibig (adj.),
amiable; loving. Absolute, ibig.
And ang ibig mof ( What do you
wish? ) Ibig mong sumama «a dkint
(Do yon wish to go with me?)
Mangwig^ ( 1 ) to like many ; (2 ) to
flirt habitually; (3) to care first
for one thing and then another.
Ex. with Ibig, T. P. : Ang tunay na
pagibig fiangdn sa hull matamis
(True love is sweet to the end).—
446. Kung tapat ang pagibiq, ma-
pait man ay matamis ( When love is
real even bitter is sweet). — 447.
Umirog. Ang irogin, the person ca-
ressed. Mairoain, an affectionate
person. Ang biydyd't irog siyang
nakalalamuy (gifts and caresses
gain over what can not otherwise
be gained).— T. P. 144.
Pumita. Mapiiahin, a desirous per-
son. Ay ang pita nang l6ob ko (It
is the desire of my heart). Mag-
pita ka sa kaniyd nang andmang ibig
mo (Ask him for anything you
wish). Pithaya is a rather rare
synonym. PiLmiihaya, to like; to
desire.
XV. Um used with sa, **at,'* **in," denotes permanency in any place.
Ex.: Ang mangd Americano sungmaaa sangkapuluan (The Americans are
settling permanently in the archipelago) .
XVf. Um is also used in some places to express the idea that what may
be signified by the root is taking place here, there, and everywhere; the
idea of confusion being inherent. Ex.: Umduay (or auayan) dodn (all is
quarreling there). Umasdua (asauin) dito (everyone is getting married
here).
Um is also used for the imperative in Manila, the tenses being distin-
guished by adverbs of time, but this is probably due to the fact that the
speakers of Tagalog in Manila generally have some knowledge of Spanish,
which confuses their grasp of the nice distinction of tense in pure Tagalog.
XVII. C/m, used with some roots indicating certain actions means to be
occupied in a matter, although perhaps not actually performing the act
indicated. Ex.: Sumusulat si Juan (Juan is busy with writing).
IRREGULARITIES.
XVIII. In some parts of the Tagalog region the present tense of the in-
definite with the primary idea ( brides the regular formation with ungm
and the reduplications of the first syllable of the root), is sometimes ex-
pressed by the particle na prefixed to the root. Ex. :
To read . Bumasa, from San sk . wdchd * ' word , * '
** discourse.'* There are three
forms of the present indef. with
primary idea. 'Ex.: Akd*y nabasa
(I am [or was] reading). Akd^y
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE. I7l
nabasay nakatdlog akd ( I was read-
ing and fell asleep). Nanasaakd
( I am reading ) . Bungmabasa ak6
(I am reading). (See tables for
other tenses. ) Ang hasahm^ what
read. Ang hasahan^ the person
read to. BasaMn, professor, lec-
turer. Magbasdf to read much,
or by many, Angpagbaaa^ the act
of reading. Maoabasa, anything
legible. Ex.: Nabasa mo na ang
librong ipinahiram ko sd iydf (Had
vou [nave you already] read the
book I lent you?) Hindi ko pa na-
boMt (I have not finished reading
it yet). Magpabasa^ to order to
reaid. Ex.: Nagpapabasa ang
mangadral sa manga batd (the
teacher is ordering the children to
read). Mabasahin; mamamasa or
palabasa^ reader. TagabasOy reader
Dv occupation. Basa is also ap-
plied to a gravestone. Bumasd
( from 5a«d} , is * 'to wet, to moisten. ^ '
This last is evidently a Malayan
word; Malay, basahkxin, to wet or
moisten. Basa (from Sansk.
wdchd) means language, speech, in
Malay, while bacha has oeen se-
lected to represent the idea of read-
ing.
To write. Sumulat (from Arabic s'uratf a chap-
ter of the Koran, through Malaj^).
This root has been softened to mlat
in Visayan and Ta^log, but in
Bicol and Ilocano it is still sural.
Ibanag uses the root turak. There
18 also a root titik in Tagalog, mean-
ing ' *to write, " * 'to record. ' * There
is also a word meaning ' ' to print. * '
It is magpalamdn, with a primary
meaning of being implanted in the
heart. Ex.: Namlat siyd (he is
writing) . Sungmusulat siyd (he is
writing). Ang sulatin, what writ-
ten. Ex. : And ang susulatin nang
amd mo sa iyong kapatid na lalaki?
(What will your lather write to
your brother?) Isulai niyd itong
pani'dat (let him write with this
pen) (means of writing). Jsinulat
na niyd sa kaniyd na parito siyd
pagdaka (he has written him al-
ready to come here at once). Ang
sulatan^ the paper written upon,
or the writmg desk, place, etc.
Ex. : Svdaian mo itong panel ( write
on this paper) . And baga angsinu-
latan mo nang manga pangalan?
( Which paper did you write the
names upon ? ) Itong papel na it6*y
Digitized by
Google
172
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
To eat.
To buy.
To obey; to follow.
To resist; disobey; contradict; con-
tend with.
To show anger;
from.
To stand up; to rise to the feet.
To sit down.
To look at
aiijang Busulatan niyd (this paper
is for him to write upon [fut.]).
MagmUaty to writemuchor by many.
MaamlatsiUatan (dim.), to write a
little; to scribble. Ex.: Nagsusu-
iMmUdan ak6 (I am writing a little;
I am scribbling ) . ManiUatf to write
as an occupation. Ang manuwLdat,
the clerk; writer. Ang paniUatf
the pen, stylus, brush, etc. (See
also under maka, magjxij and maki),
MapagMat, a person who writes
much.
Kutnain. (Already explained.) Ex.
with na: Nakain giyd (he is eat-
ing) . Kungmakain giyd ( he is eat-
ing [reeular form] ).
Bwnili. (Already explained. ) Ex. :
NabUi akd nang damit (I am buy-
ing some clothes). Also tmngmi-
bili akd nana damxt.
Sumunod. Nasunod Biyd^ he is obey-
ing or obeys. Ang sundalong 9ung-
musunodf tunorin tsiyd kun oficial
(the obedient soldier will be
obeyed when an oflScer himself).
Magmnorany to follow each other.
Magmnodsunodf to follow in rapid
succession ( many ) . Magsumunod,
to follow closely, also two children
bom in succession. Magkasumu-
nody to follow wherever another
™ay go, or to obey implicitly.
Ex.: Nagkaka^umunodangmndalo
9a punong niyd (the soldier follows
his officer wherever he goes).
Sino ang pinagkammunddn mot
(Who are you obeying so implic-
itly?) Ang punong ko (ray com-
mander). Ano ang ipinagkaka^su-
munod mo [ninyo] sa kaniydt
(Wh^ do you [yej obey him so
implicitly?) AWy sundmOy p6 (1
am a soldier, sir).
Sumuay. Na»day siyd^ he is disobey-
ing. Magstiayy to disobey, etc.
(much). Ma»dayj disobedient;
contradictory. Jfa(7«tiayan, to con-
tradict each other. Magsisdayj to
disobey (many). Kamayan^ dis-
obedience.
(2) to turn aside Tamdbog. Ex.: Naidhog siyd (he
shows anger; he is turning aside).
Tumindia. Naiindig siyd (he is ris-
ing to his feet ) . Verb has al ready
b^n explained.
Umupd. X^aupd sUd ( they are sitting
down). Verb has already been
explamed.
Tumingin. Naiingin akd (I am look-
ing). Verb has already been
explained.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
173
To read.
To capture.
To take.
XIX. Bisyllabic ( two-fly llabled) roots commencing with b^ ife, jo, f, or a
vowel, generally admit of a similar irregularity in the imperative, past, and
present tenses; n being prefixed to vowel roots for the past and present
tenses and m for the imperative, while the initial letter of 5, ifc, p, and t
roots changes to n for the past and present tenses, and to m for the
imperative.
Bumasa. Ex.: (Irreg.) Masa ka;
(Reg.) Bumasa ka(TeBd). (I.)
Nam akd; (R.) Bungmasa ak6 (1
read [past tense]). (I.) Nanasa
akd; ( K. ) Bungmahasa akd (I am
reading). The other tenses are
regular. Ex.: Nakabasa akd (I
h£ui read). Babasa akd (I shall
read ) . Makabasa akd (I shall have
read). Ang pagha^a, the act of
reading.
Bumihag, Kabihagan, captivity.
Same as foregoing.
Kumuha ( parti v explained before).
Imp., Muha ka; kumuha ka; kuha
ka (take) . Past, Nuha akd; kung-
muha akd (I took). Pr., Nunuha
akd; kungmukuha akd (I am tak-
ing), pip. I Nakakuha akd (I had
taken). F., Kukuha akd (I shall
take). F. P., Makakuha akd (I
shall have taken). Manguha^ to
take habitually. Aug panguniny
what taken habitually. (Note that
the u is all that remains of kuha.)
Makakuha, to be able to take.
Ex.: Nakuha nild iyang mangd
bunga (they were able to take that
fruit [pi.]).
Kumadn. Conj. like kumuha. (Al-
ready explained.)
Pumdsok. Mdsok ka; pumdsok ka
(come in) . Ndsok siyd; pungmd-
8ok siyd (he went in). Nandsok
sild; pungmapdsok aild (they are
going in) . Nakapdsok akd (I had
gone in). Papdsok akd (I will go
in) . Ang Migpdsokf the act of en-
tering. Magpasokf to enter much.
Magpdsok, to put something in-
side. Ang pamkin, the object of
entrance. Ang ipdsok, what put
inside. Ang pasukan, the door
entered or the house, etc. Nasok
silang walang batibatl (they came
in without any ceremony) . Ma-
kapdsoky to enter or go in casually;
to be able to enter. Ex.: (1)
Akd^y nagpapasial ay makapdsok
akd sa looban ni Got iMis (I was
out for a stroll, and without think-
ing went into Don Luis' s yard).
Magpapdsokj to order to enter; to
get into, as clothes. Ex. : Si Juan
ay nagpapdsok kay Pedro nang da-
To go for; to bring; to call.
To enter; to come in; to go in (vol-
untarily).
Digitized by
Google
174 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
mU (Juan told Pedro to get into
his clothes) . Nagpapdsok «i Pedro
nana damit (Pedro put on the
clothes). Makapagpapdsoky to be
able to order another to go in.
To pluck ; to gather, as flowers. PumUds. ( Already explained.)
Conj. like pumdsok.
To tempt; to try. Tumuksd. Imp., MuksS; tumuksd
(tempt, try). Past, Nuks6; tung-
muksd (tried). Pr., Nunukso;
tungmuiuksd (trying). Pip., Naka-
tuksd (had tried). F., Tutuks6
^shall, will try). F. P., Makatuksd
( shal 1, wi 11 have tried ) . Ang jmg-
pagtuksdf the trying, tempting.
MagtuksOf to tempt much or many.
Ang tuksohiUf the person tempted.
Angpagtuksohin^ the person greatly
or many times tempted. Ang
ituMj the cause or means of temp-
tation. Ang ipagtuksdj the cause
or means of great or repeated
temptation. Ang tuksohmi^ the
place of temptation. Ang pagtuk-
sohauy the place of much or re-
peated temptation. Mag tukso-
tuksohan (dim.), to tempt a little,
or in mockery . Manuksd, to tempt
habitually. Ang manunuksSj tne
tempter; temptress. Magpanuksd,
to tempt frequently and a great
deal. Ang ipanuksdj the cause or
means of the foregoing. Ang pa-
nuksohanj the place corresping to
foregoing. Magpakatuksdy to tempt
strongly. Ex. : And ang ipinagpa-
katuksohan {ipinakapagtuksohkn)
nildf ( Why were they so strongly
tempted?)
To peck (as a bird). Tumukd. Coni. like tumuksd. Ap-
parently applied to bite of snake.
Ex.: Siyd^y tinukd nang ahas (he
was bitten by the snake).
To leave; to go away. Umalis. Imp., (I.) Mails ka; (R.)
umalis ka. Past, Nalis ak6 (I.);
Ungmalis akd (R.) (I left, went
away, etc.) Pres., Nanalis akd
(I.); ungmaalis akd (R. ) (I am
going away, leaving, etc.). Pip.,
Nakalls akd (I had left). Fut.,
Aalis akd (I shall leave). F. P.,
Makaalis akd (I shall have left).
Ang pagaliSf the leaving. (This
root nas already been partly ex-
plained. )
The following roots are conjugated like alis:
To ascend. Urnakyat. Ang inakyat, what ascend-
ed or the person ascending. Ang
iakyaty the cause. Ang akyatdn,
the place.
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LANGUAOB.
175
Not to wish.
To go for water with a pitcher.
To drink.
To turn back; to go back; to fall
back; to retreat.
To return; to come back.
To lead; to go ahead.
Umayao. Ex. : Paayao ka (say you
do not wish to). BdHt siyd napa-
ayaof (Why did she say she did
not wish to?)
TJmigih.
Uminum, Imp., Minum ka^ drink.
Malay minum means "to drink."
(This verb has already been ex-
plained. )
Umurong.
Umuui.
Umund.
(Already explained.)
XX. Some polysyllabic (of more than two syllables) roots beginning
with 6, ky p, ty or a vowel, are conjugated with the particle man (q. v.).
XXI. Some sixty-six polysyllabic verbal roots commencing with pa
replace the first syllable with na in the past and present and with ma in
the imperative and future. In the present and future tenses the second
syllable of the root is reduplicated and not the first. This conjugation
resembles but is not identical with man. There are also some euphonic
vowel modifications. (See tables for synopsis of conjugation. )
The verbal roots, which are conjugated in this manner, are the following:
To verbalize these roots, change initial jo to n or m as required for tense
of indefinite.
To rise early.
To profit; to make (in business).
To listen to (with attention).
To solicit or urge (for good or evil).
To bathe one^s self; to take a bath.
To swell.
To dwell; to live in a house.
To swell up (as a sting) ; also to
swell badly.
To supplicate; (2) to ascend into a
house for important reasons.
To wag the tail (as a dog'
To incite; to provoke.
Paagdf from agdj "morning."
Pakindbang. Probably from a lost
root tdhang^ which still exists in
Bicol and Visayan, with the mean-
ing "to aid; nelp; succor;" and
the prefix paki^ def . of maki.
Pakinig, To listen to much, magpa-
kini{f.
PakiiHsapf from usap and pakij def.
of mM,
Paligd. Magligb, to bathe another;
also magpaligd. Syn. pambo (rare) .
Maligd ka ( take a bath) . Paligoan
mo ang cabayo (wash the horse).
Pamagdy from bagd^ "a tumor, ab-
cess," SLndpan.
Pamdhay y from bdhay^ "house, "and
pan,
Pamanghidy from pangkidy "to
swell" (the nerves), and^n.
Pamanhiky from panhik and pan.
Pamdypoy ( rare ) . Seiple thinks may
be from lost root paypoyy variation
oipaypay, "fan." MamaypaVy to
fan one's self or another. Usual
word "to wave" is pumaspds.
Paspasin mo ang bandila (wave the
flag).
Pamongkahl. Ex. : Pinamomongkahian
tayo nang presidente municipal sa
masamang gawd (The municipal
president [mayor] is inciting us
to do wrong). (Present tense,
reduplication of modified syllable
mo and suffix an. From pongkahly
Digitized by
Google
176
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To offer; to dedicate.
To envy.
To sigh; (2) to whistle.
To dream.
To put one's self under the control
of another.
To pray.
To trust; to confide.
To vanquish; gain; conquer; win.
To sing funeral songs.
To descend by stairs or ladder; (2)
to spend; to use up.
a variation of pongkd^ **to incite
to a quarrel,*' and pan. This root
is said to be of Chinese origin.
Panagano. Seiple says from Vis.
part, panag and and^ "what."
Panaghill. Seiple also gives this as
from panag and hiliy **envy.*'
Ex.: Hoxmg hang managhili sa
kapua mo tauo (Do not envy your
neighbor). Syn. pangimbolo
(rare).
Panaghoyy from taghoy, "to pant, to
breathe hard,'' and pan.
Panaginip^ from glnip and pana^ a
combination found by Seiple in
but four words of polysyllabic
structure. Ex.: Ndnanaginip ha
hagAf (Are you dreaming?) Syn.
Bunganlulogy from tulog^ "sleep."
Panngisuydf from tag'isuyo and pan.
The ultimate root is myd with the
same general meaning.
PanalangiUy from dalangin and pan.
Panaligy from s&lig. Ex.: Siyd ang
sinaBaligan hOy haya akd matdpang
(I trust in him, and am brave for
that reason). Pinapanaligan mo
{panaliganin mo) ang Dios (let
your trust be in God [trust in
God]).
PanalOy from talo and pan. Sino ana
nanalot (Who was the winner?)
TumalOy to dispute ( one ) . MagtalOy
to argue ( two, etc. ) . ManalOy indef .
of panalo. MagpaialOy to allow
one' 8 sel f to be conquered. PatalOy
to consent to be vanjjuished. Ma-
hitalOy to interfere in a dispute.
Ang mananalOy the winner; con-
queror. Ang talonany the van-
quished.
Panambitany from samhity "funeral
song," an suffixed and pan.
Pandog. Seiple gives a Panav-Vi-
sayan root naogy but the Samar-
Leyte dialect seems to lack this
word. Ex.: (Tag.) Pumandogyio
descend a ladder (also, to go or
come down stairs). Magpandogy
to do the above much. Magpapa-
ndogy to order the above to be
done; to use up; to spend. Ex. :
Nagpapandog nang art ang nam-
ruhhd (The property has been used
up on account of poverty ) . Napa-
panaogan akd nang limang pisos (I
have spent five pesos ) . A Iso with
ma. Ex.: Ang napandog sa dhin
ay limang pisos (The amount of my
spending was five pesos). Mag-
pandog also means to bring some-
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
177
To sit down (with the feet crossed
and knees apart).
To promise; to resolve.
To persevere; to persist; to last.
To penetrate (as water).
To be able to do.
To kneel down; to kneel.
To prop with the hand.
thing down stairs or oy means of a
ladder. ^ n^ripando^, what brought
down. Magpapagpandogf to order
something to be brought down
thus.
Panasild, from «i/d, with same mean-
ing with mag and pan. Seiple
thmks pana a root, but it may also
be from the indef. Aug pinana-
nasilaany the person sat down be-
fore, or the place.
Panata. Angpanatahiuy what ^rom-
ised. Ang panatahaUy the person
promised. Syns. Pangakd; Tu-
mandang. The roots talagd and
pandan have somewhat similar
meaning.
Panatilij trom tiliy idea of propping
up; and ©ana.
Panimtim (from timtimf and pan),
Seiple gives iiyim as the root, mean-
ine **to ooze into; to leak.'* No-
ceda gives panayimiim as the word.
Ex. Mapanayimtim sa l6ob ang ma-
samang a^al (The evil habit pene-
trates the heart).
Pangyari ( from yari and pan ) . Ma-
kapangyarihany powerful; omni-
potent. KapangyarihaUy power;
faculty; authority. Ex. MayrSon
siyangkapangyarihan ( he has power
[or authority]). Wald siyang k.
(He is without a) . Wald akong k.
(I am without a). Mangy ariy to
be possible. Ex. Hindi mangy a-
yan (It can not be ) . Hindi mang-
yaring di akdpumaroon (I can not
possibly keep from going there).
Mangyari hagang di ak6 pumaroonf
(Is it not possible for me to keep
from goine there?) An6*t di man-
gyayarif (Why should it not be «o)*)
May nanpyari doon sa bdhay niya
(Somethmg has happened in his
house over there ) . Sukat mangyari
(Suppose it may happen?) Di
sukat mangyari ( It should not hap-
pen ) . Mangyayari din (It will in-
deed be possible). Yari alone
means done; finished; completed.
Ex. : Yari na ang sulat (The letter
is already finished).
Panikluhod. (Already explained).
Syn. Lumuhod.
Paniin. Ang tjomantin, what propped
thus. Magtiiny to put out the
hands in order to rise; (2) also to
stamp or print. Tiinan mo ang
papely stamp or print it on the
6855—05-
-12
Digitized by
Google
178
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To think; also **to regret.'*
To squat.
To believe; to confide in; to trust.
To guide; to lead.
To accomplish the will.
To view (as a spectacle); to gaze at;
to sight; to behold; to look at
from far off; to view with astonish-
ment.
To make water.
To lodge.
To wait upon the pleasure of another;
to flatter; (2) to serve.
To promise.
To dare; to venture.
paper. Root tiin and pan. Tiin
means * * to prop oneself with hands
and feet in order to rise.**
Panimdim (from dim dim and pan).
This root is domdom in Bicol.
Paninakayad (from tinkayad and
pan). Also tumingkayad, with
same meaning.
Paniwala (from iiwdUi and pan).
^n(7A^i?mZa, the confidant; l>osom
friend.
Pandgot.
Panolos (from a lost root, tolos^ sug-
gests Seiple, who cites the Java-
nese word *Uulu8f sincere; faith-
ful; loyal, etc.** and adopted in
Malay). Ex.: Hindi ak6 manolos
kumainy at ang nasasakit akd nang
la gnat (I can not force myself to
eat, because I am sick with fever).
Pandod (from n6od and pan). Ma-
ndody to look at what contents and
gives pleasure. Ang pinandod,
what beheld.
Panubig (from tubig and pan).
Panuluyan (from iMoy anq pan).
Ang panuluyanan, the lodging
place; also ang tuloyan. Ang ipa-
nuluyan^ the cause or person for
whom lodging is looked for. Mag-
papanuluyan, to give another lodg-
ing. Ang papanuluyaniny the per-
son given lodging. TamitUoy to
lodge. Magiuloyy to lodge many
or much. Ang tvluyan, the lodg-
ing place. Ang pagtvluyan^ the
lodging place of many or much.
Ang Uuloyf the cause. Ang ipag-
tuloy, the cause of many or much.
Magpaiuloyy to give lodging. Ang
patuLuyin, the person given lodg-
ing. Ang paiuluyarij the place
where given lodging. Ang papag-
iuluyiny the person given much
lodging. Ang mangdpapagtuluyiny
the persons given lodging. Ang
pinagpapatuluyanj the lodging
nouses. Ex.: Sino ang nanunu-
luyan sa bdhay mof (Who is the
lodger at your house?) Isang ma-
hirap napinatuloy ko sa Aking bdhay
(a poor man whom I have alloweci
to lodge at my house).
Panuyd (from myd and pan). See
panagisuyd.
Pangakd (def.); mangakd (indef.).
Syn.y panata. From dko, ** secu-
rity,** and^n.
Pangahds; mangaha^ (probably from
dahds, **idea of bravery,** and
pan). Seiple points out that the
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
179
To become tired from much standing
or being in. the same position a
long time.
To become thin; emaciated.
To become numb (as the arm or leg
from inaction); to **go to sleep. *^
To fold the arms.
To rest the face upon the hand; to
bury face in hands.
To apprehend; to dread.
To bear a child; to lie in.
To be with child for the first time.
To dread.
To look in mirror or other reflecting
surface.
To hurt; to damage; to malign; to
make ashamed.
To talk in sleep; to dream.
To humble or abase oneself.
To make love; to woo.
To be jealous.
To tremble; to shudder.
To warn; to guard oneself; to sneak
away.
regular formation should be pana-
hds. In Bicol, dahds means vio-
lence; force.
Pangdlay. Ex.: Nanganadlay kanaf
(Are you tired alreaay?) Hindt
p6 (no, sir). The roots ngdlay^
hingdlay^ ngalo, and ngimi have
about tne same meaning.
Pangalirang (greater than yaycU),
Sy n. , pangatigang. Root, ngalirang
and pan.
Pangato (from ngcUOf ** idea of pain
from fatigue ' ' ) . Syn. , ngimi.
Pangalokipkip (from halokipkipj to
cross the arms). Var., panhalo-
kipkip. Ult. root, kipHp, Ex.:
Kumipkipj to lay the arm or 1^
upon anything. Bdkit ka nanaang-
cUokipkipf ( Whjr are you folding
your arms?) Seiple shows that
halo often prefixes roots composed
of two identical syllables.
Pangalumbabd (from ngalumbabdemd
pan). Yax.fngayumbahd. Tauong
mapangalumbahdy a melancholy
person.
Pangamba (less than pangdnib or
tdkot). From gambdy **idea of
dread," Sindpan.
Panganak (from anaky "child,'* and
pan).
Pangdnay.
Pangdnib (from gdnib, ** idea of being
in danger' ' ) . (Greater degree than
paiigamba.)
Panganind (from aninOy ** image,
shadow," and pan).
Panganyaya (from any ay a and pan).
Makapanganyayay to cause dam-
age. Panganyayang tduOy a person
who destroys property, maligns,
etc. Anyayang tduo, a lazy person.
Makapapanganyava (adj.), harm-
ful; hurtful; slanderous.
Pangdrap (from drop, **idea of
dreammg," and pan).
Pangayvpapd (from ngayupapd and
pan).
Pan^ibig (from ibig and pan). See
ibig.
Pangigboghd (from boghd^ "idea of
jealousy;" still found in pani-
bughdf * * jealousy " ) .
Pangildbot (from hldboty "idea of
trembling").
PangUag (def.); mxingUag (indef.);
both from ilag. Imilagy to flee.
MagUagy to draw aside; to avoid.
Pangilagan mo ang mangd tduong
vxdang pinagaralan (avoid men
without education [breeding]).
Digitized by
Google
180
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
To be scornful.
To keep holidays.
To become numb (as the arm or leg
from inaction); to "go to sleep.'
To tremble ( much with cold or fear) .
To feel a tingling pain in the teeth.
To shake (as from the ague).
To precede (as in room or street);
to commence; to start or begin.
To lose in trade, business, or barter.
To talk.
Pangilap, Seiple thinks may be
from sUaVj **idea of a wordy quar-
rel,'* Bnapan.
Pan^in (from ngUing^ "idea of ob-
serving holidays [fiestas], etc.,''
and van). Seiple observes that
the nnal a of the root has been
dropped, but this may be acci-
dental.
Pangimi ( from ngimi ) . Sy n. pangalo,
Parwinip (from Jdnigy really kinyig).
JCuminigy to tremble with cold or
fear. Magkinigy to tremble nmch
thus. Makinig, to be trembling
thus [state]. Manginig, indef. of
panginig. Mahapanqinig^ to cause
to tremble with cold or fear.
PangingUd (irompan^Oy itself from
ngildf a tingling pain in the teeth.
Pangibi (from ngiki), Ak6*y nan-
gingihi (I am shaking).
Panguna (from una, ** first," and
pan).
PangtUugi (from nguliigi, a loss in
business, and jxin).
Pangusap ( from usap and pan ) . Ex. :
Ilindt ka makapangusapf (Can't
you talk?) (See umpj already
partly explained).
DIMINUTIVES IN "UM."
Um verbs are made diminutive by the repetition of the root if bis yllabic,
or the first two syllables if longer. Ex. :
To run.
To rain.
TumakbS. Tumakbo-takbdf to ramble ;
to run a little.
Umuldn. Umulan-vUdn, to drizzle.
In ordinary composition the hy-
phens are generally omitted.
THE VERBALIZING PARTICLE "MAG."
The particle 7naa is used to verbalize roots, as a general rule, either
when a definite object is held in view or else when the verb does not
require an object to express intensity (sometimes plurality) with roots
which are verbalized in the simplest sense with um. Mag has also a recip-
rocal (mutual) idea, an (han) being usually suflBxed.
Magy which is always a prefix, changes to nag in the present and past
tenses. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated for the present and
future tenses. Makn and naka^ which are used to indicate the second
future perfect and pluperfect, Respectively, retain paOy the definite of mag,
with the root, as tney are also independent particles when used alone.
In this respect, and also in the retention of the particle in front of the
reduplicated initial syllable of the root in the future tense, all particles
differ from um. (See the table for conjugation of mag roots. )
I. Mag^ prefixed to roots which admit um and which do not change the
meaning with mag^ signifies plurality either of persons or acts, this being
the general meaning imparted by this particle. Mag {nag) sometimes
throws the accent upon the last syllable of a root. Ex. :
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
181
To guard; watch for.
To sit down.
Tamanod. Magtanodf to guard much
or by many. Ang tanoran, what
guarded. Ang pagtanoran, what
guarded much or by many. Ang
ttanodj the cause of guarding.
Ang ipagtanodf the cause of guard-
ing much or by many; also the
person for whom guarded, if there
be a person concerned.
Umupd. Magupdy to sit down ( many ) .
Among other verbs may be mentioned magbasdj to read much or by-
many (bumasa); magkainy to eat much, etc. (kumain); maggiikf to thresn.
(gumiik); maginum, to drink much, etc. {uminum)] maglakad^ to walk
much, etc. (lum6Lkad)\ magsulat^ to write much or by many (miniXlat);
magtakbS, to run much or by many (tumakbd) ; magtangis^ to weep much
or by many {tumangis), and magtuksd^ to weep much {iumukad); all of
which verbs have been heretofore explained.
II. Those roots which do not admit um as a verbalizing particle are not
pluralized by magy but simply verbalized in the primary sense. Besides
others, all roots beginning with m fall in this class on account of caco-
phony (harshness) with um.
To grind (as grain).
To enhance.
To think with care.
To see well (purposely).
To inherit.
To note; to experience.
To start; to commence.
Magbayd. Ang bayin, what ground.
Ang bayohauy the grinding place.
Magmahal. Ang minamahaly the es-
teemed, etc., person. Ex.: Ang
banal nxi tduo ay minamahal (the
just person is esteemed). Mama-
half to rise in value. Ex. : Nama-
mahal ang lakd (the merchandise is
rising in value). Magpakamahal,
to esteem highly. Ex. : Pinagpa-
pakamahal ko sa kaniyd (I do es-
teem him highly). Also with
maka alone. Ex. : Pinakamamdhal
ko sa kaniyd. Makimahaly to act
like a noble person. Mapakimahaly
to arrive at a state of being es-
teemed. Kamahalany deamess;
nobility, etc.
Magmahang.
Magmalas. To see well, casually,
makamalas.
Magmana. Ang pagmanahiny what
inherited. Ang magkamanay to
leave property. Ang iparnana, the
estate. Ang pamanoy the inherit-
ance (verbal noun). Ex.: It6ang
parnana sa dkin nang amd ko ( This
was my inheritance from my
father). Ang pagmanakany the
heir. Makimanay to ask for an in-
heritance.
Magma&id. Ang mapagrrumdy the
person who notes or experiences.
MagmuJd. Muldn mo U6, commence
tifiis. Used only thus in impera-
tive and past indicative. As * * pro-
ceed " it IS used in past and present.
Digitized by
Google
182 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Anq pinagmumtUdny the point from
which proceeding. Muld as prep,
means "from; since/'
To recall to memory. MarpnuH. Also means to open the
eyes widely; and to look at well.
To cheapen; insult; dishonor. Magviura. Mamura, to lower in
value. Ang murahin^ what cheap-
ened, or who insulted, dishonored,
etc. Magpakamuramura, to despise
intensely. Magmuraharif to insult
mutually. Anghokomanangpinag-
murahan nildf they insulted each
other in the court room.
There are comparatively few verbal roots beginning with m in the Taga-
log. The foregomg are nearly all that are in common use. A few others
are to be found, which will be noted later, used with other particles.
III. Roots which change the meaning with um and mag are pluralized
in two ways with mag. If the /«a/ sv liable of the root is accented nor-
mally the first syllable of the root is added extra in all tenses, but if the
accent is not normally upon the last syllable of the root, plurality is
expressed by changing the accent to the nnal syllable. It should also be
noted that the meaning changes back.
To buy. Bumilt. MagbUi^ to sell. Nagbibill
akdy I am selling. NagbiUbili ak6,
I am buying much. This form is
now rare, man (q. v.) being gen-
erally used. Ex.: NamimUi akd
(I am buying much).
To teach (as a doctrine). Umdral. Magdral, to learn; to
study. Magaral, to teach much;
to preach. Now generally re-
placed by man, Ex.: Mangdral,
to preach.
The reduplication of a bisyllabic root or the first two syllables of a poly-
syllabic root intensifies plurality with mag roots. This same construction
with um roots indicates diminutives. Mag roots add an (han) to express
diminutives or reciprocal verbal actions, which have to be distinguished
by the context, meaning, etc. Ex. :
To think. Ma^lsip. Magisipisip, to think
deeply; profoundly.
To meditate. Magnuay, Magnilaynilay^ to medi-
tate profoundly. ManUay natauo,
a considerate person. Manilny,
also means to fish. Paninilayan,
a fishing canoe.
To follow; to obey. Sumunod. Ma^sunodsunody U) follow
in rapid sequence (many) .
IV (a). Roots which may admit the idea of more or less take an addi-
tional repetition of the first syllable to signify intent or plurality. If the
entire root be repeated the plurality is intensified. Roots of three or more
syllables repeat only the two first, according to the general rule in Taga-
log. Ex. : Nagsusumpd ako sa kapidbdhay ko (I have cursed my neighbor
many times). Nagsusumpasumpd akd sa kapidbahay ko {1 have cursed
[slandered] my neighbor times without number).
(6) Mag and the doubled root in certain cases signify the performance
of an act and its opposite. Verbs expressing an unsteady motion or quick
change of position are also formed in a similar manner, (c) In the present
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
183
tense nag may be dropped, being replaced by the reduplicated initial
syllable of the primitive root. Some um verbs have this form also. Ex. ( b) :
To pass.
To go or come out.
To turn over.
To stagger; to reel.
To shift about; to chan^ continu-
ally; to turn over contmually.
To wander about aimlessly, (um).
To stagger.
To tiptoe about; to walk on tiptoes.
To bend over.
To move (c).
To walk with the head on one side
(c).
Dumaan, MagcUian^ to pass many
times or by many. Magdaandaan^
to pass and repass many times.
Daandn^ a made road. Dt madaa-
nan, impassible. Makaraan, to be
able to pass. M<wparaan, to allow
to pass Ex.: Paraanin mo akd
( let me pass ) . Hindi ko pararaanin
hangan di mo akd bibtgydn nang
kaunting tubig (I will not let you
pass until you give me a little
water). Daan also means "hun-
dred.
Lumahds. MaglabdSy to take out.
MaglabaslabdSj to go out or come
in (many times) .
Magbaligtad, Magbalibaligtady to
turn over. Ex. (c) : Babalibaligtad
ang may sakit sa hihigdn (the sick
man is turning over and over in
bed).
Magbalingbdling. Babalingbdling
yaong tduo, that man yonder is
reeling. Magpapagbalinqbdlingy to
be staggering from walking, etc.
Ex. : Pinapagbabalingbdling mo akd
nangpaghdnap saiyd (I am ready
to fall from looking for you. Syn.
MamKUingpdling.
MagbUingbUing. Ex.: BibUinabUing
mandin siyd (he is shifting alx>ut).
Bibilingbiling ang l6ob ko (I have
my doubts). Bibilingbiling ang
may sakit sa hihigdn ( the sick man
is twisting and turning in bed).
Sumulingsuling. Susulingfuling myd
(he is wandering about aimlessly ) .
Magsuraysf'iray, Susuraymray siydf
(Is he staggering?) Opd, ang lasing
ay susuraysuray kung lumdkad (yes
sir, a drunken man staggers when
he walks) .
Tumiad. Magtiadtiad, to tiptoe about
much . TUiadliad akd ( I am walk-
ing about on my tiptop).
Umukod, Mag^ikody to bend over
much. Maukod, to be bent over.
Magukodukod, to walk bent over
or waveringly. Uukodukod siyd
( he walks bent over) . Uukodukod
yaong maiandd (that old person
walks haltingly) .
Kumibd. Magkibokibd, to move
much.
Magkilingkiling, Jyang batd^y kiki-
linakiling kung lumdkad (That child
holds the head on one side when
walking).
Digitized by
Google
184
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To assemble (purposely.)
To assemble; to meet (purposely).
To wabble (c). Kuminday. MagHndayHnday^ to
wabble much. Syn. Magkinding-
kinding.
V. Mag is also used to express personal actions which may be dual or
plural in character, reciprocity or mutuality being implied. If the plurality
18 to be intensified, the root is repeated, subject to the general rule for poly-
syllabic roots. Ex. :
To quarrel; to fight. Magbabag. Ana paghahagy the act of
quarreling. MapagbabaOf quarrel-
some person. Ang haoagin^ the
person quarreled with.
Magpulong. Ex.: Nagpupiilong ang
rnanpd maginoo sa bay an (the
**pnncipale8" of the town are
assembhng). And ang pinagpu-
longan kanilaf (Why have they
met?) Ang ipinagpulong nUd^y
nang paguaapan ang pa^ddting
nang gobemador-general (The pur-
pose of their meeting was to talk
over the coming of the governor-
general).
Magtipon. Tumipon^ to join (one).
Magkatipon, to meet or assemble by
chance (as a street crowd). Ex.:
Nagkatipon ang mangd tduo sa bd-
hay ko ( Some people have happened
to meet in my house). Ang kati-
punan^ the assembly. Also the
popular name of the well-known
revolutionary society, the K. K. K.
Ex.: Ang pinagkakatipunan nang
mangd maruruncng (The meeting-
place of the learned people — i. e.,
of learned societies, etc). Houag
kang sumamaH hindt nababagay sa
isang dalagang pumaroon sa pinag-
kakatipunan nang maraming lalaki
(Do not accompany [him, her, or
them] because it is not proper for
a girl to go where there is a meet-
ing of many men).
Other verbs of this nature, all of which have been mentioned before, are
maghiwalayy to separate mutually; magpisany to associate; maghitdy to see
each other; magsamaj to accompany each other; magtalo, to argue; and
magusapj to converse; to litigate.
VI. The distinction between plurality, intensity^ etc., and mutuality,
reciprocity, etc., is sometimes made by a change of accent. Ex.:
To approach (one). Lumdpit. Magldpit, to draw near.
Maglapitf to approach mutually.
Maldpitf near. Maldpit stud sa dHn
(He IS a relative of mine).
To look at. Kumitd. MagkUdy to look at each
other. Magkitdy to look at many
things; or to look at intently.
VII. Mag verbalizes reciprocal actions of a nature admitting competition
or rivalry, provided that no special emphasis is placed upon the conten-
tion. Ex. :
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
185
To become reconciled (two).
To stir, mixing at same time; to shake.
Maghall (also to speak in a friendly
way). J/o^^atoi, to become recon-
ciled (many).
Humald, Ang haloing what shaken;
stirred. Maghald^ to mix two (or
more ) thines together. Ang ihaldf
what mixed. Ang hdhan, the mix-
ing place, etc. Ang hincUdj what
shaken (past). Ang ihincUdf wh&t
mixed (past).
VIII. Voluntary reciprocal actions of certain classes are also conjugated
with mag prefixed to the root and an (han) (nan) sufl&xed. Ex. :
To mock; jeer at.
To suffer; to endure.
To kick.
To curse.
To help; to aid (another).
Magbird, Maabiroan^ to mock each
other. MaHpaghiroan^ to mock
greatlj'^; to jeer at another viciously.
Birohirdy mapagbird^ palabird^ all
stand for degrees of being a jester,
etc. Maapalabirdj to jest with a
good deal. Tduong Mrdj an incon-
siderate person.
Dumalkd. MagdalUaan, to suffer for
each other, or mutually. Magpa-
kackUidalitdf to suffer intensely.
Mapa^dalitdf sufferer. Kadalitaanj
sunenng. Dt madalitd, intoler-
able; insufferable.
Sumlkad. Magsikad, to kick much.
Magsikaran, to kick each other.
Manlkady to kick habitually. Also
magmmikadf to work with rapidity.
Synonyms for kicking: Tuma-
dyakj magtadtjaky magtadyakany
tumindakf magtindaky magtinda-
kan.
Sumumpd. Ang sumpainy who or
what cursed. Ang isumpdy the
reason or cause of cursing. Mag-
gumpdy to curse much; also many
at same time. Ang pagsumpainy
who or what cursed thus. Ang
ipagmmpdy the cause or reason for
cursing thus. Magsumpaany to
curse each other. Manumpd, to
curse habitually; also to take an
oath. Ang palaanmpdy the habit-
ual curser; also the witness. Ang
panunumpdy habitual cursing, or
the oath taken. Ang panumpaany
the person administering the oath ;
also the place. Ang xpanumpdy
the testimony given; also what
sworn habitually.
Tumulong. Magtulongy to help
another much. Maglulongany to
help each other. Manulongy to
help another often. Manulongan;
magpanulongany to help each other
much or often. Ang katulongy the
aid; assistant; helper.
Digitized by
Google
186 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Touse insulting or indecent language; Maatungayao. Magtungayauan^ to
to say such words. abuse each other thus. Manung-
ayaOf to abuse or insult thus con-
tinually or habitually. Mapag-
tungayaoy abuser; insulter.
Among other verbs of this description may be cited magkagaJtan, to bite
each other; magibigan^ to like each other; viagpaloan^ to cudcel each
other; mag»intahan, to love each other; magmnoran, to follow each other;
and magiauanan^ to laugh at each other. All of these have been mentioned
before.
IX. In the use of fna^ to verbalize actions admitting reciprocity, care is
necessary in noting their nature and the intent and purpose for which the
actions may be executed, as there are local differences in this r^pect.
Reciprocal verbs require an object which returns the action. (A) Thus,
mag prefixed and an suffixed with a root which admits competition
expresses rivalry. (B) If the action requires an object and rivalry is to
be expressed, the suffix an should be riepeated.
To jump. Lumokso. Magloksdj to jump much
or by many. Magloksohan, to jump
in competition. (This verb has
already been explained. )
To look. Tumingin. Magting'm^ to look at
\ much or by many. Magtinginan,
to look at each other. (Hereto-
fore explained. )
To push; to shove off (as a boat). Tumulak. Magiulak, to push hard
or by many. Magtulakan^ to push
against each other. Magttdakanan,
to push in rivalry or competition.
X. Mag and the reduplicated root form intensive reciprocal verbs which
can only be distinguished from diminutives, verbs of feigning, mockery,
imitation, etc., by the context. As usual, polysyllabic roots repeat the
first two syllables only. Ex. :
To embrace. Yumdkap. Magydkap, to embrace
each other; to tie up to a post.
MagyakapyakapaUy to embrace
each other warmly; also means
"to embrace a little, to pretend to
embrace, to imitate embracing,"
etc.
Other verbs already cited are magabviabutany to reach many things; to
pass many things from hand to hand, etc. ; maghaiidhatiran^ to send to each
other, etc., and ma{/tingintinginan, to look at each other closely; to pretend
to look, etc.
XL Nga may also be infixed with maa^ forming mangag, the particle thus
made imparting the idea of great plurality when prefixed to a root. Ex. :
To converse. Magusap. Mangaguaap^ to converse
(as a great crowd).
XII. Roots with mag may be used both with and without an object, the
meaning varying more or less in such cases. Ex. :
To divide into equal parts. Bumahdgi Magbahdgi kayd! Dis-
perse ! Magbahdgi kayd nitong aa-
lapi (divide this money).
XIII. Movement caused by an outside agency is expressed by mag. As
will be remembered, self-movement is expressed by urn (Par. XI, um).
HumangOy to pull out, take out, etc., is an exception to the rule. Ex.;
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
187
To fell trees; to blow trees down (as
the wind) .
To part from another; to go to a dis-
tance.
To rise (voluntarily, as a bird).
Maghual. A ng hualiny the tree felled .
Ang ibualf the person felling, or
wind. Angbualan, the plsLce. Ang
pamual, the instrument, i. e., ax.
Lumayd. Lumaydy to remain left far
away (by another). Magloyb^ to
part' (two); also to remove any-
thing to a distance. MalayOy dis-
tant; far.
Tumdas. Magidas, to raise ; to lift up.
MatdaSf high; tall; noted. KcUaa-
sariy heijrht. Kataastaasan, ex-
treme height.
Among other verbs of like nature, which have already been explained,
are magalis, to take away; magldpit^ to draw something near; magpandog^
to take or let anything down stairs or a ladder; magpanhik, to take any-
thing upstairs or up a ladder, etc.; magsilid^ to put anything in or into;
magtaydf to set up; and magtinfUg, to stand anythmg upright.
XIV. Bodily voluntary actions affecting one^s self only, or those per-
mitted to be done, are expressed with mag. Those actions of like nature
performed upon another take um (Par. XII, um). Ex. :
To whip one's self (as in penance). Magkampds. Humampdsy to whip
another. Magpahampds^ to allow
one's self to be whipped, etc. Pa-
Jiampds, to consent to be whipped.
Ex. : Houag kangpahampds sa sino-
man (don't let anyone whip you).
Other verbs following this rule are fully explained in Par. XII under
um,
XV. As has been noted mag expresses for the indefinite the idea of los-
ing control, as um expresses the idea of acquiring the same. What is lost
control of is expressed in the definite with i, combined with in for the
past and other tenses where necessary. For the aid of the memory it
ma^ be said that verbs of throwing away, throwing at, etc., sowing, scat-
tering, pouring out, mixing, placing, putting, giving, and selling follow
this rule. Ex.:
To throw away.
To throw or dash down.
To throw at (as with a rock).
To throw at; to pelt.
To throw up (much).
To scatter nee seed.
To scatter in the air; to emit
To scatter seed.
To transplant.
Magtapon. (Already explained.)
Maghulog. (Already explained. )
Magpukol. Angpuklin, what thrown
at, or stoned. Ang ipukoly what
thrown.
Maghagis. Ex.: Naghagis akd nang
batd (I threw a stone).
Magsukd. Sumuka^ to throw up.
Ma^hasik. Manhasik, to sow much
rice thus or by many working to-
gether.
Magmmbulat. Ang isamhulat^ what
scattered, as grain, etc. Sumam-
bulatf to scatter, disperse, as. a
crowd of its own volition. Ma-
nambulatj to scatter much, either
by inside or outside agencv.
Magsdbog. ( A.lready explained. )
Syn. , magwdlat. JHfagkdlaty&lTesLdy
set forth ; means to spread, prop-
agate.
Magpunld. Magtanim^ to plant, to
set out (already explained).
Digitized by
Google
188
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
To scatter.
To break up; scatter (as parts of a
house torn down).
To pour out.
To pour out; shake out (not liquids).
To saturate with water.
To mix.
To stew; to boil meal, etc.
To put wood on the fire.
To place.
To put in the sun.
To place in layers, etc.
To give.
To present with; to make a gift.
To grant; to give.
To give; primarily, to hand to an-
other by reaching out the arm.
To sell.
To sell goods.
To trade on a small scale; to sell at
retail.
To sell at cost.
Magbulagsak.
Magwasak,
(Already explained. )
Magbobd. Ang bobdn, what poured
into. Ang ibobdy what poured
out. Syn., magbuhos (already ex-
iaghohd. Ang ihoh6j what poured
or shaken out, as grain, etc.
Magbisakf var. magbaysak.
Maghald. (Already explained.)
Syns., magSahog; maglahok. Lu-
mahoky to join.
Maglugao. Ang ilugao, the material.
Ang limugaOf the mush; stew.
Ang lugauan, the stewpan, etc.
Maggdtongy also to stir up the fire.
Magpagdtong, to ask that the fire
be stirred up. Makigdtong, to ask
for a few coals to start a fire. Ang
igdtongy the poker, etc. Ang
gatonginj what burned. Ang ga-
tongauy the place.
Maglagay. (Already explained.)
(Already explained.)
(Already explained. )
(Already explained).)
(Already explained.)
Ang ipagkaldoby the
Magbilad
Magpdfong.
Magbigay.
Magbiyaya.
Magkaldob.
grant.
Maggduad,
Gumduady to st retch out
the arm in order to reach some-
thing, ^n^ ^auarm, whatreached.
Angigduad, what given or handed
over. Anq iginduady what was or
has been given, etc.
MagbUL (Already explained.)
Maglakb, Maglakd, to peddle from
town to town. Ang Uakdy what
sold. Ang ilakdy what peddled
from place to place.
Magutay, (Already explained.)
Magdmot.
at cost.
Ang ipagdmoty what sold
Verbs of "permitting, sending, restoring," etc., also (pllow the mag and i
conjugation. Ex. :
To permit.
To send; to remit.
To restore.
Magiuloi. Ang Uuloty what permitted.
Maghatid. (Already explained.)
Magsaoll. (Already explained.)
XVI. Being of like nature, verbs of "speaking, relating, telling," etc.,
are conjugated by mag in the indefinite and i in the definite. A few, how-
ever, have um with i for the object. Ex. :
To tell; narrate; report. Magsaliid. (Definites, already ex-
plained. )
To report; to announce; to tell the MagbalUd. Ang ipinagbaliidy the
news. news announced or reported; also
the cause or means (past tense).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
189
To converae (two).
To converse (two or more).
To speak; pronounce.
To explain.
To speak in a low tone; also to mut-
ter; grumble; talk about another
in al^nce, etc.
To ask; to inquire.
Ang pinagbalitaan^ the person to
whom told, etc. (past tense).
Mabimalitdf to ask for news.
Magsabi, To talk ( one ) , mmabi. To
talk much, magsabi, (This verb
has already been explained. )
Magdsap. (Already explained. )
Mangiisapy to talk. Ex.: Maka-
pangusap hat (Can you talk?)
Hindi ka makapangusap? (Can't
you talk?)
Magwikd. Hindi ko mawikd, (I can
not pronounce it).
Magscdayany. f Already explained.)
Another wora is magsaysayy which
with um has also the meaning of
to arrange, as the hair of another,
and with mag to arrange some-
thing for one s self, as the hair,
etc. Ex. with ma.: Hindi ko ma-
say say (I can not explain it).
Magbulong. Ex.: May ibubulong ak6
sa iyd (1 have samething for your
ear only).
Twmanong. Magianong, to ask about,
or conceminj^. Ang tammain, the
person questioned. Ex.: Sinoang
tinanong mof (Whom did you ask,
or of whom did you inquire?)
A ng itanongy what asked. And ang
itinanong mo (what did you in-
quire).
Magands. Ex.: lands mo (tell it
gently).
Mags^imbong, Mapagsumbong^ t&tr
tier.
Magbald. Ang ibald^ what said.
Mabala ka (say something). Ba-
babalin mo ang manga tauo nitd
(notify the people of this). It
should be noted that the definite
here takes an extra ba.
Magbdtial. Ang ibdtuil^ what forbid-
den. Ang baualan^ the person to
whom something may be forbid-
den. Ang pagbabdualy the act
of forbidding (present tense).
Buiigang bdual, forbidden fruit.
XVII. Maa prefixed to roots signifying nations, races, conditions, etc.,
means to behave to some degree as the root signifies, but if a complete
assimilation is to be implied, the particle maki {paki) is used. Ex.:
To be somewhat Americanized. Magamericano. Ex. : Nagaamericano
siyd nang damit (he [she] is quite
Americanized in dress).
Magcasiila. Nagcacastila sild nang
asal (they are quite Spanish in
custom).
XVIII. (a) Mag^ with natural objects, signifies to produce them; (b)
with artificial objects, to make them; (c) with articles of barter, to trade
To speak gently.
To tattle.
To say something; accuse, denounce,
notify.
To forbid.
To be quite Hispanicized; to be like
a Spaniard in some ways.
Digitized by
Google
190
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
or sell them; (d) with edible thinffs, etc., to eat them; (e) with property,
to possesss it; (/) with names of relatives, to know how to act toward them;
and (g) with the possessive pronouns, to have:
Ex. (a):
To put forth leaves (as a tree, etc.). Magdahon, Also means to put the
food on leaves, as when out of
doors. Ang tagapagdahon^ the
cook. Ang dakonan, the eating
place thus.
Magbdhay. (Already explained.)
Magaabdn, ( Already explained ) .
Magbiads, (Already explained. )
Magpalay. Ex.: Magpalay ha nang
pulot (trade palay for some honey ).
Magbagoon.
Magbunga, Ex.: Nagbubunga giyd
(she is selling fruit).
Magisdd. Ex.: Nagiisdd gild (they
are selling fish). Umudd, to have
fish once more in a river or creek,
etc. Ungmiiadd ngaydn sa Hog
(there are fish now in the river).
Magitlog, Ex. : NagiiUog siyd (she is
selling eggs).
Magsdging. (Already explained).
MagsiculcUe (from Mex.-Sp., choco-
late; from Nahua ( A ztec ) , chocolaU,
chocOj cacao; and IcUly water).
Magtabaco (from Sp. and originally
a West Indian word).
Magari. Maari, landowner. Aria-
riaUf small farm; also household
furniture.
Magsarili.
Magamd, Ex.: Si Jvan ay maalam
magamd (Juan knows how to treat
a father [i. e., how to be a good
son ] ) . Magamd also means father
and child.
Maganak. Ex. : Si Jimn ay marunong
maganak (Juan knows how to treat
a child [i. e., how to be a good
parent] ). Also child and parent.
Magiyd.
Magkanild.
Magakin.
Ex. {by
To build a house.
To make soap.
Ex. (c):
To sell or trade rice.
To sell or trade unhulled rice.
Ex. (d):
To sell or eat pickled fish.
To eat fruit or to sell it.
To eat or sell fish.
To eat or sell eggs.
To eat bananas or to sell them.
To drink chocolate.
To use tobacco.
Ex. (0:
To have property.
To have anvthing of one's own.
Ex.(/):'
To know how to treat a father.
To know how to treat a child, i. e.,
how to be a good parent.
Ex. (g):
To have as yours.
To have as theirs.
To have as mine.
XIX. Words signifying articles of wearing apparel may be verbalized
with mag to express the wearing of the same. Ex. :
Mirror; (2) spectacles; glasses. Salamin, 3fa^«a^min, to look in the
mirror; ( 2 ) to wear glasses or spec-
tacles. Ang salaminan, what seen
in the mirror.
Trousers. Salawal. Magsalawal, to wear trou-
sers.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANODAGE.
191
Hat. Sambalilo (from Span, sombrero).
Magsavibaiilo, to wear a hat (occa-
sionally) . ManambalUOf to wear a
hat hahitually.
Shoe, sandal. Sapln, Magsapin^ to wear shoes;
also to line.
Apron. Tapis, MagtapiSf to put on or wear
an apron.
XX. Mag generally governs all Spanish, English, and other foreign words
not incorporated into the language. Ex. :
To play baseball.
To gamble.
Magbesbol. Ex.: Nagbebesbol ana
mangd batd (the boys [children]
are playing baseball. )
Maghugal ( from Span, jugar ) . Sugal
is the usual term. Lard is the na-
tive word and means, like the
Spanish , either to play or to gam ble.
XXI. Roots denoting officials may take mag to express the discharge of
duties pertaining to the office named. Ex. :
To be governor.
To be mayor (presidente).
To be a councilman.
To be secretary.
To be treasurer.
To be prosecuting attorney.
Maggobern ador.
Magpresidente.
Magconsejal.
Magsecretario.
Magtesorero.
Magfiscal.
XXII. Mag J prefixed to abstracts beginning with ka and ending in av,
signifies to do w^hat is expressed by the abstract. Such words are usecl
only in the infinitive, and should be clearly distinguished from those roots
Srefixed by the particle magka, which lack the suffixed an with the in-
efinite infinitive. Ex. :
Magbanalan (from kabanalanj virtue,
justice).
Magkatuiran (from kaiuirany right,
justice ) . Ex . : Hatolan mo sild nang
katuiran (Advise them what is
right).
Magkalinisan (from kalinisan, cleanli-
ness).
Magkahalayan (from kahatayaUy ob-
scenity).
XXIII. With adjectives formed by prefixing ma to the root, mag signi-
fies to assume or boast of what is expressed by the adjective, if the mean-
ing permits such assumption or boasting. In some cases mag means to
regard as signified by the adjective. Ex. :
To do deeds of virtue or justice.
To do right.
To act chastely or in a cleanly man-
ner.
To behave obscenely.
To boast of good judgment.
To boast of knowledge.
To boast of beauty.
Magmabait, Ex.: Nagmamabait si
Juan (Juan boasts of his good
judgment [or prudence]). Ma-
baity judicious, jrudent.
Magmariinong. Ex. : Nagmamaru-
nong si Andrh (Andres boasts of
his knowledge ) . Marunong, wise,
learned (from ddnong). Karuno-
ngan, wisdom, knowledge.
Magmarikit. Ex.: Nagmamarikit si
Biangoy (Maria boasts of her
beauty). Marikity pretty (from
dikit). Dumikity to grow pretty.
Magdikity to beautify.
Digitized by
Google
192
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To boast of elegance, beauty.
To boast of bravery; to swagger.
Magmaganda. Ex. : Nagmamctgandd
»i LoUiigj Dolores (Lola) boasts
of her elegance; beauty. Ma-
ganddy elegant, beautiful. Kagan-
daharif elegance, beauty.
Ma^matapang. Ex. : Nagmatdpang
81 Faustino (Faustino boasted of
his bravery; or Faustino swag-
• gered). Mat&pang, brave. Kaia-
pangauy bravery.
XXIV. If an action does not admit of boasting, Tno^ used with a ma
adjei'tive denotes becoming, growing, etc., what maj^ be signified by the
adjective. The definite particle in is generally suffixed to the roots in
these cases. Ex.:
To become forgetful. Magmalimotin. Lumimoty to try to
forget. Makalimotf to forget Ma-
limotf forgetful. Ang nalimotan^
w hat forgotten. MalUimotiriy a for-
getful person. Kalimotariy forget-
lulness.
Magmamktin. Ex.: Niigmamamktin
^^d (He is^rowing infirm). May
sakity to be ill. MoBosaktiny an in-
firm, sickly person. SumakUy to
feel pain anywhere. Ang sakitany
theseatofpain. (See Par. XXVI).
XXV. Verbs with mag are made diminutives by repeating a bisyllabic
root or the first two of a longer one, and suffixing any han, or nany as
required. Ex. :
To grow infirm.
To write a little; to scribble.
To cry a little; to snivel.
To nibble.
Magdulaisulaian (from Mat.). (Al-
ready used).
Magiyakiyakan (from iyak). Ex.:
Nagiiyakiyakan iyang hdUmg iydn,
that child is sniveling.
Magkainkainan, (Alrewady used.)
XXVI. The same form as the above also signifies feigning, imitation,
mockery, plaving at, etc. Both these and those mentioned in Par. XXV
can only be distinguished by the context from intensive reciprocal verbs
formed in the same way. (See Par. X).
To affect virtue, i. e., to play the
hypocrite.
To play at building houses (as chil-
dren).
To play at biting (as dogs).
To malinger; feign illness.
To tempt a little or to pretend to
tempt.
To sham insanity.
To feign deafness.
Magbanalbanalan ( from bancU ) . Ex . :
Nagbabanalbanalan siyd ( He is a
hypocrite).
Magbahaybahayan (from bdhay).
(Already used.)
Magkagatkagatan ( from kagat). ( Al-
ready used.)
Magsakiisakitan (from sakit). Ex.:
Nagsasakitsakitan ka (you are ma-
lingering).
Magtuksoiuksohan (from tuksd),
(Used before.)
MagululiUnlan (from lilul). Umdlvl,
to drive another crazy. Maululy to
become insane. Arig ikauhUy the
cause of insanity. Kaululany in-
sanity.
Magbingibinqihan ( from bingi ) . Ex . :
Houag kang magbingibingihan
(Don't try to sham deafness).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE,
193
To force, oblige, compel.
To exert one's self; to work effi-
ciently.
XXVII. Some um verbs admit prefixed magj the combination denoting
the action to be executed with earnestness, endeavor, enterprise, etc.
(h) Some roots with maka also take the prefix magy with the same signifi-
cation. The infinitive form of the root with um or maka is always retained.
Ex. (a):
To make haste. Magdumali (from dumalt^ to do
quickly). Madali, quickly, Mag-
madaltf to do something quickly.
(Idiom.) Magdumaling drao, a
short while.
MagpilU. In Manila, pumllU. Mag-
pumUitf to endeavor.
Magsdhi. Sumdbity to oblige another
to work; to use force toward an-
other. Magsumdkity to exert
greatly for the carrying out of an
obiect. Ex. : Ang tauong nagsxisu-
makU matuiu nang mabubuting
kaasataUf ay igagdlang nang lahat
(the man who exerts himself
greatly to learn good manners will
be respected by everyone). (Su-
mdkit regarded as a new root. )
Magmmunod. (Already explained. )
Magmakaaud. (Already used.) See
and,
Magmakahiyd (from mokahiyd, to
make ashamed). Ex.: BdUt mo
ipinagmamakahiyd ang mangdma-
gulangf (What is the reason you
cause so much shame to your
parents?) Walang hiydj without
shame, shameless. (See Par. VI,
under ma. )
Magmakaamoamb (from amxi^ idea of
placating). Ex.: Nagmamakaa-
moamb ang tauong it6 sa inyb (This
man is supplicating you). Ambia
generally reduplicated, and it will
be seen that makaamoamb is re-
garded as a new root, the ma of
maka being reduplicated for the
present tense.
XXVIII. Mag also forms nouns indicating pi urality , totality, and agency,
which have been used many times heretofore. The article is usually pre-
fixed to the compound word. Mag is the antithesis (or opposite in mean-
ing) of ka, which limits the idea to unity.
XXIX. Mag prefixed to noun roots which are generally used with the
dual sense denotes such duality without the use of mangd or other particles,
which rather indicate plurality. Ex. :
To follow closely, etc.
To be able to move to compassion. (6)
To be able to shame greatly. (6)
To be able to placate another; to
supplicate. (6)
The married couple, the husband
and wife.
The brothers-in-law (two).
The two enemies.
The parents; ancestors.
6855—06 13
Ang magasdua. Magasdua, to marry.
(See also Par. XV, under man.)
Ang magbaydo.
Ang magdway. Magdway^ to quarrel
with each other.
Ang magulang, from gulang. Kagu-
langanj ancestry, descent. Gumu-
langj to grow old.
Digitized by
Google
194 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The two sisterB-in-law. Ang maghlpag.
The betrothed couple; the sweet- Ang magibigan. Magibigarij to like
hearts. each other. ( See next para^^ph. )
XXX. A root capable of expressing plurality is strictly limited to the
dual sense by the insertion of ka between mag and the root. Ex. :
The two friends. Ang magkaibigan.
The two companions. Ang magkasama,
XXXI. If plurality is to be indicated with words sometimes used in the
dual sense, ka is reduplicated. Ex. :
The friends (several). Ang magkakaibigan.
The companions (several). Ang magkakasama.
XXXII. Correlative nouns are expressed with mag prefixed to the root
of the principal word. (See also Par. XVIII.) Ex.:
Father and child. Magamd.
Mother and child. Magind.
Father (or mother) -in-law and son Magbiandn,
(or daughter) -in-law.
Master and man. Magpanginoon.
XXXIII. If the second correlative is expressed, especially by a proper
noun, jointly with the first, the particle is prefixed to the principal, the
subordinate taking the genitive case. Ex. :
John and his father. Magamd ni Juan.
Jos6 and his father-in-law. Magbiandn ni JosS,
Lola and her mother. Magind ni Loleng.
XXXIV. Mag denotes totality with some roots of time. Ex. :
The whole night; al] night. Magdamag. Ex. : Ma^damag akong
natulog ( I slept all mght ). Gabi is
the usual word for night.
The whole day; all day. Maghapon. Hapon alone means the
tune from noon until dark.
XXXV. Mag prefixed to roots conjugated with um and mag forms verbal
nouns signifying the agent. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated
and the article generally used. Ex. :
The thief. Ang magnandkao. (Already used. )
The Jaborer. Ang magsasaka. Magsaka^ to work
in the fields.
XXXVI. Mag retains joa^ with the definite in certain cases, but with
these exceptions, which have been pointed out from time to time, the
definite of m<ig roots follows the same rule as the definite of um. (See Par.
II, underpay.)
THE DEFINITE PARTICLE **PAG.''
I. As true auxiliary verbs are not found in Tagalog, the participle as-
sumes as many forms as there are tenses, the imperative excepted. By
prefixing the article of common nouns, ang, "the,** or a demonstrative
pronoun to the proper tense of a verb a particle is formed which may be
translated in several ways, even by a clause in English.
Pag and pagka are commonly used in T^aloe where the idea would be
expressed in English by the indefinite particle, out the best way to obtain
a clear understanding of the variations to which Tagalog verbal nouns may
be subjected is to make a close study of the examples following or referred
to. Ex.:
To die. Mamatay. Ang pa^/kamatay^ the act
of dying.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 195
To fall. MaMlog, Ang pagkcMlogf the act
of falling.
To eat. Kumain, Ang pagkaiuy the act of
eating.
II. Pag (definite) corresponds to maq (definite) in certain cases. As a
rule verbs with mag have the same definites as wm, except as noted. When
pag is prefixed, in is inserted for the present and past tenses, forming
pinag, Pag only is prefixed for the imperative and future tenses, in being
suffixed at the same time. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated
for the present and future tenses. (See the tables. )
III. Pag sometimes expresses place in combination with suffixed an^
where an alone is used to express the person who mav be the .object of the
action. ^See hanapan and paghanapan. Par. V, the definite.)
(h) This rule also applies where the object takes an instead of in.
To collect; to dun. Sumingil. Ang singilaiij the unpaid
debt. A ngpagsingilan, the place of
asking for a debt. Maningil, to
collect or dun as an occupation or
habitually.
IV. The particle pag is also used with the definite when place is directly
expressed in the sentence, but not when implied or metaphorically (fig-
uratively ) . This use of pag^ however, is only with those verbal roots which
admit an for the person or object of the action of the verb, and with other
verbal roots pag is not used in this sense, even if place be expressed. Ex. :
To bury; inter. Maabadn. Ang poghaonan^ the buri-
al place. Ex. : It6 ang pinagbaonan
nang sundalo (This was the burial
place of the soldier).
To endure hardships. Maahirap. Ang paghirapan, thehajcd-
ships. Ex. : Ang bay ang pinaghi-
rapan nild (The town in which
they endured the hardships).
To place. Maglagay. Ex. : Lagydn mo nang
tdbig itong bangd (Put some water
in this vase). WaM akong pagla-
lagydn nUona salamin (There will
be no place for me to put this mir-
ror).
To embark or travel. Sumakay. Ang sakaydn or sasakydn^
boat or vessel of any kind. Ex. :
116* y ang bangkang pinagsasakydn
nang marami (This is the canoe in
which many have embarked).
(6) See also map^iWori^, ** to assemble,'* and ma^y^^, '^toeiect, set up."
V. Pag is also combined with i definite, forming ipag^ ipinag, as a pre-
fix, when the person for whom an act is performed is mentioned. (See
Par. VIII, the definite.)
VI. Vi henever the sentence expresses plurality of acts or agents, or of
feigning or reciprocal actions, pag (and ipag when required) must be used
with the definite. The article ang being generally used, gives the com-
pound the idea of a verbal noun in the majority of cases. For examples
see Par. IX under the definite.
VII. Pag is retained with the definite of the mag form when roots
which differ in meaning with um and 7nag are used. See Par. X, the defi-
nite for examples.
VIII. The participle is formed from um verbs or roots by prefixing oapr
to the root, the compound preceded by the article or its equivalent. The
Digitized by
Google
196 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
first syllable of the root is reduplicated for mag verbs or roots. See also
under ma, pa, and pan for other forms of the participle.
To teach. Umdral, Ang pagdraly the teach-
ing.
To study. Magaral. Ang pagaAral, the study-
ing.
To descend; to fasten upon. Humiiloff. Ang ^pagMlog, the de-
scending; fastening upon.
To throw or dash down. Maghdlog. Ang paghuMdog, the
dashing down or throwing down,
IX. Pa^ sometimes indicates the present tense. Ex.: Fagsabi ko sa
kaniyd (as soon as I told him).
X. There is occasionally a tone of menace in its use. Ex.: Paghindi
siyd pumarito*y hindi ko siyd bahayaran (if he does not come here, 1 shall
not pay him). **If" is generally understood, the idea being a future
condition.
XI. Fa{i, with verbal roots of some kinds, indicates action as transpiring.
Ex.:
Light; clearness. Liiudnap. Ang pagliwdnag, the grow-
ing light (of the day, etc.). Ang
liwdnaa nang drao, tne Ught of day
or of tne sun.
XII. For verbal changes, see tables:
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MA."
I. The indefinite verbalizing particle ma is used with roots which do
not require an object when verbalized, or with those verbs expressing
involuntary action. Ma changes to na for the past and present tenses.
The first syllable of the root is reduplicated for the present and future
tenses. Ma generally expresses a state or condition of oeing, but there is
also a possessive idea oi "to have," and hence many roots are made
adjectives when prefixed by this particle, as is already familiar to the
reader.
II. Such adjectives in ma must express intrinsic states or conditions,
and states or conditions which may or c&n be attained by the voluntary
effort of an agent can not be expressed with ma,
III. Actions which require an object when conjugated with other parti-
cles may be conjugated with ma if they take place unconsciously or by
chance on the part of the agent.
IV. The conjugation of roots with ma {na) has naka and maka of the
pluperfect and future perfect respectively replaced by na and ma, Na is
also repeated after the verb in both these tenses. Some roots beginning
with p soften it to m after ma. (See tables for examples. )
V. iVj'a added to ma forms the particles nangd and mangd used to
express plurality when prefixed to a verbal root. Mangd, as has been
seen, is the usual indication of plurality when used as a separate word
before nouns, ete. Ex. :
To be hungry. Magiitum. Ex. : Marami nga ang
nangagutum (many were hungry).
Marami nga ang nangagugvtum
(many are hungry). Marami nga
ang mangagumdum (many will be
hungry). The root is gutum, the
idea of being hungry.
VI. Ma is used to express actions of an involuntary nature or beyond the
control of the subject. A few anomalous words also take ma, Ex. :
To fall. Makdlog, Ang nahulogan, the per-
son or object on whom anything
Digitized by
Google
TAOALOO LAKOUAOE.
197
To fall on the face.
To stumble.
To slip; to slide (invol.); (adj.) slip-
pery; slimy.
To stick in the throat; to choke.
To lose one's way.
To go astray.
To loose; to miss; to lack.
To die.
To be proper or appropriate.
falls accidentally. Nah&Log giyd^
he fell. Ang kahuhgan, the place
of falling. Ang kahtdogdn, the
meaning (range of expression).
Ang Hnahuloaany the place where
something fell or has mllen. Ang
Hnahuhuloganf the place where
something is falling. Ang kahuhur
loqan^ the place where something
will fall. (See index for kiLUog with
other particles. )
Madapd, ( Alr(Mwly used. )
Maiisod, £x.: Naiisod aiydHnadapd
(he stumbled and fell on his face).
Saan ncUisod siyd^f (Where did
he stumble?) lyang batong iydn
ang tinatisuran niyd (that stone
was where he stumbled, or over
which he stumbled.
MadtUds; martUds, Ex.: Pal^ikarin
mo niydng marahan makd martUda
(tell him to go slowly lest he slip).
Mahirin, Ex. : Nahinnan siyd nang
tiniky (she [he] was chok^ by a
fish bone).
Maligdo. Ang kaligaoan, the place
of being lost.
Mcdihis. Lumihis^ to be away pur-
posely. Pcdihis daan, to go out of
the road for anv reason.
Mawald. Nawalan ak6 nang lakdail
lost [or lacked] the strength).
NawMn siyd nang loob (he lost
heart [or the spirit]). Magtuald,
to get rid of; to flee; to put out of
sight; to conceal anything.
Mamatay. Ang pagkamaiayt the act
of dying. Ang mamaJtaydn^ the
mourner ; the bereaved. (See Par.
XII, in.)
Mabdpay. ( See index for examples. )
This verb is rather anomalous.
VII. (a) Uncontrollable states are generally conjugated with ma. These
forms are also adjectives in the majority of cases. (6) Acts which are
more or less controllable take the particle most suitable to express the
degree. If uncontrollable, ma is used. Ex. :
To be angry.
To be cold; chilly.
To be terrified.
To be afraid.
To be astonished..
To be hungry.
MagdlU. (See index.)
Maoindo. Also adj. Maginauin^ a
chilly, cold person.
Maaalangtang. Ang ikagaiangtangt
the cause of being terrified.
Matdkot. Ex.: Natatdkot kaf (Are
you afraid?) Maialakotiny a faint-
hearted person. (See index. )
Magdlat. Ex.: Nagdlat siydf (Was
he astonished?)
Magdtum, Magugutumin, a very
hungry or starved person,
index.)
Digitized by
Google
198
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To be ashamed. Mahiyd. Mahihiyirij a bashful per-
son. (See Par. XV, ma,) For
hiyd with other particles, see index.
Malugod. Lumugod^ to please; to
recreate. KcUugoranj fnend; com-
panion in recreation.
Malumbay, Ex.: TUa nalvlumhay
kavdy you seem to be sad. (See
index. )
Matud, Ang kaiuaan^ the person or
object over whom or which one is
pleased or amused. (See index. )
McUulog. Ang ttUogan^ sleeping place.
McUulogiriy a great sleeper; also
mapagtulog. Tumiilogj to go to
sleep; to sleep (little used). Mag-
txdogy to sleep a great deal. (See
index. )
Mauhao. (Already used.)
McUangis; manangU. ( Al ready used . )
Maiaua, Tamaua, to laugh. Maa-
tauttf to laugh (two or three).
Mangagtaua^ to laugh (many).
Magtaudf to laugh much. Maka-
taua or magpataua, to cause to
laugh. Malauanirif a laughing,
smiling person.
VIII. Unconscious or uncontrollable states of the mind are expressed
with ma. Conscious or controllable states are expressed with urn or mag.
Ex.:
To forget. Malimot. (Already used.)
To forget to do. Maliaan. Lumimn, to omit to do (on
purpose).
IX. (a) Ma {na) is used to express accidental or internal acts of a de-
structive nature, or when reference is made to an actual state of destruc-
tion. Deliberate acts of destruction take um or mag.
To be pleased.
To be sad.
To be glad; amused.
To be asleep.
To be thirsty.
To cry; to weep (uncontrollably).
To giggle; to laugh uncontrollably.
To break up; to split up.
To break up (from internal causes
or accidentally).
To spoil; to become putrid.
To break (int. or ace).
To part; to break in two.
MahaJX. Ex.: NabaH ang tungkod
(the cane broke). Nabalian siyd
nang pad (he dislocated his foot).
Magbali, to break up, to split, as
wood, cane, etc. Ex.: Baiiin mo
iyang tubd^ t ak6* y balian nang munJtt
(break up that piece of sugar cane
and break me off a little).
Mabdsag. Ex.: Nabdsag ang vaso
(the glass was broken), tfaabd'
sag, to shatter; break up, as glass,
crockery, etc. Naghdsag siyd nang
maraming vaso (he broke many
glasses [purposely]).
Mab%d;k. Ex.: Bulok na ang isdd
(the tish is spoiled now). (See
magpa. )
Malagot. Ex.: Malalagot itong «inii-
lid ( this thread will break) . Nala-
got angsinulid (the thread broke).
Maglagot, to break, as thread; to
tear up, as vegetables, etc.
Mapatid. ( A Iready used. )
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
199
To spoil; to be destroyed.
To burn up.
To dry out.
Masird. ( Already used. )
Mamnog. (Already explained.)
Matuyd. (Seeindek.)
(b) Na following the root with verbs of destruction gives the adjectival
idea with *' already" or **now." Other actual states are also expressed
with the root and na if the contex clearly indicates an actual stiate of being.
(See under bAsag, butok^ sirdf patay^ tapusy tuydf and yari for examples. )
X. With verbs expressing situation of posture ma {na) indicates the
actual state of being in such posture or position, or else the involuntary or
unconscious taking of such position. £x. :
Mahigd. ( Already used ; see index . )
Maluhod. (Already usied; see in-
dex.)
Matihayd. (Already used; see in-
dex.)
Matindig. (Already used; see in-
dex.)
Maupd, ( Already used ; see index. )
XI. Conditions or states reached by slow transition in most cases or a
return thereto are expressed by ma {na).
To be lying down; to be in bed.
To be on the knees; to kneel in-
voluntarily.
To be lying on the back.
To be on one's feet.
To be seated.
To be deaf.
To be stuttering.
To be insane; crazy.
Mabinpi, Ex. : Nahihingi siyd he is
deaf) . ( See u nder magin. )
Magartl. Ex. : Nagagaril siyd (he is
beginning to stutter again ) . Mag-
garilf to stutter; to stammer. Ga-
riliny stuttering; stammering.
Mavlul. Ex. : Naulul siyd (he went
crazy ). Nauulul siyd (he is crazy ).
Mauxdui siyd (he will go crazy).
Nagululululan siyd (he was sham-
ming insanity).
Malabd. Also adj. turbid; muddy;
bleared (eyes); thick (speech).
Ex.: Nalaboan siyd nang pagiisip
(his mind became clouded).
XII. The use of ma is sometimes governed by reason of the rationality
or irrationality of the agent. Ex. :
To lose the mind (lit., to become
turbid).
To be upright.
Malay6. { Already used ; see index. )
XIII. Maka {naka) is sometimes used in place of ma {na)j these parti-
cles having many analogies. (See maka^ Par. XIX.)
XIV. Other uses of ma have been explained under the adjective, q. v.
XV. Ma prefixed and in (/»>?, nin) suflSxed to roots signifying mental
emotions, passions, and involuntary actions form adjectival nouns, which
generally require to be expressed in English by an adjective and a noun.
A humane person.
An irascible person.
A loving person.
An affectionate person.
A loving person.
An obedient person.
A weeper; a weeping person.
A smiling person.
A sleepy person.
A.n affectionate person.
Maauain {troxn and). (See index.)
Ma^alitin (from gdlit^ wrath; ire).
Maibigin (from ibig). (See index. )
Mairogin (from irogy affection; ca-
ressing).
Masiniahin (from «iw/d, love).
Masunorin (from sunod).
Matangisin (from tangis),
Matauanin (from taua).
Matuhgin (from tulog).
Mawilihin (from wiliy affection).
Digitized by
Google
200
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
XVI. If the root admits of contraction, begins with ly or an intensive
degree is expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated:
Ex.:
A bashful person.
A feverish person.
A forgetful person.
A joyful person.
An infirm, sick person.
A faint-hearted person.
Mahihiin (from hiyd). (Root con-
tracts.)
Malalagnatin (from lagnatf fever).
(L. root.)
MalUimotin (from limotj forgetful-
ness). (L. root.)
Malulugdin (from lugod^ joy; pleas-
ure). (L. root.)
Masasaktin (from aakit). (Con-
tracted root. )
Matatakotin (from tdkol). (Intensive
degree.)
THE DEFINITE PARTICLES **MA" AND **KA."
I. From the fact that ma verbs do not generally require an object, there
is little use for some forms of the definite. Every action, however, may
have a reason, time, or place, and thus i definite and an definite are to be
found, ma being replaced by A;a as a rule, and always with i definite.
Ka an, as has been seen, forms abstracts and places, as well as standing
for persons and objects of the action. Ex. :
To be glad; amused.
To die.
To be afraid.
To stumble.
To be deaf.
To be blind.
To be poor.
To be ruined (as in business).
To be lame.
To faint away; to swoon.
To drop off; to drop something ac-
cidentally.
Mattid, Aug kaiuaarit the person or
object over which one is glad, etc.
Ang ikaiudf the cause of gladness
or amusement. Ex.: Katuaanmo
ang manga batd (amuse yourself
with the children). Kinattman
niyd ang mangd batd (she amused
herself with the children ) . Kina-
iviuaan nild ang mangd batd (they
are amusing themsdves with the
children). . Katuluaan ko ang
mangd bald (I will amuse myself
with the children).
Mamaiay. (See index.)
Matdkot. (See index.)
Matisod. (See index. )
MabinbL Ang ikabingij the cause of
deamess. Kabingihany deafness.
Mabulag. Ex.: Ncdmlaaansiydnang
gdlit (he was blinded by wrath).
Kabulagan^ blindness.
Madukhd. Ang ikadukM^ the cause
of poverty. Kadukhaan, poverty.
Dumukhdf to become poor. Ang
dukhainy the person becoming
poor thus. (See index. )
Malugi. Ang ikalugij the cause of
being ruined. Lumugiy to decline
(as from age or natural causes).
Mapilay. Ang ikapilayj the cause of
lameness. Kapilayan, lameness.
Mahild. Ex.: iVam/d«iT/d( she fainted
away). Nahihild siyd (she is faint-
ing away ). Ang kahiloany the place.
Mala^lag. Ang kalaglagany the place
of dropping. Ang tkalaglag, the
Digitized by
Google
TAQALOa LANGUAGE.
201
To be drowned.
To be tired out.
To be included; to be contained.
To be finished; also concluded and
extinguished.
cause. Maglaglag, to drop some-
thing purposely. Ang ilaglag^ what
dropped. Ang laglagan, the place
or the person to whom dropped.
Lumaglag, to drop down pur-
posely. Ang laglagin, the person
thus dropping down.
McUunod, Ang kalunoran, the drown-
ing place; hence the west, **the
drowning place of the sun."
Mapdgod. Ang ikapAgod, the cause.
Ex.: And ang ikinapapdgod mot
(Why are you tired out? [Lit.,
**What is the cause of your being
tired out?' * ] ) . 8y n . pakang. The
word 6god means great weakness,
and looks as if it were a variation.
MataklAo, Ang kasaklaiuin, the place
where contained. Ex. : Ang mangd
uto8 nang hokhd'y kinaaasaklauan
niton g liSrmw it6 (the orders [reg-
ulations] of the army are con-
tained in this book).
Mautds. Var. lutds. MagltUdSt to
finish or conclude anything. Mag-
kalutaslutdSf to finish completely.
Ang kahiiamny the place.
II. Ka is omitted with an when the person affected is meant, and not
the place or deliberate act. See mahirin, mamatay^ and mawald for
examples.
III. Pagka is generally used to form verl)al nouns for roots conjugated
by ma, although pag may be used with some roots and pagkaka is occasion-
ally found. Ex. : Ang pagkatulog or ang pagtulogy the act of sleeping.
(Seetti/o^r.)
THE INDEFINITE VBRBALIZINQ PARTICLE "mAN.**
I. This particle, known as the third to Spanish writers on Tagalo^, has
pan for the definite and is one of the most important of the modifjdng
verbalparticles. It admits m, i, and an with the definite.
II. The great attention paid by Tagaloc to euphony or smoothness in
sounds is well illustrated by the changes demanded of the initial letter of
a root when mxm {pan) is prefixed. Tnis grammatical peculiarity is found
most ixxWy developJed in western languages, in Irish ana Scottish Gaelic, in
which it is known as ** ellipsis.** English has this tendency to a slight
degree, as shown by a, an, according to a following vowel or consonant
sound.
III. When preceded by man the following changes take place in initial
latters of roots, the final n of the particle being either dropped or modified.
B and P to 3f.
K (and hard Cor Q) to ifg.
/S; r, and 2> ^generally) to N,
My Ny and 2?g cause final n to drop out.
Ay ly Oy t7 modify n to ng.
IV. Man has nan for the present and past tenses, the first syllable of the
root being reduplicated for the present and future tenses. There is a I and
a II pluperfect tense, the former adding na to the past tense and the
latter prefixing naka to the root. The future perfect nas also two forms,
the first form^ by adding na to the future tense, and the second by prefix-
ing maka to the root. The present participle (verbal infinitive) is formed
Digitized by
Google
202
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
by prefixing pan to the root, the first syllable of which is reduplicated.
The use of the definite particles in, t, and an follows the general rule.
To ridicule; mock; scoff; hoax; abuse,
etc.
To give much; to lavish.
To buy much.
To be nauseated or disgusted.
ManLibdk. Ana libaldn, what or
whom ridiculed, abused, etc. Ang
libakan; also ang mapaglihaky the
scoffer, hoaxer, mocker, etc. For
indef . with man see tables. Ex. :
B&kii ha nanlUibak sa kaibigan mof
(Why are you ridiculing your
friend?) Syns. Vr(yy; uyam, uyao,
and tiyao.
Mamiaay (from bigay). For definite
with i see index, also the tables.
Mamili ( from bUi) . For definite with
in see tables.
Mandiri, For definite with han see
tables.
V. Man is used to express plurality of acts rather than of persons with
those roots which denote the simple action with um or mag. With some
roots of colors man denotes intensity, and with some other roots indicates
continuousness. It is essential for these ideas that the meaning shall not
be changed by man from what it is with um or wo^.
Ex. (B roots):
To divide up among others.
To habituate; to accustom.
To pull up continually or continu-
ously.
Ex. (Droot):
To pray constantly.
Ex. (G roots):
To imitate much or habitually.
To mix habitually (as a druggist).
To clear off (as land).
Mamahagi (from bahagi), Ex. : And
kaya ang ipinamamaJuigi mof
( What are you dividing up?) Ang
ipinamamahagi ko'y nanalaman
nana mangd pinamama haginan ko
(What I am dividing up is known
to those for whom I am dividing).
Mamihaaa (from bihasa). Ex.:
Houag kang mamihdsang mamintas
sa mangd kapidbdhay mo (Do not
accustom yourself to complaining
about your neighbors).
Mamiinot (from bilnot). Bumunot, to
pull up. Magbunoty to pull up
much.
Manaldngin (from daldngin). See in-
dex.
Mangagad. Gumapady to imitate.
Maggagadf to imitate (many).
Mangamao. Ang pangamauin^ what
so mixed. Ang ipangamdo^ what
used to mix with thus. Ang pan-
gamaudn^ the place of habitual
mixing. Gumamdoy to mix. Ang
gamauiny what mixed. Ang ig-
amdoy what added or the instru-
ment used to mix with. Ang
gamaudn, the place; the mortar;
dish, etc. Maggamdo, to mix
much. Ang paggamauiny what
mixed much. Ang ipaggamdOj the
instrument thus. Ang paoga-
mauduy the place of much mixing.
Gumamas, Ang gamasin, what
cleared off. Ang gamasan, the
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
203
To reap; to cut rice.
To quarrel
loudly.
with; to reprimand
To cut down underbrush; to clear
off land; also to speak freely.
To thresh (by many).
Ex. (H roots):
To scout.
To sow much rice; or by many.
To wash one's face (habitually).
To predict habitually.
Ex. (I roots):
To like (many); also to flirt.
To avoid entirely.
Ex. (K roots):
To devour; to eat continually.
To take habituallv.
To cling to with nands and feet (as
a monkey does).
To nibble much; to bite with the
front teeth.
To tremble much or frequently with
cold or fear.
To break off (as flowers or fruit) as
an occupation.
Ex. (P roots):
To pluck or break off much; or by
many.
land cleared off. MaggamAs, to
clear off (by many). MangamaSj
to clear off much. Ang panga-
masaUf the land thus cleared.
Gumapas. Ang gapasin^ what reaped.
Ang gapasany the field. Ang gin-
apasanj the stubble left. Magga-
pdSf to cut or reap much. Man-
gapaa, to cut or reap (many).
Ang pangapasy the sickle. Ang
mangagapaSj the reaper, harvester
(person).
Gumaadi. Ang gasaan^ the person so
Quarreled with or reprimanded.
Maggasdy to quarrel with much, or
to reprimand much or many.
Mangasdiy to quarrel with or to
reprimand habitually.
Gumasak. Ang gaaakin, what clear-
ed, i. e., the underbrush. Ang
^aaakany the place. Ang gasakin
is also the person spoken to freely.
Mangasak, same actions as fore-
going by many.
Mangiik. (See index: ^iiifc.)
Manhdnap. (See index: Mnap.)
Manhadk, (See index: /i(mA;.)
Manhilamos, (See index: hilamos.)
Manhuld. Ana manhuhuldf the
prophet; soothsayer. HumulcLy to
predict; foretell. Ang hulain,
what foretold. Ana hulaxin, the
person to whom told.
Mangihig.
Mangilag.
(See ihig.)
(See Hag.)
Mangain. (See kain.)
Manguha, (SeeA^w/ia.)
Manguydpit (from kuydpit). Ang
panguyapitan^ what clung to, i. e. ,
tree, etc. Kumdydpity to grasp
thus. Ang ikuydpit, what with,
i. e., the hands, feet, etc. No old-
world monkeys have a tail which
can be used for grasping, the Phil-
ippine Islands species included.
Mangibit (from kibit), KumibiL to
nibble.
Manginyig (from kinyig). See index.
Mangitil (from kitil). Kumiiil, the
simple action. MagkUily to break
off thus much. Syn.: Pati; and
see also putol.
Mamitds (from pitas). See index.
Digitized by
Google
204
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To break off (by many); to ^ther
habitually (as flowers or fruit).
To whiten intensely.
To grow very pale.
To cut up (as cloth).
Ex. (S roots):
To disperse; also to scatter much in
the air.
To bite much (as a mosquito).
To destroy completely.
To curse habitually.
Ex. (T roots) :
To peck much («is a bird).
To tempt habitually.
Mamuti (from puti), PumiUi^ to
break off. Magputif to break off
much. MangagptUif to break off
(by many). Syn.: KitU; and see
putol. Ang putihin, what broken
off. An^ pagptuikarif the branch
from which much is broken off.
Mamutt (from putl). See index.
MamuUd (from putld). See adjec-
tive. Pumuttdt to grow pale.
FuUain^ a person who is always
pale; pallid. Maputld, a person
who may become pale or pallid.
Kaputlaarij pallor. Makaputld, to
cause pallor.
Mamutot ( already used. ) See index.
PdtoL
ManambulcU (from samhAlat), See
index.
Manigid, Ang slgdin, the person/
etc., bitten. Ang pagsigdany the
place. Sumigid, to bite (as one
mosquito). Mcmgidf to be bitten.
Ex.: Naninigid ang mangd lamok
(the mosquitoes are biting hard [in
plenty]).
Manird (from sird). See index.
Manumpd (from mmpd) . See index.
ManuM (from tulcd).
Manukad (from tuksd).
See index.
See index.
VI. With roots which admit of the idea of making a living by exercis-
ing the acts denoted by the roots, man expresses the idea of an occupation,
trade, or profession. Ex. :
To preach.
To care for.
To practice medicine.
To milk (as occupation).
Mangdral (from Aral). Ang mang-
angdraly the preacher, but ang
mangadralf the master or teacher
( of a doctrine, etc. ) . Ang ipangd-
ral, what preached. Ang %pi-
nangadral, what is being preached ;
the subject of the sermon. Ang
pinangangaraldny the persons being
preached to (the congregation) or
the pulpit. (See index for draL)
Mamahald ( from bahald) . This word
is from Sansk. hkara^ the root of
the English '*to bear," Lat. ferre.
Kay 6 hdhald^ p6 (you take care,
sir [i. e., pay what you like]).
Sino ang namamahald sa bdhayf
(Who is taking care of the house?)
Si Juan (Juan).
Mangamot ( from gamot) . See index.
Mangatas ( from gatas) . Ang nanga-
gataSj the milkman (or maid).
Gumatas, to milk (occasionally).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
205
To cook or do anything habitually.
To live by robbery.
To sew nipa (for a living) .
To collect bills (as an occupation).
To dive (as an occupation).
To write (as an occupation).
To spin (as an occupation).
Magawd. ( See index ; gawd, )
Manhull (from hrUi). See index.
Manduid {horn pduid). Ex.: And
ang ginagawd ninyd'diydnf (What
are you doing there?) KamVy na-
mamduid (we are stitching nipa
[thatch]).
Maningil Tfrom ftingil). See index.
Manisid (from sisid). See index.
Manulat (from aulal). See index.
Manulid (from aulid). Ang manu-
nulidf the spinner. Sinulidy thread ;
anything spun. Sumulidy to spin
(simple act).
Manahi (from tahi). See index.
Manguna (from una). See index.
To sew (as a tailor).
To go first; to guide.
VII. Some roots with man have the idea of running around doing the act
expressed by the verbalized root; going about in a certain manner, etc.
Ex.:
To advance, clinging to something.
To run around biting (as a vicious
dog).
To go about sadly and mournfully.
Mangdpit (from kdpU). This verb
would be used if bamboo rail, etc.,
was clung to crossing a bridge, etc.
Kumdpity to cling to; to support;
to hold up from falling.
Mangagat (from kagat). See index.
Mangulila (from ulila^ an orphan).
VIII. Many with roots denoting animals or birds, expresses their chase;
with roots meaning fish, etc., their seeking, and with other animal or
vegetable names, the gathering of what is denoted by the root. The idea
is generally that of an occupation or habitual engagement in such hunting,
fishing, gathering, etc. Ex.:
To gather the rattan
ging."
To hunt or catch birds.
called "b^- Mamdging. This is a species of ivy.
To catch fish ; to fish for a living.
To cut or gather wood.
To gather tortoise shell.
To gather nacre or **kapis**
shells used in windows).
(the
To gather rattans (oejuco).
To Sunt tortoises.
To gather '*pajos" (a kind
mango).
To hunt frogs.
of
To gather the rattan called **pala-
san."
To gather palm leaves.
Mangibon (from ibon). Ebon is
**egg** in Pampangan.
Mangisdd. (See index isdd.)
Mangdhoy (from kdhov). Kakako-
yany woodland. Gubat is ** forest;
timber, etc."
Mangala (from kala). MangangaUiy
tortoise-shell hunter. MagkaUiy to
sell tortoise shell.
Mangapis (from kapis). MagkapiSy
to sell nacre. Ang kapisiny the
nacre. Ang kapisany the place
used, i. e., the window.
Mangway (from way).
Mamagong (irom pagong) .
Mamahd. ifagpand, to deal in **pa-
jos."
Mamalakd (from palakd, frog; syn:
Kabkab).
Mamalasan. Kapalasanany place
where the palasan is found.
Mamalaspds (from palaspdSy "palm
leaf"). Magpalaspdsy to adorn
with palm leaves.
Digitized by
Google
206
TAGALOa LANGUAGE.
To fish for eels.
To hunt sea turtles.
To gather or hunt for honey.
To gather oysters.
To hunt deer.
Mamalds (from paldSf eel).
Mamawikan (from patuikan, sea tur-
tle).
Mamulot (from ptdot, honey). Man-
puloty to buy honey. Magpulot
(1) to make honey; (2) to deal in
honey. Ang pulotin, the honey
made. PinuUmn, what has been
made from honey (from pulotdn^
sweets made of honey). Pulotin
is also a term of endearment. Ex.
with an: Houag mo akong pvlotan
(Don't flatter (honey) me). Pulot-
gatdf honey and cocoanut milk.
Mamilabd (from talabd). Katalaba-
harif oyster bed.
Mangusa (from w«o, deer).
IX. Similarly any instrument, weapon, utensil, or animal which can be
so used is verbalizea with the idea of hunting, fishing for, or catching by
man. Ex. :
To hunt with dogs or hounds.
To hunt with or to use a gun.
To fish with a hook.
To fish with a small hook.
To fish or hunt with a light.
To use or hunt with a spear called
*'kal4wit.''
To fish with the hook.
To fish with a seine.
To fish with anything that may be
used to catch fish.
To seine with the large net called
'*pangtf.''
To seine with the net called ' * piikot. ' '
To fish with rod, line, and hook.
Manga^o (from owo, dog). See
index.
Mamaril (from barilf a shotgun).
Malay, badHl. Ang mamamarily
the hunter.
MaminuH (from binuit). See index.
Mamiwas^iTombiwas). This means
to use a rod and line. BumiwaSy
to lift the hook by the line. Mag-
biwa^y to do this much. Akd^y
mamimiwas (I am going fishing
with a rod and line).
Mangilao (from ilaOy a light). Ex.:
Manginqilao ka bagd f ( Are you
going Ashing with a light?) 06
(Yes). Aling bdkid ang pinang-
ingUmmn mof (In which field
are you going to fish with a light?)
lyang buhid iyang malayo sa manga
bdhay (In that field over there far
away from the houses). UmilaOy
to light up. MagilaOy to carry a
light. Ang ilauany the lamp or
place of light.
Mangaldwit.
Manlambang (from lambangy a
hook).
Manlambat. See index: lambaL
Mamalakaya (from palakaya). Pu-
malakayay to fish occasionally.
Mamangti.
Mamukoi. .
Mania (from miy a thorn or hook).
Magsiity to make anything out of
thorns or hooks; to make abbatis.
Syn., iinik, Tinik also means fish
bone.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
207
X. With roots denoting arms, tools, or instruments man indicates the
habitual use or wearing of the arms and the constant use of tools or instru-
ments. Ex. :
Mangiwa (from iwa). See index.
Manlilik (from lilik, sickle).
MamcUakol (from palakoly axe).
MagpcUakoly to have an axe.
ManandcUa (from sandaia, arm,
weapon). Magsandala^ to bear
arms. A7ig sandatahan^ armed
forces; levy en masse.
ManumpU (from sumpit).
Manundang (from sundanoy knife).
MagsunaanOf to carry a knife.
Mannhak. Magtabak, to wear a war
bolo. Tumabaky to cut off with a
war bolo.
XI. With roots denoting certain places man indicates the living in such
f)laces, earning the living from the products thereof, or traveling in such
ocality. Ex. :
To use a dagger.
To use a sicKle.
To use an axe.
To use arms.
To use a syringe.
To use a knife.
To use a **war bolo'* (tabak).
To live (general idea).
To dwell in a house.
To live in town.
To live in the mountains; to wander
there; to gain a living from the
products thereof.
To live in the open country.
To lead a seafaring life; to be a
deep-sea fisher.
To live in the timber; to lay the
timber waste; to wander in the
woods; to live by wood chopping,
etc.
To travel or live on the bank of a
river or the seacoast.
MamiLihay (from buhay). Idea is to
reside, etc. Magbuhayy to live.
Bumuhayy to give life to. Buhay y
alive; living.
Mamdhay (from bdhay). See in-
dex. Ex. : Saan kayd namamayanf
( Where do you live?) Ang bdhay
koypdy ditdsa bay ang ito (My house,
sir, is here in this town).
Mamayan ( from bay an ) . Kababayan,
fellow-townsman, also country-
man. MagbayaUy (1) to look for
a town site; (2) to found or build a
town; (3) to apportion by towns
and not by inhabitants. Bayan
also means space between earth
and sky, day (rare), and weather
(rare).
Mamundok (from bundok). This
word may also mean to travel in the
mountains. Taga bundoky moun-
taineer; sometimes used insult-
ingly, as ** hayseed,*' in English.
Mamukid (from bukidy *'field").
Mandgat ( from ddgaiy * * sea " ) . Man-
andgat, sailor or deep-sea fisher.
Also taga ragat; tauong dumdgat,
Magddgaty to travel by sea. Du-
mdgaty to flood the land.
Mangubat {from gubaty "timber; for-
est"). Ang ipangubatf what car-
ried in the timber; or the cause of
wandering, etc. Ang pangubatany
the place of working, devastating,
wandering, etc., in the forest.
Gumubaty to become a forest.
Gubatany timber land or forested
country.
Manlambay (from lambay). Mag-
lambayy to carry anything to coast
Digitized by
Google
208 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
or bonk. Lumamhay^ to go to or-
along the bank or coast (single
act).
XIJ . With roots denoting certain articles of wearing apparel man indi-
cates their habitual use or wearing. Ex. :
To wear a shirt habitually. Mamaro (from haro). See index.
See also sambalUOf hat; sapirif
shoe; and tapiSj apron.
XIII. With roots denoting vehicles, boats, or other means of artificial
locomotion, man signifies to travel by what is denoted by the root. Ex. :
To travel by canoe. Mamangkd. Ex. ; llang drao bang-
kain mula dito hangan Maynildf
( How many days by banka [canoe]
from here to Manila?) Maghapon
kayang bangkain (Perhaps all of
one day by banka).
To travel on horseback. Man£abayo (from cabayOf ** horse'* ).
To travel by * * quilez. * ' MangUes ( from kUes^ a vehicle named
from Guillermo Quilez, of Vigan,
Ilocos Sur, who suggested it to his
carriage maker, a native of Vigan ) .
XIV. Man also denotes self-supporting and slowly developing actions
from within such as the growth of flowers, fruit, etc. Many roots com-
mencing with 6, which would otherwise be conjugated with wm, take man
for euphonic reasons. (See uw, Par. VII.) Ex.:
To sprout; to put forth shoots (as Manlahong (from labong). Also
the bamboo). lumahong. Maglabong, to have
shoots.
To open (as a flower). Mamukadkad (from bukadkad). Vis-
ayan, bukad.
To bloom; to blossom (as a flower). Mamxdaklak (from bulaklaky flower).
Visayan, burak; also applied to
the ilangilang. Ex. : Namumvlak-
lak ang manga halaman ( the plants
are blooming).
To bear fruit. Mamunga (from bunga, fruit). Ex. :
Namumunga na ang mangd kdhoy
(the trees are already bearing
fruit).
To bear fruit; to be full of fruit. Mamusaksah (from busaksak). Ex. :
Namumusaksak itong punonalukban
(this lukban tree is full of fruit).
XV. Some roots have differing meanings with wm, mag^ and man. In
some cases the variation is great, but in others little or none. Man^ how-
ever, looks to the effect or result more than to the simple action, which is
expressed by urn or mag. The examples will best show these differences
and resemblances. Ex.:
Words differing in each case:
To teach. Umdral. Magdral, to study. Mangd-
ralf to preach. (See index: drcU;
also talo and aalamin. )
Words agreeing with urn (if used) and man; but differing with mag:
To intrude or steal in. Dumikit; maniJnt. MagdikUy to fas-
ten; to paste together.
To throw a lasso or rope. Sumild. ManUdj to lasso; to rope;
to ensnare. MagaUdf to make a
lasso or snare.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 209
Words agreeing with um and man, mag being little used:
To admire; to wonder at. GumiMds; mangUalds. Ex.: Aking
pinangigikdamn ang karikitan nang
manga oituin sa Idngit (I admire
[my admiration is] the beauty of
the stars in the sky).
To drag along; to arrest. HumilA; manhild, (See index: hUd.)
To shake (as a tree to get the fruit). Lumoglog; manloglog. (See also in-
dex for lihaky idea of ridiculing,
etc.)
Words differing with um and man, mag being little used:
To afflict. Dumaig (from daig). Manaig, to
overcome; to surpass; to vanquish.
To kill. Pumatay. Mamatay, to die. (See
index: ptjtay,)
XVI. Some few words which do not admit of frequency have the simple
idea with man. Others are generally used with the particle in a seemingly
arbitrary manner. Ex. :
To bear a child. Manganak
To die. Mamatay.
The following are arbitrary:
To allow light to pass (as glass or MaiTgan^mag. Maaninag, transpar-
anything transparent). ent (from anino^.
To feel nauseated. Mandlri (from diri).
To have; to possess. Jtfandoon (from c^oon). (See index).
To originate from; to come from; to Mangdling. Ang pinanpalingan, the
descend from; to arise. place or source of rising; origin;
etc. Ang gdling na drao, the sun-
rise. Gating is the idea of doing
good. (See index.)
To look at wrathfully. Manlidk. Ex. : NanlUisik ang maid
nang pool narilat (fixing the eyes
wide with anger).
To find fault with; to complain of. Mamintds (from pinlds). Ex. : Hindi
mo hagd alam na mafidlay ang pam-
iminlda sa ibdf (Don't you know
the dishonesty of complaining
about others?) Ang pintaMn; ang
pintasdn; ang mapamintda, the
critic; the fault-finder; complainer.
Ang pamintasdn. who or what found
fault with. Ang pagpintasdn, who
or what found much fault with.
(See also index: tilawa, to confide
in.)
XVII. Although pan, the definite corresponding to man, generallv has
a verbal meaning, tnere are several instances in which pan, prefixed to a
root, signifies an instrument, utensil, or article. These roots then admit,
although they do not always require, the euphonic changed, as have
already been explained in Par. III. Ex. :
The razor. Angpangdhit ( from mangdhit) . ( See
index: dhit.)
The auger. Ang pamutas (from bdtas). Maghu-
taa, to bore; to make a hole in.
The mop. Ang pangixskus (trom kuskus). Ku-
muskua, to mop up.
6855—05 14
Digitized by
Google
210
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The sickle.
The spade.
The brush, ruler, etc.
The pocket handkerchief, napkin,
towel, etc.
The hammer.
The pen, pencil, etc.
The string, cord, rope, etc.
Ang pangapas (from gapas). (See
index: gapas.)
Ang panhiikay {irotn hHkay). (See
index. )
Ang pangiihU (from guhit), GumA-
hitj to line, mark, or paint.
Ang pamdhid (irom pumdhidj to rub;
to clean).
Ang pamukpuk (from pumukpuk or
magpukpukf to strike).
Ang panulat (from manulcUj to write,
[iora livinj?] ). (See index: siilaL )
Ang pancdi (from tali), Magkdi^ to
tie, fasten, bind.
XVIII. With names of the days and nouns like **drao'' (day) pan
denotes something used daily or on the day named. Ex. :
Ang pang&raodrao,
cated.)
Ang panldnes.
(Noun redupli-
Something for daily use.
Something for use on Mondays.
XIX. In like manner, many with the reduplicated initial syllable of the
root, indicAtes the habitual agent with those roots capable of denoting
occupation, trade, or profession. It may also be used with some other
roots. In some cases the particles are repeated with occasional euphonic
changes. Ex. :
The following have a simple reduplication:
Barber.
Hunter (with gun).
Sailor.
Physician.
Reaper.
Weaver.
Tinsmith, plumber, etc.
Sawyer.
Writer; clerk.
Spinner.
Tailor; seamstress.
Winner; conqueror.
Rescuer; redeemer.
Tempter.
Manadhlt (from dhit), usually Mang-
angdhit in Manila.
Mamamaril (from baril).
Manandgat (from ddgai).
Mangagamot (from gamot).
Mangagapas (from gapas).
Manhahabi ( from habi ) . Humabi, to
weave.
Manhihinang ( from hinang ) . Humi-
nangy to solder.
Manlalagarl {from lagarl). (See in-
dex.)
Manundlat (from »dlat).
Manunulid (from sidid).
Mananaht (from taht).
Mananalo (from talo).
Manunubds (from tubds). TumubdSy
to rescue, to redeem (simple act).
Manunusksd (from iuksd).
In the following examples the root as conjugated with man has the ini-
tial syllable of the new word inserted between the ma and the ng of the
particle. Ex.:
Mangangdral (from mangdraly to
Preacher. preach ) .
Hunter with dogs or hounds. Mangangaso (from mangasOy to hunt
with dogs).
Fisherman. Mangingisdd (from mangisddy to fish
for a living).
XX. With weights, measures, and similar nouns, man prefixed signifies
**to each,'* or *' apiece,'' amounts as may be denoted by the noun. (See
under the numerals. )
XXI. With many roots man signifies a resemblance to what may be
denoted by the root, which is reduplicated. Ex. :
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 211
Hurricane; typhoon. Bogy 6. Ex.: Manbagydbagyd Uong
hanain (This wind seems like a
t)rphoon ) . Naglalayag siW y binor
^6 sUd sa ddgat (They were coast-
ing and were caught at sea by a
typhoon).
Anger. GMiL Ex.: Mang&LUgdlU yaong
panguri^fiAsap (That way of talk-
ing resembles anger).
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MAKA."
I. This particle (naka in the past and present) has two distinct mean-
ings, the first being that of cause and the second that of power, ability, etc.
For this reason there are two definites, that corresponding to the idea of
cause being jba, and that to the idea of power being ma (na).
In both cases the true pluperfect and future perfect tenses are formed by
na following the verb as existing in the past and future tenses, respectively.
The idea of cause is indicated by maka with roots denoting conditions,
torts (wrongs), and betterments, which have only one definite; that with
if which has in with the past and present tenses, forming ika, iHna. Ika
and ikina also indicate time (not tense) in certain cases. (See index.)
II. The difference in syntax between these rrmka verbs in the sense of
cause and all others must be noted. In the definite these verbs have the
agent in the nominative and the recipient or object of the action in the
genitive. In the indefinite the agent is in the usual nominative also, but the
recipient or object takes the accusative, which is invariably preceded by sa
(never by nang). This use of sa is also found with some other verbs.
III. Mag and man roots retain the definite forms pag and pan when con-
jugated with maka^ as will be seen from examples.
To be able to learn or study. Makapagdral. Ex. : Nakapagdralakd
(I was able to study). Nakapor
gaAral siyd (He [she] is able to
study ) . Makapagadral sUd ( They
will be able to study ) . Hindi akd
makapagadral (I shall not be able
to study). Napagdral ko ang idrdl
(I was able to learn the lesson).
Napagadral niyd ang idral (He
[she] is able to learn the lesson).
MapagaAral nild ang idrol (They
will be able to learn the lesson).
To be able to teach. Makadral, Ex.: Nakadral akd (I
was able to teach). The other
tenses, both of the indefinite and
the definite are formed in the
same wav.
To be able to preach. Makapangdral, Nakapangdral akd
(I was able to preach). Naka-
pangangdral siyd (He is able to
preach). Makapangangdral siyd
( He will be able to preach ). The
definite is formed in the same way
as with pagdral.
IV. Roots verbalized by maka reduplicate the first syllable of the root in
the present and future tenses. In some districts the second syllable of the
particle is reduplicated, but this is a provincialism. Ex. :
To cause damage. Makapanganyayd (from anyayd and
pan). See index.
To cause anguish. Makabalisa,
Digitized by
Google
212
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To cause satiety.
To beautify or adorn.
To cause disgust.
To do good.
To hinder.
To adorn; to embellish.
To cause relief.
To cause sadness.
To hinder.
To cause another to tremble with
fear.
To cause to tremble with cold or
fear.
To cause or do evil.
To cause disgust; weariness; annoy-
ance.
To dazzle (as the sun or lightning).
To cause anxiety.
To cause nausea.
To wound (lit., to cause to be
wounded).
To cause to be set afire.
To cause loathing (as food).
To cause fear.
To cause laughter.
To cause pleasure.
MakabtMog, Biisog is a bow
(weapon).
Makabuti, Bumud^ to grow hand-
some. (See baii in index.)
Makadimdrim or makarimdrim,
Mandimdrim, to disgust. Ex.:
Nandimdrim akd sa pagkain niyd
(His manner of eating disgusted
me).
Makagaling. (See index: gcUing.)
MakagambcUd,
Makagandd. Ex.: Ang kahinhhia^ y
nakaaagandd sa manga dalaga
(Modesty is a beauty in girls).
(Def.): Ang kahinhindn ay siyang
ikinagagandd nang mangd dalaga,
Makaginhdua, Ex. : MakaginhAua 9a
inyd ang gamot (Let the medicine
relieve you ) . Nakaginhdtm sa abin
ang patriot (I was relieved by the
medicine). NakamginMua sa ka-
niyd ang gamot (He is being re-
lieved by the medicine). Makagi-
ginhdua sa inyd ang gamot ^You
will be relieved by the medicine).
Ang pagkaginhdua, the relief ( act ) .
Makahdpis. (See index: hdpis.)
Makaliban^, (See index: Kian^.)
MakapangUdbot (from kildbot and
pan). KakUakildbotf horrible.
Makapanginyig. ( See index : kinyig ) .
Makasamd. Makasasamdy noxious;
malignant. Also future tense.
Ex.: Houag mong kanin itong
bungdH makasasamd sa iy6 (Don't
eat this fruit, because it will in-
jure you [be noxious to you, in-
def.]). Ang ikinasasarnd nang
dking loob ay ang kaniyang pag-
mumiirang wolang tigil ( What puts
me in bad humor is his everlasting
slanderinsr l^lit.. The cause of my
bad humor is his slandering with-
out cessation, def. j ) . Sumamd^ to
become bad or evil. (See index:
samd.)
Makasaud.
Makasilao. ( Sy n : pulag. )
Makasukal.
MakasJiklam,
Makasugat. {See index: sugat.)
MakaMnog. (See index: «ino^.)
Makasuyd. (Syn. sunok,)
Makatdkot. (See index: fdibo/.)
Makataua, (See iawa; index.)
Makatud, {See index: tud.)
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
218
V. The indefinite forms will be clearly seen by the conjugation of
makaginhdua in the preceding paragraph, there being no irregularities
and there is but one definite with ita, forming ilea as a prefix to the root
for the infinitive and future and ikina for the past and present tenses, in
being incorj>orated in the latter cases. For the conjugation of this definite
see hapis in index.
VI. Prefixed to roots denoting actions maka signifies power or ability to
perform what may be denoted oy the root. Roots which are conjugated
in the simple idea by mag or man retain pag or pan before the root in all
tenses.
VII. Md is the corresponding definite to maka potential, and when used
with the idea of attraction toward, etc., suppresses in completely. Ma
becomes na for the past, pluperfect, and present tenses. Pag and pan are
retained with those roots requiring it to preserve the meaning, as explained
in the preceding paragraph. The definites with i and an also exist. The
particle i is inserted between the particle ma{na) and the root, contrary to
its use with kaf where it is prefixed to the latter particle. Ex. :
To be able to go away.
To be able to teach.
To be able to do or make.
To be able to take.
To be able to go or come out
To be able to walk; march; etc.
To be able to write.
MakaaliB. Makapa^alls, to be able
to take away.
Makadral. Makapagdral, to be able
to learn or study. Ex.: Napagd-
ral ko ang idral ( I was able to learn
the lesson). Napagdral na ko ang
idral (I had been able to learn the
lesson). Napagadral ko ang idral
(I am able to learn the lesson).
Mapaaadral ko ang idral (I shall
be able to learn the lesson). (See
dral in index.) To be able to
preach, makapangdral,
I^kagawd. (See index: ^atw!.)
Makahiha, With idea of attraction
toward, in is suppr^sed. Ex.:
Nakuha ko iyang bwiwa (I was able
to take that fruit) . Nahikuha niyd
iyang bunga (He [she] is able to
take that fruit). Makukuha ko
iyang bunga ( I shall be able to take
that fruit) . ( See also index : kuha. )
Makalabds, MakapaqlaMSftoheable
to take out. (See index: labds. )
Makaldkad. (See index: Zdifcad.) Ex.
with maka (indef. ) : Nakaldkad ak6
( I was able to walk ) . Nakalaldkad
siyd (He is able to walk). Maka-
laLakad sUd (They will be able to
walk).
MakasiUat. With i inserted between
ma {na) and root with definite.
Ex.: NaiaulaJb ko Hong paniUat (I
was able to write with this pen).
NaisusMat ko itong pamulat (I am
able to write [can write] with this
pen). Maisu8ukU ko itong paniUat
(I will be able to write with this
pen). BukoB maisusulat ang Mat
na ipadadald md sa iyong amd aa
Maynild (To-morrow I will be able
to write the letter which you will
Digitized by
Google
214
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To be able to run away.
have to send to your father in
Manila). AcUis ak6 nang maisulat
na niya ana iniutos ho sa kanivd
( Iwill go when he writes down the
orders I have given him). (See
index: Mat,)
Makatakbd. ( See index : takbo ) .
VIII. With negative particles the imperative is largely used instead of
the present tense, although the meaning is the same as that of the latter,
i. e., hindi ak&ng makaMat^ I cannot write; I am not able to write; instead
of hindi akong nakasusulat The definite is sometimes used in the same
way with the negative, and even with the affirmative. Examples: Hindi
akong makapagdrcU ( I can not [am not able to] study [or learn] ) . Hindi mo
madampotf ( Can* t you pick it up [grasp it] ? ) Hindi ko maipalidyag ( from
hdyagt ma, t, and^a) (i can not reveal it [make it public]). Hindi ak6
makaluds sa MaynildH ak6*y may saJcit (I can not go down to Manila, because
I am ill). Witn um this may be expressed hindi akd mangyaring lumudssa
MaynildH akd m^ay sakit. Hindi kayd makapanguaapf (Can^t you talk?)
Hindi ko matuikd (I can not pronounce it). Hindi ko mamysay (I can not
explain it). Hindi ko masaU (i can not tell it).
IX. Maka (naka) with the indefinite and ma (na) with the definite sig-
nif jr to do what is denoted by the root mechanically, casually, involun-
tarily, or suddenly (occasionally), especially acts of the mind and physical
senses. Ex. :
Makaamoy. Nakaaamoy kaydf (Do
you smell anything?) Naxmmoy
ninyd bagd ang bangong isinammbu-
lat nang mangd bulaklakf (Do you
smell the fragrance shed by the
flowers?)
Makaramdam, from damdam, Na-
ramdamAn mof (Did you feel it?)
0<5, nadaramdamdn kopa (Yes, I
feel it yet).
Makaringig (from dingig). See in-
dex: dingig.
Makalasap, (See index: ^ap.)
Makakitd. "Ex.: Akd'ytiakakiidnang
isang tauong diydn (I saw a person
there). Nakitd bagd sildf (Did
you see them? ) Hindi ngunV t ma-
kikitd ko sana (No, but I may be
able to see [them]).
To smell.
To feel.
To hear.
To taste.
To see.
Acts of the mind:
To know (something).
To think.
To comprehend somewhat; to
to understand.
To understand (naturally).
feel;
MakaMam. Walang nakaadlam (No
one knows). Hindi ko naaalaman
(1 do not know it.)
Makaisip. Hindi maisipy incompre-
hensiole. Ex.: And ang i&ip mo
or Naiisip mo or Naiisipan mof
(What do )[ou think about it?)
Kaisipan, opinion. Ang pagkaidp,
the act of thinking.
Makamalay,
Makatalaatds, Ex.: Natatalastds
ninyd bagdf (Do you understand
it? ) Walang nakataialasids ( No one
understands). Tumalastds, to un-
derstand (by an act of volition).
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
215
To remember (casually, etc. ).
To forget.
Miscellaneous:
To like (naturally).
To ascend or go up (cas.).
To enter (casually).
To fall asleep.
Makaalaala. (See index: alaala.)
Makalimot, (See index: /mo^)
Makathig. (See index: ihig.)
Makapanhik. Ex.: Napanhikan ko
ang Mhay nang kaihigan natin (I
went up by chance into the house
of our friend).
Makapdsok. (See index: ^d«o^.)
Makatuloa. Ex.: Bungmaaa akd'y
nakatiilog akd (I was reading
and fell asleep). Ang ikatulog,
the cause or time of sleeping.
Ang ipagtulog, the cause or time
of sleeping a great deal.
X. Ma (na) is used in connection with an (sometimes tn) to express
being overtaken by wind, weather, night, etc., and also to express the
casual advent of a season, date, etc.
Some phrases of this nature are used with in only.
The definite only is found.
Madrao. (See index: drao and init
for exs. )
Magabi. Ex. : Gagabihin ka sa daan
( You will be overtaken by night
on the road).
Mauldn. (See index: wWn.)
Mabulag. (See indeis.: bulag,)
Mainit. Ex.: Naiinitan akd (I am
warm). Uminitf to become hot.
Maginily to heat. Magpainitj to
allow to become hot.
Malabb. (See index: toftd.)
Majulio. Ex. : KamVy najxdiohan sa
Tar lac (Julv found us in Tarlac).
(Any month may be used in this
manner.)
Mapascua; mapaskd. Ex.: Napas-
kuhan akd sa Maynild (Easter
found me in Manila).
XI. Maka also signifies the possible accomplishment of a purpose with
the indefinite; ma being used with the definite. (Naka; na. ) Tne accom-
plishment of the end sought is always expressed in the past tense.
To be caught out in the sun.
To be overtaken by night.
To be caught in the rain.
To be blinded.
To be hot (warm).
To be clouded; turbid.
To be overtaken by July.
To be found at Easter.
To be able to lift.
To be able to overtake by running.
To be able to find.
To get by asking.
To be able to catch fish.
To be able to pass an examination.
Makabuhat. Makabub&haiy liftable.
Ex.: Bubuhatin ko itong bayona
kung mabuhat (I will lift this sack
if it be liftable).
Makahdbol. ITumdbolj to run after
another in order to overtake him
(her). Ex.: Hindbol ko siyd^y
hindi nahdbol (I ran after him [her]
but could not overtake him Ther] ).
Makahdnap, (Seeh&nap: index.)
Makahingi. {^eehingi: index.)
Makapangisdd, Ex.: Akd^y mang-
ingisdd kung makapangisdd (I am
going to fish if it is possible to
catch any fish).
Maka8ulit, Ex.: Sinulit 8iyd nang
superintendenie ay (hindi) nakasulU
Digitized by
Google
216 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
( He was examined by the superin-
tendent and passed [did not pass]) .
Makamsulit kayd? (Will you oe
able to pass?) Sumiilitj to examine;
to give an account of.
To be able to hit with arrows. Jfakapand. PUmond, to shoot at with
bow and arrow. Ex. : Pungmanct
siyd sa mangd t6on, nguniU hindt
nakapanci siyd ( He shot at the birds
with bow and arrow, but was not
able to hit them).
XII. Maka, correctly used, expresses physical power or ability as a
general rule, «ukat and mangyari being used to express moral power or
ability. By the uneducated, these words are used almost indiscriminately.
(See suka and mangyari: index. )
XIII. Maka is also used to verbalize kayd; "perhaps, may be,** etc.,
which is coniugated as in the following examples:
Dili ko makaydnang dalhin (I do not know if I will be able to carry it).
Dili ak6 makakayd ibigay il6 sa kaniyd (I do not know if I will be able to
give this to him). WaJd akong ikakayd (I have no way to do it). Maka-
kayd ka bagd bumili nitdf (Will you be able then to buy this?) Di ko
makayanang labanan kayd (I am not able to fight against you [plural]).
linumin ko, kun makayanan ko {1 will drink it, if I can).
Bagdy "perhaps, by chance,'* etc., has a stronger meaning than kayd.
XI V. Maka (ma) is sometimes used in reluctantly admitting a fact or in
avoiding too direct an injury to the feelings of another. Ex.: findef.)
Nakapagnakao siyd (he may nave stolen); (Def.) napagnakao niya it6 (he
may nave stolen this).
XV. Maka is also used colloquially in conversation as follows: MakaJta-
nong kayd? (Is there anything more to be asked about it?) MakakUd
bagaf (ts there anything more to be seen?)
A more usual form is made with lalo, "more,** and the root with m,
viz : Lumalo sa tanonginf ( Is there anything more to ask about it? ) Lumalo
sa kitainf (Is there anything more to be seen?)
XVI. Maka forms certain adjectives in Tagalog, which have the inher-
ent idea of potentiality. These adjectives, which in English are generally
formed by the suffixes able and ible or by/w/, have three distinct forms in
Tagalog.
XVn. (a) Roots expressing qualities which may be felt by the mind
are made adjectives by prefixing iba, the casual definite of maka^ to the
root, which is reduplicated to the second syllable. Ex. : Kaayaaya {aya)
* * delightful * * ; kaginhaginhdua ( ginhdua ) , " wholesome ; salubrious ;* * kaibi-
gibig {ihig), "amiable;** kakUakUdbot {kildbot)^ "horrible;** kaiakoUdkot
{tdkot) "fearful; dreadful.**
(6) Adjectives of similar meaning are also formed by maka with the
future indefinite. Ex. :
Makahihiyd {hiyd), "bashful;** makamamatay {matay)y "mortal** (death-
causing); makamird (sird), "destructive;** makatataud (taud)^ "laugha-
ble;** makatutud (tud)^ "pleasant, agreeable.**
(c) When the roots may express aptitude or inaptitude or facility or dif-
ficulty in doing anything; if affirmative the adjective is formed with the
future definite of the potential particle ?na, and ii negative with the impera-
tive ma (without reduplication of the first syllable of the root), which is
generally preceded by the negative particle dly "not.** Ex. :
Makakain, "edible;** di makairiy "unedible, uneatable;** maga^wd,
"practicable;** di magawdj "impracticable;** maiinum, " potable, drinka-
ble;'* dimainum, "un drinkable;** makikitdf "visible;** dtmakild^ "invisi-
ble;** ma^asabi, "tellable;** dimasabiy "untellable, unspeakable;** man-
gyayariy "possible;** di mangyari, "impossible;** dimabata, "intolerable;**
dimakalagy "indissoluble;** di magamit, dt malapitariy "inaccessible;** dt
matiisy "insufferable;** di matingkcday "incomprehensible;** di masaiang,
"untouchable.**
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 217
(d) Adjectives of the classes above described take the **tie'' ng when
united to a following noun or verb if ending in a vowel, but remain
unchanged if ending m a consonant. The following verbs take the defi-
nite imperative, which is best translated into English by the infinitive
with **to.'* Ex.: Kagalanggalang amd ** respected father;*' kadumaldd-
mcU tigndriy 'Misgusting to see;*' kaayaayang pakingdn, ** delightful to listen
to;'* madcding gawin^ **easy to do or make;'* maliwag mbihirij ** difficult to
say;*' ma/iirap ifeamtdn, ** hard to accomplish."
XVIII. Maka may be compounded with magj resulting in magmaka,
denoting the idea of a great or excessive d^ree oi what may be indicated
by the root, which is generally reduplicated. (See par. 27, mag, )
Ex. : Magmakaauaaud {aud) ** to be able to move to compassion; ** magma-
hagalitgdlU {gdlit), **to be able to move to anger;" maamamakagalUgdlil
ak6 iyang tauOf **that man will be able to anger me;*' makagalit, "to
cause anger;** magmakahiyd^ *'to be able to shame greatly** (see par. 27,
mag); magmakalumbaylumbay {lumbay)^ **to be able to move to grief; ** nag-
makalumbaylumbay ak6 ang oalitdy **the notice was enough to move me to
grief;** makalumbayf **to cause sadness; to make melancholy;** hdkilmo
xkinoLulumbay ana masammang baiitdf or An6H nakahdumbay aa iyd ang
masasamang halUat ** Why does the bad news sadden vou?**
XIX. Maka (naka) is sometimes used in the place of ma (na) indefinite,
the two particles having many analogies. Ex. : Nakabukds ang pinto^
"the door is open;** nakalimot sii/dj "he forgot;" nakatayd siyd^ "he is
standing up; ** nakaupd aiyd, "he is sitting down.**
XX. Makd and its synonym bakd express fear or apprehension of pos-
sible danger, hurt, or injury. They are written as separate words and not
as prefixes. Bakd is more common. These two words may be best
rendered into English by "lest,** "for fear that,** etc. Ex.: Ak&y
nagdalang tdkoty bakd maringig (I was afraid lest I should be heard.)
Houag mong gawin iydn^ makd mapahdmak ka (do not do that, because you
may lose). Houag kang magdaan sa bundok^ makd harangin ka nang mangd
ttdis&n (do not travel in the mountains, because you might be stopped by
the "ladrones**). Humarang^ to stop another on the highway. Makd
may tduo diydn (lest there be people there).
(6) Makd also denotes partial resemblance, as in comparing speech,
fruit, flowers, etc. Ex.: Makd Tagdlog ang capitdn nang pangungusap
(the captain is like a Tagalog in his speech). Makd biUaklak sa AmSrica
iiong bulaJdak nan^ amoy (this flower is like an American flower in odor).
XXI. In addition to the meanings of maka as a verbal particle, it
indicates completed verbal action, b^t translated by the adverb "after**
and a verb. Ex.: Makamisa nang parS (after he had said mass the
priest ). Makayari nWy paroon ka sa (after you do this go there
to ).
It is also used idiomatically. Ex.: Makasakdling may dungmating^
bumUi ka nang kakanin (in case anyone should arrive, go buy something
[for him] to eat).
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "mAGPA.**
I. This particle, signifying the ordering to do or make or permitting to be
done what is denoted by the root, reduplicates the last syllable of the
particle for the present and future indefinite tenses. The definite, pa,
being a monosyllable, causes the first syllable of the root to be reduplicated
for the same tenses. The definite has all three forms of in, i, and an,
Mag and man roots retain this between magpa and the root. Pag
sometimes precedes magpa in the definite form (pagpa).
Sa is generally used before the person commanded. Ex. :
To order to teach. Magpadral, Magpadral ka kay Pe-
drOj order Pedro to teach. Mag-
papagdraly to order to study.
Magpapagdral ka kay Juan, order
Juan to study. Papagaralin mo
Digitized by
Google
218
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To order to read.
To order to do or make.
To order to come or go out;
order to take or bring out.
To order to ascend.
To order to go or come down;
order to descend.
To order to get into or enter.
To order to write.
ang iyong anak (order your child
to study). Pinapagdral pa ak6
nang dhing ind (my mother or-
dered me to keep on studying).
Magpapongdral (1) to order to
preach; (2) to request to preach
(if not competent to order).
Magpabasa. Nappapabasa ang maes-
tro sa mangd bald (the teacher is
ordering the children to read).
Magpagoud. Nagpagawd akd (I or-
dered [something^ done or made).
Nagpapagawd siya ( he [she] is or-
dering [something] to oe done or
made). Nakapagpagawd akd (I
was able to order [something] to
be done or made) . Maa^apagawd
akd (I will order [something] to be
done or made). Makapagpagawd
akd (I shall have ordered [some-
thing] to be done or made). The
definite with i is: Ipagaivd mo US sa
kaniyd (order him to do [make]
this). Jpinagaivd ko sa iy6 itd (I
ordered you to do [make] this).
Iphiagagawd niyd sa iyd il6 (he or-
ders you to do this). Ipagagaiod
ko sa iyd it6 (I shall order you to
do [make] this). (See index:
gawd. )
( 2 ) to Magpalabds. Magpolabds ka kay Juan
(order Juan to get out). Magpal-
abds ka kay Jiian nang damit (order
J uan to get the clothes out ) . Pal-
abasin mo itong aso (have this dog
put out).
Magpapanhik. Papanhikin mo ang
mangd batd (tell the muchachos to
come up). Makapagpapanhikf to
be able to order to ascend. Naka-
pagpapanhik akd (I was able to
order to ascend). Nakapagpapa-
panhik akd (I am able to oraer to
ascend ) . Makapagjtapapanhik akd
(I will be able to order to ascend).
Magpapagpanhiky to order some-
thing brought upstairs, hoisted,
etc. Papagpanhikin mo ang mangd
batd nang tubig (tell [order] the
muchachos to bring up some
water) . ( See index : panhik. )
to Magpapandog, A Iso means to spend ;
to use up. Magpapagpandog, to
order something to be brought
down. (See index: pandog.)
Magpapdsok. (For examples see in-
dex: pdsok.)
Magpasulat. Ang mangddral ay nag-
pasulat sa iyd (indef. ) ; pinasulat ka
nang mangddral (dei.) (the teacher
ordered you to write). The definite
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 219
with in is: Paaulatin mo siyd nitong
sdlat (order him to write this let-
tei). The dual (two) is used in
the following examples, but they
are translateaas usual into English.
Pinasulatkitdnitongsulat (I ordered
you to write this letter). Pinam-
sulat katd nitong siilat (I am order-
ing you to write this letter). Pa-
svsulatin katd, nitong sulat (I will
order you to write this letter).
(See index: sulat.)
To order to lock. Magpasusl. To lock ; magsusX. Su-
sian mo it6 (lock this). Houag mo
susian it6 (don't lock this). ltd
hindt nakasusl (this is not locked).
Alisin mo ang pakasud nitd (un-
lock this [lit., ** release this condi-
tion of being locked"]). Susian
mo ang pintd ( lock the door) . Ang
ismiy the key. Arig susian, what
locked. A ng pagsusl, what locked
much, or the act of locking. Ang
ipaasian; what used to lock much
with. Suslf derived from Chinese,
is distinct from sust, meaning clear,
pure, or neat, which comes from
the Sanskrit, cuchi.
To order to sew. Magpataht ltd ang pataht niyd sa
dHn (this is what she told me to
sew). (See index: <a/z^.)
II. Magpa reverses the meaning in sentences where an inferior addresses
a superior, or in which the subject has no power to command, the particle
then meaning **to request, ask," etc. Ex.: Magpagawd ka nitd sa inyong
amd **ask your father to do this," not "order your father to do this."
Magpadral kayd pa sa inyong anak sa escuelahan (indef.) or Papagaralin
ninydpa ang anak ninyd sa escuelahan (def. ) (let your child study for a
while yet at school).
III. The indefinite form will be seen by the conjugation of magpagawd
"to order to do or make;" there being but one irregularity of note, viz:
In the pluperfect and future perfect tenses naka and maka, with pagpa pre-
fixed to the root and na following, express these tenses, respectively. ( See
tables for conjugation.)
IV. Pay the corresponding definite verbal participle to magpa j and
formed by dropping the first syllable of the latter, forms the three defi-
nites regularly. The examples given in the tables are magpa^ulat {sulat) y
"to order to write " (in); magpagawd {gawd)y " to order to do or make "
(0; and ma^gpatanim (tanim)y " to order to sow " {an).
V. Magpa may be preceded by makay forming makapagpay the com-
pound givmg the idea "to be able to order to." (See under magpapon-
hik in Par. I, magpa. )
VI. Magpa also denotes what is suffered willingly or what is done with-
out restraint by others upon the subject; to allow or permit, with those
roots which admit such ideas. The context serves generally as a guide to
distinguish the idea of "to order to " from " to permit to." Ex. :
To allow deception ; cheating. Magparayd ( from dayd) . ( See index :
dayd. )
To allow oneself to be crucified. Magparipd (from dipd). (See index:
aipd. )
To allow oneself to be whipped. Magpahampds, (See index :/ia7n/)(is. )
Digitized by
Google
220
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To allow oneself to be flatly con-
tradicted.
To allow one* 8 hair to be combed.
To allow oneself to be slapped.
Magpwmai.
Magpasuklay. Also **to order to
comb.*' (See index: suklay.)
Magpatampal. Tumampalf to slap.
Magtampal, to slap much.
Vll. Magjm, with a root denoting a state or condition resulting from
gradual intrinsic action, indicates the purpose of the subject either to accel-
erate or allow the transition.
To allow to become putrid.
To order to throw down; raze; (2)
to allow to fall into ruin.
To allow to become hot.
To allow to become cool ; to cool any-
thing.
MagpabtUok. Houag mong kahuZokin
ang marTgd sdging (don't let the
bananas rot).
Magpagibd. Gumihd,, to do away
with; to level; to throw one's self
down. Jna5^niM,(l) what thrown
down or leveled; (2) what done
away with. Maggibhj to throw
down many things.
Magpainit ( from init ) . Magpapaginitj
to order something to be neated.
(See index: init.)
Magpalamig. Palamigin natin ang
drao (let us wait until the day is
cooler) . Magpalamig ka nang tving
(let some water cool [i. e. , put some
water out to cool] ). Ipalamig mo
ang idbig (put the water some-
where to cool). Bdkit hindt ka
nagpapalamig nang tubigf (Why
don't you cool some water?) Saan
ak6 magpapalamig nang tubigf
(Where shall I put the water to
cool?) lyang batalang iydn ang
pagpapalamigdn mo nang tubig (let
the water cool out there on that
porch ) . Kahapon ay ang ibang sUid
ang pinagpalamigdn ko nang tubig
(yesterday I let the water cool in
tne other room ) . Magpapaglamig,
to order something to De cooled).
Magpatuyd. Houag mong patuyoin
ang mangd halaman (don't let the
plants dry up). Tayd na p6 (they
are dried up already, sir). Hindi
ko nga pinatutuyd (indeed, I am not
letting th em dry up ) . Patuyoin mo
iydny dry that or let it dry.
VIII. Magpa is also used to express acts of the Creator; of nature, and
of persons beyond the control of the speaker, mainly with the idea of
cause. Ex. :
To allow to'dry up or out; to put out
to dry.
To cause waves.
To cause the flowers to bloom.
To cause it to thunder.
To rear; bring up (as a child).
Magpadlon. And ang nagpapoMon sa
dagatf (What causes the waves
at sea?) Ang hangin (the wind).
Magpabulaklak.
Magpakulog.
Magpalaki, (See index: toH.)
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
221
. Magpaj used with reference to the effect of such actions as the fore-
, which are beyond the power of a human agent, signifies ** to ex-
IX.
going,
pose to;*' ** to put in," etc. Ex.
To expose to the sun; to sun one-
self.
To expose to the wind or air.
To expose to the rain.
Magpaardo (accent on the last sylla-
ble). (See index: drao.)
Magpahangin, (See index: hangin.)
Magpauldn. (See index: uldn.)
X. Magpa coupled with meteorological phenomena and astronomical
occurrences, connected with a human agency, denotes a waiting on the
part of such agent until the condition has changed or the event taken
place. The context generally serves to give the correct idea. Ex. :
To wait until the typhoon ceases.
To wait for a change of wind.
To wait for the day to become cooler.
To wait until the sun (or moon)
a change (as in bad
To wait for
weather).
MagpabagyS.
Magpahangin.
Magpalamig nang drax), (See Par.
MagpasUang. (See index: «iZaw^r.)
Magpatild,, Patilain mo mund ang
uCdn (wait until the rain ceases).
The root is tUd,, which alone means
"to seem." Tlld. tduo or anaki
tduo (it looks [seems] like a per-
son ) . Tild naparoon sild ( it seems
they went there ) . Tild napaparito
sild (it seems they are coming
here).
Magpauldn.
Magpaumaga (from umagay ** to
dawn;" root, «(/a).
XI. With roots expressing the indefinite idea of what mav be given
magpa expresses acts which benefit another than the agent. These roots
are generally those conjugated primarily with urn. Ex. :
To wait until the rain ceases.
To wait until davbreak.
To give food; to feed.
To send; to forward.
To clothe; to furnish clothing.
To give something to drink; to wa-
ter (as animal or fowl).
To put at interest; to invest.
To give lodging.
To lend willingly.
Magpakain. (See index: kain.)
Magpadald. ltd ang padald niyd sa
dkin (this is what he ordered me
to bring [carry] ) . Jt6^y padald sa
dkin ni irm ( this is what my mother
sent [brought] me). Ang ipina-
dald (what was ordered brought
[i. e., what was sent] ). Magdald^
to carry, bear, bring or take (over).
Ang dinaldy what so brought, etc.
(See index: dald.)
Magparamit (from damit). (See in-
dex: damit)
Magpainum. (See index: tnwTw.)
Magpatubd.
Magpatuloy.
MagpaiUang.
(See index: tubd.)
(See index: iuloy.)
(See index: utang.)
There may be mentioned magpakUdy to restore the sight.
XII. With roots expressing definites with mag in the primary verbal
sense, magpa expresses the idea of compulsion, exaction, or request, as
shown by the intrinsic meaning or the context. Definites exist with in, t,
and an. Ex. :
To collect taxes; to demand (or col-
lect) tribute.
Magpabuis (from buis, **poll tax,"
etc. ) . Fabuis ko si Pedro nang piso
Digitized by
Google
222 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
(I asked Pedro to pay one peso in
taxes) . Imng piso ang ipinabuis ho
kay Pedro (one peso was what I
asked Pedro to pay in taxes).
Itong hayan ay ang pinagpahuisan
ko (this town was where I col-
lected taxes). Ma^huiSy to pay
taxes.
To beg; to ask for alms. Magpalimds (from Span., limoma).
To ask for a pledge or pawn. MagpasarUd,, Sangpisos ang sanladn
ko nitong singsing ( I want to pledge
this ring for one peso).
XIII. Actions in which the agent has a passive part are also explained
by magpa. Ex. :
To hear confession. Magpaxyampisal (from Sp. confesar).
Saan naroon ang pari / ( W here is
the "padre?'*) Nagpapacumpiml
siyd (He is hearing confessions).
Magcumpisalf to confess.
To pardon. Magpatauad. (See index: tottod.)
To get shaved. Magpadhit. (See index: 4^i<.)
To have the hair cut. Magpagupit. (See index: ^|3i7.)
To have cleaned (as shoes). Magpalinis. (See index: Knw.)
XIV. Magpa also expresses the idea of repeating something many
times, or reciting the same much, and sometimes by many. Pagpa is
treated grammatically in many cases like magpa — i. e., the last syllable of
the particle is reduplicated for the present and future tenses. Ex. : Magpa
* * we ' ' kay 6 ( Al 1 of you say * * we * ' many times ) . Nagpadiablo akd sa kaniyd
(I called him a devil many times). And ang ipinagpapadiablo ninyif
(Why do you say devil so much?) Houag ninyong j^agpapadiablohan ang
kapoua tdno (Don't say devil so much to those around you).
XV. In some cases magpa signifies to do voluntarily what is denoted by
the root. Ex. :
To adorn one's self. Magpamuti (from huli). Nagpapa-
buti yaong dalaga (That girl is
adorning herself).
To praise one's self. MagpamuH (from puri). At yaong
i8a.y nagpapamuri (and that one
is [doing the same] for the praise).
Ang mahinhing dalaga^y pinupuri
nang lahat (A sensible girl is
praised by everyone ) . Kapurihan^
praise; honor; fame. Syn. : bunyi,
XVI. Magpa with some datives and all adverbs of place signifies "to go
or come intentionally," where denoted by the root, etc. Ex.:
To come to me. Magpasa dkin.
To go to you. Magpasa inyd.
To go (come) to the person. Magpasa t&uo.
To go to Pedro. Ma^pakay Pedro.
To come here (near by). Magpadini.
To go there. Magpadoon.
To go up the river, or up country. Magpa ilaya,
XVII. Mapa^ formed by dropping the g of magpa^ signifies " to go in some
direction naturally or accidentally, and without intention on the part of
the subject." /generally precedes the root. Ex.:
To run off or lower (as water). Mapaibabd. Napapaibabd ang idbig
(The water is becoming low [or is
running off]). (See index: babd,)
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
228
To ascend (as smoke). Mapaitaas. NapapaitaasangasS {The
smoke is rismg). Dt man makUd
ang ningaSf as6 ang magpapaMyag
(Although the flame may not be
seen, the smoke will reveal it. —
T. P., 60).
Mapailandang. Ang bdnoy ay napai-
landang sa impapauid (The eagle
ascended into the clouds).
XVIII. It will be observed that the greater part of the roots verbalized
by magpa require i in the definite to egress "what is ordered done, given,'*
etc., and in or an in the same form to express ** the person commanded,*'
etc. Ex. :
lo fly up in the air (as a bird).
To give food to another.
To allow to be punished; or to cause
or order to be punished.
Magpakain. (See index: kain,)
Magparuaa ( from dusa ) . Houag niong
parusahan ang walang kamlanan
( Do not permit the innocent [not
guilty] to be punished).
Magpadaan (from cfoan, "road**).
See index.
Magpainum. ( See index : inum . )
Magpaldkad. (See index: Idkad,)
Magpatindig. (See index: tindig.)
To permit to pass.
To give another something to drink;
to water animals or fowls.
To cause to walk up.
To cause or order another to stand
up.
XIX. A sense of ordering mav be given to roots not having such an
idea by inserting a second pa, although it is clearer to use ma^ with a fol-
lowing infinitive. This second pa ( which remains in all tenses) with roots
having the idea of ordering signifies to order a person to order another,
although simpler forms are generally used. Ex. : Ang capUdn ay nagpa-
painum sa mangd cabayo (The CAptain orders the horses to be watered); or,
Ang capUdn ay naguiUos uminum sa mangd cabayo [same meaning]. (2)
MagpapasMat ka kay Juan kay Pedro; or, Magutos ka kay Jxmn na magpa-
sMat styd kay Pedro (Order Juan to order Pedro to write).
XX. The tendency of Tagalog, like all langua^, to simplify itself, is
shown by the use of the root with pa prefixed, with the significance of a
verbal noun. The agent takes the genitive and the object or person acted
upon the dative. Ex.: Pabangdy "perfume;** pamuti (butt), "holiday
or parade appearance;** padaMf "burden or what carried;'* pahiyds,
"jewel;** pamana^ "inheritance;** patago, " what hidden.**
ltd ang patago niyd sa dkin (This is what he ordered me to hide). Pau-
tang, "credit.**
THE PARTICLE "PA.**
I. This particle has many aflSnities with magpa, as will be seen by the
examples. It reduplicates the first syllable of the root for the present and
future tenses, except when sa ift attached to and incorporated with it. With
roots of place, which require pasa, the first syllable of the particle is redu-
plicated for these tenses, Na is prefixed Wpa in the indefinite past and
present tenses with both pa and pa^a. This latter particle should not be
confounded with roots beginning with sa conjugated with pa. (See tables:
tulong. )
II. One of the principal significations of pa is to ask or beg for in refer-
ence to the subject, while magpa is generally applied under like circum-
stances to the object. Ex. :
To ask for protection.
To ask for mercy or compassion.
To ask for shelter or support.
Paampdn.
Paaud, ( See index : aud. )
Pakupkup. Kumupkupy to pi-ess to
the breast or shelter under the
wings.
Digitized by
Google
224 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To ask for aid, succor, or a favor. Pasangalang. Magsangalang^ to aid,
favor, or succor.
To ask for defense. PatangoL Tumanaol^ to defend.
To ask for help. Patulong. (See tables: (liZongr.)
III. At times pa signifies **to permit** the action indicated by the root
" upon one's self," and sometimes " to ask,** as above explained. It de-
notes greater willingness by the person affected than magpa does. Ex. :
To consent to be deceived. Par ay d. (from .dayd). (See index:
dayd. )
To ask to be kissed. Pahalik. (See index: halik.)
To consent to be whipped. Pahampds. {See indax:. hampds.)
To consent to be vanquished. Patalo. (See index: talo.)
To consent to be slapped. Patampal. (See index: tampal.)
IV. (a) With the adverbs of place, and roots expressing place, pa sig-
nifies movement to or from what is denoted by the root. (6) With roots
of place sa is added to the particle, forming oa«a, which bisyllabic parti-
cle reduplicates the last syllable of the particle for the present and future
tenses. The initial d of the adverbs changes to r after pa. Ex. (a): Pa-
rinij '*come here;** parito, "come here;** pariydn^ "go there;** paro&n,
"go there.** (See index: dini^ ditOj diyan^ do6n,) These four adverbs
admit the definites i and an. That in i is compounded with A;a, forming
ikay ikina. In may be used if compounded with magpa, signifying "to
order to come or go.** (See tables and index: dito. )
Some localities are to be found where the last syllable of the particle is
reduplicated with these adverbs of place for the present and future tenses,
but this is irregular and incorrect. The practice is unknown to the earlier
writers.
The four adverbs which have been considered are also further conjugated
with um, making infinitives, etc. Ex.: Pumarini, pumaritOy "to come
here;'* pumariydny pumarodn, "to go there.**
( 6 ) PasoMhayy " to go to the house. * * ( See tables : bdhay. ) PasaMMd,
"to go to the country** (fields); paaaddaat, "to go to sea;** pasaUog, "to
go to the river;** pasabundoky "to go to the mountains;'* pasa AmSrica, "to
go to America;** pasa Kastilay "to go to Spain.** Napasaan siyaf {Sa4in
ang tungo niydf) (Where did he go?) Napatungo sa MaynUd (He went
to Manila).
V. Pa also indicates to say what may be denoted by the root, but with-
out the plurality indicated by magpa. Ex. :
To say "yes.** Pa6o. Pa(5o A;a/ (Say "yes!**) Na-
pa6o ka sa kaniydf (Did you tell
him "yes?*')
To say " no. ' * Padih. PadiVl ka! (Say " no * * )
DUX Hn (No, indeed); var. dirt.
Ang piaadlriian; person to whom
"no** is being said. MagpadiH;
to say "no** repeatedly. Ang
pinagdirian; person to whom "no * *
nas been said often.
To say "no.** Pahindi. Pahindi ka {kay6) (Say
"no**).
To say not to wish. Paayao. (See index: ayao.)
To say "devil.** Padiablo. (See index.: diablo.)
To call "chicky-chicky.** Pakorukid.
VI. Pay prefixed to roots denoting bodily positions, forms words ex-
pressing the position taken. Ex. :
Lengthwise; lengthways. Pahabd. Putlin mo it6 nang pahabd
(cut this lengthwise). Mahabdy
long.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 225
Crosswise; cross ways. PaMlang.
Lying down; prone (position). Pahigd. (See index: /li^rd.)
Lying on the side (position). PcUagllid,
Lying on the face (position). Pataob.
Lying on the back (position). Patihayd. (See index; tihaycL.)
On foot; afoot. Patindig. (See index: iindig.)
Seated (position). Paupd. (See index: wpd.)
VII. Pa, prefixed to roots denoting articles which may be bought, sent,
carried, sewn, left, lent, etc., forms nouns indicating what affected by the
action. In composition these nouns take the nominative, the agent the
genitive and the recipient the dative. Ex. :
What brought. Padald. (See index: dald.)
What borrowed or lent ( not money) . Pahiram, ltd' y pahiram sa dkin nang
kaihigan ninyo (this is what your
friend lent me).
What left as an inheritance. Pamana, (See index: mana.)
What sewn. Patahl. {See index: taht.)
VIII. Some roots, such as kain, eating; and Vnttm, drinking, are not clear
when used with »a alone in this sense, and are conjugated with both the
particle joa and tne definite of magpa (pa) forming papa. Ex.: Papakain
ka kay Juan (ask Juan to give you something to eat). Papainum ka kay
Tomds (ask Tomds to give you something to drink).
IX. Formerly mapa^ with roots indicating relatives, signified to call
others by such names. This custom exists to some degree yet. Ex.:
Mapaalij to call **aunt.*' MapanunOj to call ** grandfather" (or "grand-
mother").
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAGPAKA."
I. This particle, which may be analyzed into paka with mag prefixed,
generally signifies to do, suffer or voluntarily allow what may be denoted
by the root, and has two forms for the definite, pagpaka and paka, Mag-
paka. and pagpaka form the present and future tenses in a peculiar manner.
The last syllable, iba, adheres to the root in all tenses, and pa is redupli-
cated for the present and future. The mag of maapaka changes to nag
for the past and present tenses. When paka is used with a root it is not
divided, the first syllable of the root being reduplicated for the present and
future tenses. Paka also retains pag with verbs conjugated primarily with
mag^ forming the prefix pakapag. Paka admits m as well as i and an.
Roots conjugated with maapaka may have either a reflexive or transi-
tive meaning, or both, accoraing to the context.
II. For the conjugation of roots with magpaka^ see the tables: matay^ huti^
sisif and dral.
III. Some verbal roots conjugated in the foregoing sense by magpaka are:
To allow one's self to be insulted; Magpakaapi.
patronized.
To humble; humiliate or lower one's Magpakahabd. (See index: babd.)
self.
To satiate one's self. Magpakabusog.
To adorn one's self. Magpakabuti. Ang kahinhinan ay
nagpapakabtUi sa dalaga (modesty
befits a girl). Ang ipinagpapaka-
buti nang dalagang iydn ay nang
siyd^y mapuri (the reason why that
girl is adorning herself is to be
admired).
To impoverish one's self voluntarily. Magpakadukhd. MapakadukMy to
come to poverty.
To improve or reform one's self. Magpakagaling. (See index: galing.)
6865—05 15
Digitized by
Google
226
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To despise one's self.
To repent (deeply).
To exert one's self; to make efforts.
To enrich one's self.
To diminish (voluntarilvV MagpakcUiit, Jfaliit, small; little.
To esteem one's self highly. MagpakamahcU, (See index; mahal, )
To allow one's self to be killed; Magpakamatay, Nagpakamaiay ang
(2) to commit suicide. tauo kusa niyd (the man allowed
hunself to be killed). Nagpaka-
matay ang taaa Ilapdn sa kaniyang
garili (the Japanese voluntarily
killed himself [committed sui-
cide] ).
Magpakasamd, (See index: samd.)
Magpakasin. (See index: «m.)
MagpakcUdpang. Tapangan {pakata-
pangin) mo ang toob mo (exert
yourself; ** brace up"). (See in-
dex: tdpang.)
Magpakaydman. (See index: yd-
man.)
IV. As usual, i stands for cause, reason, or instrument of the action with
magpaka, and an for the place or the object, according? as the verb for the
direct object admits it or not for the direct object. Ex. :
To take exact notice. Magpakatandd, Pakatandaaji mo ang
sinasabi ko sa iy6 (pay exact atten-
tion to what I am telling you).
(This word should not be con-
founded with its homonym tandd^
idea of age. )
V. The foregoing sense of magpaka generally applies to actions which do
not go beyond the subject or to verbs which do not require an object to
complete the meaning; but when used with verbs admitting a direct com-
plement other than the subject or capable of voluntariness, magpaka gives
greater force or intention to the root. In this signification the particle
admits tn, t, and an, the reduplication being generally from tne first
syllable of the root, as paka is the usual form of the definite in such cases.
Roots conjugated thus must be capable of expressing the idea of more or
less. Pag is retained in this sense with mag roots, forming pakapag or
pagpaka, as the case may be, and in certain cases pagpakapag may be
lormed. Ex. :
To teach earnestly.
To have great prudence.
To go very slowly.
MagpakaAral, Pakaaralan ninyd ang
mangd baid (try to teach the chil-
dren earnestly ). Magpakapagdral,
to study earnestly. Pagpakapa-
garalan ninyd ang wikang Tagdlog
(try earnestly to study the Tagalog
language). Magpakapangdral, to
preach earnestly.
Magpakabait.
Jfagpakarahan (from dahan), Mag-
pakarahan kang lumdkad (walk
very slowly). Pakarahanin mo
ang paghUa (throw it very delib-
erately ) . Dahanan mo iyang gawd
mo (do that work of yours slowly
[carefully]). Mapakarahan, to
slow down; to oecome quiet.
Napakardhan na (it has become
quiet already; it has slowed down
now). Dumahan, to go away
slowly. Magdahan^ to go slowly.
(See index: ddhan,)
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 227
To love greatly. MagpakagUio, PinakagigUio kong
hapaiid na babaye (my dearly be-
loved sister).
To guard one's self well. Magpakaingat.
To think earnestly, deeply. Mae^akaisip. Magpakaisipisipy to
think very deeply. (See index:
isip.)
To arrange well. MagpakdhMay. (See index: fnubmy.)
To rectify well. Magpakatuid. (See index: <wid.)
To tempt greatly. Magpakotuksd, (See index: (M/fcs(5.)
VI. By reduplicating the root, roots cai)able of expressing the idea of
more or less acquire still greater force or intensity with magpaka, The^
are generally used in the definite with this construction, and the redupli-
cation does not extend beyond the first two syllables of the root, according
to the general rule. Ex.: MagpakaddLidaliid, **to suffer intensely or to
endure greatly. ' * Paka idpisipin mo, ' * think intensely. * ' Pakasipagsipagin,
" take the greatest of care; care for it sedulously.*'
VII. Dropping the ka from paka, there remains pa, which pronounced
long arid almost as paa, has the same meaning as paka, but should not be
confounded with pa (the definite of magpa), pa (the particle), nor with
pa, *'yet." It is generally used in the imperative. Ex.: Pabuksdn mo
(open wider [or quicker]). Papplb mo (strike harder). Pataponan mo
(throw it with more force [or quicker]). (See index: Bukds; palb; and
tapon. )
VIII. A further use of magpaka with nouns or verbs expressing time is
to signify to persevere or remain until such time, doing what maybe
denoted by the root used. This signification admits of in, %, and an. Ex. .
To until morning. Magpakadrao. (See index: drao.)
To until evening. Magpakahapon, (See index: hapon.)
To all night awake. Magpakapliyat. Ang ipinagpapaka-
puyat ko*y Hong gawd (This work is
the cause of my having to remain
awake all night). Itong silidWy
ang pinagpakapuya^tan ko (This
room is the place where I remained
awake [or watched] all night).
IX. When an accidental or fortuitous action is to be expressed with
magpaka the g is dropped, making mapaka, an analogous particle to ma.
Pinaka, formed from paka and in, should not be confounded with pinakd,
used in a very different sense. (See index: pinakd. ) Ex. :
To multiply. Mapakarami (from dami). Applied
to animals, etc. (See index: dami.)
To come to poverty. Mapakadukhd. (See index: dukhd.)
To grow greatly. Mapakalaki. (See index: feH.)
To be delayed more than usual. Mapakaldwig.
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "mAKI.**
I. This particle, known as the sixth to Spanish grammarians, has
paki for the definite, and reduplicates the second syllahle (ki) of the par-
ticle for the present and future tenses. The pluperfect and future perfect
tenses are wanting. Maki changes to naki for the past and present tenses,
and paki takes m lor the same, forming joinaH.
II. The principal signification of maH with roots capable of expressing
companionship, etc., is joining with, accompanying another, interference
or intermeddling in what may be denoted by the root
III. MaH may be combined with um, ma{^, man, magpapa, and pa, as well
as with itself {paki). There are some verbs which resemble maH in form,
Digitized by
Google
228
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
Biich as pakmdbang^ paldnig^ etc., which are classed as um verbal forms,
and should be carefully distinguished. Ex. :
To join with or interfere in writing.
To join with in play or gaming.
To join in fishing with a casting net
called "dala."
To join with in saying **yef."
To join in a conversation uninvited.
MakiMat (from mmiilcU). IpinaU'
TdMat ko xt6 do6n (I am putting
this in so it may be written there).
lyang maiTgd sMat ay pakisulatan
mo nitd (Put this in to be written
with those letters). Maktpagpa-
Mat; to join (or interfere with) in
ordering to write (from magpasu-
lat),
Makipaglar6{iTom.maglar6; to play or
gamble; see tables: lar6). Also:
Pakipaglaroan mo si Pedro (Play
with Pedro) . ( With pa) Papaki-
laroin mo si Pedro «a kaniyd (Tell
[make] Pedro play with him).
Makipandala (from mandala; to fish
for a living thus) . Dumala; to fish
(occasionally) with a **dala.*'
Magdalay to use a * * dala. ' ' Maka-
dala; to be able to catch anything
with a "dala.»'
MakipaSo ( from pa6o; to say * * yes. ' ' )
Makipakiusap (from makiusap).
TV, See tables: umdral; mag&ral, and sumakay.
V. Maki by itself admits only of i and an in the definite, /represents
the reason, cause, or object of the action, and an the person interfered or
meddled w^th, or joined, accompanied, etc. For the conjugation with i
see the tables: sulat and huTnatid. For the definite with an see maglard.
VI. In is only used with maki in combination with magpa (pa), Ex.:
Papakigavnn mo ang alila mo sa mangd tduo iydn (Tell your servant to join
those men in their task). See also makipaglard in Paragraph III, preced-
ing, and tables.
VII. Some roots conjugated with the principal signification of maki are:
To join or meddle with teaching.
To pick a quarrel.
To claim a part in ; to participate.
To carry along with; to join; to in-
terfere.
To embark with.
To thrust oneself into the com-
pany of another.
To thrust oneself into a dispute or
argument.
To join» with in weeping.
To join (or meddle) in pleasure.
Makidral, (See tables.) Makipagd-
rolj to join or meddle with study-
ing. (See tables.) Makipangdral,
to join or meddle with preaching.
Makipagduay, (See index: ditaj/.)
Makirdmay (from ddmay),
Makihatid, (See tables.)
Makisakay,
Makisamd,
(See tables.)
Makitalo, (See index: toZo.)
MakUangis. (See index: tangis,)
Makitud, (See index: iiwi.)
VIII. An is sometimes suffixed to roots conjugated with maki to express
intensity of the idea denoted by the root. Pag is generally retained in
expressions of this class. Ex. :
To mock greatly; to make fun of,
maliciously.
To join eagerly in play or gambling.
To thrust oneself into an alterca-
tion; to answer with vehemence.
Makipaghiroan. (See index: hiro,)
Makipaglaroan, (See index: lard,)
Makipagsagutan. An6H nakikipagsa-
gutan sa kapidbdhay mo? (Why
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 229
are you getting into an altercation
with your neighbor?) Sumagnt;
to answer; to reply.
To thrust oneself into a con versa- Mahpagsaliiaan. ( See index : «aZt/(i.)
tion; to interrupt a report.
To hate intensely; to detest. MaJcipagtaniman (from tanim). Not
to be confounded with its homo-
nym, fam'm, * Ho sow.'* Nakikxta-
niman si Juan hay Pedro (Juan de-
tests [hates] Pedro intensely).
Houaa kang makipagtaniman sa ka^
pidbahay mo (Do not detest [hate]
your neighbor so)..
IX. The asking for such articles of food, etc., as are generally exchanged
among neighbors for cooking and household work is expressed by makif
with the root denoting what may be asked for. A small quantity is always
understood. The cause is expressed with i and the person asked by an^
should the definite be used. In is used only in combination with magpa
(pa). Ex.:
To ask for a little wine. Makldlak (from 61ah). This word is
from the Arabic araq, from araqa^
** to sweat; perspire. It is found
in English as arrack.
To ask for a few coals (fire). Makiapuy.
To ask for a little salt. Makiasin. (See index: o^^n.)
To ask for a little rice. Makibigds. Nakikibig&s ak6 sana sa
inyS, j)6 {1 would ask you for a
little rice, sir) . JSlno angipinakiki-
bigds mo? (Who are you asking it
for?) Aking ipinakikibigds ang ina
kong may sakit (I am asking for the
rice for my mother, who is ill).
Paid! (Is that so!)
X. With roots verbalized into actions, maki denotes asking that the
action expressed by the root be done for the subject. Ex. :
To ask another to reach something. Makidbut. (See index: dbut.
To thank for. Makihmgl (from humingt; to request;
see index: hingt).
XI. With nouns denoting partition maki signifies to aak for what may
be denoted by the root; and with ordinal numbers, in using which the
initial letter i is dropped, maki signifies to ask for the part designated by
the ordinal used. Ex. :
To ask for an inheritance. Makimana (see index: mana).
To ask for a part or piece of any- Makipisang. Magpisang; to break
thing (as bread). up and divide a cracker or bread.
Maapisang kild (let us break it up
ana divide it).
To ask for a fifth, tenth, etc. Makikalima; makikapuo.
XII. With roots denoting work which may be joined in by more than
one, maki sometimes expresses the idea of asking to join in such work.
Ex. : Si Juan ay nakikatulig sa dkin (Juan asked me to help him in getting
some water). The partible ka, expressing companionship, is prefixed to
the root.
XIII. Some roots commencing with 6, p, «, and t change with maki in a
similar manner as with many when used in the signification of "to ask, re-
quest," etc. Ex.:
Digitized by
Google
230
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To ask for news. Makimalitd (from bcditd; see index:
balUd).
To ask for a passage (as on a vessel). Makinakay (from sakay),
XIV. With roots sij?nifying nationality, race, state, condition, occupa-
tion, profession, etc., maki is sometimes used to signify that one acts lite,
bears nimself like, or resembles what is denoted by the root. This idea,
however, is generally otherwise expressed, as some roots used thus are not
clear unless fully explained by the context.
XV. With may maki has a neuter meaning similar to that borne by ma
alone. £x. :
NapakimaJial. Napakikimahal ang
alipin (The slave looks like a noble
[has become so casually]).
Makiamericano.
MaHcastUa.
MakUagdlog. Nakikitagdlog itong
tduo 8a parigungusap (This man
resembles a Tagalog in his man-
ner of speaking).
MakUduo. Nakikitduo ang amd (wn-
goy) (The monkey acts like a i)er-
son).
Makibabaye. Nakibabaye si Juan
(Juan acted like a woman) . This
also means to run after women.
Makilalaki. Nakilalaki Uong baba-
yeng itd (This woman acted like a
man).
Makihdyop. Nakihdyop itong tduo ito
(This man acted like a beast).
Makiugali.
To appear like a noble (casually).
To act like or resemble an American.
To act like or resemble a Spaniard.
To act like or resemble a Tagalog.
To act like or resemble a person.
To act like a woman.
To act like a man; to run after men.
To act like a beast.
To conform to in customs.
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE '* MAQKA."
I. Magktty the ninth particle of the Spanish writers upon Tagalog, may
be analyzed into mag and ka^ one of the definites of ma. This particle
generally expresses the idea of having (or being) what was not had or pos-
sessed (or existed as a state) before. As a rule, magka refers to condition
or state, while man refers more to the action by which a state or condi-
tion is brought about.
The second syllable of the particle is reduplicated for the present and
future tenses, while m changes to n for the past and present, following the
usual rule. There are a few exceptions, the first syllable of the root being
reduplicated in some words. (See tables: utang.)
I definite expresses the cause or reason of the action, while a7i stands for
either place or person, according to the nature of the action. (See tables:
utang. )
Some very correct and widely used expressions are made by using an
with magka. Ex. :
To look much at things; to inspect
closely.
To amuse one's self.
(See index: pisan; Upon,)
Umaninao. Wald akong sukat pagka-
kaaninauan (There will be noplace
where I will be able to look at it
[inspect it; study it out]).
Magkalibang. Wald silanq pinagka-
hbangan (There was no place where
they could amuse themselves).
Malilibangy to be amused ; diverted.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOO LANGUAGE.
231
Some roots conjugated in the foregoing signification with vnagka are:
To have children.
To possess prudence.
To nave crocodiles again (as a river).
To be laden with fruit.
To have (there).
To have reason.
To be lucky; to have luck.
To have rice again (also to have much
rice).
To err; to sin.
To forbid.
To have money again.
To be ill.
To have enough.
To have gray hair.
To owe a debt.
Magkaanak,
Magkahait,
Magkabuaya. Nagkakabuaya na itong
uog (This river is inf^ted with
croccNdiles again).
Magkabunga. Nagkabunga na itong
kdhoy na itof ( Has this tree borne
fruit already?) Hindi pa nagka-
bunga (As yet it has not borne
fruit).
Magkaro6n, (See index: do6n.)
Magkaisip. Nagkakaisip na itong
batang itdf (Has this child reason
yet? fi. e., has it yet arrived at the
age oi reason] ).
MagkapaUid.
Magkapdlay,
Magkasala.
Magkakasala,
Magkasalapi.
Magkasakit. Ang ipa^/kasakitj the
cause of illness. And ang ipinag-
kasakit mof ( What made you ill?)
Pasajctdn, to be painea. Ang
papagkasaktin, one ill from his own
fault, also a sick person.
Magkasiyd. Wold p6j hindl nagkaka-
siyd sa kaniyang pagkabuhay (No,
sir; he does not get enough to live
on).
Magkauban.
Magkautang. (See tables: titengr.)
II. The casual, accidental, or chance assemblage of many people or
things, even though immaterial, is sometimes expressed by magka. The
particle denotes a plurality of subjects in such cases, as opposed to a plural-
ity of acts, as expressed by some other particles. Ex. :
To quarrel (as two or more).
To be equal; to coincide; to accord.
To meet casually; to gather (as a
crowd).
To assemble casually (as a crowd).
To meet casually (as a crowd).
( See i ndex : duay. )
(See index: sahi-
Magkaduay.
Magkaayon.
Magkasalubong,
bong. )
Magkasama. (See index: sama.)
Magkatipon. (See index: Upon.)
III. Magka also indicates universality or plurality of subjects suffering
from or affected in some way by what is denoted by the root. Ex. :
To suffer from a typhoon. Magkabagyd.
To suffer from an epidemic of small- Magkabulutong.
pox.
To suffer from a famine (also for Magkagutum.
many to be hungry).
To suffer from a conflagration. Magkasunog.
To enjoy a holiday. Magkatud.
To have a riot or tumult. Magkagulo.
To be squeezed or pressed in a crowd. Magkadagon,
Digitized by
Google
232 TAGALOO LANGpAGE.
IV. Another use of magha is to express an unintentional or casual error
in what may be noted by the root. The imperative is made with maid
or bakd (q. v.). Ex.:
To say one thing accidentally for Magkaibd. Naakaibd giyd (He acci-
another. dentally said one thing for an-
other).
To err in counting. Magkalimang.
To equivocate accidentally. Magkamalt Nagkamalt akd (I
equivocated accidentally).
Houag mong akalaing akd'y naa-
kakamalt{Don*t you think I maae
any mistake).
V. Maqka is also used to express self-deception by the sight, hearing, etc.,
the definite past tense with an suffixed being taken as the root. For the
present tense the first syllable of the root is reduplicated and not the second
syllable of the particle. Ex. :
To be deceived by the hearing. Magkaringan. Nagkariringan akd
(My hearing deceives me). (See
index: dingig.)
To be deceived by the sight. Magkakitd. (See index: jb'^.)
VI. A further use of magka is with the um infinitive of some verbal
roots and some adverbs of place, with which infinitives magka expresses
the idea of making the said movement or going to or from the place indi-
cated by the adverb for some particular reason or cause. Ex. :
To follow (or obey) for a particular Magkasumunod (from sunod). Also
cause or reason. to follow wherever another may
go. {See index: mnod.)
To be here for a particular cause or Magkadumito. (See index: dito.)
reason.
VII. Doubling the root intensifies the meaning with magka in some
cases. Ex. :
To be very late or tardy. Magkabdlamhdlam. Nagkakabalam-
bdlam ka (You are very late
[tardy]).
To be broken into very small pieces. Magkalarisaglansag (from lansag).
Lumansagj to break anything into
small pieces.
To be finished or concluded com- Magkalutdslutds (from lutds).
pletely.
To be completely broken up (as a Magkapatidpaiid (from patid; see
rope or cord). index).
To be completely destroyed. Magkasirdsird. (from sird; see index).
To be torn into tatters (as clothes, Magkawindangwindang (from wind-
etc.). ang).
VIII. Sometimes ka^ the definite of ma, combines with pag to denote
the source of something. (See index: sird. )
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MAGIN."
I. Magiuy which Minguella thinks a *' disguised passive*' in conception
reduplicates the gi of the last syllable of the particle for the present and
future tenses. It also changes m to n for the past and present indefinite.
It expresses the conversion or transformation, either gradual or sudden, of
one thing into another, as a general rule, the root being that into which
the other thing is converted or transformed. Magin is also used to express
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGXTAGE.
233
such ideas as '* to beget/' etc. Being a neuter particle generally there is
no imperative in such cases» as there can be no volition in the action ex-
cept with personal pronouns.
II. For slow, self-converting processes um is generally used, but in some
cases the use of magin is correct. Besides the indefinite tbe definites with
i and an exist. (See tables: 6lak.)
As magin generally denotes a state or condition, it admits ika with some
roots, and in combination with pa, the definite of magpa^ it also admits in
with others. (See tables: ddpai.)
III. As will be noted, magin is commonly used to express such acts as
the turning of wine into water by miraculous agency, etc. , as well as natural
processes. Some of the roots usually conjugated with magin are:
To be converted into wine.
To be converted into gall or bile.
To be turned into stone; to become
petrified.
To be converted into vinegar.
To be begotten.
To be made man.
MagindlaL (See tables: d/aA;.)
MaginapdS. Nagiginapdd ang dJdng
bibig (my mouth tastes like gall).
Maginbaid, Ang as&ua ni Loth ay
naginbatong asln (the wife of Lot
became a rock of salt).
Maginsukd, (See tables: «tU*d.)
Ma^inanak (from anak, "child*').
Na^inanak ni Abraham si Isaac; at
naginanak ni Isaac si Jacob; at na-
ginanak ni Jacob si Juda at kani-
yang mangd kapatid (Abraham be-
gat Isaac; and Isaac begat Jacob;
and Jacob begat Judas and his
brethren)— Matth. II, 2.
Magintduo, Ang anak nang Dies ay
nagintduo (the son of God was
made man). (But if volition is in-
cluded other particles or expres-
sions must be used.) Ang anak
nang Dios ay nagkaiauang tduo (the
son of God assumed the form of
man).
Magintagdlog. Nagigintdgalog ang
capitdn sa pangangusap (the cap-
tain resembles (or seems to be) a
Tagalog by his speech).
IV. It should be noted that nagin in the past tenses is the only sense
which can really be said to denote complete conversion, etc., the present
and future tenses conveying the idea of "seems to be," "may be," and
"might be," respectively.
V. Magin is also used in a neuter sense to express the assumption of
ofiice, states, conditions of mind, morals, or body, etc., if intention is not
meant, in which case other particles are used.
To become a Tagalog.
To becom o * ' presidente. ' '
To become just or virtuous.
To become a miser.
To become worthy.
Maginpresidente. Naginpresidente si
Gat Simeon at sakd nagingobemador
(Don Simeon became presidente
and afterwards governor).
MaginbanaL
Maginmardmot (from mardmot, mi-
ser; see ddmoi).
Maginddpat (from ddpai; see tables:
ddpat). Mardpaty fair; just; de-
serving. Karaptany merit; deserts.
Ang ikapaginddpat, the reason or
cause of being worthy.
Digitized by
Google
234
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To become an habitual litigant (bar-
rator).
To become deaf.
To become blind.
To become dumb.
VI. With some roots magin may
To be the motive or cause.
To befall.
To turn out to be true.
To be a servant
To be converted into an animal. Maginhdyop. MaghAyop, to sell, deal
in, or raise animals. Hay opart , cor-
ral for animals; pen. Kakayopariy
brutish ness. Ang pagkahayop,
brutality.
Maginpalausap. Naginpalaump siyd
(he has become an habitual liti-
gant).
Magi'Mngi.
Maginhulag.
Maginpipi.
express the idea of "to be." Ex.:
Magindahildn. ltd ang nagindahi-
Ian (this was the reason). M ang
na^gindahildn (this is the cause).
Maginpdlad. An) k ay 6, ang magigin-
pdlad ko? (What will my luck be?
[What will befall me?])
Maginlotdo, Nagintotdo ang sinabi mo
8a dkin (what you told me turned
out to be true).
Maginalild. Jtong tauo ii&y rnagigin-
alild, ninyd (this man will be your
servant).
VII. The idea of volition is sometimes admissible with magin when used
with personal pronouns. Ex. :
To be thine. Maginiyd.
To be mine. Maginakin. Akd^y magiginiydH ikdo
ay magigindkin (I will be yours
and you will be mine).
VIII. (a) Magin is also used in combination with the interrogative
adverbs ildnf (how many?) and magkanof (how much?) and with the
answers thereto. (6) With magin prefixed to a number and na following
it the completion of the period named is denoted. Magjn expresses the
idea of ** about" in these cases. Ex.: (a) Ma^iginildn sild? (about how
many will there be?) Magiginildn ang paroroonf (about how many will
go tnere?) Magigindalawang puo (about twenty). Magiginmagkano itdf
(How much will this be worth?) (6) Kung maginimng budn na (After
about a month). Nang maginilang drao (after a few days). Kung magin-
sangtadn na (after about a year).
IX. Magin may be used sometimes in the sense of "be it" or
"either" "or." Ex.: Maginitd; maginiydn (be it this or be it
that). Maginlalaki siyd; maginhahaye (be it man or be it woman). Ma-
ginngaydn; maginbdkas ay paroroon akd (either to-day or to-morrow I will
nave to go there).
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE " MAGSI."
I. This particle, which changes initial m to w for the indefinite past and
present, reduplicates the last syllable of the particle for the present and
future tenses. It has all three definites, and may be combined with all
other particles, which are placed between it and the root, except maka and
ma definite in the sense of power, which precede it. (See tables: alis;
gawd; tapon, and kuha. ) It has no other signification than to denote a
plurality or universality of subjects in connection with the verbal action.
Naturally there is no singular number. Ngd may be inserted after the
first two letters of the particle to indicate an extreme degree of plurality.
See tables: pagrdro/. Ex.:
To teach (many).
Magsidral. Magmpagdraly to study
(many). Ang mangd hatd dilo sa
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
235
To confess (many).
Togo out (many).
To look; behold, etc. (many).
To enter; come in (many).
To laugh (many).
bayan ito*y magsidpagdral na lahat
(ail the children herein this town
are studying). Aug mangd batd
nitong escuelahan nangagsidpagdral
(all the children in this school
are learning [or studying] ) . Maa-
npangdraly to preach (many).
Mangdgsipangdrcdf to preach (by a
great number).
Ma^sipagcumpisal. To hear confes-
sions (many priests (; magsipagpa-
cumpisal. {See index: cumpisal.)
Magsilabds, Magsilabds kayong Idhai
na naririto sa loob (all of you who
are inside go out).
Magaipandod. Bdkk ipinagmsipandod
nila ang ddgat iyang mangd tdno
iydnf (Why are those men look-
ing at the sea for?)
Magsipdsok. Magnpdsok kayong lahat
na naririyang walang gawd : ( Come
in all of you who are out there
doing nothing [or without work] ).
Magsitaua.
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE " MAGPATI.*'
I. This particle is little used, and besides the usual change of m to w for
the past and present indefinite reduplicates the second syllable (pa) of the
particle for the present and future tenses. It is used with roots express-
ing the idea of motion or positions of the body, and signifies to perform
such motions or take sucn positions voluntarily, and with briskness or
suddenly. If such sudden motion occur or position be assumed involun-
tarily, the ^ is dropped, forming inapaii^ equal in meaning to mapa. The
definites with i (ika) in the sense of cause, and a7i (han) for place exist.
(See tables; luhod.) Ex.:
To prostrate one*s self quickly.
To lie down quickly; to throw one-
self down.
To fall on one*s knees.
To turn the back abruptly.
To spring to the feet.
To sit down suddenly.
Magpatirapd (from dapd).
Magpatihigd. Magpaiihigd ka (lie
down quickly).
Magpaiiluhod. Ang ikapagpatUuhod:
the cause or reason for falling on
the knees. Ang pagpatiluhordn:
the place where or person knelt
to. (See tables.)
Magpatiialikod. To do the same
without intention, mapaliialikod.
Magpatitindig. Nagpaj^iitindig siyd
(he is springing to his feet). Na-
papatitindig ako (I sprang to my
feet unconsciously).
Magpatiupd. To sit down suddenly
without meaning to: mapatiupd.
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "mANHI."
I. This particle beside the change from m to n for the past and present
indefinite, reduplicates the second syllable {hi) of the particle for the present
and future tenses. This particle is used to express verbs of searching for
minutely, for those expressing the idea of removing dirt, etc., from the
face or body, and for miscellaneous ideas which will be better seen from
the examples. Certain letters beginning roots are modified by manhiy the
same as they are by man. The definites with i and panhiy in the sense of
Digitized by
Google
236
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
cause, with an and either panhi or hi in the sense of place, and with in
and either pan/ii or hi for ordinary definite sentences exist. (See tables:
matay; mdtay; tinga.)
II. A reciprocal form of many of the verbs conjugated with manhi may
be formed with an suffixed or with maghi in place of manhi, retaining an as
a suffix, however. Ex. :
To search for carefully; to glean.
To peck here and there (as a bird in
search of grain).
To search for grains of metals or
minerals.
To wash one's face; to remove stains,
smudges, etc.
To comb the mustache.
To pick the teeth.
To clean the ears.
To clean the eyes.
To treat swelled eyelids or wash
them.
To clean the nails.
To cleanse from head lice.
To follow by trailing; to hold in
memory (met.).
To rebel; revolt.
To avenge or take revenge.
To peddle; to sell bad goods.
To act like a child.
To tell the fortune by the palm.
Manhimdlat/ (from pdlay, "un-
husked rice ' ' ) . Fannimalayin ( hi-
malayin) mo ana iyong kakanin
(look for [glean J what you have
to eat). Ang gutum ay ang ipi-
nanhihimdlay myd (hunger is tne
cause of his gleaning) . Ang hukid
ni Juan ayang^inanhimalayan niyd
(he was gleanmg [he gleaned] in
the field of Juan).
Manhinukd (from tukd),
Manhimulos (from joiifes, '*all of one
color"). Pulo^ also means the
grains themselves.
Manhildmos (from Idmos, ** stain,
smudge"). The root hildmos is
from this combination.
Manhimisay (from misay, " mus-
tache").
Manhininga (from iingay "what ad-
heres to the teeth ' ' . See tables) .
Manhinuli (from tululiy "earwax").
Manhimutd, (from mutd, ** secretion
of the eye").
Manhimokto (from poktd, "swelling
or inflammation of the eyelids").
. Pamoktohin, a person frequently
afflicted thus.
Manhingokd (from kok6, "nail,
claw").
Manhingutu (from kutu, "head
louse " ) . Manhingutuhan or mag-
hingutuhaUf to cleanse each other
thus. Manhinoma, to cleanse of
body lice. Tomahin, person af-
flicted thus.
Manhimakds (from hakds, "footprint,
sign, trail, etc."). Bakasin mo at
naitd ang ydpak (follow it, here is
thefootprmt). Maghimakasan, to
follow each other on the trail, etc.
Manhimagsik (from hagsik, "cruel,
tyrannical").
Manhiganti (from ganti, "reward,
premium " ) . Pinanhiganti nild
siyd (they avenged him [her]).
Slid ang panhihigantihan niyd (he
will take revenge on them).
Manhilako (from lako).
Manhimosmos (from mosmds,
"child"). Mosmds mo itdf (Is
this your child?)
Manhimdlad ( from pdladf * * palm " ) .
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
237
To pretend to work, or to work
without purpose.
To be uneasy on account of solitude.
To meddle; intrude.
To faint; swoon.
To suspect evil.
To beat about the bush.
To change color or the expression of
the face.
To feel badly for lost work.
To embark in the boat of another.
To exert one's self.
Manhimanday (from panday^
"smith")' Panday tuikciy great
talker, "wordsmith."
Manhimangldo (from pangldo.j sad-
ness, fear, or uneasiness caused by
bei ng alone ) . Mapangldo na bdhay
(a lonely [solitary] house).
Manhimdsok (from pdsok), Houag
mong panhimasukan ang buhay
nang ibang mangd tduo (don't med-
dle with what passes in the life of
other people).
Manhimatay (from matayy "idea of
dyi ng. ' ' See tables : matay. )
Manhimula (from pula, "idea of not
believing and blaming another " ).
Fuld is the idea of redness.
ManhimUing (from piling, "bank,
shore"). Houag mo akong panA-
linggmilingan (Don't beat about
the bush with me; don't try any
red tape on me).
Manhimuti ( IroTaputt, * * idea of white-
ness").
Manhindyang (from sdyang).
Manhinakay (from sakayy "boat, ves-
sel").
Manhindpang (from tdpang).
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAGSA."
I. As usual, this particle has the past and present indefinite take n in
place of m, while the second syllable {sa) of the particle is reduplicated for
the present and future tenses. All three definites exist. See tables: insik.
The signification of this particle is imitation, adoption or following the
customs, dress, or language of another people. It is little used, maki being
more customary. Ex. :
To follow
To follow
To follow
To follow
To follow
To follow
To follow
American customs.
Bicol customs.
Visayan customs.
Spanish customs.
Ilocano customs.
Moro customs.
Tagalog customs.
Magsaamericano.
MagsahikoL
Magsabisaya.
Magsa^astila,
Magsailoko,
Magsakamorosan.
Magsaiagdlog. Ang sinasatagdlog,
what followed or imitated, etc.;
Ang ipagsatagdlog, the reason or
cause of such adoption. Pag is
dropped with in.
II. Magm; isa; as in the expressions magsadrao ka nang damit; put the
clothes in the sun: isahangin mo itong bard; hang this shirt in the wind, etc. ,
are not from this particle but from «a, the preposition "in," conjugated
with mag and i respectively.
III. The signification of magsa may be expressed by other particles
than makiy among them being magka and ma with an suffixed. Ex. : Si
Juan ay nagkakastUoAn (Juan is very Spanish in his ways [speech, etc.]).
Natatagalogan «iyd ( He is very Tagalog in his wavs ) . By doubling the root,
if a bisyllabic one, or the first two syllables thereof if longer, a diminu-
tive meaning is imparted. Ex.: Natatagaiagalogan sii/d ( He is somewhat
Tagalog in his ways).
Digitized by
Google
238
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAGKAPA."
This particle changes initial m to n for the past and present indefinite,
and reduplicates the last syllable {pa) of the particle for the present and
future tenses. The sole use of the particle is to express, prefixed to roots
denoting positions of the bodj^ or motions of the parts thereof, the invol-
untary remaining in such position, etc., as the result of fright, surprise, or
other violent emotion. The definites with t, to ex press the cause, and with
arif to express place, exist. (See tables: midai,) Ex.:
To remain with staring eyes.
To be left with the mouth open; to
stand with open mouth.
To stand showing the teeth (as an
animal, etc.
MagkapadUat. Dumilaiy to open the
eyes. MadiUU, to be open (as the
eyes) . Syn. , magkaparntiUxty to re-
main with the eyes open. Ang
ipagkapamulatj the cause of remain-
ing with staring eyes. Angpagka-
pamdldtaUj the place of remaining
thus. ^ •
Magkapangang&y from ngangA. Ngti-
mangdy to open the mouth.
Magkapangm (from ngisi).
THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAGKAN."
I. This particle takes n in the past and present indefinite in place of w,
and has the peculiarity of reduplicating the initial syllable of all roots con-
jugated by it. For the present and future tenses the second syllable {ka)
of the particle is reduplicated in a similar manner to the reduplication of
the gi ot magin, (See tables: luhd,.) Magkan signifies primarily the in-
voluntary flowing out of the secretions of the body, and nas the definites
of i for the cause and an for the place. In a metaphorical sense magkan is
also used to express involuntary emotions, actions, etc., as will be seen by
the examples:
To bleed.
To sweat from fear or illness.
To slaver; to drool.
To weep or shed tears unconsciously
(as from a wood fire).
To blush.
To undress or lose the clothes (in-
voluntarily).
To overflow; to exceed.
To drop off.
To burst into laughter.
To be stunned by a blow.
Magkandudugd ( ixomdugdy ' *blood' ' ).
Magkanpapdvris (horn pdwis).
Magkanlamway (from Idway, ** sa-
liva").
Magkanluluhd ( from luhd, * * tear " ) .
Magkanhihiyd (from hiyd). Kahi-
ydhiydy a shameful thing.
Magkanhohobd, Nagkakanhohobd si
Juan nang jHigtaua (Juan is shak-
ing his clothes off with laughter).
Magkanlalabis, Linabisan mo ang
utos ko sa iyd (You exceeded my
orders to you).
Magkanlalaglag,
Magkantataua.
MagkantitUap.
COMBINATIONS OF PARTICLES.
The combining of various particles is called "transcendency *' by the
writers upon Tagalog, and may be said to have the following characteris-
tics: With two exceptions, double or triple combinations of particles
prefixed to a root demand that the one immediately before the root take
the definite form. (See tables, dual; dlak, )
First exception. Some roots conjugated by mag and magka admit um,
(See tables, pUU; dali; sunod. )
Digitized by
Google
TAGAIOO LANGUAGE.
239
l8t Urn,
No def .
10th. Magin,
2d. Ma^,
Po^.
11th. Mag»i.
3d. Man,
Pan.
12th. Magsa.
4th. Maka,
Ma Ka,
13th. Jfan/ii.
5th. Magpa,
Fagpa,
14th. Magpaka.
6th. MaH.
PakL
15th. Magpali,
7th. Pa.
Fa,
16th. Magkapa.
8th. 3fa.
Ka Ma.
17th. Magkan,
9th. Magka,
Pagka.
Second exception. The particle maifea precedes other particles, a prop-
ert;^ also possessed by maggiy except when in combination with makay
which goes before maggi in such cases. (See tables, hxrb; gawd; hulog;
dito; alls. It must further be borne in mind that roots which are primarily
conjugated by mag retain pag as a prefix invariably, as do also those roots
differing in meaning with um and mag,
THE DESIGNATION OF PARTICLES.
For convenience of reference to the Spanish works and also to the work
of Humboldt, the numbers given by the early writers to the various
particles modifying roots are of use. They are:
Pagin.
Pagsi,
Pagsa.
Panhi,
Pagpaka,
Pagpaii.
Pagkapa,
Pagkan.
In, i and an are the three particles always accompanying the definite.
THE PABTICLES **KAPAG** AND **KAPAGKA.''
These particles are much used in Tagalog to express the ideas ^iven in
the following examples. The agent takes the genitive (or possessive) case
and the object or effect of the action the accusative. Ex. :
When my father left, I left also. Kapagalis nang dking amd^y akd^y
ungmalis din.
After he finished his work, he came Kapagkatdpus niyd nang kaniyang
to where I was. gauiVy pinarUohan niyd akd,
THE PARTICLES "PAG** AND ** PAGKA."
The same expressions as the above may also be rendered by pag and
pagka, Ex. :
When my father had gone away, they Pagalis dito nang dking amd*y siyang
arrived. pagddttng nitd.
When it strikes twelve, we will rest. Pagtuglug nang d las doce ay magpa-
pahingd tayo.
After you pay your respects to him, Pagbati mo sa kaniyd^y parini ka,
come here.
After I eat, I shall go for a walk. Pagkakain ko'y ak6*y magpapasial,
THE PARTICLE **PINAKA,'*
This particle, prefixed to roots, signifies to be held or reputed in what
may be expressed by the roots. It may also mean ** number of times
made '* in some cases. Ex. :
Rice is considered to be the bread of Ang kanin ay siyang pinakaiindpay
the Tagalogs. nang mangd tagdlog.
We regard you as a parent. Kayd p6^ y pinakamagulang namin.
He is regarded as their leader. Siyd ang pinakapund nild.
Digitized by
Google
240
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
FORMATIONS OP NOUNS FROM ROOTS.
Nouns are formed in various manners in Tagalog from roots.
I. Some nouns are formed by prefixing inapag to the root. Ex.
Mocker; scoffer.
Generous person.
Scoffer; hoaxer.
Proud; arrogant
person.
Mapagbird.
Mapagbiyaya.
Mapaglioak.
MapagpalcUd.
Respectful person.
Destructive person.
Mapagpitagan.
Mapagmd,.
II. Paid prefixed to roots forms other nouns. Ex. :
Blasphemer.
Barrator (litigant to
excess).
Boaster; great talker. Palamkd,
Palammpd.
Palausap.
Quarrelsome person. Paladuay.
Drunkard. Palainum.
Glutton. Palakain.
Loving (amorous) Palamdd.
person.
Some of the above may be verbalized by changing the initial p to n or ?/?.
Ex.: Nalakain siyd (he became a glutton). Nalalainum siya (he is be-
coming a drunkard). 3f(nr/a/atriA*d«^'i/<i (be will become a boaster). This
is now provincial.
III. Some nouns of the classes under consideration are formed bv pre-
fixing ma either to the imperative or future of the root, as combined with
in, Ex. :
Friendly person.
Amorous person.
Disobedient person.
Obedient person.
A joUv person.
An affectionate person.
A timid, bashful person.
A forgetful person.
A pleasant person.
A sorrowful person.
A delicate, sicklv person.
A timid person (cowardly).
Maibigin,
Mairogin; masintahin.
Masuain (from suay).
Maminorln (from sunod).
Matauanin (from tatia).
MawilihH.
Mahihiyin (from hiyd).
Malilimuiin (from lirnot).
Malulugdin (from lugod).
Malulumbayin (from lumbay).
Masasaktin (from sakil).
Mataiakutin (from idkot).
IV. Other nouns indicating occupations, professions, trades, etc., are
formed by man with the future tense of the indefinite. See list of such at
end of section three.
V. Nouns indicating a person suffering from a chronic disease or fault
are to be found formed by suflBxing in to the root denoting such disease
or fault. (See Par. XXIII, in.) These nouns may be verbalized by
in. Ex.: ^^iyd'y /iimAiM (he suffers from asthma). Sild^y tinaiamad {they
are lazy).
VI. Some nouns with an idea of place inherent are formed with the
future tense of some roots with an. Ex.: Pagbabaonan, cemetery; burying
place ( from badn ) . Paghibinyagdn^ bapistry ( from binyag) . Pagpapataydrif
abbatoir. Place of execution, Pagbibitaydn (from bitay).
VII. Some nouns indicating occupation are formedf by iaga combined
with />a^ ((a^apagr) before a root. Ex.: Tagapagbantay^ sentinel, watch-
man. Syn.: Tagapagtdnod. Tagapagsding, cook (from sding^ "cooked
rice"). Sometimes <a^a alone indicates this. Ex.: Ta^a%ao, wanderer,
stroller.
MISCELLANEOUS WORDS.
The following words arranged alphabetically by roots in Tagalog will
show the use of many idiomatic phrases, etc. :
Occupation; employment.
To try; to intend.
AbaJa (syn.: gawd).
Magakala (from akala).
Digitized by
Google
TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
241
Rancid.
To look after and follow a person.
To heed; to note.
The.
To reap or cut rice.
What?
Unaccounted for; without reason;
at random.
Rancid (usual word).
To growl.
To sing.
New.
To arise; to get up.
Widower or widow.
To change the clothes.
To launch or put a vessel into the
water; also to place a ladder.
To travel on horseback or by means
of horses.
To palpitate.
To weigh anchor.
A kind of rice.
To clear off timber in order to culti-
vate the land.
6855—05 16
Ala (rare). Ang pinaahx, what is
rancid. Ang pagaUij the rancid-
ity. Umalat to become rancid.
Makaala, to make rancid. Mag-
papaalttj to let everything become
rancid.
MagcUagbay (from alagbay). [Rare].
Umamiriy from amin.
Ang. Sometimes used as "be-
cause. ' ' Hindi ak6 makapagbangon,
ang ak6*y may sabit (I am not able
to get up, Decause I am ill).
Plural ang mangd,
Magani (from ani, "harvest").
And? Andbag&f (What then?) ^n(5
pa/ (What else?) And? Pagkak-
astilaan kitaf (What? Must we
speak in Spanish?)
Andand. Walang andand ang salapt
U6 (this money is unaccounted
for). Tinapal siyd niyd walang
andand (he slapped him without
reason).
Antd (same changes as a/<i).
UmangiU var. umingil (from angil;
ingil).
Magawii (from awii), Silang lahat
ay nagawU (they all sang).
Bago. Bagongtduo; bachelor. Ba-
gong damU^ new clothes. Kaba-
aon0auohan, youth fulness; bache-
lorhood. Bagong panginoon, ba-
gong ugali, new lord, new cus-
toms. MagbagOy to renovate.
MamagOf to wear for the first time;
also to renew. (See bago^ ad-
verb. )
Magbangon (from bangon^ a Java-
nese word; see tindia). Mag-
bangon ka (get up). Also means
to lift. Hindi akd makabangon
nang tapayan (I am unable to lift
the jar).
Bauo^ var. Bala,
Mngbihis.
Mahungsod. Bunasoran mo akd nang
hagddn (place the ladder for me).
Mangabayo (from cabayo^ "horse").
Derived from Sp. cabcUlOy which in
turn is from L. Lat. cahaUus, "nag;
pack horse."
Kumdbap ( from kdbag), Nagkakdbag
ang diodib ko (my heart [lit. chest]
is palpitating ) . Kakabagkabag^ to
palpitate greatly.
Kumabag (from kabag). Note the
difference in accent.
Kabog.
Magkaingin (from kaingin).
Digitized by
Google
242
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
To pick (as a guitar) ; to twang; to
pluck at.
To snatch; to take by force; to pull
up by the roots.
Iron or other chain or wire.
MagkalaUt (from kalahit^ var. kalhit),
Kumamkam (from kamkam).
What^s his name,
call it.
To catch on the wing.
Bad or stagnant water along a shore.
To seal or close a letter.
To belong to.
To be restless.
To order to elect.
Girdle.
To recline; to lean against.
To dig a hole.
To cease; to end.
To wash the hands or feet.
To speak nasally.
To unite or bind together.
To look blankly (as a blind person).
To sparkle (as the eyes in excite-
ment).
To roll up (as sleeves or trouser legs) ;
to lift the skirt.
To give alms.
To look first at one thing and then
another.
To avert the eyes.
To look here and there on account
of noise.
To look here and there hurriedly.
To glare in a wild manner.
To act foolishly.
To relish.
To wish ; to desire.
Wing (of bird).
To pardon; forgive.
Without respect; limit or considera-
tion.
Kauad. Magkauady to use a chain
or wire.
What do you Si kudn. Ang kudn. This word can
be verbalized by um, magy magpaj
makiy etc.
Dumdkit (from ddkit).
Dikyd. Madikyd itong dcUampasig itd
(there is stagnant water along this
shore).
MagdiiL Pandiitj seal, wax, gum.
Gumandn (from gandn). Gandn sa
akin ltd (This belongs to me).
Gumaso ( from gasOj rare) . GasohaUy
person disturbed. Mangaso, to
disturb another. Gagasohariy rest-
lessness. GagasogasOj very rest-
less.
Magpahalal (from kalal),
Higpit. Mahlgpity tight. Maghigpit,
to tighten; to cinch up (as a girdle,
strap, etc.). Walang higpimigpitj
slovenly.
Humilig (from hilig).
Humukay (from hukay). Ang pan-
hukay^ the spade.
Humumpay (from humpay).
Maghugas ( from hugas ) . ( See lamos,
Itgd).
Mahuhuraalhumal (from humal).
Maglangkap (from langkap).
Maglilang (from lilang).
Lumilap (from lilap) [rare].
Maglilis. Bdkit ka naglililis nang sa-
lawalf (Why are you rolling up
your trousers?)
MaglimoH (from Sp. limosna). Mag-
palimdSy to ask for alms.
Lumingap (from Ungapy var. linga^
nap.
Lumingat (from lirigat).
Lumingingig (from lingingigy rare).
Probably a combination of dingigy
idea of hearing.
Lumingos (from Hugos) .
Lumiyap (from liyap).
Mamangal. Magmamangdmangahany
to feign stupidity.
Numamnam (from namnam).
Magna^a {see pita).
Pakpak. Lumipady to fiv.
Magpaiduad (from patauady syn.,
tduad). Magpataua'^'ariy to forgive
each other.
Walang patomangd.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
243
To choose; to select.
To pick up.
To become dull (as a knife or i izor).
To boil rice.
Pest; epidemic; to suffer from.
To profess; to vow; to believe in.
To pass between rocks, hills, etc.
To peep.
To care for most diligently.
To grasp; take hold of; pinch.
To put vinegar on anything.
Can be.
To run away from or hide froj i.
To betray.
To cut grass; to mow.
To patch.
To be gaping stupidly.
To look upward.
To stare at.
Friend.
Pleasure.
To do anything swiftly.
To look down.
To assign to; to turn over to.
To sprinkle.
Orphan.
Pumill. Aug piliiny what chosen or
selected out. Ang pinilian {&\ng.)
or Ai\g pinagpUian (plur.), what
selected or chosen from.
MagpuloL
Pumorol ( from purol) . Ang purolin^
what dulled. Txvmomal (from
tomal)f to be dull (as business).
iTa/umaZan, dullness. AngitomcU,
the cause of such dullness.
Sumding ( from sding ) . Sindingy boil-
ed rice.
MagkasdIoL
Sumampalataya. Aiig mmasampala-
iaya, the creed, faith or believer.
SumUang (from eilang),
Sumilip (from sUip).
Magpdkampagsipag (from sipag).
Sumipit (from sipUy ' ' tongs ^' ) . Sini-
pitf an anchor.
Magsukd. Ang sukaan, what dipped
in or flavored with vinegar.
Sukat. Di sukaiy can not JSe. Sukal
bagd siyang pagkatiwalaanf (Can
he be trusted?) Silkat [di siikat]
siyana panivmlaan (He can [can
not] be trusted).
Tumakas (from takcig).
Tumaksil (from taksil). Taksil na
tduo, a traitorous or treacherous
man. KataksHan, treason, treach-
ery.
Tumagpas (from tagpas).
Magtagpi.
Tatangdtangd, Magtangatangdiianf to
feign stupidity.
Tumingald (from tinacdd). Ang
tinpalain, what seen thus.
Tamitig (from titig).
Katoto. Katotohin mo siyd (befriend
him).
Tud. Ang pagddting ninyd^y naka-
tuhid sa akin (Your arrival causes
me pleasure). Ikindtutud ko ang
pagddting ninyd (Your arrival is a
source of pleasure to me).
Tumulln (from tulin). Magtulin, to
go swiftly. Anq ipagtxUin, the
cause of going swiftly.
Tumung6 (from tungd). Also to bow
or incline the head. Angtunghdn,
what looked at thus or the person
bowed to.
Magukol. Si Pedro nagukol nang
kaniyang gagawin kay !fuan ( Pedro
turned over the work to be done
by him to Juan).
Magvjisik. Ang pamuidk, the
sprinkler.
UlUa.
Digitized by
Google
244 TAQALOG LANGUAGE.
To order. Maffdtos. Sundin mo ang iUos ho $a
iyd (follow my orders to you).
The following examples, taken from the Tagalo^ edition of the Renaci-
mientOf a paper of Manila, will give an idea of ordinary Tagalog composi-
tion as applied to modem conditions, and the use of foreign woras in con-
nection therewitii:
/. Singapore^ ika liB {dalawd) ng {nang) Abril {1905). Ang paraan ni
Rodjesivensky ay makardting siya sa cabo (longos) Padaran na nasa baybayin
ng Indo-China, at 160 viilla ang agwat sa Saigon. Doon nga magpipisan ang
nagkahiwaUiy na hiikbong-dagat ng rUpd (mangd) rusOy bun sakdling siWy
hindt mahdrang kapuwd ng mgdjapon.
Ang isang pangkat ng hixkbong-adgat na ptnanpungvilukan ni Rodjefivensky
ay nasa baybayin ng Muntok ngaydn na iilang milla ang agwai sa Sumatra.
Ang ibang rUpd sasakydn ay nasa pagiian pa ng Banka. Ang mgd sasak-
yanq it6*y nasa raang tiivasay sa pagUan vff Malaca.
iCindl sild nahdrang^ sapagkaH ang mgd japon mardhU ay nasa malapit sa
Formosa na doon nild ibig makUahan, ^
MardhU ang Baiavia ang susunod na daraungan ng mgd rvso, sapagkaH
doo^y may cableng dbut hdngang Rusia.
[Trandatioii.]
Singapore, 12th of April. The plan of Rodjestvensky is to try to (arrive
at) make Cape Padaran, on the coast of Indo-China, and 150 miles distant
from Saigon. There the separated fleets (sea armies) of the Russians will
unite, if the two are not encountered by the Japanese.
One division of the fleet commanded by Rodjestvensky is now off the
coast of Muntok a few miles from Sumatra.
The other vessels are yet in the region of Banka. The other vessels of
this (fleet) are remaining in the route (or neighborhood) of Malacca.
They were not molest^, because the Japanese continued to remain near
Formosa, where they wish to commence tne struggle.
Russian vessels continue to follow each other into Batavia, because there
is a cable connecting with Russia there.
II. Newchwangy ika? ng Abril. uing 500,000 kataong bumubuo ng Mkbo
ni Oyama ay sumasalakay na maigi sa hukbo ni IdnevUch na nakapagtibay sa
Kirin.
MaJtyuti ang paraan ng pagkakalilsob ng rn- fa japon at ang habd ng kaniUmg
lupcmg nahahanayan ay may dpat na puo u limang puong milla. InaakcUa
m Oyama na itaboy untiunti ang rfipd ruso hdngang sa kanilang madaig na
hibusan.
Ang hdkbong pinamamahalaan ni general Linevitch ay hindt hihigit sa bilang
na £00y000, sapagkaH bukod sa namatayan siyd ng marami sa labanan, ay
maramipa ang nabifiag ng mgdjapon.
[Translation.]
_ Newchwang, 7th of April. The 500,000 men composing the army of
Oyama are advancing in good order upon the army of Linevitch now in-
trenched at Kirin.
The plan of advance of the Japanese is good (excellent) and the length
of their front (ground) is 40 or 50 miles. Oyama is trying to push the
Russians gradually until he can vanquish them all (unitedly).
The army under the charge of General Linevitch does not number more
than 200,000, especially because Ijesides the many who have been killed in
battle there are many also who have been captured by the Japanese.
///. San PetersburgOy ika 6 ng Abril. Ang mgd japon ay nakagusvUong na
unti'Unti sa dakong kinalalagydn ni general Linevitch at ng kaniyang hukbo.
Isang drao paH ang Harbin ay hindi na marahil matatahanan ng rngd rtASOy
sapagkaH pmagiisipang gibain ng kadway. Hindi na pinangangaiawanan ng
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 245
nTgd ruso ang pagpapakatibay m Harbin, sapagkaH may nakikiniHnita sUang
malaking pangdnio na snsapilin doon. Ang dakong uurungan ng rngd rum ay
ang Vladivostok na kanUang inasahang mapagtitibayang maigi hdngang sa
magkaroon ng kapayapaan. Masamd ang tayd ng rftgd hdkbong ruso, data-
puwaU hindt rmmdn maj)ahu%ay, it6 dahU sa gulong nanpyayari sa Rugia.
Marami sa Rusia ang naniniwald na madadaig ang hukbo nx general Linevitch^
at hung magkagaydn ay magkakaroon ng kapayapaan,
[Translation.]
St. Petersburg, 6th of April. The Japanese are advancing little by little
upon the position of General Linevitch and his army. One day more, and
Harbin may possibly not be remaining to the Russians, because they think
it may be destroyed by the enemy. The Russians are making no efforts
to strengthen themselves in Harbm, because they believe themselves to
be in great danger of capture there. The place of retreat for the Russians
is Vladivostok, which tfiey hope to fortify so well as to hold it until peace.
The situation of the Russian armies is bid, but it can not be bettered on
account of the riots taking place in Russia. Many in Russia believe that
the army of General Linevitch will be defeated, and that in that event
there will be peace.
IV. Manila ika 14 ng Abril. Ibiriabalitd ng Gobemador Dancel {Lalavnpang
Rizal) , na noong unuigd ng ika 6 ng bdvxmg lumaldkad ay may nadakxp sa
Bagbagin na tatlong tduong labds at siyam na kalabao na ninanakao sa Nova-
licheSf dafawang bard at dalawang revolver, Noong ika 11 ay may nadakip
na isang tduong labds na may dalang, isang kalabao^ at isang rijleng mauser,
dalawang puong cartuchoH dalawang puong rifieng remington. Noong ika 10
ay may nasumpungan ang presidente $a Taytay na isang remington na maij
sampuong cartucho. Ang ingd kalabao ay dinald sa tosoreria municipal.
Noong ika 11 ay nakadakip din namdn si Gobemador Dancel ng isang nag-
ngangalang Pedro Pio, na di umano*y siyang nangbagahag na maigi sa
Baranka at Marikina noong viemes. It6*y ibinigay kay mayor Haskell ng
constabulario. May nadakip pa ring dalawang tduong labds na may isang
revolver coU at sampuong cartucho.
[Translation.]
It is announced by Grovemor Dancel (Rizal Province) that on the morn-
ing of the 6th of the current month there were captured at Bagbagin three
outlaws and nine of the carabao stolen from Novaliches, two shot^ns, and
two revolvers. On the 11th there were captured one armed outlaw, one
carabao, and one Mauser rifle, twenty cartridges, and twenty Remington
rifles. On the 10th the presidente (mayor) of Taytay secured a Reming-
ton and ten cartridges. The carabao were sent to the municipal treasury.
On the 11th Governor Dancel was also able to capture one called Pedro
Pio, said to be the person who made trouble at Baranka and Mariquina
last Friday. This person was turned over to Major Haskell, of the con-
stabulary. There were also two outlaws captured who had a Colt revolver
and ten cartridges.
V. Hindi maUdaunan at magtatayd ritd sa Maynild ng bagong hospital.
Itd'y isang ambagannahiningi ng Rt. Rev. Opispo Brent ng siyd^y nasa EtUadoe
Unidos.
Ang salaping gugugulin ay kaloob ng limang universidad sa Harvard, Yale,
Princeton, Pennsylvania at Columbia.
Ang mangangoMvM nitd ay ang Iglesia Episcopal, datapuwaH tantangapin
ang sinomang nadkol sa ibang religidn.
[Translation.]
It will not be long until there will be erected here in Manila a new hos-
Sital. This will be from a subscription solicited by the Right Reverend
iishop Brent when he was in the United States.
Digitized by
Google
246 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
The money to be offered is from the funds (interior) cf five universities:
Harvard, Yale, Princeton, Pennsylvania, and Columbia.
The direction of this (hospital) will be under the Episcopal Church, but
anyone will be received belonging to another faith.
VI. Ang gobemador sa Bataan si G. Tomds del Rosario ay nag alay sa Ba-
langa ng isang lupang may 15 Iiectarea at ^4^000, ang halagdy upang mapag-
tayuan ng isang ^^ secondary schooV* Ang yaong lupang ya6n ay magagamit
ta paga&ral ng agricultura 6 ng mgd. ddnong tungkol gapamumuHd, at magin-
garalan din namdn ng rrtgd pagsasanay ng pangpalakds ng katawan,
Sa akala rin namdn ng Gobemador ay mabviing magkaroon ng imng ma^strong
americano sa bayan bayan upang maitanyag ang ritgd paraan at ugaling ameri-
cano sa rngd JUipino.
[Translation.]
The governor of Bataan, Hon. Tom^ del Rosario, has given a piece of
land comprising 15 hectares and worth P'4,000, in Balanga, in order that
there may be a site for the erection of a ** secondary school." That land
may be used for teaching agriculture or for sciences or occupations per-
taining to the land, and tor instruction in the means of strengthening the
bodv (manual training school).
The endeavor of the governor will be to have one American teacher in
each town in order to snow the customs and habits of the Americans to
the Filipinos.
VII. Di umand'y hihilinpin ng Compania ng tranvia eUctrico na tulutan na
ang samkyang itd'y marapating paratingin kangan sa Palanyag,
Ipinagbihigay alam din namdn ngayan sa gobemador general ng nanganga-
sivxL sa tranvia eUctrico na sa lunes ay pasisxmulang patakbuhan ang daan sa
Santa Ana,
[Translation.]
It is said that the electric street-car company will ask that the line be
permitted to be extended to reach as far as raraflaque.
Notice has also been given to-day to the governor-general by the man-
agement of the electric railway that on Monday it will commence the
operation of the road to Santa Ana.
VIIL Paunawa. — Ipinamanhik sa sinomang nakapdlot ng isang dsong
lalaki na may balahibong kulay cafe at may putt sa dibdib at sa dulo ng paang
kanan sa unahdn^ may tagloy na collar sa liig at isang chapa na may numerong
(bilang) 1965, ay mangyaring ibalik 6 isauh sa daang Arranqae bHang (big. )
15S at doo^y kakamtan ang isang pabuya at dabUang pasasaldmat,
[Translation.]
Notice. — It is requested that anyone who may pick up a male dog with
coffee-colored hair and with white on the breast and the end of the right
front foot, bearing a collar on the neck and a tag with the number 1%5,
will be able to return or restore him to No. 158 Arranque street, where a
reward will be given, together with many thanks.
IX. Nawald. Sa bdhay na bilang 74 sa daang Rada, TondOj ay nawald
ang isang manuk na sasabunging balahibong lasaky maitim ang tahid, maputi
ang pa^t baldado ang datu sa kanan, Sinoman ang makapagdald 6 maka-
pagturd ng kincUcUagydn ng naturang manuk ay bibigydn ngpcibuyang hatagang
wal6 6 sampuong piso.
[Translation.]
Lost. — From the house No. 74 Rada street, Tondo, there has been lost
a gamecock with white and red (lasak) plumage, black spurs, and white
feet, with the middle claw of the right foot crippled. Anyone who may be
able to bring or point out the whereabouts of the said fowl will be given a
reward to the amount of eight or ten pesos.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
247
A careful study of the foregoing examples will enable one to clearly
understand the general run of the modem language. Reading the native
press, both for practice and keeping track of what is of interest in native
circles, is recommended to all who may be stationed in the Tagalog region.
Section Eight.
The following table of the contractions and variations of the roots of
Tagalog words will be found of use in quickly finding the form:
English.
To salute; hail
To remember
To be lazy
What?
Spouse; to marry
Salt; to salt
Roof; cover; to roof
To carry on the shoulders
Uneasiness
To moisten
To suffer; endure
To pound rice
To give
To accustom
To buy
To change the clothes
To open
To separate
To spill
To pass
To bring; carry
To seize; arrest; detain
To arrive
To stick
To stretch out the arms
To hear
Blood
To do one*8 duty
To work
To pull down; destroy thus. . .
To awake
Deposit
To kiss
To substitute
Ribbon; band
To sow; scratter seed
To conduct; escort
To lie down
To blow
To complain
To wait for
To ask for
To borrow (except money) . . .
To change
To go for water
The other side
Abd
Alaala
Alisagd . . .
Anof
Asdua
Asin
Atip
Babd
Balisd
Basd
Bald
Bayo
Bway
Bihasa ...
Bill
BihiH
Bukds
Bukod
Buhos
Daan
Dald
Dakip
Dating ...
Dikii
Dipd
Dingig ...
Dugd
Ganap ...
Gavu
Gibd
Gisdng
Habilin . . .
Halik
Haiili ....
Hapin
IIoMk
Haiid ....
Higd
Hihip ....
Hinanakit
Hintay . . ,
Hingi
Hiram
Ihd
Igih
Kabild ...
Contraction, variation,
etc.
Ahin,
Alalahdnin.
AUsugdn,
Anhinf
Asauin.
Asndn,
Aptdn.
Babhin.
Kabalisanhdn,
Basin; basdn,
Bathin.
Bay in.
Bigydn,
Bimnhin,
Bilhin; bilhdn,
Bisin; bisdn.
Buk»dn,
Bukdin,
Busdn.
Dandn; danin,
Dalhin; dalhdn,
Dakpin.
Datnin; datndn,
Dikiin; diktdn,
Dip'hin; dip-hdn.
Ding-gin; ding-gdn,
Dugin; dugdn,
Gampdn.
Gamn; gawdn,
Gibln; gibdn,
Gisndn.
Habinldn.
Hagkdn.
Ifaiinhdn,
Ifapndn,
Ilaskdn.
Hatddn.
Higdn; hihigdri.
Hipan.
Ifinanaktdn.
Ilintln.
Hingin; hingdn,
Ilirmin; hirmdn,
Ibhin; ibhdn.
Igbin; igbdn.
Kabilin; kabUdn,
Digitized by
Google
248
TAOALOO LANGUAGE.
English.
Contraction, variation,
etc.
To bite
To deny; cloak
Toeat
To untie; loosen
Left
To obtain
To grope for
To grasp; embrace
To nibble
To cut off
To know; be acquainted with .
To exceed
To place
Strength
To grow
Contents; pulp
To soften
Far; distant
Five
To err; to make a mistake
To observe; experience
To begin; commence
To settle; appease
To contain ; include, etc
To listen
To dream
Name
To break (as a rope, etc. )
To squeeze
To wring
To cut
To embark; to mount
To be ill
To err; sin
To tell; report
Evil
To come back; to give back . .
To bum rubbish
To devour; eat
To put into
To follow; obey
To wonder at
To cover
To turn the back
To sow
To grasp; to hold to
Tostand
To taste; try
To look
To redeem
To dry
To move
To return; repeat
To sit down
To lack
Kagat
Kaild ....
Kain
Kalag
Kalixvd . . ,
Kamit
Kapd
Kapit
Kibit
Kitil
Kilala
Labis
Lagay
Lakds
Lakl
Lamdn . . ,
Laid
Ijayo
Limd
}fali
Masid
Muld
Palagay ..
PcUaman .
Pakinig...
Panaginip
PangaUin ,
Paild
Pigd
P'ml
Putol
Sakay
Sakit
Sala
SalUd ....
Samd
Saoli
Sigd
Sild
mid
Sunod
Takd
Takip
Talikod,..
Tanim
Tangan . . .
Tayd
Tikim
Tingin
Tubds
Tuyd
Ugd
UK
Up6
WaM
Kagtin.
KaHdn,
Kanin,
Kalgin; kcdgdn,
Kaliwin; kaliw&n,
Kamidn.
Kapin; kapdn.
Kaptin; kaptdn,
Kibtin; kibtdn,
Kitlin; kiUdn,
Kilanlin.
Lahhdn,
Lagydn,
Laksdn.
Lakhin; lakhdn,
Lamndn.
Latin; latdn,
Laydn.
Limhdn.
Malin; maJdn.
Masddn.
MtUdn.
Palagydn. From lagay,
Palamndn. From lamdn,
Pakingdn.
Panagimpdn.
PangarUan.
Patddn.
Pigin; pigdn.
Pislin.
Putlin; puildn,
Sakydu.
Saktirt; saktdn,
Sanldn.
Salitin.
Samin; samdn.
Saolin; moldn,
Sigdn.
Silin; sildn.
Sidldn.
Sundin.
Takhdn.
Takpdn.
Tahkddn,
Tamndn.
Tangndn.
Taydn.
Tikmdn.
Tlngndn,
Tubsin; tvhftdn,
Tuyin; tuydn.
Ugln,
IJlin; Uldn,
Updn.
Walin; tualdn.
Digitized by
Google
TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 249
II. For names of animals, birds, fishes, and invertebrates not given in
this work the student is referred to Jordana*s Bosquejo Geogrdfico i His-
t&rico Natural del ArchipUlago FUipinOy Madrid, 1885; to the work of Friar
Casto de Elera, Dominican, entitled Catdhgo Sistemdtico de Toda la Fauna
de PUipinaSy Manila, 1895; and to the book of Montero y Vidal, El Archi-
pielago Filipino y las idas MarixinaSy Carolina^ y PalaoSf Madrid, 1886. For
the fauna the great work of Friar Blanco, Augustine, will be of great aid,
as well as the reports of the forestry and agricultural bureaus at Manila.
The work of Father Delgado, S. J., Manila, 1892, deserves attention as
revised and annotated.
In conclusion, it is hoped that a careful study of the language under dis-
cussion will lead the student to explore for himself, and note the localisms
and changes in each province. Any suggestions, corrections, or criticisms
will be welcomed by the author.
Digitized by
Google
250
TAGALOG LANGUAGE.
« u -^
9 q;
o
{^
a
•^1
«I
'S «M .2 ^
'd 'd -fj y
^og|
A fit
o o
^
^3
- C
o Z>
fl *
P
a
o
2 °
"It
6 3
o o
"S
08 5
■el
?!
O *
o
Digitized by
Google
>NJ
m
In,
I and II futun
In) si Maria. ** I shall
In I si Maria. "You w;
In ^ si Maria. "He (fi
iN^KsiMaria. **We(i
iNnasiMaria. **We(
In nasi Maria. "You
In)» si Maria. * * They
iVTi Maria.
^4 Maria.
JHf^ Maria.
X^ si Maria. \ Same i
2fii si Maria.
^> si Maria.
^4 Maria.
InJ AriatiN mo na? " Wha
Adiilatmo? "Whatwl
iM^Isdang ^ogawlN na niy|
Isf^g fiuigawft niyd. ' 'I
HiAitiHiN mo na? " WhJ
Aiiabimo? "Whatwi|
Ii^AifuKiN niny6 na? oi
7 you have taken?"
IiUj^lat mo na nit6? or
1 you have written th
^ifM itong pdlay or «
^111) have sown this ri|
inMU na it6? orMaJpi
'^rShifl?"
il
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
'i
I and
' i
ikonaei TomdeJ
Is nang limang i
loroafl." ^
^ \
H na or JfaArodi
to fia or Mak€$
$ na or JfalMilJ
if ak6 na or Jlf4
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
I and II future peii
^ or MakavKQ&nX ak^
I
)\y& na it6 or Ma|mk^
lesild. "They will havi
tt siyd. * * He will hav(
36 na or MAKApanlibi
pt6. "He will have b^
iyditonglahat. "Hei
Jnild iydn. "They will
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
I and II future perfect.
ak6.
"I shall have
^
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
1 I and II
r
3^^
,r
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
R^
I*anhima.lBLyiv )
nfN. "Glean a
mi
teeth witH thia
Hinii^&han mo
** Clean your tet
Magsainaik ka.i
like a Chinams)
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES,
GRAMMATICAL INDEX.
Accent, change of, 18.
Changes meaning, 19.
General rules of, 18.
Accents, 18, 19.
Acute, 18.
Grave, 18.
Circumflex, 18, 19.
Active (voice), 20.
Adjectives, 20, 38, (full analysis of) 55, 56, 57.
Prefixed to noun, 31.
Adjectives, comparison of, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76.
Equality, 72, 73.
Inferiority, 73.
Superiority, 73, 74.
Superlative, degree of, 74, 75, v6.
Adjectives (regarded as to meaning) :
Colors, 63.
Of condition, 61, 62.
Of physical conditions of body, 63, 64. ,
Of quality, 58, 59, 60.
Of quantity, 62.
Mental, moral, or personal attributes, 64-71.
Miscellaneous, 71, 72.
Adjectives, negative, 57.
Adjectives, plural of, 57.
Adjectives, position of, 57.
Adjective, predicate, 32.
Adverbial numerals, 79, 80.
Adverbs, 20, 38, (with adjective) 74, 75, (fully discussed) 83-86, (definition
of) 83, (verbalizing) 83, 84.
Adverbs:
Affirmative, 99.
Negative, 99, 100.
Of degree, 72, 75, 98.
Of measure, 72, 75, 98.
**Flat,'' 83.
*'Flexional,'' 83.
** Phrasal,»' 83.
Interrogative, 32, 33.
Of doubt, 100.
Of manner, 93, 98.
Of quality, 93, 98.
Of motion, 84.
Of place, 34, 84, (list of many) 86, 87.
Of time, 87-92.
Of succession, 87-92.
Affirmative adverbs, 99.
251
Digitized by
Google
252 INDEXES.
Affirmative particles, 37.
alangan, (adverb), 73.
an (suffix), 18, 66, 108, IV, 141, I, II (full discussion), 142-153.
Antonym, definition of, 57.
Arabic element in Tagalog, 14, 38.
Article, indefinite :
Substitute for, 31.
Article (of common nouns, places, countries, etc.), 28.
With possessive pronouns, 37.
Article (of proper nouns, nouns of relationship, etc.), 27, 28.
Declined, 27.
Plural, 27.
Special plural, 27.
Syntax, 28.
Articles, instrtunents, etc., with pan prefixed, 209, XVII.
ay (particle), 32, (with antonyms), 106, VI.
Be to, (verb) 32.
To be there, 85.
Cardinal numerals, 76, 77, 78.
Cases, 20, 38.
Chinese words in Tagalog, 14, 38.
Clauses of equal force, two, 32.
Comparative :
Of adjectives, 72, 73, 74.
Of equality, 72, 73.
Of inferiority, 73.
Of superiority, 73, 74.
Conjunctions, 102-104.
"And'' 32.
Adversative, 102, 103.
Alterative, 102.
Binding, 102.
Causative, 103, 104.
Conclusive (illative), 104.
Conditional, 104.
Contractions, 247, 248.
Definite, the, 20, 30, (discussion) 108, I, II, III.
Which definite, 108, IV to XV.
Dialects, 35.
Diminutives, 110, IX, (urn) 180, {mag) 192.
Direct object, 109, V, VI.
One, 109, V.
Distributive numerals, 80.
Do (make) to, 108, I, II, 110, XI, XIII.
Do not, 100.
Dual number, 35, 36, 38.
Endings, 31.
Consonant, 31.
In diphthong, 31.
In **n," 31.
In vowel, 31.
Euphonic changes, 32, 34, 81, (with man and pan) 201, 209.
Exclamations, 104, 105.
** Exclusive (editorial) we '' 35, 36, 38.
Future perfect tense, 106, X.
Future tense, 106, X.
ga (interrogative particle), 74.
gaalfn, 74.
gaano, 74.
ganga, 74.
gaya, 74.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 253
Gender, lack of, 38.
General terms, lack of, 19.
Genitives, double, of personal pronouns, 35, 36.
han (suffix), 18, 56, 141, I, II, (full discussion) 142-153.
hin (suffix), 18, 56, (with weights, measures, etc.) 82.
Homonym, definition of, 57.
i [particle], 108, IV, (cause, instrument or time) 109, V, (combined with
in) 110, XII, (fully discussed) 132-141.
Idioms, 20.
ika [compound particle] (with adverbs) 84, 85, (meaning cause) 108,
IV, 138, XVIII, 211, 1.
ihina [compound particle] (with adverbs), 84, 55, (meaning cause) 108,
IV, 138, XVIII, 211, I.
ikinapa [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85.
Imperative, 105, II.
Intensity, quicknesss, with, 105, III.
Imperfect tense, 106, X.
in (suffix) 18, 56, (inserted) 57, (with weights, measures etc.) 82, (with
pa) 84, 85, (motion toward or control of) 108, IV, (combincKi with i)
110, XII, (discussion) 112, I, to 114, VI (idea of attraction toward)
114-115, (possession) 115, (verbs of calling, 115, (of reaching for) 116,
(verbs of carrying, cutting, measuring or weighing) 116-119, (verbs of
destruction) 119, (verbs of receiving) 120, (of inviting) 120, (of eating,
drinking, etc.) 122, (acts of senses) 123, 124, (acts of will or mind) 124,
125, (verbs of making) 125, (of wearing) 125, (various) 126, (suffixed)
127-130.
In an, 130.
Inclusive **we,'' 35, 38.
Indefinite, 20, 30, (discussed) 111, I, to 112, V
Principal particles of. 111, I.
Indicative, 106, IX.
Indirect object, 109, VI.
Infinitive, 106, IX.
ini [compound particle], 110, VIII.
Intransitive verbs, 107, XI.
ipa [compound particle] (explained), 109, VIII.
tpag [compound particle], 109, IV (explained), 109, VIII.
tpagka [compound particle], 109, VIII.
xpagkaka [compound particle], 109, VIII.
xpina [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85 (explained), 109, VIII.
xpinag [compound particle] (explained), 109, VIII (example), 110, IX.
ipinagka [compound particle], 109, VIII.
ipinagkaka [compound particle] (with adverb), 85 (explained), 109, VIII.
ka (particle expressing likeness), 72.
kcmng (compound particle), 72.
ka (imparting idea of intensity, etc. ), 105, III.
(linking opposite ideas), 106, VI.
ka [particle], 211.
ka an [compound particle], 200, 201.
kapag [particleY 239.
kapagka [particle], 239.
hdlang (adverb meaning "less*'), 73.
ma (adjective forming particle), 55, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed), 196-
201, (def. of maka) 211.
ma in (Un)y 131, 132.
mxig (nag), 56, (verbalizing adverb) 84, 85, (use) 110, X, 111, I, (fully dis-
cuied) 180-194.
magin [particle], 232-234.
magka [particle], 38, 85, (combinations) 109, VIII, (use) 110 X, (fully
discussed) 230-232.
magkan [particle], 238.
Digitized by
Google
254 INDEXES.
magkapa [particle], 238.
magkapantay (compound particle), 73.
magkapara (compoond particle), 73.
magkaparis (compound particle), 73.
maghmng (compound piirticle), 73.
magma (compound particle), 56.
magpa [particle], 109, VIII, (use) 110, X, (fully discussed) 217-223.
moffpaka [particle], 225-227.
magpaii [psuticle], 235.
wa^«a [particle], 237.
magd [particleT, 235, 236.
maka [particle], 201, IV, (fully discussed) 211-217, ^when meaning
** cause") 66, (peculiar construction with) 112, VIII, (indicating com-
pleted action) 93.
maki [particle], 227-230.
mala (forming adjectives), 56.
man [particle], 37, (with weights, measures, moneys) 81, (with adverbs)
85, (fully discussed) 201-211.
manhi [particle], 235-237.
mapa (as adjective forming particle), 56.
mapag (as adjective forming particle), 56.
may (use) 110, XIII.
mayrdon (use), 110, XIII.
mina (minama) [particle expressing opinion], 56.
na (as adjective forming particle), 56, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed) 196-
201, (def. of maka) 211, (with irregular form of verb) 171-175.
nag [particle] (with adverb), 85, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed) 180-194.
nagin [particle], 233.
nagka [particle] (with adverb), 85.
no^A^an [particle], 238.
na^A:apa [particle], 238.
nagpaka [particle], 225, I.
nd^f>ati [particle], 235.
na^8a [particle], 237.
nagsi [particlej , 235.
naita [particleT, 201, IV, (fully discussed), 211-217.
naki [particleT, 227, I.
nan [particle], 201, IV.
napa [compound particle], 223, 1 (with adverbs), 85.
napa^a [particle], 223, I.
Negative adjectives, 57.
Negative adverbs, 99, 100.
Negative verbs, 30.
Nominative case:
Preceded by article and followed by genitive, 28.
With genitive inserted between nominative and article, 28.
Noun:
In genitive modifying nominative, 31.
Nouns, 20, (common) 28, (exp. ), 38.
Source, 28, (from roots) 240.
Numerals, 76-80.
Adverbials, 79, 80.
Cardinals, 76, 77, 78.
Distributives, 80.
Ordinals, 78, 79.
Occupations (with man prefixed), 205, 210.
Ordinal numerals, 78, 79.
pay the 66 roots beginning with, 175-180.
pa (with adverbs), 84.
papa (do.), 84.
pa (yet, still), 73.
pa [definite of ma^pa], 109, VIII, 217, I, (fully discussed) 223-225.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 255
pag [particle], 110, VIII, IX, (retention) 110, X, 194.
pagka [particle], 194, 201, III, 230.
pagpaka [i)article], 225, I.
paia [particle], 225, 1.
paki [particle], 227, I.
pala (forming adjectives), 56.
pan [particle], 201, 209, XVII.
panhi [particle], 235, 236.
para (particle of comparison), 72.
Participle, 106, X.
Particles, combinations of, 238, 239.
Designation of, 239.
Particles, verbal, 19, 20, (most important) 106, VIII.
Particularizing verbs, 19.
Passive, 20.
Past tense, 106, X.
Phrases, ordinary, some, 20-27.
pinag [compound particle], 110, IX, 195, II.
pinag an [compound particle and suffix], 110, VIII.
pinagka [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85, (discussed) 230.
pinaka, 227, IX.
pinakd [particle], 239.
pinaki [particle], 227, I.
pinapa [compound particle] (with adverbs), 84, 85.
Place (how expressed), 141, II.
Pluperfect tense, 106, X.
Plural (of adjectives), 57.
Plural (of nouns), 28, 38.
Special plural of «i, 27.
Prefix, retention of, 106, VII.
Prepositions (fully discussed), 100-102.
Present tense, 106, X.
Pronouns, demonstrative, 33,34, (idiomatic use) 34.
Pronouns, indefinite, 37, (exp.) 38.
Pronouns, interrogative, 32.
Pronouns, personal, 35, 36.
dialects, 35.
idioms, 35.
Pronouns, possessive, 36, 37.
With ang and ang «a, 37.
Syntax and order, 37.
Pronouns, relative, 38.
Proper nouns (article of), 27.
puma [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85.
jReduplication of roots, 56.
With ka an (han), 75, 76.
Of first syllable of numerals, 77.
To form diminutives, 110, IX.
Respect, great, how indicated, 37.
Root words in Tagalog, number, 13.
Roots, reduj)lication of, 56.
Roots, differing? with um and wopf, 154.
Roots, the 66 beginning with pa, 175-180.
Sanskrit words in Tagalog, 13, 38.
Sex, how indicated, 31.
Sing (particle meaning **afi^'), 72.
Spanisn element in Tagalog, 14, 38.
Superlative:
Of adjective, 74, 75, 76.
Absolute, 75.
Relative, 75.
Simple, 74, 75.
Digitized by
Google
256 INDEXES.
Synonym, definition of, 57.
Synonyms, 19.
Tagalog language, importance of, 13.
Dialects of, 13, 35.
Relationship of, 13.
Preservation of verbal system of, 13.
Number of root words in, 13.
Sanskrit element in, 38.
Chinese element in, 14, 38.
Arabic element in, 14, 38.
Spanish element in, 14, 38.
English element in, 14.
Lack of Japanese element in, 14.
Tagalog:
Pronunciation of, 15.
Structure of, compared, 107, XIV, XV.
Verb, compared, 107, XVI.
Tenses, 106, X.
Lack of change within, 107, XII.
**Ties,'* euphonic, 31.
Transitive verbs, 107, XL
U, when considered as consonant, 31.
Urn (particle), (with adverb), 84, (Use shown), 110, X, 111, I, (Fully dis-
cussed), 153-170, (Diminutives), 180.
Verb (understood), 32.
Verbs, 20, 38, (discussion) 105-108.
Completeness of Tagalog verb, 107, XVI.
Definite, 108, I, II, III.
Definition of, 105, I.
Intransitive, 107, XL
Modes, 106, IX.
Particularizing, 19.
Superlative form, 76.
Tenses, 106, X.
Transitive, 107, XL
Wold (with adjective), 74, (use) 110, XIII.
Words, number of in Tagalog, 19.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Able to , to be, 211, III, 213, VII.
Able to do, to, 177.
Accept, to, 120.
Accompany, to, X33, 165.
Act like a , to, 230.
Acts of the senses, 123, 124, 214.
Acts of will or mind, 124, 125.
Add, to, 137.
Advise, to, 134.
Afraid, to be, 129.
Aid, to, 185.
Animals, domestic, 28, 29.
Approach, to, 184.
Arrange, to, 120.
Arrive, to, 140.
Ascend, to, 174.
Ashamed, to be, 198.
Ask, to, 121.
Asleep, to be, 198.
Assemble, to, 184.
Attraction toward, idea of, 114.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 257
Bathe, to, 150.
Bed; bedding, 28, 29.
Bed, to be in, 199.
Bed, to go to, 151.
Bite, to, 122, 123.
Blow, to, 162.
Body, parts of, 49, 50, 51.
Borrow, to, 114, 115, 137, 164.
Breaking, verbs of, 198.
Bridges, 43.
Bring, to, 114, 115.
Build a house, to, 133.
Buildings, kinds of, 43.
Bury, to; inter, to, 195.
Buy, to, 114, 131, 133, 164, 172, 182, (at retail) 138.
Calculate, to, 124.
Call, to, 115, 173.
Calling, verbs of, 115.
Capture, to, 173.
Care for, to, 169, 204.
Carry, to, 116, 133, (different ways) 116, 117.
Cause , to, 211, IV, 212.
Charitable, to be, 145.
Choose, to, 114.
Civic dignities, 53.
Clothing, articles of, 62.
Cold, 47.
Come down, to, 130.
Come here, to, 147.
Come in, to, 173.
Come out, to, 129.
Coming or going, 20.
Communication, means of, 43, 44.
Compare, to, 141.
Compass, points of, 47.
Compel, to, 193.
Complain, to, 114.
Conform, to, 140
Conquer, to, 176.
Consider, to, 124.
Contend with, to, 172.
Contradict, to, 172.
Cook, to, 133.
Cooking utensils, etc., 40.
Cooking, verbs of, 135.
Country, character of, 44.
Cover, to, 142.
Curse, to, 185.
Cursing, Tagalog, 105.
Cut, to, 117, (different ways) 117, 118.
Cut hair, to, 168.
Dark, to become, 163.
Dawn, to, 162.
Deceive, to, 144.
Descend, to, 176.
Desire to, 169, 170.
Desire, to, 124.
Destroy, to, 119, 138, 156.
Destruction, verbs of, 119, 120.
Die, to, 119, 141.
6855—06 17
Digitized by
Google
258 INDEXES.
Dignities, civil and military, 53.
Directions (of compass), 47.
Disappear, to, 136.
Diseases, names of, 51.
Disentangle, to 120.
Disobey, to, 172.
Dive, to, 128.
Dream to, 176.
Drink, to, 122, 127, 159. 175.
Drinkine, 24, (drinkables) 28, 29.
Drowned, to be, 201.
Dwell, to, 175.
Earthquake, 47.
Eating, 24, (materials) 28, 29, 39, (verbs of) 122, 127, 159, 172.
Edifices (list of), 43.
Embark, to, 140, 195.
Empty out, to. 141.
Endure, to, 185.
Enter, to, 173.
Envy, to, 175.
Equalize, to, 141.
Erect, to, 152.
Evil, to do or cause, 212.
Exchange, to, 120, 164.
Explain, to, 125.
Extinguish, to, 119, 156.
Faint away, to, 119.
Fall, to, 196.
Fall back, to, 175.
Feel, to, 123.
Ferry, ford, 44.
Fight, to, 184.
Finished, to be, 201.
Fire, 40, (conflagration) 43, (signal fire) 43.
Firewood, 40.
Fish, edible kinds, 39.
Fish, to, 121, 122, 206.
Fishing, terms used in, 49.
Fly, to, 128.
Follow, to, 139, 172.
Foodstuffs, 28, 29, (cooked) 113, V.
Forage, grass, 43.
Forbid, to, 189.
Force, to, 193.
Ford, ferry, 44.
Forget, to, 198.
Fractions, how expressed, 79.
Fruit (kinds), 29.
Game, names for, 39.
Gather, to, 141.
Get ready, to, 140.
Get rid of, to, 136.
Give, to, 136, 143.
Give back, to, 134.
Glad, to be, 198.
Go, to, 129.
Go away, to, 133, 174.
(lO back, to, 175.
Go down, to, 130.
Go far, to, 173.
CfO in, to, 173.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 259
Going or coming, 21, 22.
Good, to do, 212.
Grasp, to, 147.
Grass; forage, 43.
Graze, to, 127.
Greetings; salutations, 20.
Grin, to, 160.
Guard, to, 144, 181.
Guide, to, 208.
Have, to, 30, 85, 86, (not to have) 30.
Hear, to, 123.
Hearing, verbs of, 145, 146.
Heap up, to, 137.
Heat, 47.
Heavenly bodies, 45.
Help, to, 185.
Horses and horse equipments, 42.
House, 40 (parts of) 40, 41.
Household furniture, 28, 29, 41, 42.
Hungry, to be, 128, 196, 197.
Hunt, to, 121, 206.
Inquire, to, 121.
Insult, to, 182.
Inviting, verbs of, 120.
Join with, to, 165.
Join with in , to, 228.
Jump, to, 186.
Jump down, to, 130.
Kick, to, 185.
Kill, to, 119, 156.
Kiss, to, 145.
Kneel, to, 158.
Knees, to be on, 199.
Land (features of), 44, 47.
Lauch, to, 160.
Lead, to, 175.
Leave, to, 133, 174.
Leavetaking, 23.
Lend, to (money onlv), 138.
Lend wilhngly, to, 138.
Lie down, to 151, (various postures of) 159.
Like, to, 124, 170.
Listen, to, 123.
Look, to, 186.
Look at, to, 123, 148, 172.
Look for, to, 133, 169.
Looking for, verbs of, 116.
Look out of, to, 127.
Lose, to, 129.
Love, to, 124, 125.
Make (do), to, 108, 1, 11.
Make haste, to, 193.
Making, verbs of, 125.
Malinger, to; play sick, to, 192.
March, to, 166.
Maritime terms, 45, 48.
Meals; food, 39.
Measure, to, 118.
Measures, moneys, weights, 81, 82.
Meet, to, 184.
Metals, minerals, 49.
Digitized by
Google
260 INDEXES.
Military grades, 53.
Miss, to, 129.
Mock, to, 185.
Moneys, weights, measures, 81, 82.
Months, names of, 46; days of, 79.
Moon, 45.
Motion to, to, 115.
Moving, verbs of, 116.
Mutter, to, 189.
Natural divisions (of islands), 48.
Nautical terms, 45, 48.
No, 99.
Not, 99.
Numerals, how expressed, 76-80.
Obey, to, 139, 172.
Occupations, etc., 54, 65.
Open, to, 142.
Order, to , to, 217-219.
Overtake, to, 131.
Pass, to, 182.
Pay for, to, 147.
Persevere, to, 177.
Personal possession, 115.
Physical acts, 160, 161.
Pierce, to, 147.
Place, how indicated, 148-151.
Place, to, 136.
Plant, to, 136.
Political divisions, 48, 49.
Poor, to be, 200.
Positions, to be in certain, 199.
Pour out, to, 137.
Practice m^icine, to, 204.
Preach, to, 204.
Professions, 53, 54.
Promise, to, 177.
Pronounce, to, 189.
Proper, to be, 184, 197.
Provoke, to, 175.
Push, to, 186.
Put, to, 136.
Quarrel, to, 184.
Rain, to, 162.
Reach, to, 131.
Read, to, 170,171,173.
Reap, to, 203.
Receive, to, 120.
Receiving, verbs of, 120.
Recommend, to, 134.
Relatives, kin, 31, 113, V.
Remain behind, to, 139.
Remember, to, 124.
Remit, to, 133.
Report, to, 134.
Reprimand, to, 121.
Request, to, 114, 132, 146.
Resist, to, 172.
Resolve, to, 177.
Retreat, to, 175.
Rice, kinds of, 113, V.
Rice, t/O trade or sell, 143.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 261
Rivers, streams, 44.
Roads, trails, etc., 43.
Rub, to, 124.
Run, to, 128.
Sad, to be, 138, 198.
Salutations, greetings, 20.
Scatter, to, 137.
Scattering, verbs of, 187.
Sea, 45, (phenomena) 45.
Searching, verbs of, 116.
See, to, 123.
Seize, to, 114.
Sell, to, 132, (at retail) 138.
Send, to, 114, 133.
Servant, hiring, 25.
Sew, to, 127.
Shaking, verbs of, 116.
Shave, to, 168.
Shellfish, kinds, 39.
Signal, to, 135.
Sit down, to, 159, 172, 181.
Sleepy, to be, 139.
Smell, to, 123.
Snatch, to, 132.
Sorry, to be, 145.
Sow, to, 136.
Speak, to, 134.
Speaking, verbs, of, 188, 189.
Spend, to, 176.
Spin, to, 205.
Split, to, 118.
Spreading, verbs of, 137.
Stagger, to, 183.
Stand up, to, 157, 172.
Steal, to, 145, 165.
Stir, to, 185.
Streams, rivers, 44, 45.
Stumble, to, 197.
Suffer, to, 185.
Suicide, to commit, 120.
Sun, 45, (setting and rising of) 164.
Sweep, to, 122.
Swim, to, 127.
Tableware, 28, 29.
Talk, to, 134.
Talk to, to, 165.
Take, to, 114, 132, 173.
Take out, to, 129.
Taste, to, 123.
Teach, to, 145.
Tear, to, 117.
Tear down, to, 119.
Tell, to, 134.
Tempt, to 174.
Think, to, 124, 125.
Thirsty, to be, 128.
Threaten, to, 143.
Throw away, to, 136.
Throw down, to, 136.
Throwing, verbs of, 187.
Time, divisions of, 45, 46, 92, 93.
Digitized by
Google
262 INDEXES.
Toilet, the; (dreeeing) 24.
Tools, list of, 42.
Touch, to, 123, 124.
Trails, roads, etc., 43.
Translate, to, 141.
Translations, 244-246.
Transfer, to, 141,
Travel to, 140, 195, 208.
Traveling, 22.
Trees, plants, etc., 63.
Trench, to make a, 151.
Turn back, to, 175.
Uncover, to, 142.
Untie, to, 146.
Use, to, 114.
Utensils, cooking, 40.
Utensils, list of, 42.
Vegetables, kinds, 39, 40.
Verify, to, 125.
Wait for, to, 120.
Walk, to, 166.
Watch, to, 144.
Water, 29.
Water courses, 44. 45.
Wearing, verbs of, 125.
Weather, conditions of, 23, 47.
Weep, to, 139.
Weigh, to, 119.
Weights, measures, moneys, 81, 82.
Win, to, 176.
Wish, to, 169, (not to wish), 175.
Words, miscellaneous, 240-243.
Wound, to, 151.
Write, to, 171, 172.
Writing materials, 43, 44.
Yes, 99.
TAGALOG INDEX.
Abuty 131.
Ahit, 168.
Alaala, 124.
Anyayh, 120.
Araoy 162.
Asfn, 147.
Audy 145.
Auayj 166.
AyaOy 175.
Babd (mabahd)y 58.
Bardy 125.
Binuit, 121.
Bird, 185.
Bulag, 200.
Buti (mabuti), 58.
C (only retained in words of Spanish origin).
Daan, 183.
Dohan {marahan), 95.
Daldy 114, 116.
Dami {marami), 58.
Damit, 144.
Dayd (magdarayd), 69.
Dingigy 123, 146.
Digitized by
Google
INDEXES. 263
IXpd, 82.
DitOy 34, 133, 147.
Dom, 34.
Dukhd, 200.
E (begins Spanish words only).
Galing, 138, 148, VII.
Gaivdy 108, I, II, 110, XI, XIII.
Giik, 130.
GupiU 118, 168.
Halik, 145.
Hampds, 129, 168, 187.
Hdnap, 109, V, 116, 133.
HangiUy 162.
Hdpis, 138.
jETopon, 163.
H(mk, 187.
fliad, 151.
HuamoSy 167.
ifingri, 114, 132, 146.
Huli, 165.
Hil«ay, 120.
/6ipr, 124, 169.
Init (mainit)y 60.
Inumy 122, 160.
/«dd, 122.
Mpy 124, 182.
/i^'d, 157.
Juan, 27, 37.
kay J., 27, 28.
niJ., 27, 28, 37.
nind J., 27.
si J., 27.
sind J., 27.
Kagaty 122.
Kainy 122, 140, 159.
Kinyigy 123.
Kithy 123, 169, 184.
Lobby 199.
lAkady 166.
Lakiy 156.
Lamoaty 122.
i»:mo<, 192.
imi« (maZinw), 69.
Luhody 158.
3fana, 181.
wgra, 25,30, (exp.) 37.
Panaog, 176.
Panhiky 21. '
P(i«oJ(:, 173.
Patoy, 119, 140, 141.
FitdSy 141.
Pul(y 155.
PiitoZ, 117.
Q ^retained only in Spanish words or foreign names).
R ( only begins a wora in Tagalog by reason of euphonic change from " d " ) .
rin, 37.
rito, 25, 36.
Salitdy 134.
SaUhongy 120.
Samay 165.
Samd {ma8amd)y 58.
Digitized by
Google
264 INDEXES.
SambdlcU, 187.
SUang, 164.
Sird, 119, 138, 156.
Sisi, 139.
Sdaat, 161.
JSuhay, 168.
Sdlat, 171.
;9ump(i, 185.
Sunod, 139, 172, 182.
Sdnog, 156.
raW, 127.
Taib6(5, 128.
Tdkot, 129.
ranjri*, 139.
Tdpan^ (mcUdpang)^ 65.
Taua, 160.
Toy^, 152.
Tihiydy 159.
Tmdt^, 157.
Tipon, 184.
Tod, 200.
2\iW, 161.
Tuid (matuid), 62.
TaH, 174.
Taksd, 174.
!Z\i%, 178.
2\Ayd (maluyd), 60.
C;Mn, 162.
t/nd, 150.
Up6, 159.
f)iton^, 114, 138, 164.
V, Only retained in some Spanish words; generally changed to ** B."
Ydman (may&man)^ 69.
'2/, 32, 38.
o
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
DATE DUE
.iCta^
UBRi
mr
1
DEMCX) 38-29
7
Digitized by
Google
OCMO, M 11
A hamftxiok and
Ton
of the TmsI
AXWI
8765
3 2044 043 499 789
.»i- • ■, .ynt^^' '.'
Digitized by
Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11